Customize this spec with SpecWizard
Download SECTION 11 60 01 BROADCAST, THEATER AND STAGE EQUIPMENT for
WORD | RTF | Text | Word Perfect
Find over 500 more CSI Sections
on Arcat.com
Switch to Masterformat 95
 
SECTION 11 60 01
BROADCAST, THEATER AND STAGE EQUIPMENT
 
 
Copyright 2017 - 2017 ARCAT, Inc. - All rights reserved
** NOTE TO SPECIFIER ** Wenger Corporation, JR Clancy and GearBoss; Broadcast, theater and stage equipment, sound-control door assemblies, acoustic room components, lockers, storage assemblies.
This section is based on the products of Wenger Corporation, JR Clancy and GearBoss, which is located at:
Owatonna, MN/Syracuse, NY,
Toll Free Tel: (800) 4WENGER (493-6437)
Tel: (507) 455-4100
Fax: (507) 455-4258
Email: request info (info@wengercorp.com)
Web: www.wengercorp.com | www.JRClancy.com
[ Click Here ] for additional information.
Wenger Corporation and J.R. Clancy are Your Performance Partners. In 2011, Wenger and J.R. Clancy brought together almost 200 years of experience to provide complete solutions for Performing Arts Centers and Theatres. We design, manufacture and install leading theatrical equipment worldwide from Complete Rigging Solutions and Controls to Acoustical Shell Enclosures and Orchestra Pit Fillers as well as full-line of quality furnishings.
Wenger Corporation provides innovative, high-quality products and solutions for performing arts and music and theatre education. For more than 65 years Wenger has been listening to what our customers need and then designing and manufacturing innovative, durable and functional products to meet those needs. Wenger pioneered sound isolation in practice rooms and now offers modular rooms with virtual acoustic technology (VAE) and built-in digital recording/playback. Products for music and theatre spaces include: pre-engineered acoustical doors, sound-isolating music practice rooms, acoustical shells, acoustical wall and ceiling treatment, instrument and equipment storage cabinets, fixed and portable audience seating, portable stage platforms and staging systems, music posture and portable audience chairs, orchestra pit fillers, makeup stations, tiered risers and music furniture.
Since 1885, J.R. Clancy has been a leading designer and supplier of theatrical rigging systems, accessories and services to the theatre and entertainment industries around the world. Our team of experienced mechanical and electrical engineers, project managers, and installers provides expert technical assistance and information to architects, general contractors, theatre consultants, end users, and dealers. With a combination of innovative designs, outstanding quality, and a century of experience, J.R. Clancy has become the leading manufacturer of theatrical stage equipment in the United States. We provide everything from the simplest hemp sets and rigging hardware to complete, highly sophisticated motorized rigging systems-for use just about anywhere.
 
PART 1 GENERAL
 
1.1
SECTION INCLUDES
 
** NOTE TO SPECIFIER ** Delete items below not required for project.
 
A.
Sound-control doors including the following:
1.
Integrated sound control door assemblies.
B.
Acoustic room components including the following:
1.
Sound-absorbing and sound-diffusing panels.
2.
Tunable wall panels.
3.
Motorized acoustical banners.
C.
Theater and stage equipment including the following:
1.
Acoustical clouds.
2.
Acoustical shells.
3.
Orchestra shells.
4.
Orchestra pit fillers.
5.
Stage platforms.
6.
Tiered audience seating platforms.
D.
Specialty casework including the following:
1.
Musical instrument storage casework.
2.
Music library system.
3.
Fixed theater make-up stations.
4.
Portable theater make-up stations.
E.
Audience seating including the following:
1.
Fixed seating - Boston Series.
2.
Fixed seating - Chicago Series.
3.
Fixed seating - Madrid Series.
4.
Fixed seating - Milan Series.
5.
Fixed seating - Naples Series.
6.
Fixed seating - New York Series.
7.
Fixed seating - Sydney Series.
F.
Special purpose rooms including the following:
1.
Modular sound-isolation practice rooms.
G.
Curtains and Rigging Systems:
1.
Fire curtain systems, brail fire curtain.
2.
Fire curtain systems, straight lift curtain, proscenium opening up to 18'T x 34'W.
3.
Fire curtain systems, straight lift curtain, proscenium opening up to 22'T x 42'W.
4.
Fire curtain systems, straight lift curtain, proscenium opening up to 30'T x 50'W.
5.
Fire curtain systems, straight lift curtain, proscenium opening greater than 30'T x 50'W.
6.
Fire curtain systems, curtain accessories.
7.
Counterweight rigging.
8.
Zero fleet packaged hoist.
9.
Versatility hoist with backbone.
10.
Zero fleet heavy duty hoist.
11.
Counterweight assist hoist.
12.
Standard line shaft hoist.
13.
Custom line shaft hoist.
14.
Drum hoist.
15.
Pile-up hoist.
16.
Motorized rigging accessories.
17.
Motorized rigging, control system.
18.
Stage curtains and tracks.
19.
Rope and dead hung rigging.
1.2
RELATED SECTIONS
 
** NOTE TO SPECIFIER ** Delete sections below not relevant to this project; add others as required.
 
A.
Section 01 35 00 - Special Procedures.
 
** NOTE TO SPECIFIER ** The next five sections are not relevant to stage platforms. Delete if not required.
 
B.
Section 05 12 00 - Structural Steel Framing.
C.
Section 05 50 00 - Metal Fabrications.
D.
Section 05 50 00 - Metal Fabrications.
E.
Section 06 10 00 - Rough Carpentry.
F.
Section 08 11 13.16 - Custom Hollow Metal Doors and Frames.
G.
Section 08 71 53 - Security Door Hardware.
H.
Section 09 22 16.13 - Non-Structural Metal Stud Framing.
I.
Section 09 21 16.23 - Gypsum Board Shaft Wall Assemblies.
J.
Section 09 65 13 - Resilient Base and Accessories.
K.
Section 12 32 16 - Manufactured Plastic-Laminate-Clad Casework.
L.
Section 13 21 48 - Sound-Conditioned Rooms.
M.
Division 16 - Electrical for power wiring.
1.3
REFERENCES
 
** NOTE TO SPECIFIER ** Delete references from the list below that are not actually required by the text of the edited section.
 
A.
American Concrete Institute (ACI):
1.
ACI 117 - Standard Specification for Tolerances for Concrete Construction and Materials.
B.
American Hardboard Association (AHA):
1.
AHA A135.4-95: Basic Hardboard.
C.
American Laminators Association (ALA):
1.
ALA GP 28.
D.
American National Standards Institute (ANSI):
1.
ANSI 115.1: Specifications for Steel Door and Frame Preparation for Hardware.
2.
ANSI A208.1 - Particleboard.
3.
ANSI A208.2 - Medium Density Fiberboard.
4.
ANSI A250.10: Test Procedure and Acceptance Criteria for Prime Painted Steel Surfaces for Steel Doors and Frames.
5.
ANSI B17.1 - Keys and Key seats.
6.
ANSI B18.2.1 - Square, Hex, Heavy Hex, and Askew Head Bolts and Hex, Heavy Hex, Hex Flange, Lobed Head, and Lag Screws.
7.
ANSI B18.2.2 - Nuts for General Application: Machine Screw Nuts, Hex, Square, Hex Flange, and Coupling Nuts.
8.
ANSI E1.4 - Entertainment Technology - Manual Counterweight Rigging Systems.
9.
ANSI E1.6-1 - Entertainment Technology - Powered Hoist Systems.
10.
ANSI E1.22 - Entertainment Technology - Fire Safety Curtain Systems.
11.
ANSI-BHMA A156.9 - Cabinet Hardware.
12.
ANSI/BIFMA X5.1 2011 - Office Furnishings - General-Purpose Office.
13.
ANSI/BIFMA X5.4-2012 - Office Furnishings - Lounge Seating.
E.
American Plywood Association (APA).
1.
Performance Standards and Policies for Structural Use Panels.
F.
American Society of Civil Engineers (ASCE):
1.
ASCE 7 - Minimum Design Loads for Buildings and Other Structures.
G.
Architectural Woodwork Institute (AWI):
1.
Quality Manual, 8th Edition.
H.
ASTM International (ASTM):
1.
ASTM A 36/A 36M - Standard Specification for Carbon Structural Steel.
2.
ASTM A48 - Standard Specification for Gray Iron Castings.
3.
ASTM A153 - Standard Specification for Pipe, Steel, Black and Hot-Dipped, Zinc-Coated, Welded and Seamless.
4.
ASTM A 500 -Standard Specification for Cold-Formed Welded and Seamless Carbon Steel Structural Tubing in Rounds and Shapes.
5.
ASTM A501 - Standard Specification for Hot-Formed Welded and Seamless Carbon Steel Structural Tubing.
6.
ASTM A510 - Standard Specification for General Requirements for Wire Rods and Coarse Round Wire, Carbon Steel, and Alloy Steel.
7.
ASTM A513 - Standard Specification for Electric-Resistance-Welded Carbon and Alloy Steel Mechanical Tubing.
8.
ASTM A1008/A 1008M - Standard Specification for Steel, Sheet, Cold-Rolled, Carbon, Structural, High-Strength Low-Alloy, High-Strength Low-Alloy with Improved Formability, Solution Hardened, and Bake Hardenable.
9.
ASTM A1011 - Standard Specification for Steel, Sheet and Strip, Hot Rolled, Carbon, Structural, High-Strength Low Alloy, High-Strength Low Alloy With Improved Formability, and Ultra High Strength.
10.
ASTM B85 - Standard Specification for Aluminum Alloy Die Castings.
11.
ASTM B209 - Specification for Aluminum and Aluminum-Alloy Sheet and Plate.
12.
ASTM B221 - Specification for Aluminum and Aluminum-Alloy Extruded Bars, Rods, Wire, Profiles, and Tubes.
13.
ASTM B429 - Specification for Aluminum-Alloy Extruded Structural Pipe and Tube.
14.
ASTM C423 - Standard Test Method for Sound Absorption and Sound Absorption Coefficients by the Reverberation Room Method.
15.
ASTM C510 - Standard Specification for General Requirements for Steel Rods and Coarse Round Wire, Carbon Steel.
16.
ASTM C503 - Specification for Silvered Flat Glass Mirror.
17.
ASTM E84 - Standard Test Method for Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials.
18.
ASTM E90 - Standard Test Method for Laboratory Measurement of Airborne Sound Transmission Loss of Building Partitions and Elements.
19.
ASTM E 413 - Classification for Rating Sound Transmission.
20.
ASTM E488 - Standard Test Methods for Strength of Anchors in Concrete and Masonry Elements.
21.
ASTM E795 - Practices for Mounting Test Specimens during Sound Absorption Tests.
22.
ASTM F851: Test Method for Self-Rising Seat Mechanisms.
I.
Audio Engineering Society (AES): AES-4id - AES information document for room acoustics and sound reinforcement systems -- Characterization and measurement of surface scattering uniformity.
J.
Builders Hardware Manufacturers Association (BHMA): ANSI/BHMA A156.9 - Cabinet Hardware.
K.
California, Department of Consumers Affairs, Bureau of Home Furnishings and Thermal Insulation:
1.
California Technical Bulletin 117 - requirements, Test Procedures and Apparatus for Testing Flame Retardance of Resilient Filling Materials Used in Upholstered Furniture.
2.
California Technical Bulletin 133 - Flammability Test Procedure for Seating Furniture for Use in Public Occupancies.
L.
Canadian Electrical Code (CDC).
M.
Code of Federal Regulations (CFR):
1.
16 CFR 1201 - Safety Standard for Architectural Glazing Materials.
2.
16 CFR 1610.61 - Clarification of Flammability Standard for Clothing Textiles (CS 191-53).
N.
GREENGUARD Environmental Institute (GEI): GREENGUARD certified low emitting products.
O.
Hardwood Plywood and Veneer Association (HPVA): HPVA HP-1 - Hardwood and Decorative Plywood.
P.
International Organization for Standardization (ISO): ISO 9001 Quality management systems - Requirements.
Q.
International Building Code (IBC).
R.
Laminating Materials Association:
1.
LMA EDG-1: Voluntary Product Standard and Typical Physical Properties of Edgebanding Materials.
2.
LMA SAT-1: Voluntary Product Standard and Typical Physical Properties of Saturated Paper Overlays.
S.
National Association of Architectural Metal Manufacturers (NAAMM): Metal Finishes Manual for Architectural and Metal Products.
T.
National Electrical Code (NEC).
U.
National Electrical Manufacturers Association (NEMA): NEMA LD 3-2000 - High Pressure Decorative Laminates.
V.
National Fire Protection Association (NFPA): NFPA 80 - Standard For Fire Doors and Other Opening Protectives.
W.
Underwriter's Laboratory (UL):
1.
UL 10C - Standard for Positive Pressure Fire Tests of Door Assemblies.
2.
UL 723 - Test For Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials.
3.
UL 1480, UL 2043 - Fire Test for Heat and Visible Smoke Release for Discrete Product and Their Accessories Installed in Air-Heating Spaces.
X.
U.S. Architectural & Transportation Barriers Compliance Board: Americans with Disabilities Act (ADA) and Architectural Barriers Act (ABA) Accessibility Guidelines for Buildings and Facilities.
Y.
U.S. Department of Commerce, National Institute of Standards and Technology: DOC PS 1: U.S. Product Standard for Construction and Industrial Plywood.
Z.
US Green Building Council (USGBC): Leadership in Energy and Environmental Design (LEED).
1.4
SUBMITTALS
A.
Submit under provisions of Section 01 30 00 - Administrative Requirements.
B.
Product Data: Manufacturer's data sheets on each product to be used, including:
1.
Provide test results by certified independent testing laboratory indicating compliance with performance requirements.
2.
Rated capacities, construction details, material descriptions, dimensions of individual components, profiles, and finishes.
3.
Delivery, storage, handling, and installation instructions and recommendations.
4.
Maintenance instructions and recommendations.
 
** NOTE TO SPECIFIER ** Retain applicable paragraphs below for LEED projects. Add additional requirements that apply. Verify credits required and availability of materials from the Manufacturer. Refer to USGC LEED Reference Guide for detailed information. Not applicable to rigging or curtain products, delete if only those products are specified. Delete if not required.
 
C.
LEED Submittals:
1.
Manufacturer's certificate indicating that composite wood products and adhesives contain no added urea formaldehyde.
2.
Manufacturer's certificate indicating percentages by weight of post-consumer and pre-consumer recycled content. Include statement indicating costs for each product having recycled content.
3.
Credit EQ 4.4: Manufacturer's Signed Confirmation indicating that composite wood products and adhesives used in acoustical shells contain no urea formaldehyde.
D.
Shop Drawings:
1.
Submit component and project specific installation drawings, cut sheets, and schedules showing all information necessary to fully explain the design features, appearance, function, fabrication, installation, and use of system components in all phases of operation. Submit for approval before beginning any fabrication, installation, or erection.
2.
A copy of the Bill of Material shall be included with the submission for approval.
3.
Include fabrication and installation details. Distinguish between factory and field work.
4.
Include plans, elevations, sections, attachments and work by other trades.
5.
Include wiring diagrams when applicable.
 
** NOTE TO SPECIFIER ** Retain below if project has seismic requirements. Delete if not required.
 
6.
Indicate seismic bracing and fastening requirements as applicable.
E.
Coordination Drawings: Project-specific Coordination Drawings, indicating the following items drawn and coordinated with each other. Include information required by Installers of each item in order to coordinate the Work. Include the following:
1.
Relationship of items shown on separate Shop Drawings.
2.
Dimensions and required clearances of adjacent or related work.
3.
Order of assembly of separate items.
4.
Information required for interface with other trades and components, including mechanical, electrical, and communication work.
F.
Product Schedule:
1.
Use designations indicated on the Drawings.
2.
Include room locations, dimensions, accessories, finishes, and project specific notes.
G.
Verification Samples:
 
** NOTE TO SPECIFIER ** Delete the first paragraph and retain the second if only curtain products are specified.
 
1.
Exposed Finishes and Finish Materials: Not less than 4 by 4 inches (102 by 102 mm), for each type, color, pattern, surface and material selected.
2.
Curtain Materials: Not less than 12 by 12 inches (305 by 305 mm).
H.
Closeout Submittals:
1.
Operation and Maintenance Data: For adjusting, repairing and replacing components and accessories.
2.
Warranty: Submit manufacturer's warranty.
I.
Field Quality Control Reports: Documenting inspections and demonstrations of installed products and equipment.
1.5
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
Source Limitations: Obtain all products from a single manufacturer through one source providing a comprehensive material and installation package:
B.
Manufacturer Qualifications: Minimum 5 years' experience in manufacture of similar products in use in similar environments, including project size, and complexity, and with the production capacity to meet the construction and installation schedule.
C.
Installer Qualifications: Experienced in installation of the work of this section and acceptable to the manufacturer.
 
** NOTE TO SPECIFIER ** All Wenger electrical components are supplied as listed and labeled by UL and/or ETL to meet typical local electrical inspection requirements.
 
D.
Electrical Components: Listed and labeled per NFPA 70, Article 100 by a testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.
 
** NOTE TO SPECIFIER ** Delete if no seating.
 
E.
Testing of Seats: All qualifying seats must have been independently tested and passed ANSI/BIFMA X5.4-2012 standards for Office Furnishings - Lounge Seating.
1.
Seating Durability: A load of 125 pounds shall be applied to the seat. The chair shall be tested to 10,000 cycles.
2.
Backrest Durability Horizontal: A load of 75 pounds shall be applied to the backrest. The chair shall be tested to 10,000 cycles.
3.
Backrest Durability Vertical: A load of 200 pounds shall be applied to the backrest. The chair shall be tested to 10,000 cycles.
4.
Arm Durability Vertical: A load of 150 pounds shall be applied to the armrest structure. The chair shall be tested to 10,000 cycles.
5.
Arm Durability Horizontal: A load of 100 pounds shall be applied to the armrest structure. The chair shall be tested to 10,000 cycles.
6.
Drop Test: Release 300 pounds test bag one time from a height of 6 inches above uncompressed seat surface.
7.
Load Test: Seat must hold 600 pounds load for 30 minutes without damage to the seat.
 
** NOTE TO SPECIFIER ** Indicate accessibility requirements on drawings. Delete if not required.
 
F.
Regulatory Requirements: Where components are indicated to comply with accessibility requirements, comply with the U.S. Architectural & Transportation Barriers Compliance Board's "Americans with Disabilities Act (ADA) and Architectural Barriers Act (ABA) Accessibility Guidelines for Buildings and Facilities".
 
** NOTE TO SPECIFIER ** Delete if rigging systems are not required.
 
G.
Curtain and Rigging Systems, Manufacturer Qualifications: Minimum 5 years experience in manufacture of similar products in use in similar environments, including project size, and complexity, and with the production capacity to meet the construction and installation schedule.
1.
Theatrical rigging systems are specialized overhead lifting systems. Due to the highly specialized nature of theatrical rigging equipment, and the safety requirements of the equipment, the rigging products provided for this work shall be the products of a single rigging manufacturer for quality, consistency and ease of integration. Accessory items such as wire rope, fittings, and curtain tracks may be from other specialty manufacturers.
2.
The rigging manufacturer shall have the following programs in place.
a.
The manufacturer shall have a product testing program, including determination of recommended working loads for products based on destructive testing and review by a licensed engineer.
b.
The manufacturer of the performance equipment shall have a quality management system that is registered to the ISO 9001standard.
c.
The manufacturer shall carry primary product and general liability insurance of $2,000,000 each, with excess liability coverage of $10,000,000 and a Contractors Professional Liability policy with $2,000,000 coverage.
 
** NOTE TO SPECIFIER ** Delete if rigging systems are not required.
 
H.
Rigging Systems, Installer Qualifications: Manufacturer's authorized representative, trained and approved for installation of units required for this Project.
1.
The Rigging Contractor shall be an approved rigging manufacturer or an authorized representative or dealer of an approved manufacturer. The contractor shall have been installing stage rigging systems for a period of five years or more, and shall have completed at least ten installations of this type and scope. The AHJ shall be the final judge of the suitability of experience.
2.
The Rigging Contractor shall employ an Entertainment Technician Certification Program (ETCP) Certified Theatre Rigger. A Certified Rigger shall be either the project manager or site foreman, and be responsible for the overall project including the layout, inspection, and onsite user training.
 
** NOTE TO SPECIFIER ** Delete if rigging systems are not required.
 
I.
Rigging Systems, Minimum Standards of Safety, the following factors shall be used:
1.
Cables & Fittings: 8:1 Safety Factor.
2.
Cable D/d ratio: Sheave tread diameter is the minimum D/d ratio per the "Wire Rope User Manual" or recommended by the wire rope manufacturer.
3.
Tread Pressures: 500 lbs. for cast iron, 900 lbs. for Nylatron, 1000 lbs. for steel.
4.
Maximum Fleet Angle: 1-1/2 degrees.
5.
Steel: 1/5 of yield strength or per AISC Specification.
6.
Bearings: Two times required load at full speed for 2000 hours.
7.
Bolts: Minimum SAE J429 Grade 5 (ISO R898 Class 8.8), zinc plated.
8.
Motors: 1.0 AGMA Service Factor.
9.
Gearboxes: 1.25 Mechanical Strength Service Factor, 1.0 Gearing Service Factor.
 
** NOTE TO SPECIFIER ** Include a mock-up if the project size or quality warrant taking such a precaution. When deciding on the extent, consider all the major different types of work on the project. Show mock-up locations and required components on the architectural drawings. Always delete for stage platforms, rigging and curtains. Always delete for Diva acoustical clouds and shells.
 
J.
Mock-Up: Provide a mock-up for evaluation of surface preparation techniques and installation workmanship.
1.
Finish areas designated by Architect including shims, sealants, and accessories.
2.
Provide full size units, if accepted, units may remain as part of the completed work.
3.
Do not proceed with remaining work until workmanship is approved by Architect.
4.
Refinish mock-up area as required to produce acceptable work.
1.6
DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A.
Deliver materials in manufacturer's original unopened containers with manufacturer's labels attached. Do not deliver material until spaces to receive them are clean, dry, and ready for their installation. Ship to jobsite only after roughing-in, painting and other finishing work has been completed, installation areas are ready to accept work.
B.
Handle and install materials to avoid damage.
1.7
PROJECT CONDITIONS
A.
Environmental Limitations: Do not deliver or install materials until spaces are enclosed and weather tight, wet work in spaces is complete and dry, HVAC system is operating and maintaining ambient temperature at occupancy levels during the remainder of the construction period.
B.
Field Measurements: Verify field measurements as indicated on Shop Drawings. Where measurements are not possible, provide control dimensions and templates.
1.
Coordinate installation and location of blocking and supports as requested.
2.
Verify openings, clearances, storage requirements and other dimensions relevant to the installation and final application.
3.
Where applicable, coordinate locations of electrical junction boxes.
C.
Field Measurements: Verify field measurements as indicated on Shop Drawings. Where measurements are not possible, provide control dimensions and templates.
1.
Coordinate locations of electrical junction boxes.
D.
Ensure that products of this section are supplied to affected trades in time to prevent interruption of construction progress.
1.8
WARRANTY
 
** NOTE TO SPECIFIER ** The "special warranty" is a warranty provided by the manufacturer to the building owner. The warranty terms below are available from Wenger Corp. Verify that other manufacturers listed or seeking approval furnish warranty meeting requirements. Durability is a key aspect of Wenger's product value for Owners. The available warranty reflects Wenger's high confidence in the performance of their products. Delete if not required.
 
A.
Special Warranty for Sound Control Doors: Manufacturer's written warranty indicating manufacturer's intent to repair or replace components of sound-control door assemblies that fail in materials or workmanship within 5 years from date of Substantial Completion. Failures are defined to include, but are not limited to, the following:
1.
Fracturing or breaking of unit components including doors and hardware resulting from normal use other than vandalism.
2.
Warping or deterioration of components not resulting from leaks, flooding, or other uncontrolled moisture or humidity.
3.
Failure of acoustical gaskets and seals.
 
** NOTE TO SPECIFIER ** Delete if not required.
 
B.
Special Warranty for Acoustic Room Components: Manufacturer's written warranty indicating manufacturer's intent to repair or replace panels that fail in materials or workmanship. Failures are defined to include, but are not limited to, the following:
1.
Fracturing or breaking of unit components which results from normal wear and tear and normal use other than vandalism.
2.
Warping of components not resulting from leaks, flooding, or other uncontrolled moisture or humidity.
3.
Failure of unit to perform acoustically in accordance with manufacturer's published data.
 
** NOTE TO SPECIFIER ** Delete warranty periods not required.
 
4.
Sound-Absorbing and Sound-Diffusing Panels Warranty Period: 5 years.
5.
Tunable Wall Panels Warranty Period: 5 years.
6.
Motorized Acoustical Banners Warranty Period: 3 years.
 
** NOTE TO SPECIFIER ** Delete if not required.
 
C.
Special Warranty for Specialty Casework: Manufacturer's written warranty indicating manufacturer's intent to repair or replace components of music education storage casework that fail in materials or workmanship within 10 years from date of Substantial Completion. Failures are defined to include, but are not limited to, the following:
1.
Fracturing or breaking of casework components including doors, panels, shelves, or hardware resulting from normal wear and tear and normal use other than vandalism.
2.
Delamination or other failures of glue bond of components.
3.
Warping of casework components not resulting from leaks, flooding, or other uncontrolled moisture or humidity.
4.
Failure of operating hardware.
 
** NOTE TO SPECIFIER ** Delete if not required.
 
D.
Special Warranty for Fixed Audience Seating: Manufacturer's written warranty indicating manufacturer's intent to repair or replace components of fixed audience seating that fail in materials or workmanship.
1.
Failures include, but are not limited to, the following:
a.
Fracturing or breaking of unit components which results from normal wear and tear and normal use other than vandalism.
b.
Delamination or other failures of glue bond of components.
c.
Warping of components not resulting from leaks, flooding, or other uncontrolled moisture or humidity.
2.
Damage from deliberate destruction and vandalism is excluded.
3.
Warranty Period:
a.
Structure (including back bracket, standard, metal base): 10 years.
b.
Operating mechanisms (including seat/back cushion, wood works (wood panels/armrest/ADA end arms), plastic parts (plastic shells, polypropylene armrest), tip-up seat mechanism, writing tablet (including writing tablet mechanism): 5 years.
c.
Accessories (such numbering, aisle light, moveable base, and similar items): 3 years.
 
** NOTE TO SPECIFIER ** Delete if not required.
 
E.
Special Warranty for Special Purpose Rooms: Manufacturer's written warranty indicating manufacturer's intent to repair or replace components of sound-isolation practice rooms that fail in materials or workmanship within 5 years from date of Substantial Completion. Failures are defined to include, but are not limited to, the following:
1.
Fracturing or breaking of room components, including doors, panels, or hardware, that results from normal wear and tear and normal use other than vandalism.
2.
Delamination or other failures of glue bond of components.
3.
Warping of components not resulting from leaks, flooding, or other uncontrolled moisture or humidity.
4.
Failure of operating hardware.
5.
Failure of acoustical gaskets and seals.
6.
Failure of room to perform acoustically in accordance with manufacturer's published data.
 
** NOTE TO SPECIFIER ** Delete if curtain systems not required.
 
F.
Special Warranty for Curtain Systems: Provide manufacturer's standard limited 3 year warranty against defects in materials or workmanship from the date of Substantial Completion. The warranty is contingent on inspection of the equipment and training of its use being provided annually by an Entertainment Technician Certification Program (ETCP) Certified Theatre Rigger at the Owner's expense. It is the responsibility of the end user to make arrangements for the annual inspection and training. Failure to obtain the inspection and training annually shall result in a one year warranty. The warranty shall not cover equipment that has become defective due to misuse, abuse, accident, act of God, alteration, vandalism, ordinary wear and tear, improper maintenance, or used not in a manner intended.
 
** NOTE TO SPECIFIER ** Delete if rigging systems not required.
 
G.
Special Warranty for Rigging Systems: Provide manufacturer's standard limited 3 year warranty against defects in materials or workmanship from the date of Substantial Completion. The warranty is contingent on inspection of the equipment and training of its use being provided annually by an Entertainment Technician Certification Program (ETCP) Certified Theatre Rigger at the Owner's expense. It is the responsibility of the end user to make arrangements for the annual inspection and training. Failure to obtain the inspection and training annually shall result in a one year warranty. The warranty shall not cover equipment that has become defective due to misuse, abuse, accident, act of God, alteration, vandalism, ordinary wear and tear, improper maintenance, or used not in a manner intended.
 
** NOTE TO SPECIFIER ** Delete if not required.
 
1.9
EXTRA MATERIALS/ATTIC STOCK FOR FIXED AUDIENCE SEATING
A.
Furnish the following extra materials from the same manufacturing run as the original products that match products installed. Package with protective coating and identified with product labels.
1.
Full-size units of the following seating components equal to 5 percent of amount installed for each type and finish installed, but no fewer than two units:
a.
Arm standards (both center and end standards).
b.
Wooden/Plastic seat back and cushion covers.
c.
Seat bottom.
d.
Lighting Components devices.
e.
Fabric.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
 
2.1
MANUFACTURERS
A.
Acceptable Manufacturer: Wenger Corporation, JR Clancy and GearBoss, which is located at: ; Owatonna, MN/Syracuse, NY, ; Toll Free Tel: (800) 4WENGER (493-6437); Tel: (507) 455-4100; Fax: (507) 455-4258; Email: request info (info@wengercorp.com); Web: www.wengercorp.com | www.JRClancy.com
B.
Acceptable Manufacturer: Wenger Corporation; JR Clancy , which is located at: 7041 Interstate Island Rd, Syracuse, NY 13209. Tel: (315) 451-3440. www.jrclancy.com.
 
** NOTE TO SPECIFIER ** Delete one of the following two paragraphs; coordinate with requirements of Division 1 section on product options and substitutions.
 
C.
Substitutions: Not permitted.
D.
Requests for substitutions shall be considered in accordance with provisions of Section 01 60 00 - Product Requirements.
1.
Manufacturers seeking approval shall submit the following:
a.
Product data, including third-party certified acoustical data and proposed layout for this project.
b.
Project references: Minimum of 5 installations not less than 3 years old, with owner contact information.
c.
Sample warranty.
2.
Submit substitution request not less than required days prior to bid date.
3.
Approval shall be indicated by issuance of written Addendum.
4.
Approved manufacturers shall meet separate requirements of Submittals Article.
 
** NOTE TO SPECIFIER ** Delete if rigging systems not required.
 
E.
Rigging Systems, Requirements for Approval: Other equipment manufacturers seeking approval shall submit the following information at least 2 weeks prior to the bid opening date. Approval of manufacturers shall be by addenda. Failure to submit any of the required information shall automatically disqualify the manufacturers from consideration of approval.
1.
Evidence that the manufacturer has been in business for a minimum of ten years manufacturing stage equipment.
2.
A listing of 10 equivalent installations, including:
a.
Name, address and telephone number of owner;.
b.
Name, address and telephone number of architect;.
c.
Scope of work.
3.
A brief written description of the manufacturer's operation including facilities, financial capabilities, and experience of key personnel.
4.
Written, third party evidence showing that the manufacturer has the testing, quality management and insurance programs required above in place.
 
** NOTE TO SPECIFIER ** Delete if not required.
 
2.2
INTEGRATED SOUND CONTROL DOOR ASSEMBLIES
A.
Basis of Design: Sound Control Door Assemblies as manufactured by Wenger Corporation.
B.
Performance Requirements: Provide sound-control door assemblies identical to assemblies tested by an independent testing agency per ASTM E 90 with the specified minimum certified STC rating per ASTM E 413 for the configurations indicated.
1.
Acoustical performance shall meet manufacturer's published data for transmission loss based on door type specified.
 
** NOTE TO SPECIFIER ** Retain paragraph and subparagraph below when sound-control door assemblies are located in a fire-resistance-rated wall or partition. Delete if not required.
 
C.
Compliance for Fire-Rated Sound-Control Door and Frame Assemblies:
 
** NOTE TO SPECIFIER ** Verify testing requirements of authorities having jurisdiction. The force required to compress acoustic gaskets enough for the door to latch may require a spring-type closer. Consult manufacturer and requirements of authorities having jurisdiction.
 
1.
NFPA 80 compliant, listed and labeled by a testing and inspection agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.
2.
Test at equalized pressure per UL 10C.
 
** NOTE TO SPECIFIER ** Paragraph below is not optional if doors being specified have glazing. Delete if not required.
 
D.
Safety Glass Compliance: Products must comply with testing requirements in 16 CFR 1201 for Category II materials.
 
** NOTE TO SPECIFIER ** Edit accessibility requirements paragraph below to meet project requirements. Note that sound gasketing and threshold design required to achieve acoustical performance may require opening and closing forces in excess of that allowed under accessibility requirements. Consult manufacturer and requirements of authorities having jurisdiction.
 
E.
Compliance with Accessibility Requirements:
 
** NOTE TO SPECIFIER ** Delete compliance standards listed below not required for project.
 
1.
Americans with Disabilities Act/Architectural Barriers Act (ADA/ABA).
2.
Accessibility Guidelines for Buildings and Facilities (ADAAG).
3.
ANSI A117.1.
4.
FED-STD-795 Uniform Federal Accessibility Standards.
 
** NOTE TO SPECIFIER ** Delete paragraphs and subparagraphs below not required for project. If multiple Door Types scheduled on Drawings, delete first two paragraphs below and select from paragraph that include SCD# and references to schedule and Drawings.
 
F.
Non-Fire Rated Doors:
1.
Door Type: 3070 Solid Door.
a.
Sound Transmission Control Rating: STC 50.
b.
Nominal Width: 3 feet.
2.
Door Type: 3070 Solid Door with 90 sq in (581 sq cm) window.
a.
Sound Transmission Control Rating: STC 50.
b.
Nominal Width: 3 feet.
3.
Door Type: 3070 Solid Door with 600 sq in (3871 sq cm) window.
a.
Sound Transmission Control Rating: Not rated.
b.
Nominal Width: 3 feet.
4.
Door Type: 3070 Solid Door with 1296 sq in (8361 sq cm) window.
a.
Sound Transmission Control Rating: STC 51.
b.
Nominal Width: 3 feet.
5.
Door Type: 3570 Solid Door.
a.
Sound Transmission Control Rating: STC 52.
b.
Nominal Width: 3.5 feet.
6.
Door Type: 3570 Solid Door with 100 sq in (645 sq cm) window.
a.
Sound Transmission Control Rating: STC 52.
b.
Nominal Width: 3.5 feet.
7.
Door Type: 3570 Solid Door with 600 sq in (3871 sq cm) window.
a.
Sound Transmission Control Rating: Not rated.
b.
Nominal Width: 3.5 feet.
8.
Door Type: 3570 Solid Door with 1296 sq in (8361 sq cm) window.
a.
Sound Transmission Control Rating: STC 52.
b.
Nominal Width: 3.5 feet.
9.
Door Type: 4070 Solid Door.
a.
Sound Transmission Control Rating: STC 53.
b.
Nominal Width: 4 feet.
10.
Door Type: 4070 Solid Door with 90 sq in (581 sq cm) window.
a.
Sound Transmission Control Rating: STC 54.
b.
Nominal Width: 4 feet.
11.
Door Type: 4070 Solid Door with 600 sq in (3871 sq cm) window.
a.
Sound Transmission Control Rating: Not rated.
b.
Nominal Width: 4 feet.
12.
Door Type: 4070 Solid Door with 1296 sq in (8361 sq cm) window.
a.
Sound Transmission Control Rating: STC 53.
b.
Nominal Width: 4 feet.
13.
Door Type: 6070 Solid Door.
a.
Sound Transmission Control Rating: Not rated.
b.
Nominal Width: 6 feet.
14.
Door Type: 6070 Solid Door with 90 sq in (581 sq cm) window.
a.
Sound Transmission Control Rating: Not rated.
b.
Nominal Width: 6 feet.
15.
Door Type: 6070 Solid Door with 600 sq in (3871 sq cm) window.
a.
Sound Transmission Control Rating: Not rated.
b.
Nominal Width: 6 feet.
16.
Door Type: 6070 Solid Door with 1296 sq in (8361 sq cm) window.
a.
Sound Transmission Control Rating: 51.
b.
Nominal Width: 6 feet.
G.
Fire Rated Doors: 1 Hour rating.
1.
Door Type: 3070 Solid Door.
a.
Sound Transmission Control Rating: STC 49.
b.
Nominal Width: 3 feet.
2.
Door Type: 3070 Solid Door with 90 sq in (581 sq cm) window.
a.
Sound Transmission Control Rating: STC 48.
b.
Nominal Width: 3 feet.
3.
Door Type: 3070 Solid Door with 600 sq in (3871 sq cm) window.
a.
Sound Transmission Control Rating: Not rated.
b.
Nominal Width: 3 feet.
4.
Door Type: 3570 Solid Door.
a.
Sound Transmission Control Rating: Not rated.
b.
Nominal Width: 3.5 feet.
5.
Door Type: 3570 Solid Door with 90 sq in (581 sq cm) window.
a.
Sound Transmission Control Rating: Not rated.
b.
Nominal Width: 3.5 feet.
6.
Door Type: 4070 Solid Door.
a.
Sound Transmission Control Rating: Not rated.
b.
Nominal Width: 4 feet.
7.
Door Type: 4070 Solid Door with 90 sq in (581 sq cm) window.
a.
Sound Transmission Control Rating: Not rated.
b.
Nominal Width: 4 feet.
8.
Door Type: 6070 Solid Door.
a.
Sound Transmission Control Rating: Not rated.
b.
Nominal Width: 6 feet.
9.
Door Type: 6070 Solid Door with 90 sq in (581 sq cm) window.
a.
Sound Transmission Control Rating: Not rated.
b.
Nominal Width: 6 feet.
H.
Sound-Control Door Assemblies: Provide sound-control door assemblies consisting of acoustically engineered door and frame combination with engineered sound seals.
 
** NOTE TO SPECIFIER ** Retain subparagraph below only when information for sound-control door assemblies is shown in schedule on Drawings. Modify ' SCD' designation and/or fill in the blank below with door designation as required for project. Delete if not required.
 
1.
Designation in schedule on Drawings: SCD# ___.
 
** NOTE TO SPECIFIER ** If a specific Door Type is selected from the list above, delete corresponding attributes below to avoid redundancy (Glazing Lite Size, Fire Rating). Delete options for Door Configurations not required.
 
2.
Door Configuration: Single leaf.
3.
Door Configuration: Double leaf.
4.
Door Configuration: As scheduled on Drawings.
 
** NOTE TO SPECIFIER ** Delete options for Door Leaf Sizes not required.
 
5.
Door Leaf Size: 36 inch (91 mm).
6.
Door Leaf Size: 42 inch (107 mm).
7.
Door Leaf Size: 48 inch (122 mm).
8.
Door Leaf Size: As scheduled on Drawings.
 
** NOTE TO SPECIFIER ** Delete options for Glazing Lite Sizes not required.
 
9.
Glazing Lite Size, per Door: None.
10.
Glazing Lite Size, per Door: 90 sq in (581 sq cm).
11.
Glazing Lite Size, per Door: 600 sq in (3871 sq cm).
12.
Glazing Lite Size, per Door: 1296 sq in (8361 sq cm).
13.
Glazing Lite Size, per Door: As scheduled on Drawings.
 
** NOTE TO SPECIFIER ** Delete options for Fire Rating not required.
 
14.
Fire Rating: None.
15.
Fire Rating: 60 minutes.
16.
Fire Rating: As scheduled on Drawings.
 
** NOTE TO SPECIFIER ** Fill in the blank below with STC rating , or delete the line as required for project. Delete options for Assembly Sound Transmission Class not required.
 
17.
Assembly Sound Transmission Class (STC): ___.
18.
Assembly Sound Transmission Class (STC): Not rated.
19.
Assembly Sound Transmission Class (STC): As scheduled on Drawings.
 
** NOTE TO SPECIFIER ** Edit requirements for STC and transmission loss below based on Wenger product data for door size, configuration, and glazing selected above. For multiple doors with different characteristics, copy and paste multiples of this paragraph and subparagraphs and edit, or schedule information on drawings. Delete below for assemblies where STC is not specified.
 
I.
General: Provide flush-type steel sound-control doors minimum 2-1/2 inch (64 mm) thick, with split, crimped, and gasketed isolation construction with harmonically unbalanced steel face thicknesses and window lite thicknesses. Fabricate without visible seams on exposed faces.
 
** NOTE TO SPECIFIER ** Delete options for door cores not required.
 
1.
Door Cores: Manufacturer's standard meeting specified STC rating.
2.
Door Cores: Manufacturer's standard meeting specified STC and fire rating.
3.
Door Cores: Manufacturer's standard meeting requirements for STC and fire rating as scheduled on Drawings.
4.
Door Face Sheets: 14 gauge/0.067 inch (1.7 mm) and 12 gauge/0.093 inch (2.3 mm) cold-rolled steel sheet, on opposing faces.
J.
Door Hardware Reinforcement: Minimum 14 gauge (0.067 inch) (1.7 mm), hot-rolled or cold-rolled steel sheet as reinforcement for hinges, lock face, flush bolts, closers, and concealed holders.
K.
Acoustic Vision Lite Assembly: Metal-framed unit consisting of harmonic vibration-resistant 1/4 inch (6.0 mm) and 3/8 inch (9.0 mm) thick laminated glazing with 2.81 inch (71 mm) interspace.
 
** NOTE TO SPECIFIER ** Wenger's unique split frames can be ordered to accommodate wall/partition thicknesses from 4-1/2 inches (114.3 mm) to 12-1/2 inches (317.5 mm), speeding installation by eliminating field modifications that can alter acoustical performance.
 
L.
Frame Fabrication:
1.
Materials: 14 gauge/0.067 inch (1.7 mm) cold-rolled steel sheet.
2.
Construction: Full-welded unit.
3.
Corners: Mitered and reinforced.
4.
Frame Design: Split frame design with integrated frame support for metal threshold.
5.
Frame Acoustic Liner, Non-Fire-Rated Doors: Factory-installed sound-absorbing material behind acoustic seal rabbet.
M.
Frame Hardware Reinforcement: Minimum 14 gauge/0.067 inch (1.7 mm) reinforcement for hinges, lock face, and closers.
N.
Door Hardware: Provide manufacturer's standard acoustical seals, threshold, and hinges required to achieve sound control performance requirements specified.
O.
Acoustical Seals:
 
** NOTE TO SPECIFIER ** Delete options for fire-rated or non-rated heads and jambs if not required.
 
1.
Head and Jambs, Non-Fire-Rated Doors: Extruded flexible vinyl with dual magnetic seals, uninterrupted at hinge and latch.
2.
Head and Jambs, Fire Rated Doors: Silicone compression seal, uninterrupted at hinge and latch, with intumescent material in jamb meeting requirements of fire-resistance assembly specified in Quality Assurance Article.
3.
Door Bottoms: Fixed in place foam and fiberglass-backed, teflon-coated sweep seal, field-adjustable, providing sound control seal without mechanical drop operation.
P.
Hinges: Cam-lift wrap-around continuous barrel-type hinge.
Q.
Metal Thresholds: Flat, smooth plate stainless steel, 5/16 inch (7.9 mm) high, profiled to provide sound control seal with door bottom seal.
 
** NOTE TO SPECIFIER ** Delete paragraphs, and associated subparagraphs as applicable, for Locksets not required.
 
R.
Locksets: Provide door manufacturer's standard mortise lockset.
S.
Locksets: Provide door with standard mortise pocket prepared to receive mortise lockset specified in another Division 08 section and frame prepared to receive standard strike plate, with door edge and frame cover plates included.
T.
Other Door Hardware: Refer to requirements of Section 08 71 53 - Security Door Hardware.
U.
Fasteners: Refer to Section 06 10 00 - Rough Carpentry.
V.
General Fabrication:
1.
Fabricate sound-control door assemblies to same tolerances as tested units meeting performance requirements.
2.
Form surfaces smooth and flush with invisible joints when doors are closed.
3.
Factory-assemble doors, frames, manufacturer-provided hardware, and glazed lites.
W.
Door Fabrication:
1.
Form metal doors to required sizes with minimum radius.
2.
Join door faces at vertical edges by welding or crimping method identical to manufacturer's tested units.
X.
Frame Fabrication:
1.
Form metal frames to required sizes with minimum radius.
2.
Weld joints continuously.
3.
Make joints smooth, flush, and invisible.
4.
Provide plaster guards where required to contain grout or mortar.
Y.
Hardware Preparation: In compliance with ANSI A115.1.
1.
Factory-prepare assemblies to received hardware.
2.
Prepare for hardware mounting as recommended by manufacturer in accordance with manufacturer's acoustically tested assemblies.
Z.
Primer: Factory primed for field-applied painted finish.
1.
Type: Manufacturer's standard, lead- and chromate-free primer.
2.
Compliance: ANSI A250.10.
3.
Thickness: Minimum 0.7 mils (0.018 mm) thick.
 
** NOTE TO SPECIFIER ** Wenger tunable panels are specifically determined for appropriate quantities and location for each music rehearsal or performance space. They are typically required to allow musicians and directors to hear all ensemble parts while protecting against echoes, flutters, and unsafe sound energy levels. Delete if not required.
 
2.3
SOUND-ABSORBING AND SOUND-DIFFUSING PANELS
A.
Basis of Design: Provide a system of acoustical panels, as manufactured by Wenger Corporation, that absorb or diffuse sound in a configuration designed to reduce excess sound energy levels and improve sound distribution throughout the space.
B.
Performance Requirements: Provide sound absorbing and sound-diffusing panels meeting requirements with the following characteristics:
1.
Wall Panel Mounting Types for Acoustical Performance Characteristics according to ASTM E 795, with measurements determined according to ASTM C 423:
a.
No air space.
2.
Ceiling Diffuser Panel Mounting Types for Acoustical Performance Characteristics according to ASTM E 795, with measurements determined according to ASTM C 423:
a.
No air space.
b.
E-150: 6 inches (152 mm) air space.
c.
E-400: 16 inches (410 mm) air space.
C.
Wall and Ceiling Absorber Panels: Manufacturer's standard panel, with fabric covering laminated to front face of rigid glass-fiber board, with chemically hardened edges, with the following characteristics:
1.
Basis of Design Product: Wenger Wall Absorber Panel and Ceiling Absorber Panel.
2.
Absorber Panel Size: Width and length indicated on the Drawings.
 
** NOTE TO SPECIFIER ** Delete thicknesses not required.
 
a.
Thickness: 2 inches (51 mm).
b.
Thickness: 3 inches (76 mm).
c.
Thickness: 4 inches (102 mm).
3.
Fabric Covering: Manufacturer's standard, color and pattern as selected.
4.
Wall Panel Mounting Method: Metal wall bracket with panel-mounted z-bracket.
5.
Ceiling Panel Mounting Method:
 
** NOTE TO SPECIFIER ** Delete mounting method not required. Note that manufacturer does not offer a lay-in method of mounting.
 
a.
Direct mount with brackets attached to panel back.
b.
Wire suspension from brackets attached to panel back.
 
** NOTE TO SPECIFIER ** Delete if 2 inch thickness not required.
 
6.
Acoustical Performance, 2 inch (51 mm) thick, Sound Absorption Coefficients, One-third Octave Band Center Frequency, Hz, for 48 by 48 inch (1219 by 1219 mm) unit, Mounting Type A:
a.
125Hz = 0.50.
b.
250Hz = 0.96.
c.
500Hz = 1.27.
d.
1000Hz = 1.27.
e.
2000Hz = 1.23.
f.
4000Hz = 1.18.
 
** NOTE TO SPECIFIER ** Delete if 3 inch thickness not required.
 
7.
Acoustical Performance, 3 inch (76 mm) thick, Sound Absorption Coefficients, One-third Octave Band Center Frequency, Hz, for 48 by 48 inch (1219 by 1219 mm) unit, Mounting Type A:
a.
125Hz = 0.65.
b.
250Hz = 1.10.
c.
500Hz = 1.31.
d.
1000Hz = 1.23.
e.
2000Hz = 1.20.
f.
4000Hz = 1.06.
 
** NOTE TO SPECIFIER ** Delete if 4 inch thickness not required.
 
8.
Acoustical Performance, 4 inch (102 mm) thick, Sound Absorption Coefficients, One-third Octave Band Center Frequency, Hz, for 48 by 48 inch (1219 by 1219 mm) unit, Mounting Type A:
a.
125Hz = 0.65.
b.
250Hz = 1.10.
c.
500Hz = 1.31.
d.
1000Hz = 1.23.
e.
2000Hz = 1.20.
f.
4000Hz = 1.06.
D.
Convex Wall Diffuser Panels: Acoustically-configured, polycylindrical convex molded thermoplastic panel, .125 inch (3 mm) thick, width and length indicated, and with the following characteristics:
1.
Basis of Design Product: Wenger Type I Convex Wall Diffuser.
2.
Fabric Covering: Manufacturer's standard, color and pattern as selected.
3.
Wall Panel Mounting Method: Metal wall bracket with panel-mounted z-bracket.
4.
Sound Transmission Class (STC): ASTM E 90 and ASTM E 413: 23.
5.
Acoustical Performance, Sound Absorption Coefficients, One-third Octave Band Center Frequency, Hz, for 48 by 48 inch (1219 by 1219 mm) unit, Mounting Type A.
a.
125Hz = 0.18.
b.
250Hz = 0.18.
c.
500Hz = 0.13.
d.
1000Hz = 0.10.
e.
2000Hz = 0.12.
f.
4000Hz = 0.16.
E.
Convex Ceiling Diffuser Panels: Acoustically-configured, polycylindrical convex molded thermoplastic panel, .125 inch (3 mm) thick, and width and length indicated.
1.
Basis of Design Product: Wenger Convex Ceiling Diffuser Panels.
2.
Finish: Manufacturer's standard textured white.
3.
Ceiling Panel Mounting Method:
 
** NOTE TO SPECIFIER ** Delete mounting method not required.
 
a.
Direct mount with brackets attached to panel back.
b.
Wire suspension from brackets attached to panel back .
c.
Lay-in ceiling grid clip. All lay-in ceiling panels include safety cable attachment to permanent ceiling grid in all four corners of ceiling panel.
4.
Acoustical Performance, Sound Absorption Coefficients, One-third Octave Band Center Frequency, Hz, for 48 by 48 inch (1219 by 1219 mm) unit, Mounting Type A.
a.
125Hz = 0.49.
b.
250Hz = 0.16.
c.
500Hz = 0.10.
d.
1000Hz = 0.04.
e.
2000Hz = 0.03.
f.
4000Hz = 0.05.
F.
Convex Wall Diffuser/Absorber Panels: Acoustically-configured, selectively sound-absorptive polycylindrical convex molded thermoplastic panel, .125 inch (3 mm) thick, width and length indicated, with sound attenuation board adhered to internal surface of panel.
1.
Basis of Design Product: Wenger Type II Convex Wall Diffuser Panels.
2.
Fabric Covering: Manufacturer's standard, color and pattern as selected.
3.
Wall Panel Mounting Method: Metal wall bracket with panel-mounted grooved button.
4.
Sound Transmission Class (STC): ASTM E 90 and ASTM E 413: 23.
5.
Acoustical Performance, Sound Absorption Coefficients, One-third Octave Band Center Frequency, Hz, for 48 by 48 inch (1219 by 1219 mm) unit, Mounting Type A.
a.
125Hz = 0.34.
b.
250Hz = 0.27.
c.
500Hz = 0.14.
d.
1000Hz = 0.11.
e.
2000Hz = 0.11.
f.
4000Hz = 0.19.
G.
Pyramidal Ceiling Diffuser Panels: Acoustically-configured, offset pyramidal molded thermoplastic impact-resistant panel .125 inch (3 mm) thick, length and width indicated.
1.
Basis of Design Product: Wenger Pyramidal Ceiling Diffuser.
2.
Finish: Manufacturer's standard textured white.
3.
Ceiling Panel Mounting Method:
a.
Wire suspension from back-mounted brackets
b.
Lay-in ceiling grid clip. All lay-in ceiling panels include safety cable attachment to permanent ceiling grid in all four corners of panel.
4.
Acoustical Performance, Sound Absorption Coefficients, One-third Octave Band Center Frequency, Hz, for 48 by 48 inch (1219 by 1219 mm) unit, Mounting Type A.
a.
125Hz = 0.13.
b.
250Hz = 0.13.
c.
500Hz = 0.05.
d.
1000Hz = 0.02.
e.
2000Hz = 0.06.
f.
4000Hz = 0.08.
H.
Quadratic Ceiling Diffuser Panel: Acoustically diffusing panel designed in accordance with quadratic theory with multiple wells of engineered depth in a molded thermoplastic panel, 48 by 48 inch (1219 by 1219 mm) by .125 inch (3 mm) thick.
1.
Basis of Design Product: Wenger Quadratic Ceiling Diffuser.
2.
Finish: Manufacturer's standard white.
3.
Ceiling Panel Mounting Method: Lay-in ceiling grid. All panels include safety cable attachment to permanent ceiling grid in all four corners of panel.
4.
Unit Weight: 35 lb (16 kg).
5.
Acoustical Performance, Sound Absorption Coefficients, One-third Octave Band Center Frequency, Hz, for 48 by 96 inch (1219 by 2440 mm) unit, Mounting Type E-400.
a.
125Hz = 0.36.
b.
250Hz = 0.54.
c.
500Hz = 0.59.
d.
1000Hz = 0.43.
e.
2000Hz = 0.24.
f.
4000Hz = 0.19.
I.
Fabric Facing Material: 100 percent woven plain weave polyester 2-ply, with the following characteristics:
1.
Light Fastness: AATCC 16, Option 3: 40 hours.
2.
Fastness to Crocking: AATCC 8: #4 Wet & Dry.
3.
Flammability: ASTM E 84, Class A or 1.
4.
Basis of design product: Guilford of Maine, FR-701.
J.
Airborne Noise Reduction: Provide acoustical panels in layout designed by computer simulation based on Fitzroy formulas to provide the following sound reduction:
1.
Band Rehearsal: _____ dB +/- 0.5dB.
2.
Orchestra Rehearsal: _____ dB +/- 0.5dB.
3.
Choral Rehearsal: _____ dB +/- 0.5dB.
K.
Reverberation Time: Provide acoustical panels in layout designed by computer simulation based on Fitzroy formulas to provide the following reverberation times and amount of variability available in each room:
1.
Band Rehearsal: _____ +/- 0.2 seconds. Degree of change: _____ seconds.
2.
Orchestra Rehearsal: _____> +/- 0.2 seconds. Degree of change: _____ seconds.
3.
Choral Rehearsal: _____ +/- 0.2 seconds. Degree of change: _____ seconds.
 
** NOTE TO SPECIFIER ** Wenger Tunable Wall Panels are designed to adjust the amount of absorption and/or diffusion in a room, which affects the reverberation time and loudness of a room in order for the space to be used for both choral and instrumental rehearsal or performance. Delete if not required.
 
2.4
TUNABLE WALL PANELS
A.
Basis of Design: Provide a system of acoustical panels, as manufactured by Wenger Corporation, that absorb or diffuse sound in a configuration designed to increase or decrease the reverberation time up to .5 seconds at any time within the room.
1.
Panel Size: 4 feet x 4 feet (1219 mm x 1219 mm) and 4 feet x 8 feet (1219 mm x 2438 mm) as applicable; both sizes 12 inches (305 mm) deep.
2.
Fabric Covering: Manufacturer's standard, color and pattern as selected.
3.
Wall Panel Mounting Method: Metal wall bracket.
4.
Acoustical Performance: In compliance with manufacturer's published documentation for sound absorption.
B.
Diffuser Only Panel Internal Thermoplastic Sheet: ABS plastic sheet, flame spread index 25 maximum and smoke-developed index 450 maximum.
C.
Fabric Facing Material: 100 percent woven plain weave polyester 2-ply, with the following characteristics:
1.
Light Fastness: AATCC 16, Option 3: 40 hours.
2.
Fastness to Crocking: AATCC 8: #4 Wet & Dry.
3.
Flammability: ASTM E 84, Class A or 1.
4.
Basis of design product: Guilford of Maine, Anchorage Series.
D.
Face Panel: Curved aluminum micro-perf sheet, containing absorptive and diffusive qualities.
E.
Panel End Caps: Top and bottom end caps constructed of 3/4 inch (19 mm) thick laminated composite board with 1/8 inch (3 mm) edge banding.
 
** NOTE TO SPECIFIER ** Delete if not required.
 
1.
Woodgrain finish as scheduled or indicated. Refer to Drawings.
F.
Internal Adjustment: Absorber/Diffuser panel includes integrated steel actuator device which allows the panel to be changed to an absorber or diffuser by the use of an external handle.
G.
Side Frames: Integrated, radiused aluminum extrusions.
H.
Wall Brackets: Painted steel rail with holes to attach to wall studs, or mount to wall.
 
** NOTE TO SPECIFIER ** Add requirements for engineered seismic attachment of acoustical banners if required for Project. Delete if not required.
 
2.5
MOTORIZED ACOUSTICAL BANNERS
A.
Basis of Design: Sound absorbing acoustical banner units, as manufactured by Wenger Corporation. comprised of housing, fabric banner, ball bearing rollers, motor, controls, mounting accessories, and other components necessary for a complete installation. Provide units meeting performance requirements and requirements listed and labeled as an assembly by UL or another testing and inspecting agency acceptable to Authorities Having Jurisdiction.
 
** NOTE TO SPECIFIER ** Retain and edit below for projects where noise reduction and reverberation time for each listed space have been engineered to accompany a design layout of acoustic banners. Copy and repeat subparagraphs below for each additional space receiving acoustic banners.
Consult Wenger representative for assistance in establishing appropriate performance requirements for each space as well as proper instrumentation requirements for measurement.
 
B.
Airborne Noise Reduction: Provide acoustical banners in layout designed by computer simulation based on Fitzroy formulas to provide the following sound reduction:
1.
Auditorium: _____ dB +/- 0.5dB.
C.
Reverberation Time: Provide acoustical absorber and diffuser panels in layout designed by computer simulation based on Fitzroy formulas to provide the following reverberation times:
1.
Auditorium: _____ +/- 0.2 seconds.
 
** NOTE TO SPECIFIER ** Delete if type not required.
 
D.
Acoustical Performance, Synthetic Velour Double Layer, Sound Absorption Coefficient, ASTM C 423, one-third Octave Band Center Frequency: For banners of the following construction, spaced 9.5 inches (241 mm) from wall, with 3 inches (76 mm) between banner layers.
1.
200 Hz = 0.35.
2.
250 Hz = 0.59.
3.
500 Hz = 0.70.
4.
1000 Hz = 0.87.
5.
2000 Hz = 0.80.
6.
4000 Hz = 0.80.
 
** NOTE TO SPECIFIER ** Delete if type not required.
 
E.
Acoustical Performance, Wool Serge Double Layer, Sound Absorption Coefficient, ASTM C 423, one-third Octave Band Center Frequency: For banners of the following construction, spaced 9.5 inches (241 mm) from wall, with 3 inches (76 mm) between banner layers.
1.
200 Hz = 0.40.
2.
250 Hz = 0.59.
3.
500 Hz = 0.69.
4.
1000 Hz = 0.87.
5.
2000 Hz = 0.84.
6.
4000 Hz = 0.84.
 
** NOTE TO SPECIFIER ** Delete if type not required.
 
F.
Acoustical Performance, Synthetic Velour with Acoustical Blanket, Sound Absorption Coefficient, ASTM C 423, one-third Octave Band Center Frequency: For banners of the following construction, spaced 9.5 inches (241 mm) from wall, with 3 inches (76 mm) between banner layers.
1.
200 Hz = 0.38.
2.
250 Hz = 0.65.
3.
500 Hz = 0.82.
4.
1000 Hz = 0.87.
5.
2000 Hz = 0.82.
6.
4000 Hz = 0.87.
 
** NOTE TO SPECIFIER ** Delete if type not required.
 
G.
Acoustical Performance, Wool Serge with Acoustical Blanket, Sound Absorption Coefficient, ASTM C 423, one-third Octave Band Center Frequency: For banners of the following construction, spaced 9.5 inches (241 mm) from wall, with 3 inches (76 mm) between banner layers.
1.
200 Hz = 0.41.
2.
250 Hz = 0.48.
3.
500 Hz = 0.70.
4.
1000 Hz = 0.87.
5.
2000 Hz = 0.82.
6.
4000 Hz = 0.87.
H.
Fire-Test-Response Characteristics per ASTM E 84 or UL Standard 723: Flame spread index: 25 or less; Smoke developed index: 450 or less.
I.
Flame Resistance: Provide fabric components complying with NFPA 701.
J.
Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by a qualified testing agency.
 
** NOTE TO SPECIFIER ** Wenger Acoustical Banners are designed to tailor the reverberation and loudness of a room. Acoustical banners are engineered to absorb sound across a broader frequency range. Standard (60 inch) width and custom widths up to 10 feet are available. Indicate banner sizes and locations on Drawings.
 
K.
Sound-Absorbing Acoustical Banners: Acoustical double-layer fabric banners with adjustable layer spacing and adjustable wall spacing, with motorized deployment and retraction, concealed when retracted within wall-mounted housing. Provide means of securing fabric allowing fabric to be easily removed for maintenance.
1.
Product: Wenger Corporation, Motorized Acoustical Banners.
2.
Banner Size: Size indicated on Drawings.
 
** NOTE TO SPECIFIER ** Retain selected fabric option in "Banner Acoustical Fabric" and corresponding fabric description paragraphs below. Coordinate with corresponding coefficient in "Sound Absorption Coefficient" paragraph in Performance Requirements paragraph. If more than one fabric type or fabric color is required, note or schedule locations on Drawings.
 
3.
Banner Acoustical Fabric: Synthetic velour front layer, acoustical blanket back layer.
4.
Banner Acoustical Fabric: Wool serge front layer, acoustical blanket back layer.
L.
Fabric Material:
1.
Synthetic Velour: 22 oz. (746 g/sq. m) medium weight polyester synthetic velour, inherently flame retardant, wrinkle-resistant and moisture resistant, in double layer.
2.
Wool Serge: 30 oz. /sq. yd. (1017 g/sq. m) matte finish, no nap direction, inherently flame retardant, in double layer.
3.
Acoustical Blanket: High-loft synthetic fibrous insulation blanket consisting of polypropylene microfibers with spun bonded scrim surface.
 
** NOTE TO SPECIFIER ** Delete color/pattern not required.
 
4.
Colors/Patterns: As indicated on Drawings.
5.
Colors/Patterns: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full line.
6.
Colors/Patterns: Specifier insert color selection.
M.
Housing: Manufacturer's standard enclosure consisting of aluminum extrusion frame with wood infill panels.
 
** NOTE TO SPECIFIER ** Retain " Housing Closures and End Caps" paragraph below for exposed housing installations and select appropriate option.
 
1.
Housing Closures and End Caps: Laminated wood as selected by Architect from manufacturer's standard veneers and stains.
2.
Housing Closures and End Caps: Insert housing finish description.
 
** NOTE TO SPECIFIER ** Delete mounting not required.
 
3.
Mounting: Exposed wall-mounted.
4.
Mounting: Exposed ceiling-mounted.
5.
Mounting: Above ceiling-mounted.
N.
Operator and Controls:
1.
Motor in Roller: Instant-reversing asynchronous motor of size and capacity recommended by acoustical banner manufacturer; with integrated motor controls, brakes, and encoders, permanently lubricated ball bearings, thermal-overload protection, limit switches, and positive-stop action.
2.
Power Supply: 120VAC/60 Hz.
 
** NOTE TO SPECIFIER ** Retain option in "Controls" paragraph below if Owner requests ability to modify acoustical banner limit settings.
 
3.
Controls: Provide control system utilizing main bus consisting of RS485 conductors using CAT 5 cabling, power insertion box and interface, and control switches. Provide manufacturer's address reader and limit setting tool.
 
** NOTE TO SPECIFIER ** Retain and edit control description as required by Project. Coordinate with electrical drawings. Three-button control switch below is standard from Wenger. Other control options are not supplied by Wenger; consult with Wenger for recommendations.
 
a.
Control Switch: Remote up/down/stop control switch installed in recessed device box with cover plate. Provide number of control switches indicated for each banner or banner group.
 
** NOTE TO SPECIFIER ** Delete number of optional presets not required.
 
b.
Provide multiple pre-set control switch with three to five preset positions.
c.
Provide multiple pre-set control switch with five to eight preset positions.
 
** NOTE TO SPECIFIER ** Delete if not required.
 
d.
Integrated Control System: Provide interface with integrated control system scheduled and as indicated.
O.
Fasteners and Brackets: Manufacturer's standard mounting hardware for wall mount, ceiling mount, and overhead strut suspension mount as scheduled or indicated.
P.
Fabrication:
1.
Provide factory-assembled units ready for installation, shipped with banners installed and ready to deploy.
2.
Seams: Where width of banner indicated exceeds maximum width produced without seams in material specified, provide banner with horizontal seam placed in location indicated on approved shop drawings.
 
** NOTE TO SPECIFIER ** Below describes standard Wenger Diva acoustical cloud panels. Select panel face. Edit to meet job requirements. Wenger also provides complete custom design and fabrication of panels, including custom sizes and radii, acoustical densities and performance, custom accents, inlays, and faux finishes. Consult Wenger representative. Delete if not required.
 
2.6
ACOUSTICAL CLOUDS
A.
Basis of Design: DIVA Acoustical Clouds as manufactured by Wenger Corporation.
 
** NOTE TO SPECIFIER ** STC performance of the acoustical panel used in acoustical cloud is a measurement of the efficiency of sound reflection provided by the acoustical cloud. Value below indicates the performance of the Wenger Diva panel.
 
B.
Acoustical Panel Sound Transmission: Provide auditorium acoustical cloud comprised of acoustical cloud panels having the following sound transmission requirements:
1.
Sound Transmission Class (STC): Minimum 21 per ASTM E 413.
C.
Materials:
1.
Aluminum Extruded Bars, Profiles, and Tubes: ASTM B 221 (ASTM B 221M), 6063T alloy.
2.
Steel Tube: ASTM A 501, hot formed steel tubing.
3.
Cold-Rolled Steel Sheet: ASTM A 1008/A 1008M, commercial steel, Type B.
4.
Veneer-Faced Panel Products (MDF core): Meets all CARB-2 requirements for formaldehyde emissions.
5.
Hardboard: AHA A135.4, Class 1 Tempered - formaldehyde free.
6.
High-Pressure Decorative Laminate: NEMA LD 3, Grade VGS.
a.
HPDL with urea formaldehyde-free adhesive.
 
** NOTE TO SPECIFIER ** STC performance of the acoustical panel used in acoustical cloud system is a measurement of the efficiency of sound reflection provided by the acoustical cloud. Value below indicates the performance of the Wenger Diva panel.
 
D.
Acoustical Panel Sound Transmission: Provide acoustical shell system comprised of acoustical shell panels having the following sound transmission requirements:
1.
Sound Transmission Class (STC): Minimum 21 per ASTM E 413.
 
** NOTE TO SPECIFIER ** Delete if not required.
 
E.
Acoustical Cloud Panels: Manufacturer's standard stressed-skin composite acoustical cloud panels, with STC meeting performance requirements, designed to mix and blend sound and reflect a maximum range of audible frequencies to audience.
1.
Core: 1-1/2 inches thick (38 mm) honeycomb core material shall have an open geometric pattern with cell walls vertical to panel skins and defined by alternating straight and sine wave layers. Height of sine wave shall be 1/2 inch, wall thickness shall correspond to 60 lb kraft. Bonding of core material to panel faces shall be with permanently cured urethane adhesive. Foam core materials and contact adhesives shall not be permitted.
 
** NOTE TO SPECIFIER ** Delete face finish not required.
 
2.
Face, Wood Veneer-Faced Panel: 1/4 inch (6 mm) thick hardwood plywood-faced medium density fiberboard stressed skin, material and finish as indicated, with no exposed fasteners. This panel assembly shall have a minimum of STC 22.
3.
Face, Plastic Laminate-Faced Panel: Material and finish as indicated, with no exposed fasteners. This panel assembly shall have a minimum of STC 21.
4.
Face, Painted Panel: 3/16 inch (4.8 mm) thick hardboard stressed skin, material and finish as indicated, with no exposed fasteners. This panel assembly shall have a minimum of STC 22.
5.
Back: 3/16 inch (4.8 mm) thick hardboard stressed skin, painted black.
6.
Panel Edge Frame: Straight panel edges are reinforced with extruded aluminum edge frame.
7.
Acclimate panel face and back materials in a temperature and humidity controlled environment for a minimum of 72 continuous hours so that they reach appropriate equilibrate condition prior to lamination to improve dimensional stability of finished laminated panels.
a.
Documentation of specified process must be available for review.
 
** NOTE TO SPECIFIER ** Delete if not required.
 
F.
Overhead Sound Reflecting Acoustical Cloud: Acoustical cloud panels suspended directly from overhead supports.
 
** NOTE TO SPECIFIER ** Delete radius not required.
 
1.
Cloud Panel Radius: 5 foot (1.52 m).
2.
Cloud Panel Radius: 10 foot (3.05 m).
3.
Cloud Panel Radius: 20 foot (6.09 m).
4.
Cloud Panel Radius: As indicated.
5.
Cloud Panel Size and Configuration: As indicated.
6.
Cloud Panel Face Finish:
a.
Hardwood plywood veneer: Plain sliced, slip-matched and balance matched to maintain a uniform leaf width across the full width of the panel.
1)
Veneer must be a minimum of 80+ or 85+ grade. Grade A veneer, or veneer of a lesser grade, is not acceptable.
2)
Sort veneer by grain density, grain structure, and color.
3)
Clip around character marks to minimize pin knots, mineral, gum, sap, and color variation.
4)
Individually clip and hand splice each veneer leaf with the grain cathedrals centered in the middle of each leaf.
 
** NOTE TO SPECIFIER ** Delete species not required.
 
5)
Species: White oak.
6)
Species: Red oak.
7)
Species: White birch.
8)
Species: Maple.
9)
Species: Cherry.
 
** NOTE TO SPECIFIER ** Delete finish not required.
 
b.
Transparent finish, stain color as selected by Architect.
c.
Transparent finish, stain color: _____.
d.
Plastic laminate: Color as selected by Architect.
e.
Painted hardboard: Color as selected by Architect.
G.
Cloud Suspension: Chain and shackle from each of four corners to overhead supports.
H.
Miscellaneous Supports: Battens, channels, and other miscellaneous supports are part of the work of Division 05 Section "Metal Fabrications."
 
** NOTE TO SPECIFIER ** Retain above and coordinate requirements below. Suspension items for auditorium clouds are supplied by Wenger. Batten supports above are specified in other sections.
 
I.
Acoustical Cloud Installation Accessories:
1.
Shackles: Rated screw pin shackles.
2.
Chain: 3/16 inch (4 mm) Grade 30 proof coil black oxide steel chain.
J.
Finishes:
1.
Aluminum Framing: Painted.
2.
Opaque Painted Finish for Acoustical Cloud Panel: 100 percent acrylic latex, 2-coat, eggshell finish.
3.
Transparent Wood Finish for Acoustical Cloud Panel Face: Manufacturer's standard, comparable to AWI custom grade acrylic lacquer.
K.
Integrated Lighting:
 
** NOTE TO SPECIFIER ** Delete lighting type not required.
 
1.
Quartz-Halogen (Incandescent) Lighting: Wide ranging white light beam spread, color temperature and intensity options are available. Requires an external phase control dimming system. Full spectrum RGBA & RGBW color controllable options available.
2.
LED Lighting: Wide ranging white light beam spread, color temperature and intensity options are available. LED DMX512/RDM (digitally) controlled. Full spectrum RGBA & RGBW color controllable options available.
 
** NOTE TO SPECIFIER ** Delete if not required.
 
2.7
ACOUSTICAL SHELLS
A.
Basis of Design: DIVA Acoustical Shells as manufactured by Wenger Corporation. Full stage acoustical shell system consisting of mobile acoustical shell towers and adjustable acoustical shell ceiling.
B.
Materials:
1.
Aluminum Extruded Bars, Profiles, and Tubes: ASTM B 221 (ASTM B 221M), 6063T alloy.
2.
Steel Tube: ASTM A 501, hot formed steel tubing.
3.
Cold-Rolled Steel Sheet: ASTM A 1008/A 1008M, commercial steel, Type B.
4.
Veneer-Faced Panel Products (MDF core): Meets all CARB-2 requirements for formaldehyde emissions.
5.
Hardboard: AHA A135.4, Class 1 Tempered - formaldehyde free.
6.
High-Pressure Decorative Laminate: NEMA LD 3, Grade VGS.
a.
HPDL with urea formaldehyde-free adhesive.
 
** NOTE TO SPECIFIER ** STC performance of the acoustical panel used in acoustical shell system is a measurement of the efficiency of sound reflection provided by the acoustical shell. Value below indicates the performance of the Wenger Diva panel.
 
C.
Acoustical Panel Sound Transmission: Provide acoustical shell system comprised of acoustical shell panels having the following sound transmission requirements:
1.
Sound Transmission Class (STC): Minimum 21 per ASTM E 413.
 
** NOTE TO SPECIFIER ** Below describes standard Wenger Diva acoustical shell panels. Select panel face. Edit to meet job requirements.
Wenger also provides complete custom design and fabrication of panels, tower, and ceiling system, including custom sizes and radii, acoustical densities and performance, custom accents, inlays, and faux finishes, and multiple storage options. Consult Wenger representative.
 
D.
Acoustical Shell Panels, General: Manufacturer's standard stressed-skin composite acoustical shell panels, with a minimum of STC 21 to meet performance requirements, designed to mix and blend sound and reflect a maximum range of audible frequencies to both audience and performers.
1.
Core; 1-1/2 inches thick (38 mm) honeycomb core material shall have an open geometric pattern with cell walls vertical to panel skins and defined by alternating straight and sine wave layers. Height of sine wave shall be 1/2 inch, wall thickness shall correspond to 60 lb kraft. Bonding of core material to panel faces shall be with permanently cured urethane adhesive. Foam core materials and contact adhesives shall not be permitted.
 
** NOTE TO SPECIFIER ** Delete face finish not required.
 
2.
Face, Wood Veneer-Faced Panel: 1/4 inch (6 mm) thick hardwood plywood-faced medium density fiberboard stressed skin, material and finish as indicated, with no exposed fasteners. This panel assembly shall have a minimum of STC 22.
3.
Face, Plastic Laminate-Faced Panel: Material and finish as indicated, with no exposed fasteners. This panel assembly shall have a minimum of STC 21.
4.
Face, Painted Panel: 3/16 inch (4.8 mm) thick hardboard stressed skin, material and finish as indicated, with no exposed fasteners. This panel assembly shall have a minimum of STC 22.
5.
Back: 3/16 inch (4.8 mm) thick hardboard stressed skin, painted black.
6.
Panel Edge Frame: Straight panel edges are reinforced with extruded aluminum edge frame.
7.
Acclimate panel face and back materials in a temperature and humidity controlled environment for a minimum of 72 continuous hours so that they reach appropriate equilibrate condition prior to lamination to improve dimensional stability of finished laminated panels.
a.
Documentation of specified process must be available for review.
E.
Mobile Acoustical Towers: Free-standing, self-supporting, movable towers for stage back and side walls. Towers consist of acoustical shell panels in rigid, diagonally-braced vertical aluminum frame with formed steel connection components, with center panel and two hinged wing panels, in nesting configuration minimizing required storage space. Wing panel on tower equipped with latching hardware and stage access door where indicated. Counterweighted tower base with adjustable front leveling pads concealed by removable access panel.
 
** NOTE TO SPECIFIER ** Delete tower size not required.
 
1.
Tower Size: As indicated.
2.
Tower Size: 12 foot (3660 mm) wide, consisting of one 4 foot (1220 mm) center panel and two 4 foot (1220 mm) wing panels.
3.
Tower Size: 10 foot (3050 mm) wide, consisting of one 4 foot (1220 mm) center panel and two 3 foot (914 mm) wing panels.
4.
Tower Height and Width: As indicated.
 
** NOTE TO SPECIFIER ** Delete tower radius not required.
 
5.
Tower Panel Radius: As indicated.
6.
Tower Panel Radius: 5 foot (1.52 m).
7.
Tower Panel Radius: 10 foot (3.05 m).
8.
Tower Panel Radius: 20 foot (6.09 m).
 
** NOTE TO SPECIFIER ** Select finish requirements below. In addition to standard selections, a wide range of custom veneers and laminates are available. Consult Wenger representative.
 
9.
Tower Panel Face Finish:
a.
Hardwood plywood veneer: Plain sliced, slip-matched and balance matched to maintain a uniform leaf width across the full width of the panel.
1)
Veneer must be a minimum of 80+ or 85+ grade.
a)
Grade A veneer, or veneer of a lesser grade, is not acceptable.
2)
Sort veneer by grain density, grain structure, and color.
3)
Clip around character marks to minimize pin knots, mineral, gum, sap, and color variation.
4)
Individually clip and hand splice each veneer leaf with the grain cathedrals centered in the middle of each leaf.
 
Grade A veneer is not acceptable.** NOTE TO SPECIFIER ** Delete species not required.
 
5)
Species: White oak.
6)
Species: Red oak.
7)
Species: White birch.
8)
Species: Maple.
9)
Species: Cherry.
 
** NOTE TO SPECIFIER ** Delete finish not required.
 
b.
Transparent finish, stain color as selected by Architect.
c.
Transparent finish, stain color: _____.
d.
Plastic laminate: Color as selected by Architect.
e.
Painted hardboard: Color as selected by Architect.
 
** NOTE TO SPECIFIER ** Delete trim finish not required.
 
f.
Trim strips between Panels: Painted black.
g.
Trim strips between Panels: Painted color as selected by Architect.
10.
Door and Wing Panel Hardware:
a.
Hinges: extruded from high-strength aluminum with a seamless barrel and integral attachment flange; hinge loads are carried by maintenance free, self-lubricating sintered bronze bearings which pivot on a 1/2 inch (13 mm) diameter steel pin that are designed for silent operation and requiring no replacement parts. Metal-on-metal hinges without self-lubricating materials are not acceptable.
b.
Slide-lock mechanism, pull handle, and adjustable wing stay.
11.
Tower Frame:
a.
Extruded 6063 T6 aluminum alloy vertical tower frames with welded cross tube assemblies.
 
** NOTE TO SPECIFIER ** Delete stage tower transporter type not required.
 
12.
Stage Tower Transporter: Wheeled mover shall be a one stroke lifting design using mechanical leverage to lift the tower. The wheeled mover shall incorporate casters that are a minimum of 6" in diameter. A wheeled mover requiring a hydraulic pump or a battery operated motor to lift the tower shall not be accepted.
13.
Stage Tower Transporter: Air transporter configured to fit stage tower base and enable movement of towers through pneumatic cushion supporting majority (approximately 75%) of the tower's weight.
F.
Adjustable Acoustical Shell Ceiling: Acoustical shell ceiling consisting of adjustable-angle acoustical shell ceiling panels supported by integral extruded aluminum truss, suspended from stage rigging pipe batten, and stored in fly-loft in vertical position.
1.
Ceiling Panel Size and Configuration: As indicated.
 
** NOTE TO SPECIFIER ** Delete radius not required.
 
2.
Ceiling Panel Radius: 5 foot (1.52 m).
3.
Ceiling Panel Radius: 10 foot (3.05 m).
4.
Ceiling Panel Radius: 20 foot (6.09 m).
5.
Ceiling Panel Radius: As indicated.
6.
Ceiling Hinges: Aluminum, with self-lubricating bearings that are designed for silent operation. Metal on metal hinges without self-lubricating materials are not acceptable.
7.
Integral Truss: Extruded 6063 T6 aluminum alloy. An integral truss is required to keep the ceiling row assembly straight and true. A truss is required to keep the pivoting hinges in line with each other to prevent binding and undue wear when rotating the ceiling row assembly to and from the performance position. Metal on metal hinges without self-lubricating materials are not acceptable.
8.
Serves as the electrical power raceway adequate to power integrated lighting.
9.
Hanger Arms:
a.
The integral truss provides the structure to allow 1 inch (25 mm) square 11 gauge steel hanger arms to be located next to the rigging cables which is the strongest point to support the weight of the ceiling assembly. Hanger arms that are located more than 2 inches (25 mm) from the rigging cables are not acceptable.
10.
Ceiling Performance Angle Adjustment:
a.
Spring-loaded steel tube assembly allows the ceiling to be easily locked into the performance position. The stay assembly shall be easily readjusted and marked to identify preferred preset angles.
 
** NOTE TO SPECIFIER ** Wenger acoustical shell ceilings may incorporate integrated lighting option. Consult your Wenger representative. Coordinate with electrical engineer and theater rigging consultant.
 
G.
Integrated Lighting: Manufacturer's standard UL-approved fixtures located as indicated.
1.
Integral truss incorporating electrical power raceway adequate to power integrated lighting. Raceway shall have UL or ETL classification. Any raceway without UL or ETL classification shall not be accepted.
2.
A mechanical tilt switch is provided to prevent accidental activation when the ceiling row is in the storage position.
 
** NOTE TO SPECIFIER ** Rigging and pipe battens are not furnished by Wenger. Coordinate with theater rigging consultant or with Division 05 metal fabrications section.
 
H.
Stage Rigging and Battens: Rigging and battens supporting acoustical shell ceiling are part of the work of Division 11 Section "Stage Curtains."
I.
Miscellaneous Supports: Channels, and other miscellaneous supports are part of the work of Division 05 Section "Metal Fabrications."
J.
Finishes:
1.
Aluminum Framing: Mill finish.
2.
Steel Finish: Immediately after cleaning and pretreating, electrostatically apply thermosetting TGIC polyester powder coating.
3.
Opaque Painted Finish for Acoustical Shell Panel: 100 percent acrylic latex, 2-coat, eggshell finish.
4.
Transparent Wood Finish for Acoustical Shell Panel Face: Manufacturer's standard finish, comparable to AWI custom grade acrylic lacquer.
 
** NOTE TO SPECIFIER ** Delete if not required.
 
2.8
ORCHESTRA SHELLS
A.
Basis of Design: Maestro Orchestra Shells as manufactured by Wenger Corporation, consisting of sound reflective panels, tower, side and back walls, overhead sound reflectors, and lighting.
B.
Sound Reflective Panels:
1.
Construction: Laminated sandwich sound reflecting panels.
 
** NOTE TO SPECIFIER ** Delete face materials not required.
 
a.
Exposed Face Material: Standard vertical grade high-pressure laminate.
b.
Exposed Face Material: APA Grade A or N wood veneer adhered to 1/4-inch MDF core hardwood plywood.
c.
Exposed Face Material: Painted 3/16 inch thick tempered hardboard.
d.
Core Material: Fabricated from resin impregnated cellulose 3/8-inch cell honeycomb.
e.
Back Skin: Painted 3/16 inch thick tempered hardboard.
f.
Panel Edges: Hardwood profile with quarter radius rounded corners, finished with polyurethane or paint to match the finish on the face.
g.
Fastener Points: Provide with structural metal inserts within panel. Exposed structural fasteners on the panel face are not acceptable.
h.
Adhesives: High solid, pressure-cured, moisture-activated, urethane structural adhesive. Contact type adhesives are not acceptable.
i.
Panel Shape: Exterior surface with minimum eight foot radius.
j.
Weight: Laminated panels weight a minimum 1-3/4 lbs/sq ft excluding any frame weight.
k.
Finish: Panel face surface to be free of exposed fasteners or loose/removable trim pieces.
 
** NOTE TO SPECIFIER ** Delete finishes not required.
 
1)
Finish: High-pressure laminate with matching stained/painted panel edges.
2)
Finish: Hardwood veneer stained and finished to match space requirements.
3)
Finish: Primed or painted finish for field finishing.
4)
Colors: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's currently available range of colors.
C.
Tower, Side and Back Walls:
1.
Tower Base Assembly:
a.
Fabricate framework and masts of steel construction without requirement of horizontal bracing.
b.
Framework shall be welded with no bolted connections.
c.
Base assembly to incorporate a counterweight of significant weight to safely move towers around the stage. Bolt weights to the tower frame. Weights to be removable only with the use of tools.
d.
Design base assembly so that it will nest within the other to utilize a minimum of storage space when disassembled.
e.
Provide each base with four adjustable height levelers to allow for minor irregularities in the stage floor.
f.
Furnish with numbered markers to be inserted flush with stage floor to indicate location of each tower insuring consistent setup. Markers shall be coded to match each of the arrangements indicated on Drawings.
2.
Tower Transporter:
a.
Furnish tower base assembly with one transporter that locks onto and lifts the towers allowing them to move safely around the stage.
b.
Construct transporter frame from steel tubing. Provide transporter with three three-point orbital casters, each with a load rating of 1000 lbs. Transporter to permit towers to be moved in any direction.
3.
Tower Upright Sections:
a.
Towers shall consist of three bowed panel columns hinged together allowing two wings to be closed for storage and to provide tower width as indicated.
b.
Design tower construction to prevent light from penetrating between reflector panels. Additional removable trim pieces are not acceptable.
c.
Taper top tower panels so that the height at the rear of the tower matches the height at the front of the adjoining tower.
d.
Equip secondary specified doors with hardware to permit lower section of the wing to operate as a doorway for entering and exiting the performing area without disturbing the upper portion of the wing.
e.
Design wing panels to lock into storage position.
f.
Affix instructions pertaining to safe handling and operation of towers to back side of the tower in plain view.
D.
Overhead Sound Reflectors:
1.
Design overhead sound reflectors to permit the entire row to be rotated to the storage position at one time by two people. Tools shall not be required to rotate panels for storage.
2.
Hardware to permit angular adjustment from horizontal plane to 40 degrees. Hardware to have capability of locking panels in a vertical position so that they may be stored on the batten in the stage loft.
3.
Equip each row of overhead panels with hardware required to hang from recommended 1-1/2 inch Schedule 40 two-pipe welded truss batten.
4.
Furnish overhead sound reflectors with instructions pertaining to safe handling of overhead panels.
E.
Lighting:
 
** NOTE TO SPECIFIER ** Lighting fixtures need to be distributed about six to eight feet on-center to accomplish this candlepower. Actual spacing is dependent on fixture selection.
 
1.
Incorporate incandescent ceiling lighting fixtures into the ceilings and locate to provide uniform direct lighting at an intensity of 80-100 footcandles measured at 3-feet above finished floor. Fixture may use a 575- to 750-watt lamp. Furnish with a properly rated tip-over switch to protect each circuit and prevent the fixtures from being energized when reflector is in its stored position. Mount the tip-over switch on an adjustable mechanism to allow for field calibration of the shut-off angle.
2.
Provide one UL listed connector strip along with associated SO multi-cable, wire mesh strain relief and grid junction boxes for each row of ceilings. Provide a six-foot pigtail with the appropriate connector at each switch location. Arrange circuits as required to maximize use of dimmer modules provided under electrical specifications.
3.
Provide one UL listed wireway complete with grid junction box for each row of ceiling panels. Coordinate j-box locations and circuit requirements with Drawings.
 
** NOTE TO SPECIFIER ** Insert size and quantity for components in blanks below, or delete this paragraph if height and width are shown on the Drawings.
 
F.
Component Schedule:
 
** NOTE TO SPECIFIER ** Tower heights at front equal the proscenium opening height and reduce in height at approximately 10 degrees towards the back.
 
1.
Towers:
a.
Side Wall, Wall with Two Doors:
1)
Two Towers, Width: ______.
2)
Two Towers, Height, with Tapered Tops: ______.
b.
Rear Wall, Without Doors:
1)
Three Towers, Width: ______.
2)
Three Towers, Height: ______.
2.
Ceilings:
 
** NOTE TO SPECIFIER ** Ceiling pieces match proscenium opening width at the front and taper to the rear matching the angle of the towers in plan view.
 
a.
Row 1, Depth: ______.
b.
Row 1, Width with Tapered Ends: ______.
c.
Row 1, Hanger Points: ______.
d.
Row 1, Light Fixtures: ______.
e.
Row 2, Depth: ______.
f.
Row 2, Width with Tapered Ends: ______.
g.
Row 2, Hanger Points: ______.
h.
Row 2, Light Fixtures: ______.
i.
Row 3, Depth: ______.
j.
Row 3, Width with Tapered Ends: ______.
k.
Row 3, Hanger Points: ______.
l.
Row 3, Light Fixtures: ______.
3.
Hardware: One tower transport cart.
 
** NOTE TO SPECIFIER ** Delete if not required.
 
2.9
ORCHESTRA PIT FILLERS
A.
Orchestra pit fillers for:
 
** NOTE TO SPECIFIER ** Delete application not required.
 
1.
Stage level.
2.
Audience seating level.
3.
Floor level platform.
B.
Basis of Design: Portable, interlocking platform system with interchangeable, adjustable columns cross braced to independently supported platforms, with individually removable acoustically-isolated honeycomb panels, as manufactured by Wenger Corporation.
C.
Structural Performance, Orchestra Pit Filler:
1.
Uniform Live Load: 150 lbf/sq. ft. (7.1 kN/sq. m).
2.
Point Load: No permanent deformation from 1000 lb (453 kg) load on 2-inch (50 mm) diameter rubber wheeled caster.
3.
Deflection: Not exceeding L/360 at design live load for 72 inch (1829 mm) long panel and span.
 
** NOTE TO SPECIFIER ** Verify seismic performance requirements of authorities having jurisdiction. Consult project structural engineer. When required, retain below plus retain related Submittals requirement and Part 3 seismic bracing requirements.
 
D.
Seismic Performance: Comply with ASCE 7, "Minimum Design Loads for Buildings and Other Structures": Section 9, "Earthquake Loads" based upon seismic design criteria indicated.
E.
Materials:
1.
Aluminum:
a.
Sheet and Plate: ASTM B 209 (ASTM B 209M).
b.
Extruded Bars, Profiles, and Tubes: ASTM B 221 (ASTM B 221M), 6063-T6 alloy.
c.
Extruded Structural Pipe and Tube: ASTM B 429.
2.
Softwood Plywood: DOC PS 1.
3.
Hardboard: AHA A135.4, tempered grade.
 
** NOTE TO SPECIFIER ** Wenger offers optional application of wood strip flooring to match flooring specified for adjacent stage floor. Coordinate flooring selection between this section and wood flooring specification. Final sanding and finishing of applied stage flooring is performed in the field by the stage flooring installer and not by Wenger. Consult with Wenger representative.
 
4.
Wood Stage Flooring: Refer to Division 09 Section "Wood Flooring."
F.
Framing Components:
1.
Main Support Beams: Extruded aluminum with dual fastener tracks for panel connection and adjustable beam-to-stage connection bracket fastened to stage using threaded insert and 3/8 inch (9.5 mm) diameter threaded locking device.
2.
Cross Beams: Extruded aluminum with single fastener track for panel connection, attached to main support beams with pin and socket connection requiring no tools.
3.
Column Assemblies: Extruded aluminum, with pinned connection to main support beams and threaded leveling foot allowing total adjustment of 4 inches (102 mm), plus or minus.
4.
Bracing: Aluminum or steel, attached to main support beams and cross beams, with pinned connection to columns.
G.
Composite Panel Deck:
1.
Thickness: 3-9/16 inch (90 mm) overall.
2.
Panel Faces: Softwood Plywood, 11/32 inch (8.7 mm) thick, A-C Group One exterior with 1/8 inch (3 mm) tempered hardboard on face.
3.
Core: Phenolic impregnated paper honeycomb, 2-5/8 inch (67 mm) thick.
4.
Panel Edges: Extruded PVC, with glass-filled nylon corners.
5.
Panel Attachments: Integral spring-loaded screw assemblies.
 
** NOTE TO SPECIFIER ** Select traffic surface below. Hardboard is available with natural finish or painted black. Wood tongue-and-groove flooring is matched to adjacent stage flooring, and shall be field finished by the stage wood flooring Installer following delivery of the orchestra pit filler. Delete surface and finish not required.
 
6.
Traffic Surface: Hardboard, tempered, 1/8 inch (3.2 mm).
a.
Finish: Natural finish.
b.
Finish: Painted black.
7.
Traffic Surface: Tongued and grooved wood strip flooring.
a.
Finish: Hard Maple.
b.
Finish: Red Oak.
c.
Finish: White Oak.
 
** NOTE TO SPECIFIER ** Retain and edit optional accessories below per project requirements.
 
H.
Accessories:
1.
Storage and Transport Carts: Manufacturer's standard steel tube-framed transport carts configured for panel and frame components, with heavy-duty casters and clamping safety strap, configured deck units or framing members.
2.
Back Closure Panels: Perimeter closure panels matching horizontal surface, not less than 3/4 inch (19 mm) thick plywood, mounted to platform with clamps.
3.
Curtain Closures: Manufacturer's standard stage-drapery-fabric skirting closures with hanging accessories, color as selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range.
I.
Finishes:
1.
Metal Finishes:
a.
Aluminum: Mill finish.
b.
Steel: Powder-coated finish.
 
** NOTE TO SPECIFIER ** Edit finishes below to correspond to project requirements. Note that field finishing of wood strip flooring is not provided by Wenger.
 
2.
Hardboard Opaque Finish: 100 percent acrylic paint, specially formulated for adhesion to impermeable surfaces, 1-coat, satin finish, black.
3.
Wood Strip Flooring Finish: Unfinished. Refer to Division 08 Section "Wood Flooring" for requirements for field applied transparent finish to match adjacent stage flooring.
 
** NOTE TO SPECIFIER ** Delete if not required.
 
2.10
STAGE PLATFORMS
A.
Basis of Design: StageTek Platforms; portable stage platforms and seated risers as manufactured by Wenger Corporation.
B.
Structural Performance Requirements:
1.
Stage Platforms and Risers: Standard Uniform Load 4 feet by 8 feet (1219 mm by 2438 mm) Deck: 125 lbf/ft. 2 (6 kN/ m2). Heavy-Duty Uniform Load 4 feet by 8 feet (1219 mm by 2438 mm) Deck with additional 5th leg: 200 lbf/ft. 2 (9.6 kN m2).
2.
Stage Platforms and Risers: Dynamic Live Load: Side load of 15% of total Uniform Live Load: 600lb (2.7 kN) side load on a 4 feet by 8 feet (1219 mm by 2438 mm) platform under a total Uniform Live Load of 4,000 lbs (17.8 kN).
3.
Stage Platforms and Risers: Point Load: 1,500lb (6.7 kN) applied via 1 inch (2.5 cm) diameter pin.
4.
Stage Platforms and Risers: Fully replaceable components including corners, frame and wood deck. Replaceable in the field with common tools.
5.
Treads of Stairs: Uniform Load: 500 lbs (227 Kg) per 36 inches x 11 inches tread. (91.44 cm X 27.94 cm), and concentrated load: 300 lbs (136 Kg) on area of 12 sq. in. (77.4 sq. cm): Total Uniform Load of 1,000 lbs (454 Kg) per stair assembly.
6.
Guard Rail Concentrated Load: 200 lbf (0.89 kN) applied at any point in any direction.
7.
Guard Rail Uniform Load: 50 lbf/ft. (0.73 kN/m) applied to top rail.
8.
Intermediate Rails, Panels, and Baluster Concentrated Load: 50 lbf (0.22 kN) applied to 1 sq. ft. (0.093 sq. m) area.
9.
Guard Rail In-Fill Panel compliant with IBC 4 inches (102 mm) sphere code.
C.
Materials:
1.
Aluminum: Complies with ASTM Standards listed above in section 1.3 C
 
** NOTE TO SPECIFIER ** Retain and edit requirements in paragraph and subparagraphs below for projects seeking LEED certification. Confirm that manufacturer(s) are able to meet requirements.
 
2.
Materials Meeting Sustainable Design Requirements:
a.
Provide stage platforms and risers made with products and adhesives that contain no urea formaldehyde.
3.
Softwood Plywood: DOC APA PS1.
4.
Hardboard: AHA A135.4, Tempered Grade.
5.
Hardware and Fasteners: Manufacturer's standard non-corroding type, permanently mounted to units, remaining set or tightened under load and vibration in service, and designed to preclude user contact with sharp edges.
D.
Frame: Extruded 6063-T6 aluminum, 4 inches tall (102 mm), with hidden contours to accept attachments. Rounded 1.5 inches (38 mm) hand-hold area open to accept power-grip (closed-grip) around entire perimeter. Frame components are repairable and replaceable.
E.
Corners: Cast 380 aluminum corner assembly engages leg 3 inches (76.2 mm) and secures leg with a full-length 2.75 inches (69.85 mm) convex brace driven by a threaded bolt operated with a nylon t-handle. Corner assemblies are repairable and replaceable.
F.
Legs: Legs operate individually and are constructed of extruded 6063-T6 aluminum round tube, 2.50 inches diameter (63.5 mm) with a wall thickness of .075 inch (1.905 mm). Standard fixed-height legs available in 8, 16, 24, 32, and 40 inches (200, 410, 610, 810, and 1020 mm) high, as required for layout indicated. Non-marking cap. Legs to store resting on frame rails or in clamping brackets within deck frames.
 
** NOTE TO SPECIFIER ** Retain optional subparagraphs below that are applicable to project.
 
1.
Custom Length Legs: Provide where required for layout indicated.
2.
Fixed Height Legs: Provide where indicated. Legs constructed of extruded 6063-T6 aluminum round tube, 2.50 inches diameter (63.5 mm) with a wall thickness of .075 inch (1.905 mm). Standard fixed-height legs available in 8, 16, 24, 32, 40, and 48 inches (200, 410, 610, 810, 1020 and 1220 mm) high, as required for layout indicated. Non-marking cap. Legs to store resting on frame rails or in clamping brackets within deck frames.
3.
Adjustable Legs: Provided where indicated. Constructed of extruded 6063-T6 aluminum tube, 2.50 inches diameter (63.5 mm) with a wall thickness of .0750 inch (1.905 mm) with an adjustable threaded foot for infinite adjustability plus or minus 2 inches (51 mm) from nominal length of leg. The foot shall provide a non-marking rubber pad.
4.
Telescoping Legs: Provide where indicated. Standard Telescoping Legs available in 3 configurations adjusting between 16 inches to 28 inches (40.64 cm to 71.12 cm), 24 inches to 40 inches (60.96 cm to 101.60 cm), and 30 inches to 54 inches (76.20 cm to 137.16 cm). Nominal height adjustment in increments of 4 inches (102 mm) secured with spring-loaded quick-release pin. Constructed of extruded 6063-T6 aluminum round outer tube, 2.50 by .075 inch (63.5 by 1.905 mm) telescoping over a 2 inches by .125 inch (50.8 by 3.17 mm) inner tube. With an adjustable threaded foot providing for fine adjustability between beyond nominal set length of leg. The foot shall provide a non-marking rubber pad. Inner and outer Tubes secured with non-rattling bushings and shall not pull apart from each other.
 
** NOTE TO SPECIFIER ** Select one of four options for deck panel finish below. Hardboard is available with natural finish two sides, or with painted finish on top and natural finish on bottom.
 
G.
Deck Panels: Manufacturer's standard panel construction, 3/4-inch (19-mm) overall thickness, consisting of minimum 1/2-inch (12-mm) thick plywood substrate with finish surfaces consisting of, edged with extruded aluminum:
 
** NOTE TO SPECIFIER ** Delete finish not required.
 
1.
Finish: 1/8 inch (3 mm) tempered hardboard, with painted top surface.
2.
Finish: Black 0.030 inch (.76-mm) thick Standard Textured polypropylene with black smooth HDPE backer sheet.
3.
Finish: Black 0.050 inch (1.27-mm) thick Heavy Duty textured polypropylene with black smooth HDPE backer sheet.
4.
Finish: Manufacturer's standard carpet, with plywood bottom.
5.
Finish: Plywood substrate ready to receive scheduled field-applied carpet.
6.
Panel Dimensions: Manufacturer's standard sizes, as required for layout indicated.
 
** NOTE TO SPECIFIER ** Retain optional accessories if required by project.
 
H.
Guards and Railings: Complying with performance requirements, clamp-attached without tools, lower horizontal rail acts as chair stop. Optional infill panels bring Guard Rails into compliance with International Building Code specifying that a 4 inches (102 mm) sphere object cannot pass through the railing.
 
** NOTE TO SPECIFIER ** Retain optional accessories if required by project.
 
I.
Ramps: Complying with performance and accessibility requirements including 2015 IBC Section 1012, adjustable to meet platform height, portable and compatible with platform panel storage cart.
 
** NOTE TO SPECIFIER ** Retain optional accessories if required by project.
 
J.
Stairs: Fixed stair set, sized as required by platform layout, with handrails and slip-resistant treads.
 
** NOTE TO SPECIFIER ** Retain optional accessories if required by project.
 
K.
Stairs: Articulating stair set, sized as required by platform layout, with handrails and slip-resistant treads.
 
** NOTE TO SPECIFIER ** Retain optional accessories if required by project.
 
L.
Box Step: Single relocatable box step equipped with clamps for fixing in place, height as required, located as indicated.
 
** NOTE TO SPECIFIER ** Retain optional accessories if required by project.
 
M.
Leg Storage Clips: Provide bottom-of-deck panel leg storage clips.
 
** NOTE TO SPECIFIER ** Retain optional accessories if required by project.
 
N.
Chair Stops: Clamp on leg stop, able to be installed and demounted without tools constructed of tube steel. Semi-permanent Chair Stop constructed of extruded PVC and secured into deck with screws.
 
** NOTE TO SPECIFIER ** Retain optional accessories if required by project.
 
O.
Storage Cart: Steel tube-framed, folding transport cart with heavy-duty 8 inches (200 mm) casters and clamping safety strap. Provide number of carts required for layout indicated. Cart designed to carry up to 6 decks or 6 guardrails. Combinations of decks and guardrails can be stored on cart.
 
** NOTE TO SPECIFIER ** Retain optional accessories if required by project.
 
P.
Closure Panels: Closure panels matching Standard textured horizontal surface, not less than 3/4 inch (19 mm) thick plywood, secured with tool-free snap attachment located as follows:
1.
Front of unit.
2.
Sides of unit.
3.
Intermediate risers.
 
** NOTE TO SPECIFIER ** Retain optional accessories if required by project.
 
Q.
Curtain Closures and Backdrops: Manufacturer's standard stage-drapery-fabric curtain closures with hanging accessories, as follows:
1.
Skirting closures.
2.
Backdrop closure, 8 foot- (2.4 m) high, with metal frame.
3.
Color: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range.
R.
Metal Finishes: Aluminum: Mill finish.
S.
Opaque Finish for Hardboard: 100 percent acrylic paint, specially formulated for adhesion to impermeable surfaces, 1-coat, satin finish, black.
T.
Fabrication: Provide portable stages and risers meeting performance requirements, with the following characteristics:
1.
Portable and storable in space indicated.
2.
Easily set up and disassembled without use of special tools or loose fasteners.
3.
Modular and reconfigurable.
4.
Platform components replaceable with common tools to include corners, frame sections, and platform decking.
5.
Platforms supported by individual legs that are storable inside the platform frame.
6.
Platforms designed for comfortable and secure power-grip (closed-grip) anywhere around entire deck perimeter.
7.
Lightweight leg sets/understructures - 40 inches (101 cm) tall or shorter weigh less than 10 lbs (4.5 kg).
 
** NOTE TO SPECIFIER ** Delete if not required.
 
2.11
TIERED AUDIENCE SEATING PLATFORMS
A.
Basis of Design: UpperDeck Audience Seating Platforms as manufactured by Wenger Corporation. Tiered riser system consisting of columns and end frames with integral sway braces connected with truss members to provide a support grid for interlocking decks with integral chair stops.
 
** NOTE TO SPECIFIER ** Wenger Upper Deck meets requirements listed below. Verify that requirements below comply with requirements of authorities having jurisdiction.
 
B.
Comply with requirements of ICC 300-02.
C.
Structural Performance:
1.
Stage Platforms and Risers: Uniform Vertical Load: 100 lbf/sq. ft. (4.54 kN/sq. m).
2.
Uniform Vertical Load Deflection: Maximum L/240.
3.
Stair treads: Uniform Load: 100 lbf/sq. ft. (4.54 kN/sq. m), and concentrated load: 300 lbf (1.33 kN) on area of 4 sq. in. (25.8 sq. cm), whichever produces the greater stress.
4.
Back Rail and End Rail Concentrated Load: 200 lbf (0.89 kN) applied at any point in any direction.
D.
Materials:
1.
Aluminum Sheet and Plate: ASTM B 209 (ASTM B 209M).
2.
Steel Tubing: ASTM A 513, mechanical.
3.
Softwood Plywood: APA-grade trademarked, DOC PS 1.
4.
Hardboard: AHA A135.4, Tempered Grade.
5.
Hardware: Manufacturer's standard hardware, permanently attached to units, remaining set or tightened under load and vibration in service, and designed to preclude assembler or user contact with sharp edges.
E.
Deck Framing: Welded steel tubing and shapes.
F.
Decking: 1/2 inch (12.7 mm) softwood plywood with interlocking edges.
 
** NOTE TO SPECIFIER ** Poly surface in first option below is standard for Wenger; heavy-duty poly and paintable hardboard is an available option. Delete decking finish not required.
 
G.
Decking Finish: Textured, slip-resistant 0.030 inch (0.76 mm) thick poly surface, black.
H.
Decking Finish: Textured, slip-resistant 0.050 inch (1.27 mm) thick heavy-duty poly surface, black.
I.
Decking Finish: Tempered hardboard, 1/8 inch (3.175 mm) thick, with natural mill finish.
J.
Integral Nosing and Integral Chair Stop: Aluminum extrusions with radiused edges.
 
** NOTE TO SPECIFIER ** Indicate riser height, depth, and length on drawings, based on Wenger standard sizes. Standard available sizes: 3 by 8, 7, 6, 5, 4 foot (910 by 2440, 2130, 1830, 1520, 1220 mm). 4 by 8, 7, 6, 5, 4 foot (1220 by 2440, 2130, 1830, 1520, 1220 mm). Custom sizes available to 10-foot (3048 mm) high.
 
K.
Riser Heights, Depths, and Lengths: As indicated on the Drawings.
L.
Support Columns: Welded steel construction with welded connections for receiving trusses and sway braces and pinning to end frames.
1.
Adjustable power leveling system: Maximum height adjustment to 4 inches (102 mm).
M.
End Frames: Welded steel tubing with welded connections for pinned attachment to support columns.
N.
Trusses: Tube design with welded steel features for connecting columns and sway braces, in lengths required for riser layout indicated.
O.
Back Rails and End Rails:
1.
Modular welded steel construction, assembled without tools.
2.
End Rail Connection: Clamp-attached.
3.
Back Rail Connection: Tube and socket fitting.
4.
Vertical Uprights: Spaced with less than 4 inches (102 mm) clear space between uprights.
 
** NOTE TO SPECIFIER ** Retain intermediate step option when required to provide access to risers when necessitated by riser to riser height. Indicate location on drawing. Multiple intermediate step option available for access to tiers above 14 inches (360 mm).
 
P.
Intermediate Steps:
1.
Fabrication: Welded frame steel construction, with wood surface and finish to match decking.
2.
Connection: Integral connector locking step to riser.
 
** NOTE TO SPECIFIER ** Delete size not required.
 
3.
Size: 36 inch (914 mm) wide.
4.
Size: 48 inch (1219 mm) wide.
 
** NOTE TO SPECIFIER ** Retain following paragraphs when options are required for Project.
 
Q.
Power Leveling System: Fabricated steel gear drive levels frame assembly and lowers frame assembly onto wheel system where provided; accepts drive from hand-held power drill furnished by Owner.
 
** NOTE TO SPECIFIER ** Retain following paragraphs when options are required for Project.
 
R.
Wheel System: Fabricated steel wheel mount with 2-1/2 inches (60 mm) diameter neoprene wheel mounted on each end frame with a bolt fastener.
 
** NOTE TO SPECIFIER ** Retain following paragraphs when options are required for Project.
 
S.
Moving and Storage Carts: Steel tube-framed, 1200 lb (544 kg) carrying capacity, with four 900 lb. (408 kg) rated 8 inches (200 mm) swivel casters. Provide number of carts required for each component type for layout indicated.
1.
Column cart.
2.
Truss cart.
3.
Deck cart.
4.
End-Frame cart.
5.
Rail cart.
T.
Finishes:
1.
Aluminum: Mill finish.
2.
Steel Finish: Manufacturer's standard baked on or powder coated finish.
U.
Fabrication: Provide portable risers meeting standards of performance requirements, with the following characteristics:
1.
Movable along the path to storage indicated; and storable in space indicated.
2.
Quick release pin and interlocking component system to minimize the need for assembly tools.
3.
Set up and disassembled without loose parts.
4.
Standard or custom stairways.
 
** NOTE TO SPECIFIER ** Retain material below if specifying Wenger's unique AcoustiCabinet acoustically enhanced instrument storage casework. These cabinets provide the designer with the capability of increasing control over excess sound levels in rehearsal spaces. Delete if not required.
 
2.12
MUSICAL INSTRUMENT STORAGE CASEWORK
 
** NOTE TO SPECIFIER ** Retain paragraphs below corresponding to project scope. Retain description of optional acoustically enhanced instrument storage casework where Wenger AcoustiCabinet products are included in project.
 
A.
Basis of Design: UltraStor Storage Cabinets as manufactured by Wenger Corporation. Modular instrument storage casework with integral bases, adjustable levelers, and through-bolted fastening, enabling owner reconfiguration of unit layout.
 
** NOTE TO SPECIFIER ** Retain paragraphs below that correspond to scope of project. Retain paragraph and subparagraph below when utilizing Wenger's AcoustiCabinet on project.
 
1.
Acoustically enhanced instrument storage casework finished with interior lining of sound-absorbent material providing sound absorption and noise reduction properties.
2.
Sound Absorption Average: Minimum SAA of 0.80, based upon sound absorption coefficient for twelve one-third octave bands from 200 to 2500 Hz, inclusive, with a minimum Noise Reduction Coefficient (NRC) of 0.75, per ASTM C 423 and ASTM E 795.
3.
Acoustical Performance: Comply with manufacturer's published sound absorption data.
4.
Wave grille doors in 5/16 inch (24 mm) and 1/4 inch (6.4 mm) diameter designed to reduce vibration.
 
** NOTE TO SPECIFIER ** Below relates to contractor requirement for securing architectural components to building structure. Verify seismic performance requirements of authorities having jurisdiction. Consult project structural engineer. When required, retain below and indicate special bracing and fastening requirements on drawings. Delete if not required.
 
B.
Seismic Performance: Comply with ASCE 7, "Minimum Design Loads for Buildings and Other Structures": Section 9, "Earthquake Loads" based upon seismic design criteria indicated.
C.
Storage Casework Component Load Capacities:
1.
Storage Casework Wire-Grille Door Hinge: Each weld capable of resisting 400 lbf (1779 N) pull test without visible damage or permanent deformation.
2.
Storage Casework Full Grille Door Hinge: Full length door capable of supporting 315 lbs (143 kg). Through open and close cycle without permanent damage.
3.
Robe and Uniform Storage Casework Garment Hanger Rods: Capable of supporting vertical load applied uniformly along width of unit of 200 lbf (890 N).
D.
Robe and uniform storage casework with integral bases, adjustable levelers, and through-bolted fastening, enabling owner reconfiguration of unit layout.
 
** NOTE TO SPECIFIER ** Delete if not required.
 
E.
General: Provide through-ventilating instrument storage casework meeting requirements in System Description and Performance Requirements Articles.
 
** NOTE TO SPECIFIER ** Delete if not required.
 
F.
General: Provide through-ventilating robe and uniform storage casework meeting requirements in System Description and Performance Requirements Articles.
G.
Side Panels and Divider Panels: Particleboard thermoset panel with no urea formaldehyde added, 3/4 inch (19 mm) thick. Side panels machined to accept unit-to-unit through-bolting.
 
** NOTE TO SPECIFIER ** Select door type(s) below required for project. If more than one type is required by project, indicate extent on drawings. Select open casework for casework without doors. For acoustically enhanced instrument storage casework, retain grille doors. Delete door types and design not required.
 
H.
Grille Doors: Bright basic steel wire, 5/16 and 3/16 inch (7.9 and 4.8 mm) diameter, or 5/16 and 1/4 inch (7.9 and 6.3 mm) diameter for AcoustiCabinets, with full 360 degree welds at T-joints.
 
** NOTE TO SPECIFIER ** Delete application for grilles not required.
 
1.
Provide for instrument storage casework.
2.
Provide for robe and uniform storage casework.
3.
Provide for casework indicated.
I.
Panel Doors: Particleboard thermoset panel with no urea formaldehyde added, 3/4 inch (19 mm) thick.
 
** NOTE TO SPECIFIER ** Delete color not required.
 
1.
Color: Oyster.
2.
Color: Maple.
3.
Color: Pebble.
4.
Color: Cherry.
5.
Color: Evening Tigris.
6.
Color: Fusion Maple.
7.
Color: Solar Oak.
8.
Color: As scheduled.
 
** NOTE TO SPECIFIER ** Delete application for grilles not required.
 
9.
Door Grille: Provide for instrument storage casework, full height.
10.
Door Grille: Provide for instrument storage casework, compartment height.
11.
Door Grille: Provide for Robe and Uniform Storage Casework.
12.
Door Grille: Provide for casework indicated.
J.
Open Casework: Provide casework without doors.
 
** NOTE TO SPECIFIER ** Delete application for grilles not required.
Provide for instrument storage casework.
 
1.
Provide for robe and uniform storage casework.
2.
Provide for casework indicated.
K.
Panel Edge Banding: 3 mm thick, heat-bonded, with radiused and profiled edges and corners.
 
** NOTE TO SPECIFIER ** Wenger storage cabinet performance is based upon high strength shelf materials and strong shelf supports capable of surviving the day-to-day abuse of instrument case handling. Wenger's radiused, abuse-resistant shelf design is designed to survive continued impact. Delete shelving not required.
 
L.
Shelving: Sized with adequate gap between shelving and casework side panels to allow air movement inside casework.
1.
Up to 27 inches (686 mm) wide: Removable molded polyethylene shelf, with impact-resistant, radiused front edge, mounted to cabinet wall with self-locking clip.
2.
Over 27 inches (686 mm) wide: For large instrument casework: Removable formed polyethylene shelf, ribbed, with high-impact-resistant, radiused front edge, supported by steel tube frame.
3.
Tubular steel supports are included for shelves over 19 inches (483 mm) wide.
4.
Corner cabinet revolving shelving: 0.053 inch (1.3 mm) min. thickness steel sheet bolted to revolving steel center post, with radiused hardboard deflector panel.
 
** NOTE TO SPECIFIER ** Retain optional paragraphs below if required for projects that include Corner cabinet. Delete if not required.
 
M.
Flag Storage and Garment Ring: 5/16 inch (8 mm) diameter steel rod bolted to steel center post with 10 gauge steel brackets.
N.
Flag Storage Bottom Shelf Pad: Carpet pad, adhered to steel shelf.
O.
Casework Panel Color: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's standard colors.
 
** NOTE TO SPECIFIER ** Optional accessory. Delete if not required.
 
P.
Filler Panels and Closure: 3/4 inch (19 mm) thick particleboard thermoset panels with no urea formaldehyde in Oyster color. Provide the following, cut to fit field conditions, where indicated:
 
** NOTE TO SPECIFIER ** Delete filler not required.
 
1.
Wall filler between cabinet side and wall.
2.
Top filler between cabinet top and wall.
3.
Top of cabinet closure panel between cabinet and finished ceiling or soffits.
4.
Finished back panel for exposed cabinet backs.
 
** NOTE TO SPECIFIER ** Hinge and latch performance on Wenger casework is achieved with the through-bolting of Wenger's institutional grade hardware. Substitute surface mounted hinges are less expensive but are a frequent point of failure in casework installed in high abuse areas.
 
Q.
Butt Hinges: 2-3/4 inches (70 mm), 5-knuckle steel hinges made from 0.090 inch (2.29 mm) thick metal, ANSI/BHMA A156.9, Grade 1, with powder-coated finish, through-bolted to door and side panels and welded to grille door frames. Provide 2 hinges on compartment doors, and 4 hinges on full-height doors.
R.
Slide Latch: 0.105 inch (2.67 mm) min. thickness steel, with padlock eye, powder-coat finish, through-bolted to panel door and side panel and welded to grille door frames. Latches securely without padlock. Provide with clear plastic label holder for use with standard size labels; number system available for user to print. Padlocks furnished by Owner.
S.
Panel Connectors: 1/4- 20 by 1.77 inch (45 mm) panel connectors, with steel thread inserts, powder coated to match panels.
T.
Cabinet Levelers: Leveling glides with 3/8 inch (9.5 mm) diameter threaded steel rod in steel corner brackets, minimum two each per cabinet side, accessible from within unit, and concealed in completed installation.
U.
Carcass joinery includes lag screws powder coated to match substrate.
V.
Back panel 7/32 inch (5.6 mm) reinforced with 3/4 inch (19 mm) stretchers panels held in a dado groove and lag screwed in place.
 
** NOTE TO SPECIFIER ** Retain option for load capacity for expansion anchors below where required for structural fastening to meet project seismic design requirements and where required by substrate. Delete if not required.
 
W.
Fasteners: Manufacturer-recommended fasteners as required for casework substrate and project performance requirements, consisting of one or more of the following:
1.
Sheet Metal Screws: SAE J78, corrosion-resistant-coated, self-drilling, self-tapping steel drill screws.
2.
Wood Screws: ASME B18.6.1.
3.
Expansion Anchors in Concrete and Concrete Masonry Units: Carbon-steel, zinc plated.
4.
Hardware supplied to anchor the cabinets to the wall and to adjacent casework.
X.
Finish: Steel Sheet, Steel Wire, and Exposed Fasteners. Urethane-based electrostatic powder coating, color as indicated. Refer to Drawings.
Y.
Materials Meeting Sustainable Design Requirements:
1.
No Added Urea Formaldehyde Products: Provide music education storage casework made with composite products and adhesives with no urea formaldehyde added.
2.
FSC Certified Wood Products: Provide music education storage casework made with wood from certified sources. Also available in Moisture Resistant, Class 1 Fire rated and Plywood cores.
Z.
Particleboard: ANSI A208.1, minimum 43 lb/cu. ft. (689 kg/cu. m) density, composite products and adhesives, with no urea formaldehyde added.
AA.
Fire Rated Particle Board: ANSI A208.1, minimum 45 lb/cu. ft. (720 kg/cu. m) density ASTM E-84 class 1.
AB.
Plywood: APA standards PS1-98 section 5.7.4 or 5.7.1 or ANSI /HPVA HP-1-2004 Panel provide with HDF skins to prevent grain telegraphing.
 
** NOTE TO SPECIFIER ** Retain either above or below paragraphs. Retain below for projects seeking LEED certification; confirm that manufacturer(s) are able to meet requirements. Below may increase costs. The strength and long-term performance of Wenger casework is based on the quality of Wenger's shelf design and the performance of the polyester surfacing material use in the thermoset panels. Melamine facing is not a comparable finish to the high-strength finish on Wenger thermoset panels. NEMA LD 3 standard includes a battery of durability-related tests. Test data is available from Wenger upon request.
 
AC.
Particleboard Thermoset Panels: Particleboard finished with thermally-fused polyester surfacing on both sides meeting performance properties of NEMA LD 3 for VGS grade, edge-banded, including the following:
1.
Surface Abrasion Resistance: Taber Wheel, 400 cycles, for solid colors.
 
** NOTE TO SPECIFIER ** Retain paragraph below for projects that include Wenger Sheet Music Storage Casework.
 
AD.
Particleboard Thermoset Panels: Particleboard panel with no formaldehyde added 3/4 inch (19 mm) thick finished with thermally-fused polyester surfacing on both sides meeting performance requirements of NEMA LD 3 for VGS grade, edge-banded, including the following:
1.
Surface Abrasion Resistance: Taber Wheel, 400 cycles, for solid colors.
 
** NOTE TO SPECIFIER ** Wenger utilizes a patented shelf design that is highly impact and abrasion resistant, formed to protect instrument cases from abrasion, and is designed to deflect rather than transfer abusive overloading to the casework. This eliminates the need for expensive on-site repairs. Wenger will replace failed shelves without charge for the life of the installation.
 
AE.
Polyethylene Shelves: High-density, one-piece, blow-molded or polyethylene, with radiused front edge, for abuse-resistant shelves. Same color throughout will not show scratches.
AF.
PVC Edge Banding: Radiused PVC extrusions, 1/8 inch (3 mm) thick.
 
** NOTE TO SPECIFIER ** Retain article below and edit as required for projects that include sheet music storage casework. Wenger Music Library System is a high-density storage solution providing easy organization and access to sheet music collections while reducing required storage area square footage. Delete if not required.
 
2.13
MUSIC LIBRARY SYSTEM
 
** NOTE TO SPECIFIER ** Wenger's high-density music storage units described below provide a minimum of 19 cu. ft. of storage capacity per 5.3 sq. ft. of floor area for a seven-shelf unit. This enables savings in space planning for music area storage. Coordinate flooring selection at wheeled sheet music storage casework location consistent with casework and flooring manufacturer's recommendations. Due to wheel loads when fully loaded, these units perform best on hard surfaced flooring and on some high-density carpets without cushion.
 
A.
Basis of Design: Music Library System as manufactured by Wenger Corporation.
 
** NOTE TO SPECIFIER ** Delete types not required.
 
1.
Standard Width 7-Shelf Unit: 173G700 S, 16 inches (41 cm) wide; 12 inches x 34-1/2 inches x 10-1/2 inches (30 x 88 x 27 cm) of shelf space available; 4 shelves adjustable, 3 shelves fixed.
2.
Oversized Width 7-Shelf Unit: 173G700 O, 19 inches (48 cm) wide; 15 inches x 34-1/2 inches x 10-1/2 inches (38 x 88 x 27 cm) of shelf space available; 4 shelves adjustable, 3 shelves fixed.
3.
Standard Width 6-Shelf Unit: 173G600 S, 16 inches (41 cm) wide; 12 inches x 34-1/2 inches x 10-1/2 inches (30 x 88 x 27 cm) of shelf space available; 4 shelves adjustable, 2 shelves fixed.
4.
Oversized Width 6-Shelf Unit: 173G600 O; 19 inches (48 cm) wide; 15 inches x 34-1/2 inches x 10-1/2 inches (38 x 88 x 27 cm) of shelf space available; 4 shelves adjustable, 2 shelves fixed.
B.
Design and Construction:
1.
Pull-out design, equally spaced shelves provide 10-1/2 inches (27 cm) of available height per shelf.
2.
Units are constructed of 3/4 inch (19 mm) thick industrial grade composite wood with no added formaldehyde and polyester laminate finish in Wenger standard colors.
3.
Shelves are reinforced with an aluminum extrusion that includes a slot with vinyl material for labeling with dry-erase markers.
4.
Frame is 16-gauge, 1 inch (2.54 cm) square tubular steel, painted black.
5.
Back panel is designed to fit on either side of unit for left or right hand use.
6.
Includes four 8 inch (20 cm) diameter casters.
7.
Each unit contains bumpers for control of side and outward movement.
8.
Unit requires anchoring to floor and wall.
9.
Each shelf rated at 100 lbs. (45 kg) maximum capacity.
10.
Ten-year warranty.
 
** NOTE TO SPECIFIER ** The next three items are optional, delete if not required.
 
11.
Top closure, constructed particleboard that matches the end covers, supports up to 50 lb/lin.ft. (74 kg/m) loading.
12.
Oblique file system accessory on standard 12 inch (30 cm) shelf widths.
13.
Lock option (padlocks not included).
C.
Substrate and Loading: Verify substrate is concrete or epoxy coated concrete; not recommended for installation on padded carpet or vinyl flooring.
 
** NOTE TO SPECIFIER ** Delete loading not applicable.
 
1.
Floor point load for a 7-shelf unit at rated load is 800 psi (5516 kpa) per caster.
2.
Floor point load for a 6-shelf unit at rated load is 700 psi (4826 kpa) per caster.
D.
Sustainability: GREENGUARD Indoor Air Quality Certified and GREENGUARD Children & Schools Certified.
 
** NOTE TO SPECIFIER ** Delete if not required.
 
2.14
FIXED THEATER MAKE-UP STATIONS
A.
Basis of Design: Studio Make-Up Stations as manufactured by Wenger Corporation. Wall-mounted casework unit with countertop, shelf, mirror, electrical convenience outlet, and make up lights (light bulbs not supplied).
 
** NOTE TO SPECIFIER ** Select unit dimension below or delete if indicated on drawings. Dimensions shown are outside to outside of light protection cages. See Wenger product literature.
 
B.
Size: Nominal 36 inch (910 mm) wide model: 40-3/8-inch wide by 20-inch deep by 44-inch high (1030 mm by 510 mm by 1120 mm).
C.
Size: Nominal 30 inch (76 cm) wide model: 34-3/8-inch wide by 20-inch deep 44-inch high (870 mm by 510 mm by 1120 mm).
D.
Size: As indicated on Drawings.
E.
Countertop: Thermoset panel, 1 inch (25 mm) thick, concave shape.
F.
Overhead Shelf: Thermoset panel.
1.
Size: 12-inches (305-mm) deep by width of casework.
G.
Mirror: 28 inch (711 mm) by 8 inches (203 mm) less than nominal unit width.
1.
ASTM C 1503, clear glass, mirror glazing quality, with steel laminated backing.
 
** NOTE TO SPECIFIER ** Tackboard is provided for the 36-inch wide model only; and may be mounted top, side or bottom. Delete if not required.
 
H.
Tackboard:
1.
Size: 6-inch wide by 28-inch long (152-mm wide by 711-mm long).
 
** NOTE TO SPECIFIER ** Delete mounting not required.
 
2.
Mounting: Top.
3.
Mounting: Side.
4.
Mounting: Bottom.
I.
Electrical Wiring: 3-wire, 24-inch (610-mm) electrical pigtail below the countertop prepared for hard wiring to building electrical service.
 
** NOTE TO SPECIFIER ** Delete power not required.
 
1.
Power: 115 VAC single phase.
2.
Power: 250 VAC single phase (European).
3.
Light switch: Rocker switch controlling make up lights.
4.
GFCI convenience receptacle, 20A. (Domestic Only).
J.
Make Up Lights:
 
** NOTE TO SPECIFIER ** Delete lamp bases not required.
 
1.
Lamp Bases: Medium (one-inch) Edison-base accepting maximum 60W incandescent or 15W swirl fluorescent lamps. Lamps to be provided by others.
2.
Lamp Bases: Medium Edison-base accepting maximum 60W incandescent or 15W swirl fluorescent lamps. Lamps to be provided by others.
3.
Lamp Bases: 27mm EU lamp bases.
 
** NOTE TO SPECIFIER ** Select first paragraph below for 36-inch wide unit; select second paragraph for 30-inch wide unit. Adjacent units share the middle bank of make-up lights.
 
4.
Lamp Base Quantity: 9 for free-standing units; 6 for paired units.
5.
Lamp Base Quantity: 8 for free-standing units; 5 for paired units.
6.
Protective Cages: Wire cages, 3/16 inch (5 mm) diameter steel wire, configured to allow changing of lamps without removing cage.
K.
Fiberboard: ANSI A208.2, Grade LD or MD.
L.
Thermoset Panels: Fiberboard finished with thermally-fused PVC with melamine backer, with the following characteristics:
1.
Surface Abrasion Resistance: Taber Wheel, 400 cycles.
M.
Accessories:
 
** NOTE TO SPECIFIER ** Retain applicable optional features listed in paragraphs below. Select either storage cage or pull-out tray.
 
1.
Storage Cage: Under-counter storage cage.
2.
Pull Out Drawer: Under-counter lockable sliding drawer.
3.
Tack Pad: White tackable surface in a matte white frame mounted on mirror.
N.
Hardware:
1.
Mounting Bracket: Individual mounting bracket with multiple holes and adjustable vertical slots for leveling between units in multiple unit installation.
O.
Finishes:
1.
Steel Sheet, Steel Wire, and Exposed Fasteners: Urethane-based electrostatic powder coating.
a.
Mirror surround and corner accent panel color: White.
 
** NOTE TO SPECIFIER ** Portable theater makeup case equipment. Delete if not required.
 
2.15
PORTABLE THEATER MAKE-UP STATIONS
A.
Basis or Design: Backstage Portable Make-Up Stations as manufactured by Wenger Corporation Equipped with convenience handle, head and shoulders mirror, make up lights, electrical receptacle, and electrical power cord (light bulbs not supplied).
1.
Size: 33 inches wide by 9-3/8 inches deep by 33-1/4 inches high (840 mm wide by 240 mm deep by 850 mm high).
2.
Framing: Steel frame with aluminum trim.
3.
Weight: 38 lb (17.2 kg).
4.
Base: Four rubber feet.
5.
Lamp Bases: Six bases accepting 60-watt incandescent or 15-watt fluorescent lamps, with switch. Lamps to be provided by others.
6.
Wiring: 10-foot (3048-mm), 12 ga. wire with plug end.
7.
Convenience Outlet: GFCI receptacle.
8.
Case Finish: Matte white.
 
** NOTE TO SPECIFIER ** Delete if not required.
 
2.16
FIXED SEATING - BOSTON SERIES
 
** NOTE TO SPECIFIER ** Retain and edit or delete Article based on Project requirements. The following section includes descriptions for both wood and polypropylene material choices.
 
A.
Basis-of-Design: Boston Series Fixed Audience Seating as manufactured by Wenger. Audience seating with steel support, arm rest, and maintenance free self-lifting seats.
 
** NOTE TO SPECIFIER ** Delete if not required.
 
1.
Upholstery: Minimum CAL-TB-117 Flame-retardant Treated.
 
** NOTE TO SPECIFIER **Delete color and pattern not required.
 
a.
Color and Pattern: As selected from manufacturer's standard fabrics.
b.
Color and Pattern: Custom color, manufacturer and pattern.
 
** NOTE TO SPECIFIER **Delete chair widths not required.
 
2.
Chair Width: 19 inches (483 mm) measured from center of armrest to center of opposite armrest.
3.
Chair Width: 20 inches (508 mm) measured from center of armrest to center of opposite armrest.
4.
Chair Width: 21 inches (533 mm) measured from center of armrest to center of opposite armrest.
5.
Chair Width: 22 inches (559 mm) measured from center of armrest to center of opposite armrest.
6.
Chair Width: 23 inches (584 mm) measured from center of armrest to center of opposite armrest.
7.
Chair Width: Width as indicated measured from center of armrest to center of opposite armrest.
8.
Seat:
 
** NOTE TO SPECIFIER ** Delete seat bottom not required.
 
a.
Fully Upholstered Seat Bottom: Fully upholstered outer seat panel includes an inner 1/2 inch (13 mm) plywood seat panel to provide supporting structure.
1)
Seat Rise Mechanism: Maintenance free gravity assist with noise dampening seat stops.
2)
Cushion foam: High resiliency cold-molded polyurethane is a minimum of 2 inches (50 mm) thick.
b.
Wood Seat Bottom: 5-ply 1/2 inch (13 mm) thick veneer plywood with edges that are stained to match the veneered faces.
1)
Standard veneer. Finish selected from mfg. standard stain.
 
** NOTE TO SPECIFIER ** Insert stain color.
 
2)
Custom Color: ____.
3)
Seat Rise Mechanism: Maintenance free gravity assist with noise dampening seat stops.
c.
Cushion foam: High resiliency polyurethane is a minimum of 2 inches (50 mm) thick.
9.
Back:
 
** NOTE TO SPECIFIER ** Delete seat construction not required.
 
a.
Fully Upholstered Seat Back: Fully upholstered outer back panel includes an inner 1/2 inch (13 mm) plywood seat panel to provide supporting structure. Inner wood panel is contoured for additional comfort. Fabric conceals attachment brackets and hardware.
b.
Wood Seat Back: 5-ply 1/2 inch (13 mm) thick veneer plywood with edges that are stained to match the veneered faces.
1)
Standard veneer. Finish selected from mfg. standard stain.
 
** NOTE TO SPECIFIER ** Insert stain color.
 
2)
Custom Color: ____.
c.
Cushion foam: High resiliency polyurethane is a minimum of 2 inches (50 mm) thick. Back cushion is shaped to provide lumbar support for long-term comfort.
10.
Armrests:
a.
Polypropylene Armrest: High impact polypropylene.
b.
Wood Armrest.
1)
Standard veneer. Finish selected from mfg. standard stain.
 
** NOTE TO SPECIFIER ** Insert stain color.
 
2)
Custom Color: ____.
B.
Fabrication:
1.
Fabricate floor standards to fit slope of floor so that standards are plumb and maintain chairs at the required relationship to the vertical.
2.
Upholstery: Fabricate upholstered chairs with fabric free of creases and wrinkles. Install warp and woof of fabric and pattern in consistent direction.
C.
ADA/ABA:
1.
ADA Tip-Up Arm: Arm rest tips up for handicap aisle access.
D.
Materials:
1.
Hardwood Lumber: Clear Beech, plain-sawn or sliced.
2.
Beech Veneer Hardwood Plywood: HPVA HP-1, 11-ply, AA-grade, rotary cut. The seat back must be a minimum of 13-ply 11/16 inch (17.5 mm) thick plywood. The seat bottom must be a minimum of 7-ply 7/16 inch (11 mm) thick veneer plywood. Plywood edges are stained to match the veneered faces. The arm caps on the standards shall be solid beech wood.
3.
Medium Density Fiberboard: ANSI A208.2, Grade MD.
4.
Wood Finishes: Manufacturer's standard finish and stain.
5.
High-Pressure Decorative Laminate: NEMA LD-3, Grade VGS.
6.
Plastic: Polypropylene copolymer IF-727. High impact, injection molded polypropylene. Polypropylene outer seat and back panel includes a flange around the sides to provide fabric protection. Textured finish for an attractive and low maintenance surface.
7.
Cushion Foam: Raw material provided by BASF Germany. Flexible, cellular, cold-molded, contoured polyurethane foam, flame-retardant-treated.
E.
Row and Seat Numbers: Plastic with black lettering.
 
** NOTE TO SPECIFIER ** Delete finishes not required.
 
1.
Plastic Finish: Brass.
2.
Plastic Finish: Copper.
3.
Plastic Finish: Aluminum.
 
** NOTE TO SPECIFIER ** Delete attachment method not required.
 
4.
Attachment: 3M adhesive.
5.
Attachment: Visible fasteners or brads.
 
** NOTE TO SPECIFIER ** In the next two paragraphs, delete aisle lighting manufacturer not required.
 
F.
Aisle Lighting: As manufactured by Vista.
1.
Transformers as required.
2.
Aisle lights shall be low voltage system and concealed under aisle standard.
3.
Aisle lights shall meet code requirements of 0.2 foot candles to light the aisle and row numbers.
4.
The standard shall be provided with a flex steel conduit whip affixed to end standard and extends a minimum of 18 inches beyond the standard.
5.
Aisle lighting shall be inaudible.
G.
Aisle Lighting: As manufactured by Tivoli.
1.
Transformers as required.
2.
Aisle lights shall be low voltage system and concealed under aisle standard.
3.
Aisle lights shall meet code requirements of 0.2 foot candles to light the aisle and row numbers.
4.
The standard shall be provided with a flex steel conduit whip affixed to end standard and extends a minimum of 18 inches beyond the standard.
5.
Aisle lighting shall be inaudible.
H.
Donor Plaques: Plastic with black lettering. Donor plaques are blank for customer engraving 1 inch x 3 inches (25 mm x 76 mm).
 
** NOTE TO SPECIFIER ** Delete finishes not required.
 
1.
Plastic Finish: Brass.
2.
Plastic Finish: Copper.
3.
Plastic Finish: Aluminum.
 
** NOTE TO SPECIFIER ** Delete attachment method not required.
 
4.
Attachment: 3M adhesive.
5.
Attachment: Visible fasteners or brads.
 
** NOTE TO SPECIFIER ** Delete if not required.
 
2.17
FIXED SEATING - CHICAGO SERIES
 
** NOTE TO SPECIFIER ** Retain and edit or delete Article based on Project requirements. The following section includes descriptions for both wood and polypropylene material choices.
 
A.
Basis of Design: Chicago Series Fixed Audience Seating as manufactured by Wenger Corporation. Audience seating with welded tubular steel standard with attractive enclosure, upholstered back and seat with cold-molded foam cushions, seat and back covers, arm rest, and maintenance free self-lifting seats.
1.
Upholstery: Minimum CAL-TB-117 Flame-retardant Treated.
 
** NOTE TO SPECIFIER **Delete color and pattern not required.
 
a.
Color and Pattern: As selected from manufacturer's standard fabrics.
b.
Color and Pattern: Custom color, manufacturer and pattern.
 
** NOTE TO SPECIFIER **Delete chair widths not required.
 
2.
Chair Width: 19 inches (483 mm) measured from center of armrest to center of opposite armrest.
3.
Chair Width: 20 inches (508 mm) measured from center of armrest to center of opposite armrest.
4.
Chair Width: 21 inches (533 mm) measured from center of armrest to center of opposite armrest.
5.
Chair Width: 22 inches (559 mm) measured from center of armrest to center of opposite armrest.
6.
Chair Width: 23 inches (584 mm) measured from center of armrest to center of opposite armrest.
7.
Chair Width: Width as indicated measured from center of armrest to center of opposite armrest.
8.
Chair Mounting Standards: Welded 14 gauge tubular steel standard with attractive armrest and directly anchored to floor through 11 gauge steel foot.
9.
Aisle Standards:
 
** NOTE TO SPECIFIER **Delete aisle standard not required.
 
a.
Fully Upholstered Aisle Standard: Plywood core over steel structure with fabric upholstered exterior surface. The arm caps on the standards shall be solid beech wood or polypropylene.
 
** NOTE TO SPECIFIER **Delete upholstery not required.
 
1)
As selected from manufacturer's standard fabrics.
2)
Custom color, manufacturer and pattern.
b.
Wood Veneer Aisle Standard: Plywood exteriors over steel structure with stained veneered faces. The arm caps on the standards shall be solid beech wood stained to match veneer surfaces.
1)
Standard veneer. Finish selected from mfg. standard stain.
 
** NOTE TO SPECIFIER ** Insert stain color.
 
2)
Custom Color: ____.
10.
Seat:
 
** NOTE TO SPECIFIER ** Delete seat bottom not required.
 
a.
Fully Upholstered Seat Bottom: Fully upholstered outer seat panel includes an inner 1/2 inch (13 mm) plywood seat panel to provide supporting structure.
1)
Seat Rise Mechanism: Maintenance free gravity assist with noise dampening seat stops.
2)
Cushion foam: High resiliency cold-molded polyurethane is a minimum of 3 inches (76 mm) thick.
b.
Wood Seat Bottom: 7-ply 7/16 inch (11 mm) thick veneer plywood with edges that are stained to match the veneered faces. Veneered Plywood attached to 16 gauge welded steel frame.
1)
Standard veneer. Finish selected from mfg. standard stain.
 
** NOTE TO SPECIFIER ** Insert stain color.
 
2)
Custom Color: ____.
3)
Seat Rise Mechanism: Maintenance free gravity assist with noise dampening seat stops.
4)
Cushion foam: High Resiliency cold-molded polyurethane with a minimum of 3 inches (76 mm) thick.
11.
Back:
 
** NOTE TO SPECIFIER ** Delete seat construction not required.
 
a.
Fully Upholstered Seat Back: Fully upholstered outer back panel includes an inner 1/2 inch (13 mm) plywood seat panel to provide supporting structure. Inner wood panel is contoured for additional comfort. Fabric conceals attachment brackets and hardware.
b.
Wood Seat Back: 13-ply 11/16 inch (17.5 mm) thick veneer plywood with edges that are stained to match the veneered faces.
1)
Standard veneer. Finish selected from mfg. standard stain.
 
** NOTE TO SPECIFIER ** Insert stain color.
 
2)
Custom Color: ____.
c.
Cushion foam: High resiliency polyurethane is a minimum of 3 inches (76 mm) thick. Back cushion is shaped to provide lumbar support for long-term comfort.
 
** NOTE TO SPECIFIER ** Delete pitch of back not required.
 
d.
Pitch: 10 degrees.
e.
Pitch: 14 degrees.
f.
Pitch: 18 degrees.
g.
Pitch: 22 degrees.
h.
Pitch: 26 degrees.
i.
Pitch: custom degrees. Refer to drawings.
12.
Armrests:
a.
Polypropylene Armrest: Black polypropylene armrest with a textured finish for an attractive and low maintenance finish.
b.
Wood Armrest: Solid beech hardwood with rounded corners for a stylish appearance.
1)
Standard veneer. Finish selected from mfg. standard stain.
 
** NOTE TO SPECIFIER ** Insert stain color.
 
2)
Custom Color: ____.
B.
Fabrication:
1.
Fabricate floor standards to fit slope of floor so that standards are plumb and maintain chairs at the required relationship to the vertical.
2.
Upholstery: Fabricate upholstered chairs with fabric free of creases and wrinkles. Install warp and woof of fabric and pattern in consistent direction.
C.
ADA/ABA:
1.
ADA Swing-out Standard: The ADA swing-out standard allows easy access to the seat when transferring from a seated position while maintaining a uniform appearance in the facility. A simple locking lift mechanism allows for easy operation.
2.
Removable Seating: Individual seats for companion seating are equipped with a steel retractable wheel bracket so they can be easily rolled into place when needed. A simple release pedal will disengage the wheels.
D.
Materials:
1.
Hardwood Lumber: Clear Beech, plain-sawn or sliced.
2.
Beech Veneer Hardwood Plywood: HPVA HP-1, 11-ply, AA-grade, rotary cut. The seat back must be a minimum of 13-ply 11/16 inch (17.5 mm) thick plywood. The seat bottom must be a minimum of 7-ply 7/16 inch (11 mm) thick veneer plywood. Plywood edges are stained to match the veneered faces. The arm caps on the standards shall be solid beech wood.
3.
Medium Density Fiberboard: ANSI A208.2, Grade MD.
4.
Wood Finishes: Manufacturer's standard finish and stain.
5.
High-Pressure Decorative Laminate: NEMA LD-3, Grade VGS.
6.
Plastic: Polypropylene copolymer IF-727. High impact, injection molded polypropylene. Polypropylene outer seat and back panel includes a flange around the sides to provide fabric protection. Textured finish for an attractive and low maintenance surface.
7.
Cushion Foam: Raw material provided by BASF Germany. Flexible, cellular, cold-molded, contoured polyurethane foam, flame-retardant-treated.
E.
Row and Seat Numbers: Plastic with black lettering.
 
** NOTE TO SPECIFIER ** Delete finishes not required.
 
1.
Plastic Finish: Brass.
2.
Plastic Finish: Copper.
3.
Plastic Finish: Aluminum.
 
** NOTE TO SPECIFIER ** Delete attachment method not required.
 
4.
Attachment: 3M adhesive.
5.
Attachment: Visible fasteners or brads.
 
** NOTE TO SPECIFIER ** In the next two paragraphs, delete aisle lighting manufacturer not required.
 
F.
Aisle Lighting: As manufactured by Vista.
1.
Transformers as required.
2.
Aisle lights shall be low voltage system and concealed under aisle standard.
3.
Aisle lights shall meet code requirements of 0.2 foot candles to light the aisle and row numbers.
4.
The standard shall be provided with a flex steel conduit whip affixed to end standard and extends a minimum of 18 inches beyond the standard.
5.
Aisle lighting shall be inaudible.
G.
Aisle Lighting: As manufactured by Tivoli.
1.
Transformers as required.
2.
Aisle lights shall be low voltage system and concealed under aisle standard.
3.
Aisle lights shall meet code requirements of 0.2 foot candles to light the aisle and row numbers.
4.
The standard shall be provided with a flex steel conduit whip affixed to end standard and extends a minimum of 18 inches beyond the standard.
5.
Aisle lighting shall be inaudible.
 
** NOTE TO SPECIFIER ** Delete if not required.
 
H.
Donor Plaques: Plastic with black lettering. Donor plaques are blank for customer engraving 1 inch x 3 inches (25 mm x 76 mm).
 
** NOTE TO SPECIFIER ** Delete finishes not required.
 
1.
Plastic Finish: Brass.
2.
Plastic Finish: Copper.
3.
Plastic Finish: Aluminum.
 
** NOTE TO SPECIFIER ** Delete attachment method not required.
 
4.
Attachment: 3M adhesive.
5.
Attachment: Visible fasteners or brads.
 
** NOTE TO SPECIFIER ** Delete if not required.
 
2.18
FIXED SEATING - MADRID SERIES
A.
Basis of Design: Madrid Series Fixed Audience Seating as manufactured by Wenger Corporation.
B.
Fixed Audience Seating: Audience seating with steel-supported wood core standards with matching polyester resin wood grain on all exposed surfaces, upholstered back and seat with foam cushions, hardwood plywood seat back, acoustically-perforated or non-perforated hardwood plywood seat bottom, solid beech hardwood arm rest, and self-lifting seats with acoustically-dampened lift mechanism.
1.
Chair Mounting Standards: Wood grain polyester resin finish on a MDF core panel with formed steel mounting shoe, floor-attached.
2.
Upholstery: Flame-retardant Treated.
 
** NOTE TO SPECIFIER **Delete color and pattern not required.
 
a.
Color and Pattern: As selected from manufacturer's standard colors.
b.
Color and Pattern: Custom color and pattern.
3.
Seat:
a.
Plywood Bottom: 0.50 inch (13 mm) thick minimum 5-ply hardwood veneer plywood, acoustically-perforated or non-perforated.
b.
Cushion Foam: High resiliency polyurethane is a minimum of 2.5 inches (63.5 mm) thick.
 
** NOTE TO SPECIFIER **Delete chair widths not required.
 
c.
Chair Width: 19 inches (483 mm) as measured from center of armrest to center of opposite armrest.
d.
Chair Width: 20 inches (508 mm) as measured from center of armrest to center of opposite armrest.
e.
Chair Width: 21 inches (533 mm) as measured from center of armrest to center of opposite armrest.
f.
Chair Width: 22 inches (559 mm) as measured from center of armrest to center of opposite armrest.
g.
Chair Width: 23 inches (584 mm) as measured from center of armrest to center of opposite armrest.
h.
Chair Width: Width as indicated as measured from center of armrest to center of opposite armrest.
 
** NOTE TO SPECIFIER ** Delete color and pattern not required.
 
i.
Color and Pattern: As selected from manufacturer's standard colors.
j.
Color and Pattern: Custom color and pattern.
4.
Back:
a.
Plywood Back: 0.75 inch (19 mm) thick 11-ply hardwood veneer plywood. Plywood less than 0.75 inch (19 mm) thick will not be acceptable.
b.
Cushion Foam: High resiliency polyurethane is a minimum of 1.5 inches (38 mm) thick. Back cushion is shaped to provide a 2.5 inches (63.5 mm) minimum thickness lumbar support for long-term comfort.
 
** NOTE TO SPECIFIER ** Delete pitch of back not required.
 
c.
Pitch: 10 degrees.
d.
Pitch: 14 degrees.
e.
Pitch: 18 degrees.
f.
Pitch: 22 degrees.
g.
Pitch: 26 degrees.
h.
Pitch: custom degrees. Refer to drawings.
5.
Armrest on all standards: Solid beech hardwood with rounded corners for a stylish appearance.
 
** NOTE TO SPECIFIER **Delete wood stain color not required.
 
6.
Wood Stain Color: As selected from manufacturer's standard colors.
 
** NOTE TO SPECIFIER ** Insert stain color.
 
7.
Wood Stain Color: ____.
8.
Seat Lift Device: Self-lifting torsion spring and damper mechanism. A gravity self-lifting mechanism or a self-lifting system without a damper mechanism will not be acceptable.
9.
Aisle lighting.
C.
Acoustically Enhanced Fixed Audience Seating Acoustic Properties Comply with manufacturer's published documentation.
D.
Fabrication:
1.
Fabricate floor standards to fit slope of floor so that standards are plumb and maintain chairs at the required relationship to the vertical.
2.
Upholstery: Fabricate upholstered chairs with fabric free of creases and wrinkles. Install warp and woof of fabric and pattern in consistent direction.
E.
Finishes:
1.
Baked Enamel Powder-Coat Finish: Immediately after cleaning and pretreating, electrostatically apply manufacturer's standard, baked-polymer, thermosetting powder finish.
F.
Materials:
1.
Hardwood Lumber: Clear Beech, plain-sawn or sliced.
2.
Beech Veneer Hardwood Plywood: HPVA HP-1, 11-ply, AA-grade, rotary cut. The seat back must be a minimum of 13-ply 11/16 inch (17.5 mm) thick plywood. The seat bottom must be a minimum of 7-ply 7/16 inch (11 mm) thick veneer plywood. Plywood edges are stained to match the veneered faces. The arm caps on the standards shall be solid beech wood.
3.
Medium Density Fiberboard: ANSI A208.2, Grade MD.
4.
Wood Finishes: Manufacturer's standard finish and stain.
5.
High-Pressure Decorative Laminate: NEMA LD-3, Grade VGS.
6.
Plastic: Polypropylene copolymer IF-727. High impact, injection molded polypropylene. Polypropylene outer seat and back panel includes a flange around the sides to provide fabric protection. Textured finish for an attractive and low maintenance surface.
7.
Cushion Foam: Raw material provided by BASF Germany. Flexible, cellular, cold-molded, contoured polyurethane foam, flame-retardant-treated.
G.
Row and Seat Numbers: Plastic with black lettering.
 
** NOTE TO SPECIFIER ** Delete finishes not required.
 
1.
Plastic Finish: Brass.
2.
Plastic Finish: Copper.
3.
Plastic Finish: Aluminum.
 
** NOTE TO SPECIFIER ** Delete attachment method not required.
 
4.
Attachment: 3M adhesive.
5.
Attachment: Visible fasteners or brads.
 
** NOTE TO SPECIFIER ** In the next two paragraphs, delete aisle lighting manufacturer not required.
 
H.
Aisle Lighting: As manufactured by Vista.
1.
Transformers as required.
2.
Aisle lights shall be low voltage system and concealed under aisle standard.
3.
Aisle lights shall meet code requirements of 0.2 foot candles to light the aisle and row numbers.
4.
The standard shall be provided with a flex steel conduit whip affixed to end standard and extends a minimum of 18 inches beyond the standard.
5.
Aisle lighting shall be inaudible.
I.
Aisle Lighting: As manufactured by Tivoli.
1.
Transformers as required.
2.
Aisle lights shall be low voltage system and concealed under aisle standard.
3.
Aisle lights shall meet code requirements of 0.2 foot candles to light the aisle and row numbers.
4.
The standard shall be provided with a flex steel conduit whip affixed to end standard and extends a minimum of 18 inches beyond the standard.
5.
Aisle lighting shall be inaudible.
 
** NOTE TO SPECIFIER ** Delete if not required.
 
J.
Donor Plaques: Plastic with black lettering. Donor plaques are blank for customer engraving 1 inch x 3 inches (25 mm x 76 mm).
 
** NOTE TO SPECIFIER ** Delete finishes not required.
 
1.
Plastic Finish: Brass.
2.
Plastic Finish: Copper.
3.
Plastic Finish: Aluminum.
 
** NOTE TO SPECIFIER ** Delete attachment method not required.
 
4.
Attachment: 3M adhesive.
5.
Attachment: Visible fasteners or brads.
 
** NOTE TO SPECIFIER ** Delete if not required.
 
2.19
FIXED SEATING - MILAN SERIES
A.
Basis of Design: Milan Series Fixed Audience Seating as manufactured by Wenger Corporation.
B.
Fixed Audience Seating: Audience seating with cast aluminum standards with decorative plastic laminate wood grain insert, upholstered back and seat with foam cushions, hardwood plywood seat back, acoustically-perforated or non-perforated hardwood plywood seat bottom, solid beech hardwood arm rest, and self-lifting seats with acoustically-dampened lift mechanism.
1.
Mounting Standards: Die cast aluminum alloy with decorative laminate wood grain insert.
 
** NOTE TO SPECIFIER **Delete finish not required.
 
a.
Finish: Black colored powder coating.
b.
Finish: Decorative Laminate Color: As selected from manufacturer's standard colors.
c.
Finish: Decorative Laminate Color: Custom color and pattern.
2.
Upholstery: Flame-retardant Treated.
 
** NOTE TO SPECIFIER **Delete color and pattern not required.
 
a.
Color and Pattern: As selected from manufacturer's standard colors.
b.
Color and Pattern: Custom color and pattern.
3.
Seat:
a.
Plywood Bottom: 0.50 inch (13 mm) thick minimum 5-ply hardwood veneer plywood, acoustically-perforated or non-perforated.
b.
Cushion Foam: High resiliency polyurethane a minimum of 2.5 inches (63.5 mm) thick.
 
** NOTE TO SPECIFIER **Delete chair widths not required.
 
4.
Chair Width: 19 inches (483 mm) as measured from center of armrest to center of opposite armrest.
5.
Chair Width: 20 inches (508 mm) as measured from center of armrest to center of opposite armrest.
6.
Chair Width: 21 inches (533 mm) as measured from center of armrest to center of opposite armrest.
7.
Chair Width: 22 inches (559 mm) as measured from center of armrest to center of opposite armrest.
8.
Chair Width: 23 inches (584 mm) as measured from center of armrest to center of opposite armrest.
9.
Chair Width: Width as indicated as measured from center of armrest to center of opposite armrest.
10.
Back:
a.
Plywood Back: 0.75 inch (19 mm) thick 11-ply hardwood veneer plywood. Plywood less than 0.75 inch (19 mm) thick will not be acceptable.
b.
Cushion Foam: High resiliency polyurethane is a minimum of 1.5 inches (38 mm) thick. Back cushion is shaped to provide a 2.5 inches (64 mm) minimum thickness lumbar support for long-term comfort.
 
** NOTE TO SPECIFIER ** Delete pitch not required.
 
c.
Pitch: 10 degrees.
d.
Pitch: 14 degrees.
e.
Pitch: 18 degrees.
f.
Pitch: 22 degrees.
g.
Pitch: 26 degrees.
h.
Pitch: Custom angle. Refer to drawings.
11.
Chair Mounting Standards: Welded 14 gauge tubular steel standard with attractive armrest and directly anchored to floor through 11 gauge steel foot
12.
Armrest on Standards: Solid beech hardwood with rounded corners for a stylish appearance.
 
** NOTE TO SPECIFIER **Delete wood stain color provision not required.
 
a.
Wood Stain Color: As selected from manufacturer's standard colors.
b.
Wood Stain Color: Custom color.
13.
Seat Lift Device: Self-lifting torsion spring and damper mechanism. A gravity self- lifting mechanism or a self-lifting system without a damper mechanism will not be acceptable.
14.
Aisle lighting.
C.
Acoustically Enhanced Fixed Audience Seating Acoustic Properties Comply with manufacturer's published documentation.
D.
Fabrication:
1.
Fabricate floor standards to fit slope of floor so that standards are plumb and maintain chairs at the required relationship to the vertical.
2.
Upholstery: Fabricate upholstered chairs with fabric free of creases and wrinkles. Install warp and woof of fabric and pattern in consistent direction.
E.
Finishes:
1.
Baked Enamel Powder-Coat Finish: Immediately after cleaning and pretreating, electrostatically apply manufacturer's standard, baked-polymer, thermosetting powder finish.
F.
Materials:
1.
Hardwood Lumber: Clear Beech, plain-sawn or sliced.
2.
Beech Veneer Hardwood Plywood: HPVA HP-1, 11-ply, AA-grade, rotary cut. The seat back must be a minimum of 13-ply 11/16 inch (17.5 mm) thick plywood. The seat bottom must be a minimum of 7-ply 7/16 inch (11 mm) thick veneer plywood. Plywood edges are stained to match the veneered faces. The arm caps on the standards shall be solid beech wood.
3.
Medium Density Fiberboard: ANSI A208.2, Grade MD.
4.
Wood Finishes: Manufacturer's standard finish and stain.
5.
High-Pressure Decorative Laminate: NEMA LD-3, Grade VGS.
6.
Plastic: Polypropylene copolymer IF-727. High impact, injection molded polypropylene. Polypropylene outer seat and back panel includes a flange around the sides to provide fabric protection. Textured finish for an attractive and low maintenance surface.
7.
Cushion Foam: Raw material provided by BASF Germany. Flexible, cellular, cold-molded, contoured polyurethane foam, flame-retardant-treated.
G.
Row and Seat Numbers: Plastic with black lettering.
 
** NOTE TO SPECIFIER ** Delete finishes not required.
 
1.
Plastic Finish: Brass.
2.
Plastic Finish: Copper.
3.
Plastic Finish: Aluminum.
 
** NOTE TO SPECIFIER ** Delete attachment method not required.
 
4.
Attachment: 3M adhesive.
5.
Attachment: Visible fasteners or brads.
 
** NOTE TO SPECIFIER ** In the next two paragraphs, delete aisle lighting manufacturer not required.
 
H.
Aisle Lighting: As manufactured by Vista.
1.
Transformers as required.
2.
Aisle lights shall be low voltage system and concealed under aisle standard.
3.
Aisle lights shall meet code requirements of 0.2 foot candles to light the aisle and row numbers.
4.
The standard shall be provided with a flex steel conduit whip affixed to end standard and extends a minimum of 18 inches beyond the standard.
5.
Aisle lighting shall be inaudible.
I.
Aisle Lighting: As manufactured by Tivoli.
1.
Transformers as required.
2.
Aisle lights shall be low voltage system and concealed under aisle standard.
3.
Aisle lights shall meet code requirements of 0.2 foot candles to light the aisle and row numbers.
4.
The standard shall be provided with a flex steel conduit whip affixed to end standard and extends a minimum of 18 inches beyond the standard.
5.
Aisle lighting shall be inaudible.
 
** NOTE TO SPECIFIER ** Delete if not required.
 
J.
Donor Plaques: Plastic with black lettering. Donor plaques are blank for customer engraving 1 inch x 3 inches (25 mm x 76 mm).
 
** NOTE TO SPECIFIER ** Delete finishes not required.
 
1.
Plastic Finish: Brass.
2.
Plastic Finish: Copper.
3.
Plastic Finish: Aluminum.
 
** NOTE TO SPECIFIER ** Delete attachment method not required.
 
4.
Attachment: 3M adhesive.
5.
Attachment: Visible fasteners or brads.
 
** NOTE TO SPECIFIER ** Delete if not required.
 
2.20
FIXED SEATING - NAPLES SERIES
 
** NOTE TO SPECIFIER ** Retain and edit or delete Article based on Project requirements. The following section includes descriptions for both wood and polypropylene material choices.
 
A.
Basis of Design: Naples Series Fixed Audience Seating as manufactured by Wenger Corporation.
B.
Fixed Audience Seating: Audience seating with welded tubular steel standard with attractive enclosure, upholstered back and seat with cold-molded foam cushions, seat and back covers, arm rest, and maintenance free self-lifting seats.
1.
Upholstery: Minimum CAL-TB-117 Flame-retardant Treated.
 
** NOTE TO SPECIFIER **Delete color and pattern not required.
 
a.
Color and Pattern: As selected from manufacturer's standard colors.
b.
Color and Pattern: Custom color and pattern.
 
** NOTE TO SPECIFIER **Delete chair widths not required.
 
2.
Chair Width: 19 inches (483 mm) as measured from center of armrest to center of opposite armrest.
3.
Chair Width: 20 inches (508 mm) as measured from center of armrest to center of opposite armrest.
4.
Chair Width: 21 inches (533 mm) as measured from center of armrest to center of opposite armrest.
5.
Chair Width: 22 inches (559 mm) as measured from center of armrest to center of opposite armrest.
6.
Chair Width: 23 inches (584 mm) as measured from center of armrest to center of opposite armrest.
7.
Chair Width: Width as indicated as measured from center of armrest to center of opposite armrest.
8.
Chair Mounting Standards: Welded 14 gauge tubular steel standard with attractive armrest and directly anchored to floor through 11 gauge steel foot.
9.
Aisle Standards:
 
** NOTE TO SPECIFIER ** Delete aisle standard not required.
 
a.
Fully Upholstered Aisle Standard: Plywood core over steel structure with fabric upholstered exterior surface. The arm caps on the standards shall be solid beech wood or polypropylene.
 
** NOTE TO SPECIFIER ** Delete fabric not required.
 
1)
As selected from manufacturer's standard fabrics.
2)
Custom color, manufacturer and pattern.
b.
Wood Veneer Aisle Standard: Plywood exteriors over steel structure with stained veneered faces. The arm caps on the standards shall be solid beech wood stained to match veneer surfaces.
 
** NOTE TO SPECIFIER ** Delete stain color provision not required.
 
1)
Standard veneer. Finish selected from manufacturer's standard stain.
 
** NOTE TO SPECIFIER ** Insert stain color.
 
2)
Custom Color: ____.
10.
Seat:
 
** NOTE TO SPECIFIER ** Delete seat bottom not required.
 
a.
Seat Bottom - Fully Upholstered: Fully upholstered outer seat panel includes an inner 1/2 inch (13 mm) plywood seat panel to provide supporting structure.
1)
Seat Rise Mechanism: Maintenance free gravity assist with noise dampening seat stops.
2)
Cushion foam: High resiliency cold-molded polyurethane is a minimum of 3 inches (76 mm) thick.
b.
Seat Bottom - Wood: 7-ply 7/16 inch (11 mm) thick veneer plywood with edges that are stained to match the veneered faces. Veneered Plywood attached to 16 gauge welded steel frame.
 
** NOTE TO SPECIFIER ** Delete stain not required.
 
1)
Standard veneer. Finish selected from mfg. standard stain.
 
** NOTE TO SPECIFIER ** Insert stain color.
 
2)
Custom Color: ____.
3)
Seat Rise Mechanism: Maintenance free gravity assist with noise dampening seat stops.
c.
Cushion Foam: High Resiliency cold-molded polyurethane with a minimum of 3 inches (76 mm) thick.
11.
Back:
 
** NOTE TO SPECIFIER ** Delete seat back not required.
 
a.
Fully Upholstered Seat Back: Fully upholstered outer back panel includes an inner 1/2 inch (13 mm) plywood seat panel to provide supporting structure. Inner wood panel is contoured for additional comfort. Fabric conceals attachment brackets and hardware.
b.
Wood Seat Back: 13-ply 11/16 inch (17.5 mm) thick veneer plywood with edges that are stained to match the veneered faces.
 
** NOTE TO SPECIFIER ** Delete stain not required.
 
1)
Standard veneer. Finish selected from mfg. standard stain.
 
** NOTE TO SPECIFIER ** Insert stain color.
 
2)
Custom Color: ____.
c.
Cushion foam: High resiliency polyurethane is a minimum of 3 inches (76 mm) thick. Back cushion is shaped to provide lumbar support for long-term comfort.
d.
Pitch: 10 degrees.
e.
Pitch: 14 degrees.
f.
Pitch: 18 degrees.
g.
Pitch: 22 degrees.
h.
Pitch: 26 degrees.
i.
Pitch: Custom angle. Refer to drawings.
12.
Armrests:
 
** NOTE TO SPECIFIER ** Delete arm rest not required.
 
a.
Polypropylene Armrest: Black polypropylene armrest with a textured finish for an attractive and low maintenance finish.
b.
Wood Armrest: Solid beech hardwood with rounded corners for a stylish appearance.
 
** NOTE TO SPECIFIER ** Delete stain not required.
 
1)
Standard veneer. Finish selected from mfg. standard stain.
 
** NOTE TO SPECIFIER ** Insert stain color.
 
2)
Custom Color: ____.
C.
Fabrication:
1.
Fabricate floor standards to fit slope of floor so that standards are plumb and maintain chairs at the required relationship to the vertical.
2.
Upholstery: Fabricate upholstered chairs with fabric free of creases and wrinkles. Install warp and woof of fabric and pattern in consistent direction.
D.
ADA/ABA:
1.
ADA Swing-out Standard: The ADA swing-out standard allows easy access to the seat when transferring from a seated position while maintaining a uniform appearance in the facility. A simple locking lift mechanism allows for easy operation.
2.
Removable Seating: Individual seats for companion seating are equipped with a steel retractable wheel bracket so they can be easily rolled into place when needed. A simple release pedal will disengage the wheels.
E.
Materials:
1.
Hardwood Lumber: Clear Beech, plain-sawn or sliced.
2.
Beech Veneer Hardwood Plywood: HPVA HP-1, 11-ply, AA-grade, rotary cut. The seat back must be a minimum of 13-ply 11/16 inch (17.5 mm) thick plywood. The seat bottom must be a minimum of 7-ply 7/16 inch (11 mm) thick veneer plywood. Plywood edges are stained to match the veneered faces. The arm caps on the standards shall be solid beech wood.
3.
Medium Density Fiberboard: ANSI A208.2, Grade MD.
4.
Wood Finishes: Manufacturer's standard finish and stain.
5.
High-Pressure Decorative Laminate: NEMA LD-3, Grade VGS.
6.
Plastic: Polypropylene copolymer IF-727. High impact, injection molded polypropylene. Polypropylene outer seat and back panel includes a flange around the sides to provide fabric protection. Textured finish for an attractive and low maintenance surface.
7.
Cushion Foam: Raw material provided by BASF Germany. Flexible, cellular, cold-molded, contoured polyurethane foam, flame-retardant-treated.
F.
Row and Seat Numbers: Plastic with black lettering.
 
** NOTE TO SPECIFIER ** Delete finishes not required.
 
1.
Plastic Finish: Brass.
2.
Plastic Finish: Copper.
3.
Plastic Finish: Aluminum.
 
** NOTE TO SPECIFIER ** Delete attachment method not required.
 
4.
Attachment: 3M adhesive.
5.
Attachment: Visible fasteners or brads.
 
** NOTE TO SPECIFIER ** In the next two paragraphs, delete aisle lighting manufacturer not required.
 
G.
Aisle Lighting: As manufactured by Vista.
1.
Transformers as required.
2.
Aisle lights shall be low voltage system and concealed under aisle standard.
3.
Aisle lights shall meet code requirements of 0.2 foot candles to light the aisle and row numbers.
4.
The standard shall be provided with a flex steel conduit whip affixed to end standard and extends a minimum of 18 inches beyond the standard.
5.
Aisle lighting shall be inaudible.
H.
Aisle Lighting: As manufactured by Tivoli.
1.
Transformers as required.
2.
Aisle lights shall be low voltage system and concealed under aisle standard.
3.
Aisle lights shall meet code requirements of 0.2 foot candles to light the aisle and row numbers.
4.
The standard shall be provided with a flex steel conduit whip affixed to end standard and extends a minimum of 18 inches beyond the standard.
5.
Aisle lighting shall be inaudible.
 
** NOTE TO SPECIFIER ** Delete if not required.
 
I.
Donor Plaques: Plastic with black lettering. Donor plaques are blank for customer engraving 1 inch x 3 inches (25 mm x 76 mm).
 
** NOTE TO SPECIFIER ** Delete finishes not required.
 
1.
Plastic Finish: Brass.
2.
Plastic Finish: Copper.
3.
Plastic Finish: Aluminum.
 
** NOTE TO SPECIFIER ** Delete attachment method not required.
 
4.
Attachment: 3M adhesive.
5.
Attachment: Visible fasteners or brads.
 
** NOTE TO SPECIFIER ** Delete if not required.
 
2.21
FIXED SEATING - NEW YORK SERIES
 
** NOTE TO SPECIFIER ** Retain and edit or delete Article based on Project requirements. The following section includes descriptions for both wood and polypropylene material choices.
 
A.
Basis of Design: New York Series Fixed Audience Seating as manufactured by Wenger Corporation.
B.
Fixed Audience Seating: Audience seating with welded tubular steel standard with attractive enclosure, upholstered back and seat with cold-molded foam cushions, seat and back covers, arm rest, and maintenance free self-lifting seats.
1.
Upholstery: Minimum CAL-TB-117 Flame-retardant Treated.
 
** NOTE TO SPECIFIER ** Delete color and pattern not required.
 
a.
Color and Pattern: As selected from manufacturer's standard fabrics.
b.
Color and Pattern: Custom color, manufacturer and pattern.
 
** NOTE TO SPECIFIER ** Delete chair widths not required.
 
2.
Chair Width: 19 inches (483 mm) as measured from center of armrest to center of opposite armrest.
3.
Chair Width: 20 inches (508 mm) as measured from center of armrest to center of opposite armrest.
4.
Chair Width: 21 inches (533 mm) as measured from center of armrest to center of opposite armrest.
5.
Chair Width: 22 inches (559 mm) as measured from center of armrest to center of opposite armrest.
6.
Chair Width: 23 inches (584 mm) as measured from center of armrest to center of opposite armrest.
7.
Chair Width: Width as indicated as measured from center of armrest to center of opposite armrest.
8.
Chair Mounting Standards: Welded 14 gauge tubular steel standard with attractive armrest and directly anchored to floor through 11 gauge steel foot.
9.
Aisle Standards:
 
** NOTE TO SPECIFIER ** Delete aisle standard not required.
 
a.
Fully Upholstered Aisle Standard: Plywood core over steel structure with fabric upholstered exterior surface. The arm caps on the standards shall be solid beech wood or polypropylene.
 
** NOTE TO SPECIFIER ** Delete fabric not required.
 
1)
As selected from manufacturer's standard fabrics.
2)
Custom color, manufacturer and pattern.
b.
Wood Veneer Aisle Standard: Plywood exteriors over steel structure with stained veneered faces. The arm caps on the standards shall be solid beech wood stained to match veneer surfaces.
1)
Standard veneer. Finish selected from mfg. standard stain.
 
** NOTE TO SPECIFIER ** Insert stain color.
 
2)
Custom Color: ____.
10.
Seat:
a.
Polypropylene Seat Bottom: Black polypropylene outer seat panel includes a flange around the sides to provide fabric protection. Textured finish for an attractive and low maintenance surface attached to a 9/16 inch (14 mm) plywood core.
b.
Seat Rise Mechanism: Maintenance free gravity assist with noise dampening seat stops.
c.
Cushion foam: High resiliency cold-molded polyurethane is a minimum of 2 inches (51 mm) thick.
11.
Back:
a.
Polypropylene Seat Back: Black polypropylene outer back panel includes a flange around the sides to provide fabric protection. Textured finish for an attractive and low maintenance surface attached to a 9/16 inch (14 mm) plywood core.
b.
Cushion foam: High resiliency polyurethane with a contoured range of 2 inches to 3 inches (51 mm to 76 mm) thick. Back cushion is shaped to provide lumbar support for long-term comfort.
 
** NOTE TO SPECIFIER ** Delete pitch not required.
 
c.
Pitch: 10 degrees.
d.
Pitch: 14 degrees.
e.
Pitch: 18 degrees.
f.
Pitch: 22 degrees.
g.
Pitch: 26 degrees.
h.
Pitch: Custom angle. Refer to drawings.
12.
Armrests:
 
** NOTE TO SPECIFIER ** Delete armrest not required.
 
a.
Polypropylene Armrest: Black polypropylene armrest with a textured finish for an attractive and low maintenance finish.
b.
Wood Armrest: Solid beech hardwood with rounded corners for a stylish appearance.
 
** NOTE TO SPECIFIER ** Delete finish not required.
 
1)
Standard Hardwood. Finish to be selected from mfg. standard stain.
 
** NOTE TO SPECIFIER ** Insert stain color.
 
2)
Custom Color: ____.
C.
Fabrication:
1.
Fabricate floor standards to fit slope of floor so that standards are plumb and maintain chairs at the required relationship to the vertical.
2.
Upholstery: Fabricate upholstered chairs with fabric free of creases and wrinkles. Install warp and woof of fabric and pattern in consistent direction.
D.
ADA/ABA:
1.
ADA Swing-out Standard: The ADA swing-out standard allows easy access to the seat when transferring from a seated position while maintaining a uniform appearance in the facility. A simple locking lift mechanism allows for easy operation.
2.
Removable Seating: Individual seats for companion seating are equipped with a steel retractable wheel bracket so they can be easily rolled into place when needed. A simple release pedal will disengage the wheels.
E.
Materials:
1.
Hardwood Lumber: Clear Beech, plain-sawn or sliced.
2.
Beech Veneer Hardwood Plywood: HPVA HP-1, 11-ply, AA-grade, rotary cut. The seat back must be a minimum of 13-ply 11/16 inch (17.5 mm) thick plywood. The seat bottom must be a minimum of 7-ply 7/16 inch (11 mm) thick veneer plywood. Plywood edges are stained to match the veneered faces. The arm caps on the standards shall be solid beech wood.
3.
Medium Density Fiberboard: ANSI A208.2, Grade MD.
4.
Wood Finishes: Manufacturer's standard finish and stain.
5.
High-Pressure Decorative Laminate: NEMA LD-3, Grade VGS.
6.
Plastic: Polypropylene copolymer IF-727. High impact, injection molded polypropylene. Polypropylene outer seat and back panel includes a flange around the sides to provide fabric protection. Textured finish for an attractive and low maintenance surface.
7.
Cushion Foam: Raw material provided by BASF Germany. Flexible, cellular, cold-molded, contoured polyurethane foam, flame-retardant-treated.
F.
Row and Seat Numbers: Plastic with black lettering.
 
** NOTE TO SPECIFIER ** Delete finishes not required.
 
1.
Plastic Finish: Brass.
2.
Plastic Finish: Copper.
3.
Plastic Finish: Aluminum.
 
** NOTE TO SPECIFIER ** Delete attachment method not required.
 
4.
Attachment: 3M adhesive.
5.
Attachment: Visible fasteners or brads.
 
** NOTE TO SPECIFIER ** In the next two paragraphs, delete aisle lighting manufacturer not required.
 
G.
Aisle Lighting: As manufactured by Vista.
1.
Transformers as required.
2.
Aisle lights shall be low voltage system and concealed under aisle standard.
3.
Aisle lights shall meet code requirements of 0.2 foot candles to light the aisle and row numbers.
4.
The standard shall be provided with a flex steel conduit whip affixed to end standard and extends a minimum of 18 inches beyond the standard.
5.
Aisle lighting shall be inaudible.
H.
Aisle Lighting: As manufactured by Tivoli.
1.
Transformers as required.
2.
Aisle lights shall be low voltage system and concealed under aisle standard.
3.
Aisle lights shall meet code requirements of 0.2 foot candles to light the aisle and row numbers.
4.
The standard shall be provided with a flex steel conduit whip affixed to end standard and extends a minimum of 18 inches beyond the standard.
5.
Aisle lighting shall be inaudible.
 
** NOTE TO SPECIFIER ** Delete if not required.
 
I.
Donor Plaques: Plastic with black lettering. Donor plaques are blank for customer engraving 1 inch x 3 inches (25 mm x 76 mm).
 
** NOTE TO SPECIFIER ** Delete finishes not required.
 
1.
Plastic Finish: Brass.
2.
Plastic Finish: Copper.
3.
Plastic Finish: Aluminum.
 
** NOTE TO SPECIFIER ** Delete attachment method not required.
 
4.
Attachment: 3M adhesive.
5.
Attachment: Visible fasteners or brads.
 
** NOTE TO SPECIFIER ** Delete if not required.
 
2.22
FIXED SEATING - SYDNEY SERIES
 
** NOTE TO SPECIFIER ** Retain and edit or delete Article based on Project requirements. The following section includes descriptions for both wood and polypropylene material choices.
 
A.
Basis of Design: Sydney Series Fixed Audience Seating as manufactured by Wenger Corporation.
B.
Fixed Audience Seating: Audience seating with welded tubular steel standard with attractive enclosure, upholstered back and seat with cold-molded foam cushions, seat and back covers, arm rest, and maintenance free self-lifting seats.
1.
Upholstery: Minimum CAL-TB-117 Flame-retardant Treated.
 
** NOTE TO SPECIFIER ** Delete color and pattern not required.
 
a.
Color and Pattern: As selected from manufacturer's standard fabrics.
b.
Color and Pattern: Custom color, manufacturer and pattern.
 
** NOTE TO SPECIFIER ** Delete chair widths not required.
 
2.
Chair Width: 19 inch (483 mm) as measured from center of armrest to center of opposite armrest.
3.
Chair Width: 20 inch (508 mm) as measured from center of armrest to center of opposite armrest.
4.
Chair Width: 21 inch (533 mm) as measured from center of armrest to center of opposite armrest.
5.
Chair Width: 22 inch (559 mm) as measured from center of armrest to center of opposite armrest.
6.
Chair Width: 23 inch (584 mm) as measured from center of armrest to center of opposite armrest.
7.
Chair Width: Width as indicated as measured from center of armrest to center of opposite armrest.
8.
Chair Mounting Standards: Welded 14 gauge tubular steel standard with attractive armrest and directly anchored to floor through 11 gauge steel foot.
9.
Aisle Standards:
 
** NOTE TO SPECIFIER ** Delete aisle standard not required.
 
a.
Fully Upholstered Aisle Standard: Plywood core over steel structure with fabric upholstered exterior surface. The arm caps on the standards shall be solid beech wood or polypropylene.
 
** NOTE TO SPECIFIER ** Delete fabric not required.
 
1)
As selected from manufacturer's standard fabrics.
2)
Custom color, manufacturer and pattern.
b.
Wood Veneer Aisle Standard: Plywood exteriors over steel structure with stained veneered faces. The arm caps on the standards shall be solid beech wood stained to match veneer surfaces.
 
** NOTE TO SPECIFIER ** Delete stain not required.
 
1)
Standard veneer. Finish selected from mfg. standard stain.
 
** NOTE TO SPECIFIER ** Insert stain color.
 
2)
Custom Color: ____.
10.
Seat:
 
** NOTE TO SPECIFIER ** Delete seat bottom not required.
 
a.
Polypropylene Seat Bottom: Black polypropylene outer seat panel includes a flange around the sides to provide fabric protection. Textured finish for an attractive and low maintenance surface attached to a 9/16 inch (14 mm) plywood core.
1)
Seat Rise Mechanism: Maintenance free gravity assist with noise dampening seat stops.
2)
Cushion foam: High resiliency cold-molded polyurethane is a minimum of 4 inches (102 mm) thick.
b.
Wood Seat Bottom: 7-ply 7/16 inch (11 mm) thick veneer plywood with edges that are stained to match the veneered faces. Veneered Plywood attached to 16 gauge welded steel frame.
1)
Seat Rise Mechanism: Quiet rise 3/4 fold seat with adjustable torsion spring and dampener.
 
** NOTE TO SPECIFIER ** Delete stain not required.
 
2)
Standard veneer. Finish selected from mfg. standard stain.
 
** NOTE TO SPECIFIER ** Insert stain color.
 
3)
Custom Color ____.
4)
Cushion foam: High Resiliency cold-molded polyurethane with a minimum of 3 inches (76 mm) and encapsulating a welded steel frame with a serpentine spring support.
11.
Back:
 
** NOTE TO SPECIFIER ** Delete back not required.
 
a.
Polypropylene Seat Back: Black polypropylene outer back panel includes a flange around the sides to provide fabric protection. Textured finish for an attractive and low maintenance surface attached to a 9/16 inch (14.3 mm) plywood core.
b.
Wood Seat Back: 13-ply 11/16 inch (17.5 mm) thick veneer plywood with edges that are stained to match the veneered faces.
 
** NOTE TO SPECIFIER ** Delete stain not required.
 
1)
Standard veneer. Finish selected from mfg. standard stain.
 
** NOTE TO SPECIFIER ** Insert stain color.
 
2)
Custom Color: ____.
c.
Cushion foam: High resiliency polyurethane is a minimum of 3" thick. Back cushion is shaped to provide lumbar support for long-term comfort.
 
** NOTE TO SPECIFIER ** Delete pitch not required.
 
d.
Pitch: 10 degrees.
e.
Pitch: 14 degrees.
f.
Pitch: 18 degrees.
g.
Pitch: 22 degrees.
h.
Pitch: 26 degrees.
i.
Pitch: Custom angle. Refer to drawings.
12.
Armrests:
 
** NOTE TO SPECIFIER ** Delete armrest not required.
 
a.
Polypropylene Armrest: Black polypropylene armrest with a textured finish for an attractive and low maintenance finish.
b.
Wood Armrest: Solid beech hardwood with rounded corners for a stylish appearance.
 
** NOTE TO SPECIFIER ** Delete stain not required.
 
1)
Standard veneer. Finish selected from mfg. standard stain.
 
** NOTE TO SPECIFIER ** Insert stain color.
 
2)
Custom Color: ____.
C.
Fabrication:
1.
Fabricate floor standards to fit slope of floor so that standards are plumb and maintain chairs at the required relationship to the vertical.
2.
Upholstery: Fabricate upholstered chairs with fabric free of creases and wrinkles. Install warp and woof of fabric and pattern in consistent direction.
D.
ADA/ABA:
1.
ADA Swing-out Standard: The ADA swing-out standard allows easy access to the seat when transferring from a seated position while maintaining a uniform appearance in the facility. A simple locking lift mechanism allows for easy operation.
2.
Removable Seating: Individual seats for companion seating are equipped with a steel retractable wheel bracket so they can be easily rolled into place when needed. A simple release pedal will disengage the wheels.
E.
Materials:
1.
Hardwood Lumber: Clear Beech, plain-sawn or sliced.
2.
Beech Veneer Hardwood Plywood: HPVA HP-1, 11-ply, AA-grade, rotary cut. The seat back must be a minimum of 13-ply 11/16 inch (17.5 mm) thick plywood. The seat bottom must be a minimum of 7-ply 7/16 inch (11 mm) thick veneer plywood. Plywood edges are stained to match the veneered faces. The arm caps on the standards shall be solid beech wood.
3.
Medium Density Fiberboard: ANSI A208.2, Grade MD.
4.
Wood Finishes: Manufacturer's standard finish and stain.
5.
High-Pressure Decorative Laminate: NEMA LD-3, Grade VGS.
6.
Plastic: Polypropylene copolymer IF-727. High impact, injection molded polypropylene. Polypropylene outer seat and back panel includes a flange around the sides to provide fabric protection. Textured finish for an attractive and low maintenance surface.
7.
Cushion Foam: Raw material provided by BASF Germany. Flexible, cellular, cold-molded, contoured polyurethane foam, flame-retardant-treated.
F.
Row and Seat Numbers: Plastic with black lettering.
 
** NOTE TO SPECIFIER ** Delete finishes not required.
 
1.
Plastic Finish: Brass.
2.
Plastic Finish: Copper.
3.
Plastic Finish: Aluminum.
 
** NOTE TO SPECIFIER ** Delete attachment method not required.
 
4.
Attachment: 3M adhesive.
5.
Attachment: Visible fasteners or brads.
 
** NOTE TO SPECIFIER ** In the next two paragraphs, delete aisle lighting manufacturer not required.
 
G.
Aisle Lighting: As manufactured by Vista.
1.
Transformers as required.
2.
Aisle lights shall be low voltage system and concealed under aisle standard.
3.
Aisle lights shall meet code requirements of 0.2 foot candles to light the aisle and row numbers.
4.
The standard shall be provided with a flex steel conduit whip affixed to end standard and extends a minimum of 18 inches beyond the standard.
5.
Aisle lighting shall be inaudible.
H.
Aisle Lighting: As manufactured by Tivoli.
1.
Transformers as required.
2.
Aisle lights shall be low voltage system and concealed under aisle standard.
3.
Aisle lights shall meet code requirements of 0.2 foot candles to light the aisle and row numbers.
4.
The standard shall be provided with a flex steel conduit whip affixed to end standard and extends a minimum of 18 inches beyond the standard.
5.
Aisle lighting shall be inaudible.
 
** NOTE TO SPECIFIER ** Delete if not required.
 
I.
Donor Plaques: Plastic with black lettering. Donor plaques are blank for customer engraving 1 inch x 3 inches (25 mm x 76 mm).
 
** NOTE TO SPECIFIER ** Delete finishes not required.
 
1.
Plastic Finish: Brass.
2.
Plastic Finish: Copper.
3.
Plastic Finish: Aluminum.
 
** NOTE TO SPECIFIER ** Delete attachment method not required.
 
4.
Attachment: 3M adhesive.
5.
Attachment: Visible fasteners or brads.
2.23
MODULAR SOUND-ISOLATION PRACTICE ROOMS
 
** NOTE TO SPECIFIER ** Wenger sound-isolation practice rooms are true factory fabricated units. Site-fabricated rooms, and rooms with site-installed gaskets do not provide the same level of acoustical isolation performance over their service life.
 
A.
Basis of Design: SoundLok Sound-Isolating Practice Rooms as manufactured by Wenger Corporation. Factory-fabricated, modular, sound-isolation enclosures with sound transmission characteristics meeting requirements. Enclosures shall be internally wired for power, lighting, and ventilation controls. Site-fabricated enclosures and enclosures with site-installed gaskets and sealants shall not be allowed. Modifications to room on site affect acoustical performance and laboratory test data.
1.
Rooms shall be assembled from factory-gasketed modular components that allow reconfiguration and relocation without component modification or loss of acoustical performance.
 
** NOTE TO SPECIFIER ** Delete interior room height not required.
 
2.
Interior Room Height: 7 feet 6 inches (2260 mm).
3.
Interior Room Height: 8 feet 0 inches (2438 mm).
4.
Interior Room Height: 8 feet 6 inches (2591 mm).
5.
Interior Room Height: 9 feet 0 inches (2743 mm).
6.
Interior Room Height: 9 feet 6 inches (2896 mm).
7.
Interior Room Height: 10 feet 0 inches (3048 mm).
 
** NOTE TO SPECIFIER ** Retain the paragraph below if work includes Sound-Isolation Practice Rooms with VAE Technology, or with components that allow rooms to be upgraded with the VAE technology in the future.
 
B.
Room Variation: Sound-isolation practice rooms (with VAE) shall be equipped with manufacturer's Virtual Acoustical Environment (VAE) simulation system with integrated wiring, speakers, and microphones capable of providing room sonic environment simulation of a range in preset and customized practice and performance environments.
C.
Room Variation: Sound-isolation practice rooms (upgradeable to VAE) shall be equipped with integrated and wiring, raceways, panel cutouts for speakers and microphones, all concealed within wall panels to allow room to be upgraded with the VAE technology system in the future. No external mounted wiring, raceways, speakers, or microphones allowed.
D.
Room Variation: Sound-isolation practice rooms (non-upgradeable to VAE) shall be standard room that does NOT have the ability to be upgraded to the VAE technology system.
E.
Airborne Noise Reduction: Sound-isolation practice rooms with 410 cu. ft. (11.6 cu. m) interior volume, 34 percent perforated interior panels, 12 inch (304 mm) airspace between modules, mounted on concrete floor construction, tested as follows:
1.
NIC 41 from exterior to interior of module, per independent lab test.
2.
NIC 63 from interior of one module to interior of adjacent module, with 12 inches (304 mm) airspace between modules, per independent lab test.
F.
Ambient Noise at Center of sound-isolation room: Lighting and ventilating systems operating, per ANSI S 12.2: Not exceeding NC 25.
G.
Reverberation Time: Sound-Isolation Practice Rooms with 640 cu. ft. (18.12 cu. m) interior volume: in contiguous octave bands, center frequencies from 125 to 4000 Hz, per ASTM C 423: 0.45 plus or minus 0.10 seconds.
 
** NOTE TO SPECIFIER ** Retain below when specifying manufacturer's integrated fan system as part of manufactured room; delete when HVAC system design is by project HVAC Engineer. Ensure that project HVAC engineer provides adequate air to room based upon manufacturer's recommendations. ACR below is based on Wenger 6 feet - 8 inches by 9 feet - 5 inches (2032 mm by 2870 mm) Practice Room. Consult manufacturer's literature for other spaces and occupancies.
 
H.
Ventilation Air Change Rate: Sound-isolation practice rooms with 406 cu. ft. (11.5 cu. m) interior volume shall have 35 air changes per hour. Other rooms will vary according to size and occupancy.
I.
Sound-Isolating Door Sound Transmission Class: With full window, per internal testing only: STC 46.
 
** NOTE TO SPECIFIER ** Below relates to Wenger's integrated fan system. Delete below when HVAC ceiling panel is not used on project.
 
J.
HVAC Ceiling Panel Sound Transmission Class: Per internal testing only: STC 45.
K.
Safety Glazing Products: 16 CFR 1201.
 
** NOTE TO SPECIFIER ** Below relates to contractor requirement for securing architectural components to building structure. Verify seismic performance requirements of authorities having jurisdiction. Consult project structural engineer. When required, retain below plus retain related Submittals requirement and Part 3 seismic bracing requirements. Delete if not required.
 
L.
Seismic Performance: Comply with ASCE 7, "Minimum Design Loads for Buildings and Other Structures": Section 9, "Earthquake Loads" based upon seismic design criteria indicated.
M.
Wall Frame: 14-gauge/0.075 inch (1.91 mm) thick steel channel with 1-1/4 inch (31.75 mm) thick factory-applied acoustical gasketing at floor slab, with 3/4 inch (19 mm) leveling adjustment.
N.
Wall Panels: 30 inches by 4 inches (762 by 102 mm) thick composite panels, consisting of an exterior face of 16-gauge/0.0598 inch (1.52 mm) sheet steel, an interior face of 22-gauge/0.0299 inch (0.76 mm) perforated or solid sheet steel, with sound-attenuation material at panels indicated as perforated.
1.
Acoustical Seal: Two continuous acoustical gaskets factory-mounted at panel perimeter.
2.
Panel Attachment: Two or more mechanical locks on each vertical edge to align and engage adjoining panel and create compression seal between panels.
3.
Corner Assembly: Same construction as wall panels.
4.
Power Panel (one per unit): Same construction as wall panels, with factory pre-wiring meeting ETL and NEC requirements, consisting of conduit, wiring, junction and electrical boxes, and airtight cover plates, and including the following:
a.
Two duplex receptacles.
b.
Dimmable switches, occupancy sensors and connectors for lighting control (and fans, and VAE, as required).
c.
Three empty raceways for future Owner-installed circuitry.
 
** NOTE TO SPECIFIER ** Acoustic Vision Lite Wall Panel is optional addition to standard practice room. Retain paragraph below and indicate location on drawings if required. Delete if not required.
 
5.
Acoustic Vision Lite Wall Panel: Same construction as wall panels, 30 inches (762 mm) wide, with nominal 26.5 by 65.5 inches (673 by 1664 mm) vision lite, respectively, consisting of 1/4 and 3/8 inch (6.0 and 9.5 mm) thick laminated safety glass with 3 inches (76 mm) interspace, mounted in metal frame. Refer to Drawings for location.
 
** NOTE TO SPECIFIER ** Delete if not required.
 
a.
Provide one-way vision safety glass. Refer to Drawings for location.
 
** NOTE TO SPECIFIER ** Delete if not required.
 
6.
Horizontal Window, 90 degrees wide (2286mm), with nominal 32 inches x 81-3/4 inches (813mm x 2076mm) vision lite.
7.
Horizontal Window, 60 degrees (1524mm) wide, with nominal 32 inches x 51-3/4 inches (813mm x 1314mm) vision lite.
 
** NOTE TO SPECIFIER ** Communication Wall Panels are optional addition to standard practice room allowing for installation of Owner's current or future telephone, data, fire alarm, and additional power outlets. Retain paragraph below and indicate location on drawings if required.
 
8.
Communication Wall Panels: Where indicated: Same construction as wall panels, size and configuration indicated, with factory installed rough-in for addition wiring by owner, consisting of conduit, junction boxes, and airtight cover plates, and includes one pre-wired quad outlet.
O.
Ceiling Frame: Sheet steel, 16-gauge/0.053 inch (1.34 mm) thick, with clamping mechanism for compressing ceiling panel acoustical gaskets, with external support beam where required by room size.
P.
Ceiling Panels: Same construction as wall panels, 15 inches wide by 6 inches thick (381 mm wide by 152 mm thick), with the following characteristics:
1.
Acoustical Seal: Two continuous acoustical gaskets factory mounted at panel perimeter.
2.
Panel Attachment: Two mechanical locks on each vertical edge to align and engage adjoining panel and create compression seal between panels.
3.
Sprinkler Ceiling Panels: Where indicated, panels fabricated with predrilled holes to enable fire sprinkler system installation specified elsewhere. Furnish covers for installations not requiring sprinkler piping penetration.
4.
Light Panels: Where indicated, highly efficient, 50/60Hz, 100-277 Volt AC, 40 Watt, 1’ x 4’ dimmable edge-lit LED flat panels. Technical information; power factor: 0.9, lifetime (L70): 50,000 hours, LED chip type: 2835, number of LEDs (per panel): 216, physical dimensions: 11.83 inches (W) x 47.63 inches (L) x 0.39 inches (H), color temperature: 5000k (standard), lumens: 4200, beam angle: 120 degrees, RA value: 80, compatible with 0-10V dimmers. Compliance & approvals: ETL, FCC, DLC QPL, IP rating: damp locations.
Q.
Doors: 2 inches (51 mm) thick composite panel, consisting of an exterior face of 16-gauge/0.053 inch (1.34 mm) sheet steel, an interior face of 14-gauge/0.068 inch- (1.72 mm-) sheet steel, and a core of sound-attenuation material, sound transmission class (STC) 46 (based on internal testing), size and swing as indicated on Drawings, and as follows:
1.
Acoustical Seals: Magnetic seal plus compression seal at head and jambs, and adjustable sweep seal at door bottom.
2.
Hinge: Cam-type wrap around continuous barrel hinge, CR 1010 steel.
 
** NOTE TO SPECIFIER ** Delete door size not required.
 
3.
Door size: 3 feet (914 mm) wide standard.
4.
Door size: 4 feet (1219 mm) wide.
5.
Door size: 6 feet (1829 mm) wide double door with removable mullion.
6.
Door Vision Lite: Nominal 22 by 66 inches (559 by 1676 mm), glazed with safety glass.
 
** NOTE TO SPECIFIER ** Delete if not required.
 
a.
Provide one-way vision safety glass. Refer to drawings for location.
7.
Metal threshold: Stainless steel, 1/2 inch (12.7 mm) high.
8.
Lockset: ANSI/BHMA A156.2, Series 4000, Grade 1, cylindrical lock with lever handle, 6 pin cylinder, classroom function locking, satin nickel finish.
 
** NOTE TO SPECIFIER ** Delete key cylinder not required.
 
9.
Keying: Each keyed differently.
10.
Keying: Interchangeable core, with cylinder specified in Section 08 71 53 - Security Door Hardware.
 
** NOTE TO SPECIFIER ** Retain optional paragraph below when sound-isolating room includes acoustic simulation system. Description below conforms to Wenger's VAE system; consult with manufacturer for specific recommendations and availability.
 
R.
Virtual Acoustical Environment (VAE) System: Manufacturer's standard electronic sound system providing integrated record and playback capabilities, with nine virtual acoustical simulations within sound-isolating room, including:
1.
Eight speakers mounted in pre-wired corner panel speaker enclosures.
2.
Push-button operated control panel with associated electronic components.
3.
Microphone Wall Panel: Same construction as solid wall panels, with two integrated microphone mounts and two microphones.
4.
Systems using non-integrated components or external reverberation/special effects components are not acceptable.
 
** NOTE TO SPECIFIER ** Select one of following two paragraphs and subparagraphs. First paragraph and subparagraphs below are for rooms utilizing manufacturer's built-in fan system. Second paragraph and subparagraphs below are for optional direct connection to building HVAC system.
 
S.
Ceiling Ventilation System: Provide manufacturer's, built-in fan standard free-standing room ventilation system:
1.
Vent Panels: 15 inches (381 mm) wide by 6 inches (152 mm) thick panel with integral acoustical air plenum, with 1-1/2 inches (38 mm) sound-absorbing duct liner and four 90-degree bends.
2.
Fan Exhaust Panels: 120 cfm (0.057 cu. m/s) exhaust fan mounted in panel with same construction panel as vent intake panel. Number of fan panels equal to number of vent panels. Fan exhausts to surrounding space.
T.
Ceiling Ventilation System, Connection to Building HVAC System:
1.
Vent Panels: 15 inch (381 mm) wide by 6-inch (152 mm) thick panel with integral acoustical air plenum, with 1-1/2 inch (38 mm) sound-absorbing duct liner and four 90-degree bends, with 8 inch (203 mm) diameter duct connector. Capacity: 120 cfm (.057 cu. m/s) maximum per vent panel. Configured in pairs of intake and exhaust panels as indicated. Flexible ductwork specified in mechanical section and provided by others.
U.
Closure Panels: Provide vertical and horizontal closures between modules and above modules to close off space visually. Constructed of 3/4 inch (19 mm) thick composite wood with low-pressure thermofused laminates.
 
** NOTE TO SPECIFIER ** Delete colors not required.
 
1.
Color: Oyster.
2.
Color: Vanilla.
3.
Color: Warm Sand.
 
** NOTE TO SPECIFIER ** Standard Wenger practice room is furnished for direct mounting to concrete slab floor. Floor Component System in paragraph below is an available option. Delete if not required.
 
V.
Floor Component System: Where indicated: Sheet vinyl flooring bonded to high density 1-1/8 inches (22 mm) thick particleboard, supported by steel under structure, with 1-1/2 inches (38 mm) sound-absorbing vibration isolators, supported on 6-1/4 Hz natural frequency vibration isolators with 1/4 inches (6 mm) maximum deflection under typical loading, joined by mechanical fasteners and aligned by interlocking steel support clips. Floor fabricated for installation inside finished practice room without disassembly of modules.
 
** NOTE TO SPECIFIER ** Delete accessories not required.
 
W.
Mirror: Mounts directly to interior solid wall panel. Metal mounting brackets in black painted finish are provided. Dimensions: 58 inches (1473 mm) high x 22 inches (559 mm) wide with 1/4 inch (6 mm) thick mirror glass, constructed with vinyl backing to prevent shattering of glass.
X.
Drop-Down Technology Shelf: Mounts directly to interior solid wall panel for usage and storage of laptop computer. Shelf locks for secure storage of computer and all cables, wiring, etc. Constructed of metal frame with maple wood shelf. Includes 6-outlet surge protector, with 15 feet (4572 mm) long cord. Drop-down shelf dimension: 30 inches (762 mm) wide x 15-1/2 inches (394 mm) deep. Overall dimensions (in locked position): 35 inches (889 mm) wide x 25-1/2 inches (648 mm) high x 7-1/4 inches (184 mm) deep.
Y.
Metronome/Tuner: Mounts directly to interior solid wall panel and houses battery-operated metronome/tuner, Korg Model TM40. Mounting bracket included. Overall dimensions: 4-3/4 inches (121 mm) wide x 4-3/4 inches (121 mm) high x 1 inch (25 mm) thick.
Z.
Steel Sheet: Cold-rolled, ASTM A 1008/A 1008M, commercial steel, Type B.
AA.
Sound Attenuation Material: ASTM C 665, Type I, 1.5-lb/cu. ft (24 kg/cu. m).
AB.
Finish for Electrical Cover Plates:
1.
Light, Fan and VAE Switch (as required): Satin chrome finish.
2.
All other: Painted to match wall panel colors.
AC.
Finishes for Other Exposed Components: Iron phosphate pre-coat and thermo-set epoxy resin powder coat (baked) finish.
1.
Colors:
 
** NOTE TO SPECIFIER ** Delete wall and ceiling panel color not required.
 
a.
Wall and ceiling panels: Oyster.
b.
Wall and ceiling panels: Vanilla.
c.
Wall and ceiling panels: Warm Sand.
 
** NOTE TO SPECIFIER ** Delete floor rail and door color not required.
 
d.
Floor rail and door: Charcoal Grey.
e.
Floor rail and door: Warm Beige.
2.24
FIRE CURTAIN SYSTEMS, BRAIL FIRE CURTAIN
 
** NOTE TO SPECIFIER ** Delete operation not required for project.
 
A.
Fire Curtain Hoist:
1.
General Description:
a.
Furnish and install a motorized brail lift, automatically closing fire safety curtain as indicated on the drawings. The curtain shall fold up above the proscenium arch, and shall lap the masonry not less than 18 inch (457 mm) at each side of the proscenium opening and 24 inch (610 mm) at the top of the proscenium opening.
b.
The curtain shall be arranged to comply with applicable codes and, in general, intercept fire and smoke and prevent glow from severe fire on the stage from showing on the auditorium side for at least thirty (30) minutes in order to permit safe egress of all people from the auditorium.
c.
The curtain shall close by gravity due to over-balance of the curtain as specified below. Emergency closing shall occur as specified in NFPA 80 or as required by local codes when the fire line is released or fusible links separate.
2.
Special Conditions: It is the intention of this specification to provide a fully functioning fire safety curtain system. Actual equipment and components shall reflect building conditions and approved construction drawings. All dimensions shall be field verified by the Rigging Contractor.
3.
ZetexPlus Fire Safety Curtain: The curtain shall be fabricated from tightly woven J.R. Clancy ZetexPlus 1210-ZP non-wire inserted, non-asbestos, non-carcinogenic silica based cloth, 12 x 7 weave of .070 inch (1.8 mm) thickness weighing at least 40 oz/yd² (1.35 KG/m²). The curtain shall be listed and approved by the State of California Fire Marshall the NYC Material and Equipment Acceptance Division, and shall bear a certification label from a nationally recognized listing agency. All strips of fabric shall be in continuous lengths running the full height of the curtain. There shall be no horizontal seams. Each seam shall be sewn with two lines of stitching using fiberglass thread. Top and bottom pockets shall be 6 inch (152.4 mm). The bottom pocket shall be equipped with a 3 inch (76.2 mm) yield pad filled with Zetex. Sides of curtain shall have J.R. Clancy 016-170 brass guides every 18 inch (457.2 mm), securely fastened to a 6 inch (152.4 mm) hem with at least three bolts or rivets. D-rings shall be sewn 18 inch (457.2 mm) apart in vertical rows at each lift line location.
4.
Sides of curtain shall have bronze guides every 18 inch (457.2 mm), securely fastened to a 6 inch (152.4 mm) hem with at least three bolts or rivets, or as required by the governing code.
5.
Guides: Provide 1/4 inch (6.4 mm) wire rope guide at each side of the curtain. These cables shall be attached to a ring at the stage floor level and extend to the roof steel or gridiron where they shall be attached with 3/8 inch x 6 inch (9.525 mm x 152.4 mm) turnbuckles, thimbles, swage sleeves and other fittings as required.
6.
Smoke Pockets: Furnish and install one pair of smoke pockets to extend from the stage floor to a point above the top of the raised curtain or to the height specified in the drawings. Pockets shall consist of an 8 inch (203.2 mm) deep "Z" channel formed from 1/4 inch (6.4 mm) steel plate and a 1/4 inch x 18 inch (6.4 mm x 457.2 mm) steel plate which shall be bolted to the channels on 2 feet-0 inch (609.6 mm) centers. Welded construction shall not be accepted. Channels shall be anchored to the walls on 4 feet-0 inch (1,219 mm) centers.
7.
Smoke Seal: Provide a smoke seal consisting of a triple layer of folded fabric fastened above the proscenium with a mounting clamp so it rubs the curtain and seals the top of the opening. The fabric shall be Zetex 800 cloth with a minimum weight of 27 oz/yd² (0.9 KG/m²).
8.
Fire Curtain Hoist:
a.
Hoist shall consist of a cable drum, coupled to an electric gear motor. Hoist shall have a 1,100lb (500 KG) lifting capacity at a rate of 25 feet/min (0.13 m/s). The hoist shall be fully enclosed and supplied with a sturdy metal stand or wall brackets.
b.
The cable drum shall be of welded steel construction and carry 75 feet (22.86 m) of 5/16 inch (7.9 mm) diameter 7x19 galvanized utility cable. Twin guards shall keep the cable in the drum groove.
c.
The hoist (and curtain) shall be locked in position by the motor brake located within the enclosure. Releasing the fire line shall disengage the motor brake, permitting the cable drum to rotate, lowering the curtain. The brake handle shall extend through the top of the case, for easy attachment to the end of the fire line. No more than 20lbs (9 KG) of tension in the fire line shall be required to hold the full load capacity of the winch.
d.
The unit shall be equipped with an adjustable hydraulic speed governor to provide maximum control and safety in the closing of the fire curtain and to establish the travel time.
e.
Gearmotor:
1)
The motor and helical/bevel gearbox shall be an integrated unit, with the first stage pinion mounted directly on the motor's armature shaft.
2)
Motors shall be totally enclosed fan cooled (TEFC). The motor shall have a minimum AGMA service factor of 1.0 for constant operation.
3)
The gear case shall be cast iron for protection against shock damage. The output shaft shall have double lip oil seals to prevent leaks. The gearing service factor shall be a minimum of 1.0 with a mechanical strength service factor of 1.25.
f.
Rotary Limit Switch:
1)
Rotary limit switch assembly shall have four independently adjustable switch/cam sets. Cams shall be driven by a geared assembly.
2)
Switches shall have snap acting contacts.
3)
Switches shall be mounted within the winch base as to allow for easy adjustment of the switch settings.
4)
Rotary limit switches shall be Ravasi.
g.
All components in the hoist shall be fully enclosed. Access panels for adjustment and maintenance shall be removable without removing the hoist from service.
h.
Fixed Speed Starter:
1)
The hoist shall be controlled by a UL 508E listed, full voltage, self-protected, reversing starter. Enclosure shall be NEMA 12 with hinged, latching cover. The interior of the starter cabinet shall be "touch safe" per IEC 204-1 "Protection against direct contact" rules.
2)
The NEMA/IEC, magnetically operated, mechanically and electrically interlocked and reversing starter shall be sized to match the hoist motor horsepower and shall be rated for plugging and jogging. Units shall incorporate UL508E Type 2, non-welding, positive break contactors.
3)
Overcurrent protection shall be provided by an IEC Class 10 overload. Short circuit protection shall be provided by a circuit breaker.
4)
Starters shall be wired so that operation of the normal end of travel limit switches shall only allow movement away from the limit switch. Operation of an overtravel limit switch shall open the line contactor, and shall not allow further movement in either direction. A spring return toggle switch shall be housed inside the starter cabinet to allow override of the overtravel limits for resetting purposes.
9.
Control Station: Controls, consisting of up and down pushbuttons and an emergency stop switch, are mounted on the motor starter.
10.
Guided Clew: Cable clew shall be cut from 5/16 inch (7.94 mm) minimum steel, with the proper number of holes for proper attachment of turnbuckles for multiple cables. One larger hole for the drive cable shall be so located as to prevent the clew from jamming on its guide cables. Provide two parallel guide cables between the head block and the brail hoist to guide the clew.
11.
Head Block:
a.
The sheave shall have a 12 inch (304.8 mm) pitch diameter, and shall be an iron casting, with a machined groove. The sheave shall be equipped with a 1 inch (25.4 mm) diameter shaft and two tapered roller bearings.
b.
Base angles shall be a minimum 2 inch x 1-1/2 inch x 1/4 inch (50.8 mm x 38.1 mm x 6.4 mm) angle.
c.
Side plates shall be a minimum of 10-gauge (3.57 mm) steel, and shall fully enclose the sheave.
d.
The block and associated mounting hardware shall have a recommended working load of at least 2,500lb (1.1 KG), and shall be designed for use in either upright or underhung usage.
e.
Block shall be grooved for (8) 1/4 inch (6.4 mm) lift lines.
12.
Loft Block:
a.
The sheave shall have an 8-1/2 inch (215.9 mm) outside diameter, and shall be iron casting, with a machined groove. The sheave shall be equipped with a 17 mm diameter shaft and two sealed, precision ball bearings.
b.
Base angles shall be a minimum 1-1/2 inch x 1-1/2 inch x 3/16 inch (38.1 mm x 38.1 mm x 4.76 mm) angle.
c.
Side plates shall be a minimum of 12-gauge (2.78 mm) steel, and shall fully enclose the sheave.
d.
The block and associated mounting hardware shall have a recommended working load of at least 500lb (317 KG), and shall be designed for use in either upright or underhung usage.
e.
Loft blocks shall be grooved for one 1/4 inch (6.4 mm) lift line.
13.
Battens: Battens shall be made of 2 inch (50.8 mm) I.D. nominal, schedule 40 black iron pipe.
14.
Fire line System: The manual fire line release system shall consist of a 1/8 inch (3.2 mm) diameter wire rope, with six fusible links, side mounting pulleys as required, and two fire line release devices, each mounted in enclosures. Devices shall be mounted 5 feet-0 inch (1.54 m) above the stage floor on each side of the proscenium. All other components such as round weight arbors, arbor guards, floor pulleys, etc. required to form a fully functional fire line release system shall be provided.
15.
Lift Cables: The curtain lift cables shall be 1/4 inch (6.4 mm) diameter 7x19 galvanized utility cable as specified. Cables shall be terminated with corresponding cable thimbles and two forged cable clips or a Swage sleeve fitting at each end. The curtain end of each cable shall be attached to the batten using a half pipe clamp.
16.
Drive Cable: The drive cable between the brail hoist and the clew shall be 5/16 inch (7.9 mm) diameter 7x19 galvanized aircraft cable, attached to the clew using a thimble and two forged cable clips.
17.
Safety Chains: Supply one more safety chain than the number of lift cables. The 1/4 inch (6.4 mm) proof coil chains shall be located between lift cables except at the ends where chains shall be 12 inch (304.8 mm) or less from the end of the batten. Chains shall be attached to the top of the curtain with pipe clamps around the top of the batten and chain shackles. The other end shall be appropriately attached to the building structure.
18.
Half Pipe Clamps:
a.
Pipe clamps shall be made of two strips of 3/16 inch by 2 inch (3.17 mm x 50.8 mm) hot rolled steel formed to almost encompass and clamp the pipe batten leaving the bottom open. Corners shall be rounded.
b.
There shall be a 3/8 inch x 1 inch (9.52 mm x 25.4 mm) hex bolt with lock nut above the batten. A 5/8 inch (15.87 mm) hole in the top of each clamp half allows the attachment of cable, chain, or other fittings.
c.
Half pipe clamps shall have a manufacturer's recommended load rating of at least 200 lbs. (90.7 KG).
 
** NOTE TO SPECIFIER ** Delete if not required for project.
 
2.25
FIRE CURTAIN SYSTEMS, STRAIGHT LIFT CURTAIN, PROSCENIUM OPENING UP TO 18'T x 34'W
A.
Manual (Arbor/Lattice Track).
1.
General Description:
a.
Furnish and install a manually operated straight lift type, automatically closing fire safety curtain for the proscenium opening indicated on the drawings. Curtain shall lap masonry not less than 18 inch at each side of the proscenium opening and 24 inch at the top of the proscenium opening.
b.
The curtain shall be arranged to comply with the "International Building Code (2006)", American National Standard E1.22-2009, other applicable codes and, in general, intercept fire and smoke and prevent glow from severe fire on the stage from showing on the auditorium side for at least thirty (30) minutes in order to permit safe egress of all people from the auditorium.
c.
The curtain shall close by gravity due to over-balance of the curtain as specified below. Emergency closing shall occur as specified in NFPA 80 or as required by local codes when the fire line is released or fusible links separate.
2.
Special Conditions: It is the intention of this specification to provide a fully functioning fire safety curtain system. Actual equipment and components shall reflect building conditions and approved construction drawings. All dimensions shall be field verified by the Rigging Contractor.
3.
ZetexPlus Fire Safety Curtain: The curtain shall be fabricated from tightly woven J.R. Clancy ZetexPlus 1210-ZP non-wire inserted, non-asbestos, non-carcinogenic silica based cloth, 12 x 7 weave of .070 inch (1.778 mm) thickness weighing at least 40 ounces per square yard (1.35 KG/m²). The curtain shall be listed and approved by the State of California Fire Marshall, the NYC Material and Equipment Acceptance Division, and shall bear a certification label from a nationally recognized listing agency. All strips of fabric shall be in continuous lengths running the full height of the curtain. There shall be no horizontal seams. Each seam shall be sewn with two lines of stitching using fiberglass thread. Top and bottom pockets shall be 6 inch (152.4 mm). The bottom pocket shall be equipped with a 3 inch (76.2 mm) yield pad filled with ZetexPlus.
4.
Sides of curtain shall have bronze guides every 18 inch (457.2 mm), securely fastened to a 6 inch (152.4 mm) hem with at least three bolts or rivets, or as required by the governing code.
5.
Guides: Provide 1/4 inch (6.4 mm) wire rope guide at each side of the curtain. These cables shall be attached to a ring at the stage floor level and extend to the roof steel or gridiron where they shall be attached with 3/8 inch x 6 inch (9.525 mm x 152.4 mm) turnbuckles, thimbles, swage sleeves and other fittings as required.
6.
Smoke Pockets: Furnish and install one pair of smoke pockets to extend from the stage floor to a point above the top of the raised curtain or to the height specified in the drawings. Pockets shall consist of a 6 inch (152.4 mm) deep "Z" channel formed from 1/4 inch (6.4 mm) steel plate and a 1/4 inch x 18 inch (6.4 mm x 457.2 mm) steel plate which shall be bolted to the channels on 2 feet-0 inch (609.6 mm) centers. Channels shall be anchored to the walls on 4 feet-0 inch (1.2 m) centers.
7.
Smoke Seal: Provide a smoke seal consisting of a triple layer of folded fabric fastened above the proscenium with a mounting clamp so it rubs the curtain and seals the top of the opening. The fabric shall be Zetex 800 cloth with a minimum weight of 27 oz. per square yard (0.91 KG/ m²).
8.
12 inch (304.8 mm) Head Block:
a.
The sheave shall be an iron casting with a 12 inch (304.8 mm) outer diameter. The machined rope and cable grooves shall have equal pitch diameters. The sheave shall be equipped with a 1 inch (25.4 mm) diameter shaft and two tapered roller bearings.
b.
Base angles shall be a minimum 2 inch x 1-1/2 inch x 1/4 inch (50.8 mm x 38.1 mm x 6.35 mm) angle with the short leg turned in. The turned in leg shall be notched to allow clear passage of all cables.
c.
Side plates shall be a minimum of 10-gauge (3.570 mm) steel, and shall fully enclose the sheave. Side plates shall be bolted and welded to the base angles for extra strength.
d.
The block and associated mounting hardware shall have a recommended working load of at least 2,500 lbs. (1,134 KG).
e.
Head blocks shall be grooved for six or eight 1/4 inch (6.4 mm) lift lines and one 3/4 inch (19.05 mm) hand line.
9.
Loft Block:
a.
The sheave shall have an 8-1/2 inch (215.9 mm) outside diameter, and shall be an iron casting, with a machined groove. The sheave shall be equipped with a 17 mm diameter shaft and two sealed, precision ball bearings.
b.
Base angles shall be a minimum 1-1/2 inch x 1-1/2 inch x 3/16 inch (38.1 mm x 38.1 mm x 4.76 mm) angle.
c.
Side plates shall be a minimum of 12-gauge (2.78 mm) steel, and shall fully enclose the sheave. Side plates shall be bolted to the base angles.
d.
The block and associated mounting hardware shall have a recommended working load of at least 500 lbs. (226.8 KG), and shall be designed for use in either upright or underhung usage.
e.
Loft blocks shall be cast iron sheave grooved for one 1/4 inch (6.35 mm) lift line.
10.
Counterweight Arbor:
a.
Arbor shall be long enough to accommodate counterweights to balance the fire curtain and related equipment.
b.
The arbor top shall be a fabricated weldment of 1/2 inch (12.7 mm) formed steel plate and 7 gauge (4.76 mm) formed side plates. The side plates shall be punched to receive 8 cables, and shall be tied together with a bolt and spacer providing a tie-off point for the hand line.
c.
The arbor bottom shall be 1/2 inch x 3 inch (12.7 mm x 76.2 mm) steel bar with counterweight rests to keep the weights from resting on the arbor inner nuts, and a forged steel eye for the hand line tie off.
d.
The top and bottom of the arbor shall be tied together by means of two 3/4 inch (19.05 mm) steel arbor rods. The arbor rods shall have three nuts at each end, the outermost being a lock nut.
e.
The top and bottom shall have bronze guides to engage the lattice track.
f.
Provide 14 gauge (1.98 mm) spreader plates (two minimum) on arbor rods so they can be spaced between counterweights on 2 feet (609.6 mm) centers. Provide a retaining collar on each rod, each with a 1/4 inch (6.35 mm) set screw with red plastic knob for easy locking. One retaining collar shall be welded to the top spreader plate.
11.
Lattice Track:
a.
The track shall consist of two 2 inch x 2 inch x 1/4 inch (50.8 mm x 50.8 mm x 6.35 mm) angles opposing each other with formed brackets alternating front and back on 2 feet (610 mm) centers. Back brackets shall contain two 9/16 inch (14.29 mm) diameter holes for proper anchorage to wall.
b.
A fabricated steel bracket shall support the bottom of the lattice. Bracket shall have ample clearance for passage of hand line.
12.
Automatic Floor Block:
a.
The cast iron sheave shall have a 12 inch (304.8 mm) outside diameter, and shall be an iron casting, with a groove for a 1 inch (25.4 mm) rope.
b.
The sheave shall be equipped with a 1 inch (25.4 mm) diameter machined steel shaft and two tapered roller bearings.
c.
The tension block shall be held in place and guided by two 3/4 inch (19.05 mm) diameter rods, each equipped with adjustable locking collar to limit sheave travel.
13.
Battens: Battens shall be made of 2 inch I.D. nominal, schedule 40 black iron pipe.
14.
Fire line System: The manual fire line release system shall consist of a 1/8 inch diameter wire rope, with six fusible links, side mounting pulleys as required, and two fire line release devices, each mounted in enclosures. Devices shall be mounted 5 feet (1,524 mm) above the stage floor on each side of the proscenium. All other components such as the fire curtain arbor release, round weight arbors, arbor guards, floor pulleys, etc. required to form a fully functional fire line release system shall be provided.
15.
Hand line:
a.
Hand line shall be 3/4 inch (19.1 mm) in diameter, employing a 3-strand composite construction combining filament and staple/spun polyester wrapped around fibrillated polyolefin.
b.
The hand line shall contain an identifying tape showing the manufacturer's name, phone number, website, and year of manufacture.
c.
The hand line shall contain a red safety/wear indicator that shall become visible as the rope nears the end of its useful life.
d.
The rope shall hold knots well and be easily spliced. Rope shall not be subject to rotting, mildew, or moisture damage nor shall its length be affected by changes in humidity.
e.
Tape ends before cutting. Attach to arbor with two half hitches or bowline and tape end to standing line with electrical tape.
f.
Hand lines shall be SureGrip rope.
16.
Lift Cables: The curtain lift cables shall be 1/4 inch (6.4 mm) diameter 7x19 galvanized utility cable as specified. Cables shall be terminated with corresponding cable thimbles and two forged cable clips or a Swage sleeve fitting at each end. The curtain end of each cable shall be attached to the batten using a half pipe clamp.
17.
Safety Chains: Supply one more safety chain than the number of lift cables. 1/4 inch proof coil chains shall be located between lift cables except at the ends where chains shall be 12 inch or less from the end of the batten. Chains shall be attached to the top of the curtain with pipe clamps around the top of the batten and chain shackles. The other end shall be appropriately attached to the building structure.
B.
Fire Curtain Hoist:
1.
General Description:
a.
Furnish and install a motorized straight lift type, automatically closing fire safety curtain for the proscenium opening indicated on the drawings. Curtain shall lap masonry not less than 18 inch (457.2 mm) at each side of the proscenium opening and 24 inch (609.6 mm) at the top of the proscenium opening.
b.
The curtain shall be arranged to comply with the "International Building Code (2006)", American National Standard E1.22-2009, other applicable codes and, in general, intercept fire and smoke and prevent glow from severe fire on the stage from showing on the auditorium side for at least thirty (30) minutes in order to permit safe egress of all people from the auditorium.
c.
The curtain shall close by gravity, with the speed of descent controlled by a hydraulic speed regulator. Emergency closing shall occur as specified in NFPA 80 or as required by local codes when the fire line is released or fusible links separate.
2.
Special Conditions: It is the intention of this specification to provide a fully functioning fire safety curtain system. Actual equipment and components shall reflect building conditions and approved construction drawings. All dimensions shall be field verified by the Rigging Contractor.
3.
ZetexPlus Fire Safety Curtain: The curtain shall be fabricated from tightly woven J.R. Clancy ZetexPlus 1210-ZP non-wire inserted, non-asbestos, non-carcinogenic silica based cloth, 12 x 7 weave of .070 inch (1.8 mm) thickness weighing at least 40 ounces per square yard (1.35 KG/sq mtr). The curtain shall be listed and approved by the State of California Fire Marshal, the NYC Material and Equipment Acceptance Division, and shall bear a certification label from a nationally recognized listing agency. All strips of fabric shall be in continuous lengths running the full height of the curtain. There shall be no horizontal seams. Each seam shall be sewn with two lines of stitching using fiberglass thread. Top and bottom pockets shall be 6 inch (152.4 mm). The bottom pocket shall be equipped with a 3 inch (76.2 mm) yield pad filled with ZetexPlus.
4.
Sides of curtain shall have bronze guides every 18 inch (457.2 mm), securely fastened to a 6 inch (152.4 mm) hem with at least three bolts or rivets, or as required by the governing code.
5.
Guides: Provide 1/4 inch (6.4 mm) wire rope guide at each side of the curtain. These cables shall be attached to a ring at the stage floor level and extend to the roof steel or gridiron where they shall be attached with 3/8 inch x 6 inch (9.525 mm x 152.4 mm) turnbuckles, thimbles, swage sleeves and other fittings as required.
6.
Smoke Pockets: Furnish and install one pair of smoke pockets to extend from the stage floor to a point above the top of the raised curtain or to the height specified in the drawings. Pockets shall consist of a 6 inch deep "Z" channel formed from 1/4 inch (6.4 mm) steel plate and a 1/4 inch x 18 inch (6.4 mm x 457.2 mm) steel plate which shall be bolted to the channels on 2 feet-0 inch (609.6 mm) centers. Channels shall be anchored to the walls on 4 feet-0 inch (1,219 mm) centers.
7.
Smoke Seal: Provide a smoke seal consisting of a triple layer of folded fabric fastened above the proscenium with a mounting clamp so it rubs the curtain and seals the top of the opening. The fabric shall be Zetex 800 cloth with a minimum weight of 27 oz. per square yard (0.91 KG/sq m).
8.
Fire Curtain Hoist:
a.
Hoist shall consist of a cable drum, coupled to an electric gear motor. Hoist shall have a 1,100lb (500 KG) lifting capacity at a rate of 25 feet per minute (0.13 m/s). The hoist shall be fully enclosed and supplied with a sturdy metal stand or wall brackets.
b.
The cable drum shall be of welded steel construction and carry 75 feet (22.86 m) of 5/16 inch (7.94 mm) diameter 7X19 galvanized utility cable. Twin guards shall keep the cable in the drum groove.
c.
The hoist (and curtain) shall be locked in position by the motor brake located within the enclosure. Releasing the fire line shall disengage the motor brake, permitting the cable drum to rotate, lowering the curtain. The brake handle shall extend through the top of the case, for easy attachment to the end of the fire line. No more than 20lbs (9 KG) of tension in the fire line shall be required to hold the full load capacity of the winch.
d.
The unit shall be equipped with an adjustable hydraulic speed governor to provide maximum control and safety in the closing of the fire curtain and to establish the travel time.
e.
Gearmotor:
1)
The motor and helical/bevel gearbox shall be an integrated unit, with the first stage pinion mounted directly on the motor's armature shaft.
2)
Motors shall be totally enclosed fan cooled (TEFC). The motor shall have a minimum AGMA service factor of 1.0 for constant operation.
3)
The gear case shall be cast iron for protection against shock damage. The output shaft shall have double lip oil seals to prevent leaks. The gearing service factor shall be a minimum of 1.0 with a mechanical strength service factor of 1.25.
f.
Rotary Limit Switch:
1)
Rotary limit switch assembly shall have four independently adjustable switch/cam sets. Cams shall be driven by a geared assembly.
2)
Switches shall have snap acting contacts.
3)
Switches shall be mounted within the winch base as to allow for easy adjustment of the switch settings.
4)
Rotary limit switches shall be Ravasi.
g.
All components in the hoist shall be fully enclosed. Access panels for adjustment and maintenance shall be removable without removing the hoist from service.
h.
Fixed Speed Starter:
1)
The hoist shall be controlled by a UL 508E listed, full voltage, self protected, reversing starter. Enclosure shall be NEMA 12 with hinged, latching cover. The interior of the starter cabinet shall be "touch safe" per IEC 204-1 "Protection against direct contact" rules.
2)
The NEMA/IEC, magnetically operated, mechanically and electrically interlocked, reversing starter shall be sized to match the hoist motor horsepower and shall be rated for plugging and jogging. Units shall incorporate UL508E Type 2, non-welding, positive break contactors.
3)
Overcurrent protection shall be provided by an IEC Class 10 overload. Short circuit protection shall be provided by a circuit breaker.
4)
Starters shall be wired so that operation of the normal end of travel limit switches shall only allow movement away from the limit switch. Operation of an overtravel limit switch shall open the line contactor, and shall not allow further movement in either direction. A spring return toggle switch shall be housed inside the starter cabinet to allow override of the overtravel limits for resetting purposes.
5)
The fire curtain hoist shall be sized to accommodate the fire curtain and all associated hardware. The hoist shall include a push button control station. Emergency lowering speed shall be controlled by a hydraulic speed regulator. Hoist shall meet ANSE E1.22 - 2009 "Entertainment Technology Fire Safety Curtain Systems" or NFPA 80 "Standard for Fire Doors and Other Opening Protectives - 2007".
9.
Control Station: Controls, consisting of up and down pushbuttons and an emergency stop switch, are mounted on the motor starter.
10.
Battens: Battens shall be made of 2 inch (50.8 mm) I.D. nominal, schedule 40 black iron pipe.
11.
Fire line System: The manual fire line release system shall consist of a 1/8 inch (3.2 mm) diameter wire rope, with six UL listed fusible links that release at 165 degree F (74 degree C), side mounting pulleys as required, and two fire line release devices, each mounted in a steel enclosure with acrylic viewing window that contains a positive method to release the fire line. Devices shall be mounted 5 feet (1,524 mm) above the stage floor on each side of the proscenium. All other components such as round weight arbors, arbor guards, floor pulleys, etc. required to form a fully functional fire line release system shall be provided.
12.
Lift Cables: The curtain lift cables shall be 1/4 inch (6.4 mm) diameter 7x19 galvanized utility cable as specified. Cables shall be terminated with corresponding cable thimbles and two forged cable clips or a Swage sleeve fitting at each end. The curtain end of each cable shall be attached to the batten using a half pipe clamp.
13.
Safety Chains: Supply one more safety chain than the number of lift cables. 1/4 inch (6.4 mm) minimum, proof coil chains shall be located between lift cables except at the ends where chains shall be 12 inch (304.8 mm) or less from the end of the batten. Chains shall be attached to the top of the curtain with pipe clamps around the top of the batten and chain shackles. The other end shall be appropriately attached to the building structure.
C.
Line Shaft Hoist:
1.
General Description:
a.
Furnish and install a motorized straight lift type, automatically closing fire safety curtain for the proscenium opening indicated on the drawings. Curtain shall lap masonry not less than 18 inch (457.2 mm) at each side of the proscenium opening and 24 inch (609.6 mm) at the top of the proscenium opening.
b.
The curtain shall be arranged to comply with the "International Building Code (2006)", American National Standard E1.22-2009, other applicable codes and, in general, intercept fire and smoke and prevent glow from severe fire on the stage from showing on the auditorium side for at least thirty (30) minutes in order to permit safe egress of all people from the auditorium.
c.
The curtain shall close by gravity, with the speed of descent controlled by a hydraulic speed regulator. Emergency closing shall occur as specified in NFPA 80 or as required by local codes when the fire line is released or fusible links separate.
2.
Special Conditions: It is the intention of this specification to provide a fully functioning fire safety curtain system. Actual equipment and components shall reflect building conditions and approved construction drawings. All dimensions shall be field verified by the Rigging Contractor.
3.
ZetexPlus Fire Safety Curtain: The curtain shall be fabricated from tightly woven J.R. Clancy ZetexPlus 1210-ZP non-wire inserted, non-asbestos, non-carcinogenic silica based cloth, 12 x 7 weave of .070 inch (1.8 mm) thickness weighing at least 40 ounces per square yard (1.35 KG/sq mtr). The curtain shall be listed and approved by the State of California Fire Marshal, the NYC Material and Equipment Acceptance Division, and shall bear a certification label from a nationally recognized listing agency. All strips of fabric shall be in continuous lengths running the full height of the curtain. There shall be no horizontal seams. Each seam shall be sewn with two lines of stitching using fiberglass thread. Top and bottom pockets shall be 6 inch (152.4 mm). The bottom pocket shall be equipped with a 3 inch (76.2 mm) yield pad filled with ZetexPlus.
4.
Sides of curtain shall have bronze guides every 18 inch (457.2 mm), securely fastened to a 6 inch (152.4 mm) hem with at least three bolts or rivets, or as required by the governing code.
5.
Guides: Provide 1/4 inch (6.4 mm) wire rope guide at each side of the curtain. These cables shall be attached to a ring at the stage floor level and extend to the roof steel or gridiron where they shall be attached with 3/8 inch x 6 inch (9.525 mm x 152.4 mm) turnbuckles, thimbles, swage sleeves and other fittings as required.
6.
Smoke Pockets: Furnish and install one pair of smoke pockets to extend from the stage floor to a point above the top of the raised curtain or to the height specified in the drawings. Pockets shall consist of a 6 inch deep "Z" channel formed from 1/4 inch (6.4 mm) steel plate and a 1/4 inch x 18 inch (6.4 mm x 457.2 mm) steel plate which shall be bolted to the channels on 2 feet-0 inch (609.6 mm) centers. Channels shall be anchored to the walls on 4 feet-0 inch (1,219 mm) centers.
7.
Smoke Seal: Provide a smoke seal consisting of a triple layer of folded fabric fastened above the proscenium with a mounting clamp so it rubs the curtain and seals the top of the opening. The fabric shall be Zetex 800 cloth with a minimum weight of 27 oz. per square yard (0.91 KG/sq m).
8.
Line Shaft Fire Curtain Hoist:
a.
The hoist shall consist of a gearmotor assembly, a drum for each lift line, and interconnecting shafts. The gearmotor assembly shall include a brake release and a hydraulic speed regulator, allowing the curtain to close at a controlled rate of speed when the brake is released by the activation of the fire line. The hoist shall have a minimum1,400 lb (635 KG) lifting capacity at a rate of 25 feet per minute (0.127 m/s).
b.
Gearmotor:
1)
The motor, primary brake and gearbox shall be an integrated unit, with the first stage pinion gear and the primary brake both mounted directly on the motor's armature shaft. No couplings shall be permitted between the motor, primary brake and gear reducer.
2)
Motors shall be totally enclosed fan cooled (TEFC). The motor shall have a minimum AGMA service factor of 1.0 for constant operation.
3)
The gear reducer shall be a helical bevel reducer. The gear case shall be cast iron for protection against shock damage. The output shaft(s) shall have double lip oil seals to prevent leaks. The gearing service factor shall be a minimum of 1.0 with a mechanical strength service factor of 1.25.
4)
Brakes shall be normally spring applied, direct acting, electrically released, and equipped with a manual release. The brake shall be an AC / DC electro-magnetic unit with a minimum retarding torque equal to 200% of motor full load torque.
c.
Drums.
1)
Each helical drum shall be supported by a sturdy steel base, holding the elements of the drum assembly in proper alignment. Both ends of each drum shall be supported by a self-aligning flange bearing.
2)
Alternate drums shall be threaded in opposite directions, to keep the batten from "walking" as its elevation changes.
3)
Drums shall be interconnected by shafts with universal joints at each end. Shafts without universal joints are not acceptable.
d.
Rotary Limit Switches:
1)
Rotary limit switch assemblies shall have two or four independently adjustable switch/cam sets as required. Cams shall be driven by a geared assembly.
2)
Switches shall have snap acting contacts.
3)
Rotary limit switches shall be driven directly or by roller chains. If roller chains are used, sprockets shall be pinned to prevent slipping and sized for maximum usable rotation of switch cams. The input shaft and drive chain shall be fully guarded.
4)
Switches shall be mounted to the hoist base to allow for easy adjustment of the switch settings.
e.
Fixed Speed Starter:
1)
The traction drive hoist shall be controlled by a UL 508E listed, full voltage, self protected, reversing starter. Enclosure shall be NEMA 12 with hinged, latching cover. The interior of the starter cabinet shall be "touch safe" per IEC 204-1 "Protection against direct contact" rules.
2)
The NEMA/IEC, magnetically operated, mechanically and electrically interlocked, reversing starter shall be sized to match the hoist motor horsepower and shall be rated for plugging and jogging. Units shall incorporate UL508E Type 2, non-welding, positive break contactors.
3)
Overcurrent protection shall be provided by an IEC Class 10 overload. Short circuit protection shall be provided by a circuit breaker.
4)
Starters shall be wired so that operation of the normal end of travel limit switches shall only allow movement away from the limit switch. Operation of an overtravel limit switch shall open the line contactor, and shall not allow further movement in either direction. A spring return toggle switch shall be housed inside the starter cabinet to allow override of the overtravel limits for resetting purposes.
9.
Control Stations: Two control stations shall be provided in wall mounted NEMA 12 enclosures. Each shall contain hold to operate (dead man) Up and Down pushbuttons, and a mushroom head emergency stop pushbutton.
10.
Battens: Battens shall be made of 2 inch (50.8 mm) I.D. nominal, schedule 40 black iron pipe.
11.
Fire line System: The manual fire line release system shall consist of a 1/8 inch (3.2 mm) diameter wire rope, with six fusible links, side mounting pulleys as required, and two fire line release devices, each mounted in a steel enclosure with acrylic viewing window that contains a positive method to release the fire line. Devices shall be mounted 5 feet (1,524 mm) above the stage floor on each side of the proscenium. All other components such as round weight arbors, arbor guards, floor pulleys, etc. required to form a fully functional fire line release system shall be provided.
12.
Lift Cables: The curtain lift cables shall be 1/4 inch (6.4 mm) diameter 7x19 galvanized utility cable as specified. Cables shall be terminated with corresponding cable thimbles and two forged cable clips or a Swage sleeve fitting at each end. The curtain end of each cable shall be attached to the batten using a half pipe clamp.
13.
Safety Chains: Supply one more safety chain than the number of lift cables. 1/4 inch (6.4 mm) minimum, proof coil chains shall be located between lift cables except at the ends where chains shall be 12 inch (304.8 mm) or less from the end of the batten. Chains shall be attached to the top of the curtain with pipe clamps around the top of the batten and chain shackles. The other end shall be appropriately attached to the building structure.
D.
Traction Drive Hoist.
1.
General Description:
a.
Furnish and install a motorized straight lift type, automatically closing fire safety curtain for the proscenium opening indicated on the drawings. Curtain shall lap masonry not less than 18 inch (457.2 mm) at each side of the proscenium opening and 24 inch (609.6 mm) at the top of the proscenium opening.
b.
The curtain shall be arranged to comply with the "International Building Code (2006)", American National Standard E1.22-2009, other applicable codes and, in general, intercept fire and smoke and prevent glow from severe fire on the stage from showing on the auditorium side for at least thirty (30) minutes in order to permit safe egress of all people from the auditorium.
c.
The curtain shall close by gravity due to over-balance of the curtain as specified below. Emergency closing shall occur as specified in NFPA 80 or as required by local codes when the fire line is released or fusible links separate.
2.
Special Conditions: It is the intention of this specification to provide a fully functioning fire safety curtain system. Actual equipment and components shall reflect building conditions and approved construction drawings. All dimensions shall be field verified by the Rigging Contractor.
3.
ZetexPlus Fire Safety Curtain: The curtain shall be fabricated from tightly woven J.R. Clancy ZetexPlus 1210-ZP non-wire inserted, non-asbestos, non-carcinogenic silica based cloth, 12 x 7 weave of .070 inch (1.778 mm) thickness weighing at least 40 ounces per square yard (1.35 KG/sq mtr). The curtain shall be listed and approved by the State of California Fire Marshall, the NYC Material Acceptance and Equipment Acceptance Division, and shall bear a certification label from a nationally recognized listing agency. All strips of fabric shall be in continuous lengths running the full height of the curtain. There shall be no horizontal seams. Each seam shall be sewn with two lines of stitching using fiberglass thread. Top and bottom pockets shall be 6 inch (152.4 mm). The bottom pocket shall be equipped with a 3 inch (76.2 mm) yield pad filled with ZetexPlus.
4.
Sides of curtain shall have bronze guides every 18 inch (457.2 mm), securely fastened to a 6 inch (152.4 mm) hem with at least three bolts or rivets, or as required by the governing code.
5.
Guides: Provide 1/4 inch (6.4 mm) wire rope guide at each side of the curtain. These cables shall be attached to a ring at the stage floor level and extend to the roof steel or gridiron where they shall be attached with 3/8 inch x 6 inch (9.525 mm x 152.4 mm) turnbuckles, thimbles, swage sleeves and other fittings as required.
6.
Smoke Pockets: Furnish and install one pair of smoke pockets to extend from the stage floor to a point above the top of the raised curtain or to the height specified in the drawings. Pockets shall consist of a 6 inch deep "Z" channel formed from 1/4 inch (6.4 mm) steel plate and a 1/4 inch x 18 inch (6.4 mm x 457.2 mm) steel plate which shall be bolted to the channels on 2 feet-0 inch (609.6 mm) centers. Channels shall be anchored to the walls on 4 feet-0 inch (1,219 mm) centers.
7.
Smoke Seal: Provide a smoke seal consisting of a triple layer of folded fabric fastened above the proscenium with a mounting clamp so it rubs the curtain and seals the top of the opening. The fabric shall be Zetex 800 cloth with a minimum weight of 27 oz. per square yard (0.91 KG/sq m).
8.
Traction Style Fire Curtain Hoist:
a.
The hoist shall consist of a traction sheave and a manual clutch with throw out fork, direct coupled and keyed to the output shaft of the gearbox. The entire assembly shall be mounted on a heavy channel base. The hoist shall have a 2,000lb (907.2 KG) lifting capacity at a rate of 25 feet per minute (0.127 m/s).
b.
The iron or steel sheave shall be a minimum diameter of 40 times cable diameter with V-grooves for the number and diameter of lift lines required.
c.
The clutch shall be rated for the applied load. The clutch lever arm shall be kept engaged by tension in the fire line that passes through a pulley in the handle. Release of the clutch is ensured by an overbalance weight acting on the arm.
d.
Gearmotor:
1)
The motor, primary brake and gearbox shall be an integrated unit, with the first stage pinion gear and the primary brake both mounted directly on the motor's armature shaft. No couplings shall be permitted between the motor, primary brake and gear reducer.
2)
Motor shall be totally enclosed fan cooled (TEFC). The motor shall have a minimum AGMA service factor of 1.0 for constant operation.
3)
The gear reducer shall be a combination helical/bevel reducer. The gear case shall be cast iron for protection against shock damage. The output shaft(s) shall have double lip oil seals to prevent leaks. The gearing service factor shall be a minimum of 1.0 with a mechanical strength service factor of 1.25.
4)
Brakes shall be normally spring applied, direct acting, electrically released, and equipped with a manual release. The brake shall be an AC / DC electro-magnetic unit with a minimum retarding torque equal to 200% of motor full load torque.
e.
Four direct struck limit switches shall be installed so that they are operated by the fire curtain arbor. These shall provide top and bottom limits of travel as well as overtravel functions. The direct struck limit switches shall be heavy duty, lever operated rotary head units, with positive opening contacts. Direct struck limit switches shall be Telemecanique ZCKJ series or equal.
f.
Fixed Speed Starter:
1)
The traction drive hoist shall be controlled by a UL 508E listed, full voltage, self protected, reversing starter. Enclosure shall be NEMA 12 with hinged, latching cover. The interior of the starter cabinet shall be "touch safe" per IEC 204-1 "Protection against direct contact" rules.
2)
The NEMA/IEC, magnetically operated, mechanically and electrically interlocked, reversing starter shall be sized to match the hoist motor horsepower and shall be rated for plugging and jogging. Units shall incorporate UL508E Type 2, non-welding, positive break contactors.
3)
Overcurrent protection shall be provided by an IEC Class 10 overload. Short circuit protection shall be provided by a circuit breaker.
4)
Starters shall be wired so that operation of the normal end of travel limit switches shall only allow movement away from the limit switch. Operation of an overtravel limit switch shall open the line contactor, and shall not allow further movement in either direction. A spring return toggle switch shall be housed inside the starter cabinet to allow override of the overtravel limits for resetting purposes.
g.
Control Stations: Two control stations shall be provided in wall mounted NEMA 12 enclosures. Each shall contain hold to operate (dead man) Up and Down pushbuttons, and a mushroom head emergency stop pushbutton.
9.
Loft Block:
a.
The sheave shall have a 12 inch (304.8 mm) pitch diameter, and shall be an iron casting, with a machined groove. The sheave shall be equipped with a 1 inch (25.4 mm) diameter shaft and two tapered roller bearings.
b.
Base angles shall be a minimum 2 inch x 1-1/2 inch x 1/4 inch (50.8 mm x 38.1 mm x 6.4 mm) angle.
c.
Side plates shall be a minimum of 10-gauge (3.57 mm) steel, and shall fully enclose the sheave. Side plates shall be bolted to the base angles.
d.
The block and associated mounting hardware shall have a recommended working load of at least 1400 lbs (635 KG), and shall be designed for use in either upright or underhung usage.
e.
Loft blocks shall have cast iron sheave grooved for one 3/8 inch (9.5 mm) lift line.
10.
Counterweight Arbor:
a.
Arbor shall be long enough to accommodate counterweights to balance the fire curtain and related equipment.
b.
The arbor top shall be a fabricated weldment of 1/2 inch(12.7 mm) formed steel plate and 7 gauge (4.76 mm) formed side plates. The side plates shall be punched to receive 8 cables, and shall be tied together with a bolt and spacer providing a tie-off point for the hand line.
c.
The arbor bottom shall be 1/2 inch x 3 inch (12.7 mm x 76.2 mm) steel bar with counterweight rests to keep the weights from resting on the arbor inner nuts, and a forged steel eye for the hand line tie off.
d.
The top and bottom of the arbor shall be tied together by means of two 3/4 inch (19.1 mm) steel arbor rods. The arbor rods shall have three nuts at each end, the outermost being a lock nut.
e.
The top and bottom shall have bronze guides to engage the lattice track.
f.
Provide 14 gauge (1.98 mm) spreader plates (two minimum) on arbor rods so they can be spaced between counterweights on 2 feet (609.6 mm) centers. Provide a retaining collar on each rod, each with a 1/4 inch (6.4 mm) set screw with red plastic knob for easy locking. One retaining collar shall be welded to the top spreader plate.
11.
Lattice Track:
a.
The track shall consist of two 2 inch x 2 inch x 1/4 inch (50.8 mm x 50.8 mm x 6.4 mm) angles opposing each other with formed brackets alternating front and back on 2 feet centers. Back brackets shall contain two 9/16 inch (14.3 mm) diameter holes for proper anchorage to wall.
b.
A fabricated steel bracket shall support the bottom of the lattice. Bracket shall have ample clearance for passage of hand line.
12.
Battens: Battens shall be made of 2 inch (50.8 mm) I.D. nominal, schedule 40 black iron pipe.
13.
Fire line System: The manual fire line release system shall consist of a 1/8 inch (3.2 mm) diameter wire rope, with six fusible links, side mounting pulleys as required, and two fire line release devices, each mounted in enclosures. Devices shall be mounted 5' (1,524 mm) above the stage floor on each side of the proscenium. All other components such as round weight arbors, arbor guards, floor pulleys, etc. required to form a fully functional fire line release system shall be provided.
14.
Lift Cables: The curtain lift cables shall be 3/8 inch (9.5 mm) diameter 7 x 19 galvanized utility cable as specified. Cables shall be terminated with corresponding cable thimbles and two forged cable clips or a Swage sleeve fitting at each end. The curtain end of each cable shall be attached to the batten using a pipe clamp.
15.
Safety Chains: Supply one more safety chain than the number of lift cables. 1/4 inch (6.4 mm) minimum, proof coil chains shall be located between lift cables except at the ends where chains shall be 12 inch (304.8 mm) or less from the end of the batten. Chains shall be attached to the top of the curtain with pipe clamps around the top of the batten and chain shackles. The other end shall be appropriately attached to the building structure.
E.
Drum Hoist:
1.
General Description:
a.
Furnish and install a motorized straight lift type, automatically closing fire safety curtain for the proscenium opening indicated on the drawings. Curtain shall lap masonry not less than 18 inch (457.2 mm) at each side of the proscenium opening and 24 inch (609.6 mm) at the top of the proscenium opening.
b.
The curtain shall be arranged to comply with the "International Building Code (2006)", American National Standard E1.22-2009, other applicable codes and, in general, intercept fire and smoke and prevent glow from severe fire on the stage from showing on the auditorium side for at least thirty (30) minutes in order to permit safe egress of all people from the auditorium.
c.
The curtain shall close by gravity due to over-balance of the curtain as specified below. Emergency closing shall occur as specified in NFPA 80 or as required by local codes when the fire line is released or fusible links separate.
2.
Special Conditions: It is the intention of this specification to provide a fully functioning fire safety curtain system. Actual equipment and components shall reflect building conditions and approved construction drawings. All dimensions shall be field verified by the Rigging Contractor.
3.
ZetexPlus Fire Safety Curtain: The curtain shall be fabricated from tightly woven J.R. Clancy ZetexPlus 1210-ZP non-wire inserted, non-asbestos, non-carcinogenic silica based cloth, 12 x 7 weave of .070 inch (1.778 mm) thickness weighing at least 40 ounces per square yard (1.35 KG/sq mtr). The curtain shall be listed and approved by the State of California Fire Marshall, the NYC Material Acceptance and Equipment Acceptance Division, and shall bear a certification label from a nationally recognized listing agency. All strips of fabric shall be in continuous lengths running the full height of the curtain. There shall be no horizontal seams. Each seam shall be sewn with two lines of stitching using fiberglass thread. Top and bottom pockets shall be 6 inch (152.4 mm). The bottom pocket shall be equipped with a 3 inch (76.2 mm) yield pad filled with ZetexPlus.
4.
Sides of curtain shall have bronze guides every 18 inch (457.2 mm), securely fastened to a 6 inch (152.4 mm) hem with at least three bolts or rivets, or as required by the governing code.
5.
Guides: Provide 1/4 inch (6.4 mm) wire rope guide at each side of the curtain. These cables shall be attached to a ring at the stage floor level and extend to the roof steel or gridiron where they shall be attached with 3/8 inch x 6 inch (9.525 mm x 152.4 mm) turnbuckles, thimbles, swage sleeves and other fittings as required.
6.
Smoke Pockets: Furnish and install one pair of smoke pockets to extend from the stage floor to a point above the top of the raised curtain or to the height specified in the drawings. Pockets shall consist of a 6 inch deep "Z" channel formed from 1/4 inch (6.4 mm) steel plate and a 1/4 inch x 18 inch (6.4 mm x 457.2 mm) steel plate which shall be bolted to the channels on 2 feet-0 inch (609.6 mm) centers. Channels shall be anchored to the walls on 4 feet-0 inch (1,219 mm) centers.
7.
Smoke Seal: Provide a smoke seal consisting of a triple layer of folded fabric fastened above the proscenium with a mounting clamp so it rubs the curtain and seals the top of the opening. The fabric shall be Zetex 800 cloth with a minimum weight of 27 oz. per square yard (0.91 KG/sq m).
8.
Drum Style Fire Curtain Hoist:
a.
The hoist shall be mounted to allow dual drive lines to travel from either side of the fire curtain centerline, over loft blocks and to the hoist drum.
b.
The hoist shall consist of a cable drum and a manual clutch with throw out fork, direct coupled and keyed to the output shaft of the gearbox. The entire assembly shall be mounted on a heavy channel base. The hoist shall have a 2,000lb (907.2 KG) lifting capacity at a rate of 25 feet per minute (0.127 m/s).
c.
The drum shall be a minimum diameter of 30 times cable diameter with helical grooves for the number and diameter of lift lines required.
d.
The clutch shall be rated for the applied load. The clutch lever arm shall be kept engaged by tension in the fire line that passes through a pulley in the handle. Release of the clutch is ensured by an overbalance weight acting on the arm.
e.
Gearmotor:
1)
The motor, primary brake and gearbox shall be an integrated unit, with the first stage pinion gear and the primary brake both mounted directly on the motor's armature shaft. No couplings shall be permitted between the motor, primary brake and gear reducer.
2)
Motor shall be totally enclosed fan cooled (TEFC). The motor shall have a minimum AGMA service factor of 1.0 for constant operation.
3)
The gear reducer shall be a combination helical/bevel reducer. The gear case shall be cast iron for protection against shock damage. The output shaft(s) shall have double lip oil seals to prevent leaks. The gearing service factor shall be a minimum of 1.0 with a mechanical strength service factor of 1.25.
4)
Brakes shall be normally spring applied, direct acting, electrically released, and equipped with a manual release. The brake shall be an AC / DC electro-magnetic unit with a minimum retarding torque equal to 200% of motor full load torque.
f.
Four direct struck limit switches shall be installed so that they are operated by the fire curtain arbor. These shall provide top and bottom limits of travel as well as overtravel functions. The direct struck limit switches shall be heavy duty, lever operated rotary head units, with positive opening contacts. Direct struck limit switches shall be Telemecanique ZCKJ series or equal.
g.
Fixed Speed Starter:
1)
The hoist shall be controlled by a UL 508E listed, full voltage, self protected, reversing starter. Enclosure shall be NEMA 12 with hinged, latching cover. The interior of the starter cabinet shall be "touch safe" per IEC 204-1 "Protection against direct contact" rules.
2)
The NEMA/IEC, magnetically operated, mechanically and electrically interlocked, reversing starter shall be sized to match the hoist motor horsepower and shall be rated for plugging and jogging. Units shall incorporate UL508E Type 2, non-welding, positive break contactors.
3)
Overcurrent protection shall be provided by an IEC Class 10 overload. Short circuit protection shall be provided by a circuit breaker.
4)
Starters shall be wired so that operation of the normal end of travel limit switches shall only allow movement away from the limit switch. Operation of an overtravel limit switch shall open the line contactor, and shall not allow further movement in either direction. A spring return toggle switch shall be housed inside the starter cabinet to allow override of the overtravel limits for resetting purposes.
h.
Control Stations: Two control stations shall be provided in wall mounted NEMA 12 enclosures. Each shall contain hold to operate (dead man) Up and Down pushbuttons, and a mushroom head emergency stop pushbutton.
9.
Loft Block:
a.
The sheave shall have a 12 inch (304.8 mm) pitch diameter, and shall be an iron casting, with a machined groove. The sheave shall be equipped with a 1 (25.4 mm) diameter shaft and two tapered roller bearings.
b.
Base angles shall be a minimum 2 inch x 1-1/2 inch x 1/4 inch (50.8 mm x 38.1 mm x 6.4 mm) angle.
c.
Side plates shall be a minimum of 10-gauge (3.57 mm) steel, and shall fully enclose the sheave. Side plates shall be bolted to the base angles.
d.
The block and associated mounting hardware shall have a recommended working load of at least 1400 lbs (635 KG), and shall be designed for use in either upright or underhung usage.
e.
Loft blocks shall have cast iron sheave grooved for one 3/8 inch (9.5 mm) lift line.
10.
Counterweight Arbor:
a.
Arbor shall be long enough to accommodate counterweights to permit normal motorized operation of the fire curtain and emergency closure without power.
b.
The arbor top shall be a fabricated weldment of 1/2 inch (12.7 mm) formed steel plate and 7 gauge (4.76 mm) formed side plates. The side plates shall be punched to receive 8 cables, and shall be tied together with a bolt and spacer providing a tie-off point for the hand line.
c.
The arbor bottom shall be 1/2 inch x 3 inch (12.7 mm x 76.2 mm) steel bar with counterweight rests to keep the weights from resting on the arbor inner nuts, and a forged steel eye for the hand line tie off.
d.
The top and bottom of the arbor shall be tied together by means of two 3/4 inch (19.1 mm) steel arbor rods. The arbor rods shall have three nuts at each end, the outermost being a lock nut.
e.
The top and bottom shall have bronze guides to engage the lattice track.
f.
Provide 14 gauge (1.98 mm) spreader plates (two minimum) on arbor rods so they can be spaced between counterweights on 2 feet (609.6 mm) centers. Provide a retaining collar on each rod, each with a 1/4 inch (6.4 mm) set screw with red plastic knob for easy locking. One retaining collar shall be welded to the top spreader plate.
11.
Lattice Track:
a.
The track shall consist of two 2 inch x 2 inch x 1/4 inch (50.8 mm x 50.8 mm x 6.4 mm) angles opposing each other with formed brackets alternating front and back on 2 feet centers. Back brackets shall contain two 9/16 inch (14.3 mm) diameter holes for proper anchorage to wall.
b.
A fabricated steel bracket shall support the bottom of the lattice. Bracket shall have ample clearance for passage of hand line.
12.
Battens: Battens shall be made of 2 inch (50.8 mm) I.D. nominal, schedule 40 black iron pipe.
13.
Fire line System: The manual fire line release system shall consist of a 1/8 inch (3.2 mm) diameter wire rope, with six fusible links, side mounting pulleys as required, and two fire line release devices, each mounted in enclosures. Devices shall be mounted 5 feet (1,524 mm) above the stage floor on each side of the proscenium. All other components such as round weight arbors, arbor guards, floor pulleys, etc. required to form a fully functional fire line release system shall be provided.
14.
Lift Cables: The curtain lift cables shall be 3/8 inch (9.5 mm) diameter 7 x 19 galvanized utility cable as specified. Cables shall be terminated with corresponding cable thimbles and two forged cable clips or a Swage sleeve fitting at each end. The curtain end of each cable shall be attached to the batten using a pipe clamp.
15.
Safety Chains: Supply one more safety chain than the number of lift cables. 1/4 inch (6.4 mm) minimum, proof coil chains shall be located between lift cables except at the ends where chains shall be 12 inch (304.8 mm) or less from the end of the batten. Chains shall be attached to the top of the curtain with pipe clamps around the top of the batten and chain shackles. The other end shall be appropriately attached to the building structure.
2.26
FIRE CURTAIN SYSTEMS, STRAIGHT LIFT CURTAIN, PROSCENIUM OPENING UP TO 22'T x 42'W
A.
Manual (Arbor/Lattice Track):
1.
Product: Model F201m Manual Straight Lift Fire Curtain With Smoke Pocket Roller Guide and Metal Edge Curtain Channel.
2.
General Description:
a.
Furnish and install a manually operated straight lift type, automatically closing fire safety curtain for the proscenium opening indicated on the drawings. Curtain shall lap masonry not less than 18 inch at each side of the proscenium opening and 24 inch at the top of the proscenium opening.
b.
The curtain shall be arranged to comply with the "International Building Code (2006)", American National Standard E1.22-2009, other applicable codes and, in general, intercept fire and smoke and prevent glow from severe fire on the stage from showing on the auditorium side for at least thirty (30) minutes in order to permit safe egress of all people from the auditorium.
c.
The curtain shall close by gravity due to over-balance of the curtain as specified below. Emergency closing shall occur as specified in NFPA 80 or as required by local codes when the fire line is released or fusible links separate.
3.
Special Conditions: It is the intention of this specification to provide a fully functioning fire safety curtain system. Actual equipment and components shall reflect building conditions and approved construction drawings. All dimensions shall be field verified by the Rigging Contractor.
4.
ZetexPlus Fire Safety Curtain: The curtain shall be fabricated from tightly woven J.R. Clancy ZetexPlus 1210-ZP non-wire inserted, non-asbestos, non-carcinogenic silica based cloth, 12 x 7 weave of .070 inch (1.778 mm) thickness weighing at least 40 ounces per square yard (1.35 KG/m²). The curtain shall be listed and approved by the State of California Fire Marshall, the NYC Material and Equipment Acceptance Division, and shall bear a certification label from a nationally recognized listing agency. All strips of fabric shall be in continuous lengths running the full height of the curtain. There shall be no horizontal seams. Each seam shall be sewn with two lines of stitching using fiberglass thread. Top and bottom pockets shall be 6 inch (152.4 mm). The bottom pocket shall be equipped with a 3 inch (76.2 mm) yield pad filled with ZetexPlus.
5.
Metal Edge Channel:
a.
Fire curtain vertical edges shall have u-shaped, 16 gauge (1.59 mm) steel reinforcement 6 inch (152.4 mm) deep.
b.
Channels shall attach to the curtain using the curtain guide bolts.
c.
Channels are supplied in 5 feet (1.52 m) and 10 feet (3,04 m) long sections and can be field cut.
6.
Smoke Pockets with Track: Furnish and install one pair of smoke pockets to extend from the stage floor to a point above the top of the raised curtain or to the height specified in the drawings. Pockets shall consist of a 6 inch (152 mm) deep "Z" channel formed from 1/4 inch (6.4 mm) steel plate and a 1/4 inch x 18 inch (6.4 mm x 457 mm) steel plate bolted to the channels on 2 feet-0 inch (0.61 m) centers. A 14 ga. (1.98 mm) steel channel track, entirely enclosed except for a slot in the side, shall be bolted to the side of the smoke pocket to carry the guide rollers. Channels shall be anchored to the walls on 4 feet-0 inch (1.22 m) centers.
7.
Smoke Seal: Provide a smoke seal consisting of a triple layer of folded fabric fastened above the proscenium with a mounting clamp so it rubs the curtain and seals the top of the opening. The fabric shall be Zetex 800 cloth with a minimum weight of 27 oz. per square yard (0.91 KG/ m²).
8.
12 inch (304.8 mm) Head Block:
a.
The sheave shall be an iron casting with a 12 inch (304.8 mm) outer diameter. The machined rope and cable grooves shall have equal pitch diameters. The sheave shall be equipped with a 1 inch (25.4 mm) diameter shaft and two tapered roller bearings.
b.
Base angles shall be a minimum 2 inch x 1-1/2 inch x 1/4 inch (50.8 mm x 38.1 mm x 6.35 mm) angle with the short leg turned in. The turned in leg shall be notched to allow clear passage of all cables.
c.
Side plates shall be a minimum of 10-gauge (3.570 mm) steel, and shall fully enclose the sheave. Side plates shall be bolted and welded to the base angles for extra strength.
d.
The block and associated mounting hardware shall have a recommended working load of at least 2,500 lbs. (1,134 KG).
e.
Head blocks shall be grooved for six or eight 1/4 inch (6.4 mm) lift lines and one 3/4 inch (19.05 mm) hand line.
9.
Loft Block:
a.
The sheave shall have an 8-1/2 inch (215.9 mm) outside diameter, and shall be an iron casting, with a machined groove. The sheave shall be equipped with a 17 mm diameter shaft and two sealed, precision ball bearings.
b.
Base angles shall be a minimum 1-1/2 inch x 1-1/2 inch x 3/16 inch (38.1 mm x 38.1 mm x 4.76 mm) angle.
c.
Side plates shall be a minimum of 12-gauge (2.78 mm) steel, and shall fully enclose the sheave. Side plates shall be bolted to the base angles.
d.
The block and associated mounting hardware shall have a recommended working load of at least 500 lbs. (226.8 KG), and shall be designed for use in either upright or underhung usage.
e.
Loft blocks shall be cast iron sheave grooved for one 1/4 inch (6.35 mm) lift line.
10.
Counterweight Arbor:
a.
Arbor shall be long enough to accommodate counterweights to balance the fire curtain and related equipment.
b.
The arbor top shall be a fabricated weldment of 1/2 inch (12.7 mm) formed steel plate and 7 gauge (4.76 mm) formed side plates. The side plates shall be punched to receive 8 cables, and shall be tied together with a bolt and spacer providing a tie-off point for the hand line.
c.
The arbor bottom shall be 1/2 inch x 3 inch (12.7 mm x 76.2 mm) steel bar with counterweight rests to keep the weights from resting on the arbor inner nuts, and a forged steel eye for the hand line tie off.
d.
The top and bottom of the arbor shall be tied together by means of two 3/4 inch (19.05 mm) steel arbor rods. The arbor rods shall have three nuts at each end, the outermost being a lock nut.
e.
The top and bottom shall have bronze guides to engage the lattice track.
f.
Provide 14 gauge (1.98 mm) spreader plates (two minimum) on arbor rods so they can be spaced between counterweights on 2 feet (609.6 mm) centers. Provide a retaining collar on each rod, each with a 1/4 inch (6.35 mm) set screw with red plastic knob for easy locking. One retaining collar shall be welded to the top spreader plate.
11.
Lattice Track:
a.
The track shall consist of two 2 inch x 2 inch x 1/4 inch (50.8 mm x 50.8 mm x 6.35 mm) angles opposing each other with formed brackets alternating front and back on 2 feet centers. Back brackets shall contain two 9/16 inch (14.29 mm) diameter holes for proper anchorage to wall.
b.
A fabricated steel bracket shall support the bottom of the lattice. Bracket shall have ample clearance for passage of hand line.
12.
Automatic Floor Block:
a.
The cast iron sheave shall have a 12 inch (304.8 mm) outside diameter, and shall be an iron casting, with a groove for a 1 inch (25.4 mm) rope.
b.
The sheave shall be equipped with a 1 inch (25.4 mm) diameter machined steel shaft and two tapered roller bearings.
c.
The tension block shall be held in place and guided by two 3/4 inch (19.05 mm) diameter rods, each equipped with adjustable locking collar to limit sheave travel.
13.
Battens: Battens shall be made of 2 inch I.D. nominal, schedule 40 black iron pipe.
14.
Fire line System: The manual fire line release system shall consist of a 1/8 inch diameter wire rope, with six fusible links, side mounting pulleys as required, and two fire line release devices, each mounted in enclosures. Devices shall be mounted 5 feet (1,524 mm) above the stage floor on each side of the proscenium. All other components such as the fire curtain arbor release, round weight arbors, arbor guards, floor pulleys, etc. required to form a fully functional fire line release system shall be provided.
15.
Hand line:
a.
Hand line shall be 3/4 inch (19.1 mm) in diameter, employing a 3-strand composite construction combining filament and staple/spun polyester wrapped around fibrillated polyolefin.
b.
The hand line shall contain an identifying tape showing the manufacturer's name, phone number, website, and year of manufacture.
c.
The hand line shall contain a red safety/wear indicator that shall become visible as the rope nears the end of its useful life.
d.
The rope shall hold knots well and be easily spliced. Rope shall not be subject to rotting, mildew, or moisture damage nor shall its length be affected by changes in humidity.
e.
Tape ends before cutting. Attach to arbor with two half hitches or bowline and tape end to standing line with electrical tape.
f.
Hand lines shall be SureGrip rope.
16.
Lift Cables: The curtain lift cables shall be 1/4 inch (6.4 mm) diameter 7x19 galvanized utility cable as specified. Cables shall be terminated with corresponding cable thimbles and two forged cable clips or a Swage sleeve fitting at each end. The curtain end of each cable shall be attached to the batten using a half pipe clamp.
17.
Safety Chains: Supply one more safety chain than the number of lift cables. 1/4 inch proof coil chains shall be located between lift cables except at the ends where chains shall be 12 inch or less from the end of the batten. Chains shall be attached to the top of the curtain with pipe clamps around the top of the batten and chain shackles. The other end shall be appropriately attached to the building structure.
B.
Fire Curtain Hoist:
1.
General Description:
a.
Furnish and install a motorized straight lift type, automatically closing fire safety curtain for the proscenium opening indicated on the drawings. Curtain shall lap masonry not less than 18 inch (457.2 mm) at each side of the proscenium opening and 24 inch (609.6 mm) at the top of the proscenium opening.
b.
The curtain shall be arranged to comply with the "International Building Code (2006)", American National Standard E1.22-2009, other applicable codes and, in general, intercept fire and smoke and prevent glow from severe fire on the stage from showing on the auditorium side for at least thirty (30) minutes in order to permit safe egress of all people from the auditorium.
c.
The curtain shall close by gravity, with the speed of descent controlled by a hydraulic speed regulator. Emergency closing shall occur as specified in NFPA 80 or as required by local codes when the fire line is released or fusible links separate.
2.
Special Conditions: It is the intention of this specification to provide a fully functioning fire safety curtain system. Actual equipment and components shall reflect building conditions and approved construction drawings. All dimensions shall be field verified by the Rigging Contractor.
3.
ZetexPlus Fire Safety Curtain: The curtain shall be fabricated from tightly woven J.R. Clancy ZetexPlus 1210-ZP non-wire inserted, non-asbestos, non-carcinogenic silica based cloth, 12 x 7 weave of .070 inch (1.8 mm) thickness weighing at least 40 ounces per square yard (1.35 KG/sq mtr). The curtain shall be listed and approved by the State of California Fire Marshal, the NYC Material and Equipment Acceptance Division, and shall bear a certification label from a nationally recognized listing agency. All strips of fabric shall be in continuous lengths running the full height of the curtain. There shall be no horizontal seams. Each seam shall be sewn with two lines of stitching using fiberglass thread. Top and bottom pockets shall be 6 inch (152.4 mm). The bottom pocket shall be equipped with a 3 inch (76.2 mm) yield pad filled with ZetexPlus.
4.
Sides of curtain shall have bronze guides every 18 inch (457.2 mm), securely fastened to a 6 inch (152.4 mm) hem with at least three bolts or rivets, or as required by the governing code.
5.
Metal Edge Channel:
a.
Fire curtain vertical edges shall have u-shaped, 16 gauge (1.6 mm) steel reinforcement 6 inch (152 mm) deep.
b.
Channels shall attach to the curtain using the curtain guide bolts.
c.
Channels are supplied in 5 feet (1.5 m) and 10 feet (305 mm) long sections and can be field cut.
6.
Guides: Provide 1/4 inch (6.4 mm) wire rope guide at each side of the curtain. These cables shall be attached to a ring at the stage floor level and extend to the roof steel or gridiron where they shall be attached with 3/8 inch x 6 inch (9.525 mm x 152.4 mm) turnbuckles, thimbles, swage sleeves and other fittings as required.
7.
Smoke Pockets: Furnish and install one pair of smoke pockets to extend from the stage floor to a point above the top of the raised curtain or to the height specified in the drawings. Pockets shall consist of a 6 inch deep "Z" channel formed from 1/4 inch (6.4 mm) steel plate and a 1/4 inch x 18 inch (6.4 mm x 457.2 mm) steel plate which shall be bolted to the channels on 2 feet-0 inch (609.6 mm) centers. Channels shall be anchored to the walls on 4 feet-0 inch (1,219 mm) centers.
8.
Smoke Seal: Provide a smoke seal consisting of a triple layer of folded fabric fastened above the proscenium with a mounting clamp so it rubs the curtain and seals the top of the opening. The fabric shall be Zetex 800 cloth with a minimum weight of 27 oz. per square yard (0.91 KG/sq m).
9.
Fire Curtain Hoist:
a.
Hoist shall consist of a cable drum, coupled to an electric gear motor. Hoist shall have an 1,100lb (500 KG) lifting capacity at a rate of 25 feet per minute (0.13 m/s). The hoist shall be fully enclosed and supplied with a sturdy metal stand or wall brackets.
b.
The cable drum shall be of welded steel construction and carry 75 feet (22.86 m) of 5/16 inch (7.94 mm) diameter 7X19 galvanized utility cable. Twin guards shall keep the cable in the drum groove.
c.
The hoist (and curtain) shall be locked in position by the motor brake located within the enclosure. Releasing the fire line shall disengage the motor brake, permitting the cable drum to rotate, lowering the curtain. The brake handle shall extend through the top of the case, for easy attachment to the end of the fire line. No more than 20lbs (9 KG) of tension in the fire line shall be required to hold the full load capacity of the winch.
d.
The unit shall be equipped with an adjustable hydraulic speed governor to provide maximum control and safety in the closing of the fire curtain and to establish the travel time.
e.
Gearmotor:
1)
The motor and helical/bevel gearbox shall be an integrated unit, with the first stage pinion mounted directly on the motor's armature shaft.
2)
Motors shall be totally enclosed fan cooled (TEFC). The motor shall have a minimum AGMA service factor of 1.0 for constant operation.
3)
The gear case shall be cast iron for protection against shock damage. The output shaft shall have double lip oil seals to prevent leaks. The gearing service factor shall be a minimum of 1.0 with a mechanical strength service factor of 1.25.
f.
Rotary Limit Switch:
1)
Rotary limit switch assembly shall have four independently adjustable switch/cam sets. Cams shall be driven by a geared assembly.
2)
Switches shall have snap acting contacts.
3)
Switches shall be mounted within the winch base as to allow for easy adjustment of the switch settings.
4)
Rotary limit switches shall be Ravasi.
g.
All components in the hoist shall be fully enclosed. Access panels for adjustment and maintenance shall be removable without removing the hoist from service.
h.
Fixed Speed Starter:
1)
The hoist shall be controlled by a UL 508E listed, full voltage, self protected, reversing starter. Enclosure shall be NEMA 12 with hinged, latching cover. The interior of the starter cabinet shall be "touch safe" per IEC 204-1 "Protection against direct contact" rules.
2)
The NEMA/IEC, magnetically operated, mechanically and electrically interlocked, reversing starter shall be sized to match the hoist motor horsepower and shall be rated for plugging and jogging. Units shall incorporate UL508E Type 2, non-welding, positive break contactors.
3)
Overcurrent protection shall be provided by an IEC Class 10 overload. Short circuit protection shall be provided by a circuit breaker.
4)
Starters shall be wired so that operation of the normal end of travel limit switches shall only allow movement away from the limit switch. Operation of an overtravel limit switch shall open the line contactor, and shall not allow further movement in either direction. A spring return toggle switch shall be housed inside the starter cabinet to allow override of the overtravel limits for resetting purposes.
5)
The fire curtain hoist shall be J.R. Clancy 016-501P.
10.
Control Station: Controls, consisting of up and down pushbuttons and an emergency stop switch, are mounted on the motor starter.
11.
Battens: Battens shall be made of 2 inch (50.8 mm) I.D. nominal, schedule 40 black iron pipe.
12.
Fire line System: The manual fire line release system shall consist of a 1/8 inch (3.2 mm) diameter wire rope, with six fusible links, side mounting pulleys as required, and two fire line release devices, each mounted in a steel enclosure with acrylic viewing window that contains a positive method to release the fire line. Devices shall be mounted 5 feet (1,524 mm) above the stage floor on each side of the proscenium. All other components such as round weight arbors, arbor guards, floor pulleys, etc. required to form a fully functional fire line release system shall be provided.
13.
Lift Cables: The curtain lift cables shall be 1/4 inch (6.4 mm) diameter 7x19 galvanized utility cable as specified. Cables shall be terminated with corresponding cable thimbles and two forged cable clips or a Swage sleeve fitting at each end. The curtain end of each cable shall be attached to the batten using a half pipe clamp.
14.
Safety Chains: Supply one more safety chain than the number of lift cables. 1/4 inch (6.4 mm) minimum, proof coil chains shall be located between lift cables except at the ends where chains shall be 12 inch (304.8 mm) or less from the end of the batten. Chains shall be attached to the top of the curtain with pipe clamps around the top of the batten and chain shackles. The other end shall be appropriately attached to the building structure.
C.
Line Shaft Hoist.
1.
General Description:
a.
Furnish and install a motorized straight lift type, automatically closing fire safety curtain for the proscenium opening indicated on the drawings. Curtain shall lap masonry not less than 18 inch (457.2 mm) at each side of the proscenium opening and 24 inch (609.6 mm) at the top of the proscenium opening.
b.
The curtain shall be arranged to comply with the "International Building Code (2006)", American National Standard E1.22-2009, other applicable codes and, in general, intercept fire and smoke and prevent glow from severe fire on the stage from showing on the auditorium side for at least thirty (30) minutes in order to permit safe egress of all people from the auditorium.
c.
The curtain shall close by gravity, with the speed of descent controlled by a hydraulic speed regulator. Emergency closing shall occur as specified in NFPA 80 or as required by local codes when the fire line is released or fusible links separate.
2.
Special Conditions: It is the intention of this specification to provide a fully functioning fire safety curtain system. Actual equipment and components shall reflect building conditions and approved construction drawings. All dimensions shall be field verified by the Rigging Contractor.
3.
ZetexPlus Fire Safety Curtain: The curtain shall be fabricated from tightly woven J.R. Clancy ZetexPlus 1210-ZP non-wire inserted, non-asbestos, non-carcinogenic silica based cloth, 12 x 7 weave of .070 inch (1.8 mm) thickness weighing at least 40 ounces per square yard (1.35 KG/sq mtr). The curtain shall be listed and approved by the State of California Fire Marshal, the NYC Material and Equipment Acceptance Division, and shall bear a certification label from a nationally recognized listing agency. All strips of fabric shall be in continuous lengths running the full height of the curtain. There shall be no horizontal seams. Each seam shall be sewn with two lines of stitching using fiberglass thread. Top and bottom pockets shall be 6 inch (152.4 mm). The bottom pocket shall be equipped with a 3 inch (76.2 mm) yield pad filled with ZetexPlus.
4.
Sides of curtain shall have bronze guides every 18 inch (457.2 mm), securely fastened to a 6 inch (152.4 mm) hem with at least three bolts or rivets, or as required by the governing code.
5.
Metal Edge Channel:
a.
Fire curtain vertical edges shall have u-shaped, 16 gauge (1.6 mm) steel reinforcement 6 inch (152 mm) deep.
b.
Channels shall attach to the curtain using the curtain guide bolts.
c.
Channels are supplied in 5 feet (1.5 m) and 10 feet (305 mm) long sections and can be field cut.
6.
Guides: Provide 1/4 inch (6.4 mm) wire rope guide at each side of the curtain. These cables shall be attached to a ring at the stage floor level and extend to the roof steel or gridiron where they shall be attached with 3/8 inch x 6 inch (9.525 mm x 152.4 mm) turnbuckles, thimbles, swage sleeves and other fittings as required.
7.
Smoke Pockets: Furnish and install one pair of smoke pockets to extend from the stage floor to a point above the top of the raised curtain or to the height specified in the drawings. Pockets shall consist of a 6 inch deep "Z" channel formed from 1/4 inch (6.4 mm) steel plate and a 1/4 inch x 18 inch (6.4 mm x 457.2 mm) steel plate which shall be bolted to the channels on 2 feet-0 inch (609.6 mm) centers. Channels shall be anchored to the walls on 4 feet-0 inch (1,219 mm) centers.
8.
Smoke Seal: Provide a smoke seal consisting of a triple layer of folded fabric fastened above the proscenium with a mounting clamp so it rubs the curtain and seals the top of the opening. The fabric shall be Zetex 800 cloth with a minimum weight of 27 oz. per square yard (0.91 KG/sq m).
9.
Line Shaft Fire Curtain Hoist:
a.
The hoist shall consist of a gearmotor assembly, a drum for each lift line, and interconnecting shafts. The gearmotor assembly shall include a brake release and a hydraulic speed regulator, allowing the curtain to close at a controlled rate of speed when the brake is released by the activation of the fire line. The hoist shall have a minimum1,400 lb (635 KG) lifting capacity at a rate of 25 feet per minute (0.127 m/s).
b.
Gearmotor:
1)
The motor, primary brake and gearbox shall be an integrated unit, with the first stage pinion gear and the primary brake both mounted directly on the motor's armature shaft. No couplings shall be permitted between the motor, primary brake and gear reducer.
2)
Motors shall be totally enclosed fan cooled (TEFC). The motor shall have a minimum AGMA service factor of 1.0 for constant operation.
3)
The gear reducer shall be a helical bevel reducer. The gear case shall be cast iron for protection against shock damage. The output shaft(s) shall have double lip oil seals to prevent leaks. The gearing service factor shall be a minimum of 1.0 with a mechanical strength service factor of 1.25.
4)
Brakes shall be normally spring applied, direct acting, electrically released, and equipped with a manual release. The brake shall be an AC / DC electro-magnetic unit with a minimum retarding torque equal to 200% of motor full load torque.
c.
Drums.
1)
Each helical drum shall be supported by a sturdy steel base, holding the elements of the drum assembly in proper alignment. Both ends of each drum shall be supported by a self-aligning flange bearing.
2)
Alternate drums shall be threaded in opposite directions, to keep the batten from "walking" as its elevation changes.
3)
Drums shall be interconnected by shafts with universal joints at each end. Shafts without universal joints are not acceptable.
d.
Rotary Limit Switches:
1)
Rotary limit switch assemblies shall have two or four independently adjustable switch/cam sets as required. Cams shall be driven by a geared assembly.
2)
Switches shall have snap acting contacts.
3)
Rotary limit switches shall be driven directly or by roller chains. If roller chains are used, sprockets shall be pinned to prevent slipping and sized for maximum usable rotation of switch cams. The input shaft and drive chain shall be fully guarded.
4)
Switches shall be mounted to the hoist base to allow for easy adjustment of the switch settings.
e.
Fixed Speed Starter:
1)
The traction drive hoist shall be controlled by a UL 508E listed, full voltage, self protected, reversing starter. Enclosure shall be NEMA 12 with hinged, latching cover. The interior of the starter cabinet shall be "touch safe" per IEC 204-1 "Protection against direct contact" rules.
2)
The NEMA/IEC, magnetically operated, mechanically and electrically interlocked, reversing starter shall be sized to match the hoist motor horsepower and shall be rated for plugging and jogging. Units shall incorporate UL508E Type 2, non-welding, positive break contactors.
3)
Overcurrent protection shall be provided by an IEC Class 10 overload. Short circuit protection shall be provided by a circuit breaker.
4)
Starters shall be wired so that operation of the normal end of travel limit switches shall only allow movement away from the limit switch. Operation of an overtravel limit switch shall open the line contactor, and shall not allow further movement in either direction. A spring return toggle switch shall be housed inside the starter cabinet to allow override of the overtravel limits for resetting purposes.
10.
Control Stations: Two control stations shall be provided in wall mounted NEMA 12 enclosures. Each shall contain hold to operate (dead man) Up and Down pushbuttons, and a mushroom head emergency stop pushbutton.
11.
Battens: Battens shall be made of 2 inch (50.8 mm) I.D. nominal, schedule 40 black iron pipe.
12.
Fire line System: The manual fire line release system shall consist of a 1/8 inch (3.2 mm) diameter wire rope, with six fusible links, side mounting pulleys as required, and two fire line release devices, each mounted in a steel enclosure with acrylic viewing window that contains a positive method to release the fire line. Devices shall be mounted 5 feet (1,524 mm) above the stage floor on each side of the proscenium. All other components such as round weight arbors, arbor guards, floor pulleys, etc. required to form a fully functional fire line release system shall be provided.
13.
Lift Cables: The curtain lift cables shall be 1/4 inch (6.4 mm) diameter 7x19 galvanized utility cable as specified. Cables shall be terminated with corresponding cable thimbles and two forged cable clips or a Swage sleeve fitting at each end. The curtain end of each cable shall be attached to the batten using a half pipe clamp.
14.
Safety Chains: Supply one more safety chain than the number of lift cables. 1/4 inch (6.4 mm) minimum, proof coil chains shall be located between lift cables except at the ends where chains shall be 12 inch (304.8 mm) or less from the end of the batten. Chains shall be attached to the top of the curtain with pipe clamps around the top of the batten and chain shackles. The other end shall be appropriately attached to the building structure.
D.
Traction Drive Hoist.
1.
General Description:
a.
Furnish and install a motorized straight lift type, automatically closing fire safety curtain for the proscenium opening indicated on the drawings. Curtain shall lap masonry not less than 18 inch (457.2 mm) at each side of the proscenium opening and 24 inch (609.6 mm) at the top of the proscenium opening.
b.
The curtain shall be arranged to comply with the "International Building Code (2006)", American National Standard E1.22-2009, other applicable codes and, in general, intercept fire and smoke and prevent glow from severe fire on the stage from showing on the auditorium side for at least thirty (30) minutes in order to permit safe egress of all people from the auditorium.
c.
The curtain shall close by gravity due to over-balance of the curtain as specified below. Emergency closing shall occur as specified in NFPA 80 or as required by local codes when the fire line is released or fusible links separate.
2.
Special Conditions: It is the intention of this specification to provide a fully functioning fire safety curtain system. Actual equipment and components shall reflect building conditions and approved construction drawings. All dimensions shall be field verified by the Rigging Contractor.
3.
ZetexPlus Fire Safety Curtain: The curtain shall be fabricated from tightly woven J.R. Clancy ZetexPlus 1210-ZP non-wire inserted, non-asbestos, non-carcinogenic silica based cloth, 12 x 7 weave of .070 inch (1.778 mm) thickness weighing at least 40 ounces per square yard (1.35 KG/sq mtr). The curtain shall be listed and approved by the State of California Fire Marshall, the NYC Material Acceptance and Equipment Acceptance Division, and shall bear a certification label from a nationally recognized listing agency. All strips of fabric shall be in continuous lengths running the full height of the curtain. There shall be no horizontal seams. Each seam shall be sewn with two lines of stitching using fiberglass thread. Top and bottom pockets shall be 6 inch (152.4 mm). The bottom pocket shall be equipped with a 3 inch (76.2 mm) yield pad filled with ZetexPlus.
4.
Sides of curtain shall have bronze guides every 18 inch (457.2 mm), securely fastened to a 6 inch (152.4 mm) hem with at least three bolts or rivets, or as required by the governing code.
5.
Metal Edge Channel:
a.
Fire curtain vertical edges shall have u-shaped, 16 gauge (1.6 mm) steel reinforcement 6 inch (152 mm) deep.
b.
Channels shall attach to the curtain using the curtain guide bolts.
c.
Channels are supplied in 5 feet (1.5 m) and 10' (305 mm) long sections and can be field cut.
6.
Guides: Provide 1/4 inch (6.4 mm) wire rope guide at each side of the curtain. These cables shall be attached to a ring at the stage floor level and extend to the roof steel or gridiron where they shall be attached with 3/8 inch x 6 inch (9.525 mm x 152.4 mm) turnbuckles, thimbles, swage sleeves and other fittings as required.
7.
Smoke Pockets: Furnish and install one pair of smoke pockets to extend from the stage floor to a point above the top of the raised curtain or to the height specified in the drawings. Pockets shall consist of a 6 inch deep "Z" channel formed from 1/4 inch (6.4 mm) steel plate and a 1/4 inch x 18 inch (6.4 mm x 457.2 mm) steel plate which shall be bolted to the channels on 2 feet-0 inch (609.6 mm) centers. Channels shall be anchored to the walls on 4 feet-0 inch (1,219 mm) centers.
8.
Smoke Seal: Provide a smoke seal consisting of a triple layer of folded fabric fastened above the proscenium with a mounting clamp so it rubs the curtain and seals the top of the opening. The fabric shall be Zetex 800 cloth with a minimum weight of 27 oz. per square yard (0.91 KG/sq m).
9.
Traction Style Fire Curtain Hoist:
a.
The hoist shall consist of a traction sheave and a manual clutch with throw out fork, direct coupled and keyed to the output shaft of the gearbox. The entire assembly shall be mounted on a heavy channel base. The hoist shall have a 2,000lb (907.2 KG) lifting capacity at a rate of 25 feet per minute (0.127 m/s).
b.
The iron or steel sheave shall be a minimum diameter of 40 times cable diameter with V-grooves for the number and diameter of lift lines required.
c.
The clutch shall be rated for the applied load. The clutch lever arm shall be kept engaged by tension in the fire line that passes through a pulley in the handle. Release of the clutch is ensured by an overbalance weight acting on the arm.
d.
Gearmotor:
1)
The motor, primary brake and gearbox shall be an integrated unit, with the first stage pinion gear and the primary brake both mounted directly on the motor's armature shaft. No couplings shall be permitted between the motor, primary brake and gear reducer.
2)
Motor shall be totally enclosed fan cooled (TEFC). The motor shall have a minimum AGMA service factor of 1.0 for constant operation.
3)
The gear reducer shall be a combination helical/bevel reducer. The gear case shall be cast iron for protection against shock damage. The output shaft(s) shall have double lip oil seals to prevent leaks. The gearing service factor shall be a minimum of 1.0 with a mechanical strength service factor of 1.25.
4)
Brakes shall be normally spring applied, direct acting, electrically released, and equipped with a manual release. The brake shall be an AC / DC electro-magnetic unit with a minimum retarding torque equal to 200% of motor full load torque.
e.
Four direct struck limit switches shall be installed so that they are operated by the fire curtain arbor. These shall provide top and bottom limits of travel as well as overtravel functions. The direct struck limit switches shall be heavy duty, lever operated rotary head units, with positive opening contacts. Direct struck limit switches shall be Telemecanique ZCKJ series or equal.
f.
Fixed Speed Starter:
1)
The traction drive hoist shall be controlled by a UL 508E listed, full voltage, self-protected, reversing starter. Enclosure shall be NEMA 12 with hinged, latching cover. The interior of the starter cabinet shall be "touch safe" per IEC 204-1 "Protection against direct contact" rules.
2)
The NEMA/IEC, magnetically operated, mechanically and electrically interlocked, reversing starter shall be sized to match the hoist motor horsepower and shall be rated for plugging and jogging. Units shall incorporate UL508E Type 2, non-welding, positive break contactors.
3)
Overcurrent protection shall be provided by an IEC Class 10 overload. Short circuit protection shall be provided by a circuit breaker.
4)
Starters shall be wired so that operation of the normal end of travel limit switches shall only allow movement away from the limit switch. Operation of an over travel limit switch shall open the line contactor, and shall not allow further movement in either direction. A spring return toggle switch shall be housed inside the starter cabinet to allow override of the over travel limits for resetting purposes.
g.
Control Stations: Two control stations shall be provided in wall mounted NEMA 12 enclosures. Each shall contain hold to operate (dead man) Up and Down pushbuttons, and a mushroom head emergency stop pushbutton.
10.
Loft Block:
a.
The sheave shall have a 12 inch (304.8 mm) pitch diameter, and shall be an iron casting, with a machined groove. The sheave shall be equipped with a 1 inch (25.4 mm) diameter shaft and two tapered roller bearings.
b.
Base angles shall be a minimum 2 inch x 1-1/2 inch x 1/4 inch (50.8 mm x 38.1 mm x 6.4 mm) angle.
c.
Side plates shall be a minimum of 10-gauge (3.57 mm) steel, and shall fully enclose the sheave. Side plates shall be bolted to the base angles.
d.
The block and associated mounting hardware shall have a recommended working load of at least 1400 lbs (635 KG), and shall be designed for use in either upright or underhung usage.
e.
Loft blocks shall have cast iron sheave grooved for one 3/8 inch (9.5 mm) lift line.
11.
Counterweight Arbor:
a.
Arbor shall be long enough to accommodate counterweights to balance the fire curtain and related equipment.
b.
The arbor top shall be a fabricated weldment of 1/2 inch(12.7 mm) formed steel plate and 7 gauge (4.76 mm) formed side plates. The side plates shall be punched to receive 8 cables, and shall be tied together with a bolt and spacer providing a tie-off point for the hand line.
c.
The arbor bottom shall be 1/2 inch x 3 inch (12.7 mm x 76.2 mm) steel bar with counterweight rests to keep the weights from resting on the arbor inner nuts, and a forged steel eye for the hand line tie off.
d.
The top and bottom of the arbor shall be tied together by means of two 3/4 inch (19.1 mm) steel arbor rods. The arbor rods shall have three nuts at each end, the outermost being a lock nut.
e.
The top and bottom shall have bronze guides to engage the lattice track.
f.
Provide 14 gauge (1.98 mm) spreader plates (two minimum) on arbor rods so they can be spaced between counterweights on 2 feet (609.6 mm) centers. Provide a retaining collar on each rod, each with a 1/4 inch (6.4 mm) set screw with red plastic knob for easy locking. One retaining collar shall be welded to the top spreader plate.
12.
Lattice Track:
a.
The track shall consist of two 2 inch x 2 inch x 1/4 inch (50.8 mm x 50.8 mm x 6.4 mm) angles opposing each other with formed brackets alternating front and back on 2 feet centers. Back brackets shall contain two 9/16 inch (14.3 mm) diameter holes for proper anchorage to wall.
b.
A fabricated steel bracket shall support the bottom of the lattice. Bracket shall have ample clearance for passage of hand line.
13.
Battens: Battens shall be made of 2 inch 50.8 mm) I.D. nominal, schedule 40 black iron pipe.
14.
Fire line System: The manual fire line release system shall consist of a 1/8 inch (3.2 mm) diameter wire rope, with six fusible links, side mounting pulleys as required, and two fire line release devices, each mounted in enclosures. Devices shall be mounted 5 feet (1,524 mm) above the stage floor on each side of the proscenium. All other components such as round weight arbors, arbor guards, floor pulleys, etc. required to form a fully functional fire line release system shall be provided.
15.
Lift Cables: The curtain lift cables shall be 3/8 inch (9.5 mm) diameter 7 x 19 galvanized utility cable as specified. Cables shall be terminated with corresponding cable thimbles and two forged cable clips or a Swage sleeve fitting at each end. The curtain end of each cable shall be attached to the batten using a pipe clamp.
16.
Safety Chains: Supply one more safety chain than the number of lift cables. 1/4 inch (6.4 mm) minimum, proof coil chains shall be located between lift cables except at the ends where chains shall be 12 inch (304.8 mm) or less from the end of the batten. Chains shall be attached to the top of the curtain with pipe clamps around the top of the batten and chain shackles. The other end shall be appropriately attached to the building structure.
E.
Drum Hoist.
1.
General Description:
a.
Furnish and install a motorized straight lift type, automatically closing fire safety curtain for the proscenium opening indicated on the drawings. Curtain shall lap masonry not less than 18 inch (457.2 mm) at each side of the proscenium opening and 24 inch (609.6 mm) at the top of the proscenium opening.
b.
The curtain shall be arranged to comply with the "International Building Code (2006)", American National Standard E1.22-2009, other applicable codes and, in general, intercept fire and smoke and prevent glow from severe fire on the stage from showing on the auditorium side for at least thirty (30) minutes in order to permit safe egress of all people from the auditorium.
c.
The curtain shall close by gravity due to over-balance of the curtain as specified below. Emergency closing shall occur as specified in NFPA 80 or as required by local codes when the fire line is released or fusible links separate.
2.
Special Conditions: It is the intention of this specification to provide a fully functioning fire safety curtain system. Actual equipment and components shall reflect building conditions and approved construction drawings. All dimensions shall be field verified by the Rigging Contractor.
3.
ZetexPlus Fire Safety Curtain: The curtain shall be fabricated from tightly woven J.R. Clancy ZetexPlus 1210-ZP non-wire inserted, non-asbestos, non-carcinogenic silica based cloth, 12 x 7 weave of .070 inch (1.778 mm) thickness weighing at least 40 ounces per square yard (1.35 KG/sq mtr). The curtain shall be listed and approved by the State of California Fire Marshall, the NYC Material Acceptance and Equipment Acceptance Division, and shall bear a certification label from a nationally recognized listing agency. All strips of fabric shall be in continuous lengths running the full height of the curtain. There shall be no horizontal seams. Each seam shall be sewn with two lines of stitching using fiberglass thread. Top and bottom pockets shall be 6 inch (152.4 mm). The bottom pocket shall be equipped with a 3 inch (76.2 mm) yield pad filled with ZetexPlus.
4.
Sides of curtain shall have bronze guides every 18 inch (457.2 mm), securely fastened to a 6 inch (152.4 mm) hem with at least three bolts or rivets, or as required by the governing code.
5.
Metal Edge Channel:
a.
Fire curtain vertical edges shall have u-shaped, 16 gauge (1.6 mm) steel reinforcement 6 inch (152 mm) deep.
b.
Channels shall attach to the curtain using the curtain guide bolts.
c.
Channels are supplied in 5 feet (1.5 m) and 10 feet (305 mm) long sections and can be field cut.
6.
Guides: Provide 1/4 inch (6.4 mm) wire rope guide at each side of the curtain. These cables shall be attached to a ring at the stage floor level and extend to the roof steel or gridiron where they shall be attached with 3/8 inch x 6 inch (9.525 mm x 152.4 mm) turnbuckles, thimbles, swage sleeves and other fittings as required.
7.
Smoke Pockets: Furnish and install one pair of smoke pockets to extend from the stage floor to a point above the top of the raised curtain or to the height specified in the drawings. Pockets shall consist of a 6 inch deep "Z" channel formed from 1/4 inch (6.4 mm) steel plate and a 1/4 inch x 18 inch (6.4 mm x 457.2 mm) steel plate which shall be bolted to the channels on 2 feet-0 inch (609.6 mm) centers. Channels shall be anchored to the walls on 4 feet-0 inch (1,219 mm) centers.
8.
Smoke Seal: Provide a smoke seal consisting of a triple layer of folded fabric fastened above the proscenium with a mounting clamp so it rubs the curtain and seals the top of the opening. The fabric shall be Zetex 800 cloth with a minimum weight of 27 oz. per square yard (0.91 KG/sq m).
9.
Drum Style Fire Curtain Hoist:
a.
The hoist shall be mounted to allow dual drive lines to travel from either side of the fire curtain centerline, over loft blocks and to the hoist drum.
b.
The hoist shall consist of a cable drum and a manual clutch with throw out fork, direct coupled and keyed to the output shaft of the gearbox. The entire assembly shall be mounted on a heavy channel base. The hoist shall have a 2,000lb (907.2 KG) lifting capacity at a rate of 25 feet per minute (0.127 m/s).
c.
The drum shall be a minimum diameter of 30 times cable diameter with helical grooves for the number and diameter of lift lines required.
d.
The clutch shall be rated for the applied load. The clutch lever arm shall be kept engaged by tension in the fire line that passes through a pulley in the handle. Release of the clutch is ensured by an overbalance weight acting on the arm.
e.
Gearmotor:
1)
The motor, primary brake and gearbox shall be an integrated unit, with the first stage pinion gear and the primary brake both mounted directly on the motor's armature shaft. No couplings shall be permitted between the motor, primary brake and gear reducer.
2)
Motor shall be totally enclosed fan cooled (TEFC). The motor shall have a minimum AGMA service factor of 1.0 for constant operation.
3)
The gear reducer shall be a combination helical/bevel reducer. The gear case shall be cast iron for protection against shock damage. The output shaft(s) shall have double lip oil seals to prevent leaks. The gearing service factor shall be a minimum of 1.0 with a mechanical strength service factor of 1.25.
4)
Brakes shall be normally spring applied, direct acting, electrically released, and equipped with a manual release. The brake shall be an AC / DC electro-magnetic unit with a minimum retarding torque equal to 200% of motor full load torque.
f.
Four direct struck limit switches shall be installed so that they are operated by the fire curtain arbor. These shall provide top and bottom limits of travel as well as overtravel functions. The direct struck limit switches shall be heavy duty, lever operated rotary head units, with positive opening contacts. Direct struck limit switches shall be Telemecanique ZCKJ series or equal.
g.
Fixed Speed Starter:
1)
The hoist shall be controlled by a UL 508E listed, full voltage, self protected, reversing starter. Enclosure shall be NEMA 12 with hinged, latching cover. The interior of the starter cabinet shall be "touch safe" per IEC 204-1 "Protection against direct contact" rules.
2)
The NEMA/IEC, magnetically operated, mechanically and electrically interlocked, reversing starter shall be sized to match the hoist motor horsepower and shall be rated for plugging and jogging. Units shall incorporate UL508E Type 2, non-welding, positive break contactors.
3)
Overcurrent protection shall be provided by an IEC Class 10 overload. Short circuit protection shall be provided by a circuit breaker.
4)
Starters shall be wired so that operation of the normal end of travel limit switches shall only allow movement away from the limit switch. Operation of an overtravel limit switch shall open the line contactor, and shall not allow further movement in either direction. A spring return toggle switch shall be housed inside the starter cabinet to allow override of the overtravel limits for resetting purposes.
h.
Control Stations: Two control stations shall be provided in wall mounted NEMA 12 enclosures. Each shall contain hold to operate (dead man) Up and Down pushbuttons, and a mushroom head emergency stop pushbutton.
10.
Loft Block:
a.
The sheave shall have a 12 inch 304.8 mm) pitch diameter, and shall be an iron casting, with a machined groove. The sheave shall be equipped with a 1 inch (25.4 mm) diameter shaft and two tapered roller bearings.
b.
Base angles shall be a minimum 2 inch x 1-1/2 inch x 1/4 inch(50.8 mm x 38.1 mm x 6.4 mm) angle.
c.
Side plates shall be a minimum of 10-gauge (3.57 mm) steel, and shall fully enclose the sheave. Side plates shall be bolted to the base angles.
d.
The block and associated mounting hardware shall have a recommended working load of at least 1400 lbs (635 KG), and shall be designed for use in either upright or underhung usage.
e.
Loft blocks shall have cast iron sheave grooved for one 3/8 inch (9.5 mm) lift line.
11.
Counterweight Arbor:
a.
Arbor shall be long enough to accommodate counterweights to permit normal motorized operation of the fire curtain and emergency closure without power.
b.
The arbor top shall be a fabricated weldment of 1/2 inch (12.7 mm) formed steel plate and 7 gauge (4.76 mm) formed side plates. The side plates shall be punched to receive 8 cables, and shall be tied together with a bolt and spacer providing a tie-off point for the hand line.
c.
The arbor bottom shall be 1/2 inch x 3 inch (12.7 mm x 76.2 mm) steel bar with counterweight rests to keep the weights from resting on the arbor inner nuts, and a forged steel eye for the hand line tie off.
d.
The top and bottom of the arbor shall be tied together by means of two 3/4 inch (19.1 mm) steel arbor rods. The arbor rods shall have three nuts at each end, the outermost being a lock nut.
e.
The top and bottom shall have bronze guides to engage the lattice track.
f.
Provide 14 gauge (1.98 mm) spreader plates (two minimum) on arbor rods so they can be spaced between counterweights on 2 feet (609.6 mm) centers. Provide a retaining collar on each rod, each with a 1/4 inch (6.4 mm) set screw with red plastic knob for easy locking. One retaining collar shall be welded to the top spreader plate.
12.
Lattice Track:
a.
The track shall consist of two 2 inch x 2 inch x 1/4 inch (50.8 mm x 50.8 mm x 6.4 mm) angles opposing each other with formed brackets alternating front and back on 2 feet centers. Back brackets shall contain two 9/16 inch (14.3 mm) diameter holes for proper anchorage to wall.
b.
A fabricated steel bracket shall support the bottom of the lattice. Bracket shall have ample clearance for passage of hand line.
13.
Battens: Battens shall be made of 2 inch (50.8 mm) I.D. nominal, schedule 40 black iron pipe.
14.
Fire line System: The manual fire line release system shall consist of a 1/8 inch (3.2 mm) diameter wire rope, with six fusible links, side mounting pulleys as required, and two fire line release devices, each mounted in enclosures. Devices shall be mounted 5 feet (1,524 mm) above the stage floor on each side of the proscenium. All other components such as round weight arbors, arbor guards, floor pulleys, etc. required to form a fully functional fire line release system shall be provided.
15.
Lift Cables: The curtain lift cables shall be 3/8 inch (9.5 mm) diameter 7 x 19 galvanized utility cable as specified. Cables shall be terminated with corresponding cable thimbles and two forged cable clips or a Swage sleeve fitting at each end. The curtain end of each cable shall be attached to the batten using a pipe clamp.
16.
Safety Chains: Supply one more safety chain than the number of lift cables. 1/4 inch (6.4 mm) minimum, proof coil chains shall be located between lift cables except at the ends where chains shall be 12 inch (304.8 mm) or less from the end of the batten. Chains shall be attached to the top of the curtain with pipe clamps around the top of the batten and chain shackles. The other end shall be appropriately attached to the building structure.
2.27
FIRE CURTAIN SYSTEMS, STRAIGHT LIFT CURTAIN, PROSCENIUM OPENING UP TO 30'T x 50'W
A.
Manual (Arbor/Lattice Track).
1.
General Description:
a.
Furnish and install a manually operated straight lift type, automatically closing fire safety curtain for the proscenium opening indicated on the drawings. Curtain shall lap masonry not less than 18 inch at each side of the proscenium opening and 24 inch at the top of the proscenium opening.
b.
The curtain shall be arranged to comply with the "International Building Code (2006)", American National Standard E1.22-2009, other applicable codes and, in general, intercept fire and smoke and prevent glow from severe fire on the stage from showing on the auditorium side for at least thirty (30) minutes in order to permit safe egress of all people from the auditorium.
c.
The curtain shall close by gravity due to over-balance of the curtain as specified below. Emergency closing shall occur as specified in NFPA 80 or as required by local codes when the fire line is released or fusible links separate.
2.
Special Conditions: It is the intention of this specification to provide a fully functioning fire safety curtain system. Actual equipment and components shall reflect building conditions and approved construction drawings. All dimensions shall be field verified by the Rigging Contractor.
3.
ZetexPlus Fire Safety Curtain: The curtain shall be fabricated from tightly woven J.R. Clancy ZetexPlus 1210-ZP non-wire inserted, non-asbestos, non-carcinogenic silica based cloth, 12 x 7 weave of .070 inch (1.778 mm) thickness weighing at least 40 ounces per square yard (1.35 KG/m²). The curtain shall be listed and approved by the State of California Fire Marshall, the NYC Material and Equipment Acceptance Division, and shall bear a certification label from a nationally recognized listing agency. All strips of fabric shall be in continuous lengths running the full height of the curtain. There shall be no horizontal seams. Each seam shall be sewn with two lines of stitching using fiberglass thread. Top and bottom pockets shall be 6 inch (152.4 mm). The bottom pocket shall be equipped with a 3 inch (76.2 mm) yield pad filled with ZetexPlus.
4.
Metal Edge Channel:
a.
Fire curtain vertical edges shall have u-shaped, 16 gauge (1.59 mm) steel reinforcement 6 inch (152.4 mm) deep.
b.
Channels shall attach to the curtain using the curtain guide bolts.
c.
Channels are supplied in 5 feet (1.52 m) and 10 feet (3,04 m) long sections and can be field cut.
5.
Smoke Pockets with Track: Furnish and install one pair of smoke pockets to extend from the stage floor to a point above the top of the raised curtain or to the height specified in the drawings. Pockets shall consist of a 6 inch (152 mm) deep "Z" channel formed from 1/4 inch (6.4 mm) steel plate and a 1/4 inch x 18 inch (6.4 mm x 457 mm) steel plate bolted to the channels on 2 feet-0 inch (0.61 m) centers. A 14 ga. (1.98 mm) steel channel track, entirely enclosed except for a slot in the side, shall be bolted to the side of the smoke pocket to carry the guide rollers. Channels shall be anchored to the walls on 4 feet-0 inch (1.22 m) centers.
6.
Smoke Seal: Provide a smoke seal consisting of a triple layer of folded fabric fastened above the proscenium with a mounting clamp so it rubs the curtain and seals the top of the opening. The fabric shall be Zetex 800 cloth with a minimum weight of 27 oz. per square yard (0.91 KG/ m²).
7.
12 inch (304.8 mm) Head Block:
a.
The sheave shall be an iron casting with a 12 inch (304.8 mm) outer diameter. The machined rope and cable grooves shall have equal pitch diameters. The sheave shall be equipped with a 1 inch (25.4 mm) diameter shaft and two tapered roller bearings.
b.
Base angles shall be a minimum 2 inch x 1-1/2 inch x 1/4 inch (50.8 mm x 38.1 mm x 6.35 mm) angle with the short leg turned in. The turned in leg shall be notched to allow clear passage of all cables.
c.
Side plates shall be a minimum of 10-gauge (3.570 mm) steel, and shall fully enclose the sheave. Side plates shall be bolted and welded to the base angles for extra strength.
d.
The block and associated mounting hardware shall have a recommended working load of at least 2,500 lbs. (1,134 KG).
e.
Head blocks shall be grooved for six or eight 1/4 inch (6.4 mm) lift lines and one 3/4 inch (19.05 mm) hand line.
8.
Loft Block:
a.
The sheave shall have an 8-1/2 inch (215.9 mm) outside diameter, and shall be an iron casting, with a machined groove. The sheave shall be equipped with a 17 mm diameter shaft and two sealed, precision ball bearings.
b.
Base angles shall be a minimum 1-1/2 inch x 1-1/2 inch x 3/16 inch (38.1 mm x 38.1 mm x 4.76 mm) angle.
c.
Side plates shall be a minimum of 12-gauge (2.78 mm) steel, and shall fully enclose the sheave. Side plates shall be bolted to the base angles.
d.
The block and associated mounting hardware shall have a recommended working load of at least 500 lbs. (226.8 KG), and shall be designed for use in either upright or underhung usage.
e.
Loft blocks shall be cast iron sheave grooved for one 1/4 inch (6.35 mm) lift line.
9.
Counterweight Arbor:
a.
Arbor shall be long enough to accommodate counterweights to balance the fire curtain and related equipment.
b.
The arbor top shall be a fabricated weldment of 1/2 inch (12.7 mm) formed steel plate and 7 gauge (4.76 mm) formed side plates. The side plates shall be punched to receive 8 cables, and shall be tied together with a bolt and spacer providing a tie-off point for the hand line.
c.
The arbor bottom shall be 1/2 inch x 3 inch (12.7 mm x 76.2 mm) steel bar with counterweight rests to keep the weights from resting on the arbor inner nuts, and a forged steel eye for the hand line tie off.
d.
The top and bottom of the arbor shall be tied together by means of two 3/4 inch (19.05 mm) steel arbor rods. The arbor rods shall have three nuts at each end, the outermost being a lock nut.
e.
The top and bottom shall have bronze guides to engage the lattice track.
f.
Provide 14 gauge (1.98 mm) spreader plates (two minimum) on arbor rods so they can be spaced between counterweights on 2 feet (609.6 mm) centers. Provide a retaining collar on each rod, each with a 1/4 inch (6.35 mm) set screw with red plastic knob for easy locking. One retaining collar shall be welded to the top spreader plate.
10.
Lattice Track:
a.
The track shall consist of two 2 inch x 2 inch x 1/4 inch (50.8 mm x 50.8 mm x 6.35 mm) angles opposing each other with formed brackets alternating front and back on 2 feet centers. Back brackets shall contain two 9/16 inch (14.29 mm) diameter holes for proper anchorage to wall.
b.
A fabricated steel bracket shall support the bottom of the lattice. Bracket shall have ample clearance for passage of hand line.
11.
Automatic Floor Block:
a.
The cast iron sheave shall have a 12 inch (304.8 mm) outside diameter, and shall be an iron casting, with a groove for a 1 inch (25.4 mm) rope.
b.
The sheave shall be equipped with a 1 inch (25.4 mm) diameter machined steel shaft and two tapered roller bearings.
c.
The tension block shall be held in place and guided by two 3/4 inch (19.05 mm) diameter rods, each equipped with adjustable locking collar to limit sheave travel.
12.
Battens: Battens shall be made of 2 inch I.D. nominal, schedule 40 black iron pipe.
13.
Fire line System: The manual fire line release system shall consist of a 1/8 inch diameter wire rope, with six fusible links, side mounting pulleys as required, and two fire line release devices, each mounted in enclosures. Devices shall be mounted 5 feet (1,524 mm) above the stage floor on each side of the proscenium. All other components such as the fire curtain arbor release, round weight arbors, arbor guards, floor pulleys, etc. required to form a fully functional fire line release system shall be provided.
14.
Hand line:
a.
Hand line shall be 3/4 inch (19.1 mm) in diameter, employing a 3-strand composite construction combining filament and staple/spun polyester wrapped around fibrillated polyolefin.
b.
The hand line shall contain an identifying tape showing the manufacturer's name, phone number, website, and year of manufacture.
c.
The hand line shall contain a red safety/wear indicator that shall become visible as the rope nears the end of its useful life.
d.
The rope shall hold knots well and be easily spliced. Rope shall not be subject to rotting, mildew, or moisture damage nor shall its length be affected by changes in humidity.
e.
Tape ends before cutting. Attach to arbor with two half hitches or bowline and tape end to standing line with electrical tape.
f.
Hand lines shall be SureGrip rope.
15.
Lift Cables: The curtain lift cables shall be 1/4 inch (6.4 mm) diameter 7x19 galvanized utility cable as specified. Cables shall be terminated with corresponding cable thimbles and two forged cable clips or a Swage sleeve fitting at each end. The curtain end of each cable shall be attached to the batten using a half pipe clamp.
16.
Safety Chains: Supply one more safety chain than the number of lift cables. 1/4 inch proof coil chains shall be located between lift cables except at the ends where chains shall be 12 inch or less from the end of the batten. Chains shall be attached to the top of the curtain with pipe clamps around the top of the batten and chain shackles. The other end shall be appropriately attached to the building structure.
B.
Line Shaft Hoist.
1.
General Description:
a.
Furnish and install a motorized straight lift type, automatically closing fire safety curtain for the proscenium opening indicated on the drawings. Curtain shall lap masonry not less than 18 inch (457.2 mm) at each side of the proscenium opening and 24 inch (609.6 mm) at the top of the proscenium opening.
b.
The curtain shall be arranged to comply with the "International Building Code (2006)", American National Standard E1.22-2009, other applicable codes and, in general, intercept fire and smoke and prevent glow from severe fire on the stage from showing on the auditorium side for at least thirty (30) minutes in order to permit safe egress of all people from the auditorium.
c.
The curtain shall close by gravity, with the speed of descent controlled by a hydraulic speed regulator. Emergency closing shall occur as specified in NFPA 80 or as required by local codes when the fire line is released or fusible links separate.
2.
Special Conditions: It is the intention of this specification to provide a fully functioning fire safety curtain system. Actual equipment and components shall reflect building conditions and approved construction drawings. All dimensions shall be field verified by the Rigging Contractor.
3.
ZetexPlus Fire Safety Curtain: The curtain shall be fabricated from tightly woven J.R. Clancy ZetexPlus 1210-ZP non-wire inserted, non-asbestos, non-carcinogenic silica based cloth, 12 x 7 weave of .070 inch (1.8 mm) thickness weighing at least 40 ounces per square yard (1.35 KG/sq mtr). The curtain shall be listed and approved by the State of California Fire Marshal, the NYC Material and Equipment Acceptance Division, and shall bear a certification label from a nationally recognized listing agency. All strips of fabric shall be in continuous lengths running the full height of the curtain. There shall be no horizontal seams. Each seam shall be sewn with two lines of stitching using fiberglass thread. Top and bottom pockets shall be 6 inch (152.4 mm). The bottom pocket shall be equipped with a 3 inch (76.2 mm) yield pad filled with ZetexPlus.
4.
Sides of curtain shall have steel wheel roller guides every 18 inch (457.2 mm), securely fastened to a 6 inch (152.4 mm) hem with at least three bolts or rivets, or as required by the governing code.
5.
Metal Edge Channel:
a.
Fire curtain vertical edges shall have u-shaped, 16 gauge (1.6 mm) steel reinforcement 6 inch (152 mm) deep.
b.
Channels shall attach to the curtain using the curtain guide bolts.
c.
Channels are supplied in 5 feet (1.5 m) and 10 feet (305 mm) long sections and can be field cut.
6.
Smoke Pockets: Furnish and install one pair of smoke pockets to extend from the stage floor to a point above the top of the raised curtain or to the height specified in the drawings. Pockets shall consist of a 6 inch deep "Z" channel formed from 1/4 inch (6.4 mm) steel plate and a 1/4 inch x 18 inch (6.4 mm x 457.2 mm) steel plate which shall be bolted to the channels on 2 feet-0 inch (609.6 mm) centers. A 14 ga. (1.98 mm) steel channel track, entirely enclosed except for a slot in the side, shall be bolted to the inside of each smoke pocket to carry the guide rollers. Channels shall be anchored to the walls on 4 feet-0 inch (1.2 m) centers.
7.
Smoke Seal: Provide a smoke seal consisting of a triple layer of folded fabric fastened above the proscenium with a mounting clamp so it rubs the curtain and seals the top of the opening. The fabric shall be Zetex 800 cloth with a minimum weight of 27 oz. per square yard (0.91 KG/sq m).
8.
Line Shaft Fire Curtain Hoist:
a.
The hoist shall consist of a gearmotor assembly, a drum for each lift line, and interconnecting shafts. The gearmotor assembly shall include a brake release and a hydraulic speed regulator, allowing the curtain to close at a controlled rate of speed when the brake is released by the activation of the fire line. The hoist shall have a minimum1,400 lb (635 KG) lifting capacity at a rate of 25 feet per minute (0.127 m/s).
b.
Gearmotor:
1)
The motor, primary brake and gearbox shall be an integrated unit, with the first stage pinion gear and the primary brake both mounted directly on the motor's armature shaft. No couplings shall be permitted between the motor, primary brake and gear reducer.
2)
Motors shall be totally enclosed fan cooled (TEFC). The motor shall have a minimum AGMA service factor of 1.0 for constant operation.
3)
The gear reducer shall be a helical bevel reducer. The gear case shall be cast iron for protection against shock damage. The output shaft(s) shall have double lip oil seals to prevent leaks. The gearing service factor shall be a minimum of 1.0 with a mechanical strength service factor of 1.25.
4)
Brakes shall be normally spring applied, direct acting, electrically released, and equipped with a manual release. The brake shall be an AC / DC electro-magnetic unit with a minimum retarding torque equal to 200% of motor full load torque.
c.
Drums.
1)
Each helical drum shall be supported by a sturdy steel base, holding the elements of the drum assembly in proper alignment. Both ends of each drum shall be supported by a self-aligning flange bearing.
2)
Alternate drums shall be threaded in opposite directions, to keep the batten from "walking" as its elevation changes.
3)
Drums shall be interconnected by shafts with universal joints at each end. Shafts without universal joints are not acceptable.
d.
Rotary Limit Switches:
1)
Rotary limit switch assemblies shall have two or four independently adjustable switch/cam sets as required. Cams shall be driven by a geared assembly.
2)
Switches shall have snap acting contacts.
3)
Rotary limit switches shall be driven directly or by roller chains. If roller chains are used, sprockets shall be pinned to prevent slipping and sized for maximum usable rotation of switch cams. The input shaft and drive chain shall be fully guarded.
4)
Switches shall be mounted to the hoist base to allow for easy adjustment of the switch settings.
e.
Fixed Speed Starter:
1)
The traction drive hoist shall be controlled by a UL 508E listed, full voltage, self protected, reversing starter. Enclosure shall be NEMA 12 with hinged, latching cover. The interior of the starter cabinet shall be "touch safe" per IEC 204-1 "Protection against direct contact" rules.
2)
The NEMA/IEC, magnetically operated, mechanically and electrically interlocked, reversing starter shall be sized to match the hoist motor horsepower and shall be rated for plugging and jogging. Units shall incorporate UL508E Type 2, non-welding, positive break contactors.
3)
Overcurrent protection shall be provided by an IEC Class 10 overload. Short circuit protection shall be provided by a circuit breaker.
4)
Starters shall be wired so that operation of the normal end of travel limit switches shall only allow movement away from the limit switch. Operation of an overtravel limit switch shall open the line contactor, and shall not allow further movement in either direction. A spring return toggle switch shall be housed inside the starter cabinet to allow override of the overtravel limits for resetting purposes.
9.
Control Stations: Two control stations shall be provided in wall mounted NEMA 12 enclosures. Each shall contain hold to operate (dead man) Up and Down pushbuttons, and a mushroom head emergency stop pushbutton.
10.
Battens: Battens shall be made of 2 inch (50.8 mm) I.D. nominal, schedule 40 black iron pipe.
11.
Fire line System: The manual fire line release system shall consist of a 1/8 inch (3.2 mm) diameter wire rope, with six fusible links, side mounting pulleys as required, and two fire line release devices, each mounted in a steel enclosure with acrylic viewing window that contains a positive method to release the fire line. Devices shall be mounted 5 feet (1,524 mm) above the stage floor on each side of the proscenium. All other components such as round weight arbors, arbor guards, floor pulleys, etc. required to form a fully functional fire line release system shall be provided.
12.
Lift Cables: The curtain lift cables shall be 1/4 inch (6.4 mm) diameter 7x19 galvanized utility cable as specified. Cables shall be terminated with corresponding cable thimbles and two forged cable clips or a Swage sleeve fitting at each end. The curtain end of each cable shall be attached to the batten using a half pipe clamp.
13.
Safety Chains: Supply one more safety chain than the number of lift cables. 1/4 inch (6.4 mm) minimum, proof coil chains shall be located between lift cables except at the ends where chains shall be 12 inch (304.8 mm) or less from the end of the batten. Chains shall be attached to the top of the curtain with pipe clamps around the top of the batten and chain shackles. The other end shall be appropriately attached to the building structure.
C.
Traction Drive Hoist.
1.
General Description:
a.
Furnish and install a motorized straight lift type, automatically closing fire safety curtain for the proscenium opening indicated on the drawings. Curtain shall lap masonry not less than 18 inch (457.2 mm) at each side of the proscenium opening and 24 inch (609.6 mm) at the top of the proscenium opening.
b.
The curtain shall be arranged to comply with the "International Building Code (2006)", American National Standard E1.22-2009, other applicable codes and, in general, intercept fire and smoke and prevent glow from severe fire on the stage from showing on the auditorium side for at least thirty (30) minutes in order to permit safe egress of all people from the auditorium.
c.
The curtain shall close by gravity due to over-balance of the curtain as specified below. Emergency closing shall occur as specified in NFPA 80 or as required by local codes when the fire line is released or fusible links separate.
2.
Special Conditions: It is the intention of this specification to provide a fully functioning fire safety curtain system. Actual equipment and components shall reflect building conditions and approved construction drawings. All dimensions shall be field verified by the Rigging Contractor.
3.
ZetexPlus Fire Safety Curtain: The curtain shall be fabricated from tightly woven J.R. Clancy ZetexPlus 1210-ZP non-wire inserted, non-asbestos, non-carcinogenic silica based cloth, 12 x 7 weave of .070" (1.778 mm) thickness weighing at least 40 ounces per square yard (1.35 KG/sq mtr). The curtain shall be listed and approved by the State of California Fire Marshall, the NYC Material Acceptance and Equipment Acceptance Division, and shall bear a certification label from a nationally recognized listing agency. All strips of fabric shall be in continuous lengths running the full height of the curtain. There shall be no horizontal seams. Each seam shall be sewn with two lines of stitching using fiberglass thread. Top and bottom pockets shall be 6 inch (152.4 mm). The bottom pocket shall be equipped with a 3 inch (76.2 mm) yield pad filled with ZetexPlus.
4.
Sides of curtain shall have steel wheel roller guides every 18 inch (457.2 mm), securely fastened to a 6 inch (152.4 mm) hem with at least three bolts or rivets, or as required by the governing code.
5.
Metal Edge Channel:
a.
Fire curtain vertical edges shall have u-shaped, 16 gauge (1.6 mm) steel reinforcement 6 inch (152 mm) deep.
b.
Channels shall attach to the curtain using the curtain guide bolts.
c.
Channels are supplied in 5 feet (1.5 m) and 10 feet (305 mm) long sections and can be field cut.
6.
Smoke Pockets: Furnish and install one pair of smoke pockets to extend from the stage floor to a point above the top of the raised curtain or to the height specified in the drawings. Pockets shall consist of a 6 inch deep "Z" channel formed from 1/4 inch (6.4 mm) steel plate and a 1/4 inch x 18 inch (6.4 mm x 457.2 mm) steel plate which shall be bolted to the channels on 2 feet-0 inch (609.6 mm) centers. A 14 ga. (1.98 mm) steel channel track, entirely enclosed except for a slot in the side, shall be bolted to the inside of each smoke pocket to carry the guide rollers. Channels shall be anchored to the walls on 4 feet-0 inch (1,219 mm) centers.
7.
Smoke Seal: Provide a smoke seal consisting of a triple layer of folded fabric fastened above the proscenium with a mounting clamp so it rubs the curtain and seals the top of the opening. The fabric shall be Zetex 800 cloth with a minimum weight of 27 oz. per square yard (0.91 KG/sq m).
8.
Traction Style Fire Curtain Hoist:
a.
The hoist shall consist of a traction sheave and a manual clutch with throw out fork, direct coupled and keyed to the output shaft of the gearbox. The entire assembly shall be mounted on a heavy channel base. The hoist shall have a 2,000lb (907.2 KG) lifting capacity at a rate of 25 feet per minute (0.127 m/s).
b.
The iron or steel sheave shall be a minimum diameter of 40 times cable diameter with V-grooves for the number and diameter of lift lines required.
c.
The clutch shall be rated for the applied load. The clutch lever arm shall be kept engaged by tension in the fire line that passes through a pulley in the handle. Release of the clutch is ensured by an overbalance weight acting on the arm.
d.
Gearmotor:
1)
The motor, primary brake and gearbox shall be an integrated unit, with the first stage pinion gear and the primary brake both mounted directly on the motor's armature shaft. No couplings shall be permitted between the motor, primary brake and gear reducer.
2)
Motor shall be totally enclosed fan cooled (TEFC). The motor shall have a minimum AGMA service factor of 1.0 for constant operation.
3)
The gear reducer shall be a combination helical/bevel reducer. The gear case shall be cast iron for protection against shock damage. The output shaft(s) shall have double lip oil seals to prevent leaks. The gearing service factor shall be a minimum of 1.0 with a mechanical strength service factor of 1.25.
4)
Brakes shall be normally spring applied, direct acting, electrically released, and equipped with a manual release. The brake shall be an AC / DC electro-magnetic unit with a minimum retarding torque equal to 200% of motor full load torque.
e.
Four direct struck limit switches shall be installed so that they are operated by the fire curtain arbor. These shall provide top and bottom limits of travel as well as overtravel functions. The direct struck limit switches shall be heavy duty, lever operated rotary head units, with positive opening contacts. Direct struck limit switches shall be Telemecanique ZCKJ series or equal.
f.
Fixed Speed Starter:
1)
The traction drive hoist shall be controlled by a UL 508E listed, full voltage, self protected, reversing starter. Enclosure shall be NEMA 12 with hinged, latching cover. The interior of the starter cabinet shall be "touch safe" per IEC 204-1 "Protection against direct contact" rules.
2)
The NEMA/IEC, magnetically operated, mechanically and electrically interlocked, reversing starter shall be sized to match the hoist motor horsepower and shall be rated for plugging and jogging. Units shall incorporate UL508E Type 2, non-welding, positive break contactors.
3)
Overcurrent protection shall be provided by an IEC Class 10 overload. Short circuit protection shall be provided by a circuit breaker.
4)
Starters shall be wired so that operation of the normal end of travel limit switches shall only allow movement away from the limit switch. Operation of an overtravel limit switch shall open the line contactor, and shall not allow further movement in either direction. A spring return toggle switch shall be housed inside the starter cabinet to allow override of the overtravel limits for resetting purposes.
9.
Control Stations: Two control stations shall be provided in wall mounted NEMA 12 enclosures. Each shall contain hold to operate (dead man) Up and Down pushbuttons, and a mushroom head emergency stop pushbutton.
10.
Loft Block:
a.
The sheave shall have a 12 inch (304.8 mm) pitch diameter, and shall be an iron casting, with a machined groove. The sheave shall be equipped with a 1 inch (25.4 mm) diameter shaft and two tapered roller bearings.
b.
Base angles shall be a minimum 2 inch x 1-1/2 inch x 1/4 inch (50.8 mm x 38.1 mm x 6.4 mm) angle.
c.
Side plates shall be a minimum of 10-gauge (3.57 mm) steel, and shall fully enclose the sheave. Side plates shall be bolted to the base angles.
d.
The block and associated mounting hardware shall have a recommended working load of at least 1400 lbs (635 KG), and shall be designed for use in either upright or underhung usage.
e.
Loft blocks shall have cast iron sheave grooved for one 3/8 inch (9.5 mm) lift line.
11.
Counterweight Arbor:
a.
Arbor shall be long enough to accommodate counterweights to balance the fire curtain and related equipment.
b.
The arbor top shall be a fabricated weldment of 1/2 inch (12.7 mm) formed steel plate and 7 gauge (4.76 mm) formed side plates. The side plates shall be punched to receive 8 cables, and shall be tied together with a bolt and spacer providing a tie-off point for the hand line.
c.
The arbor bottom shall be 1/2 inch x 3 inch (12.7 mm x 76.2 mm) steel bar with counterweight rests to keep the weights from resting on the arbor inner nuts, and a forged steel eye for the hand line tie off.
d.
The top and bottom of the arbor shall be tied together by means of two 3/4 inch (19.1 mm) steel arbor rods. The arbor rods shall have three nuts at each end, the outermost being a lock nut.
e.
The top and bottom shall have bronze guides to engage the lattice track.
f.
Provide 14 gauge (1.98 mm) spreader plates (two minimum) on arbor rods so they can be spaced between counterweights on 2 feet (609.6 mm) centers. Provide a retaining collar on each rod, each with a 1/4 inch (6.4 mm) set screw with red plastic knob for easy locking. One retaining collar shall be welded to the top spreader plate.
12.
Lattice Track:
a.
The track shall consist of two 2 inch x 2 inch x 1/4 inch (50.8 mm x 50.8 mm x 6.4 mm) angles opposing each other with formed brackets alternating front and back on 2 feet centers. Back brackets shall contain two 9/16 inch (14.3 mm) diameter holes for proper anchorage to wall.
b.
A fabricated steel bracket shall support the bottom of the lattice. Bracket shall have ample clearance for passage of hand line.
13.
Battens: Battens shall be made of 2 inch (50.8 mm) I.D. nominal, schedule 40 black iron pipe.
14.
Fire line System: The manual fire line release system shall consist of a 1/8 inch (3.2 mm) diameter wire rope, with six fusible links, side mounting pulleys as required, and two fire line release devices, each mounted in enclosures. Devices shall be mounted 5 feet (1,524 mm) above the stage floor on each side of the proscenium. All other components such as round weight arbors, arbor guards, floor pulleys, etc. required to form a fully functional fire line release system shall be provided.
15.
Lift Cables: The curtain lift cables shall be 3/8 inch (9.5 mm) diameter 7 x 19 galvanized utility cable as specified. Cables shall be terminated with corresponding cable thimbles and two forged cable clips or a Swage sleeve fitting at each end. The curtain end of each cable shall be attached to the batten using pipe clamp.
16.
Safety Chains: Supply one more safety chain than the number of lift cables. 1/4 inch (6.4 mm) minimum, proof coil chains shall be located between lift cables except at the ends where chains shall be 12 inch (304.8 mm) or less from the end of the batten. Chains shall be attached to the top of the curtain with pipe clamps around the top of the batten and chain shackles. The other end shall be appropriately attached to the building structure.
D.
Drum Hoist.
1.
General Description:
a.
Furnish and install a motorized straight lift type, automatically closing fire safety curtain for the proscenium opening indicated on the drawings. Curtain shall lap masonry not less than 18 inch (457.2 mm) at each side of the proscenium opening and 24 inch (609.6 mm) at the top of the proscenium opening.
b.
The curtain shall be arranged to comply with the "International Building Code (2006)", American National Standard E1.22-2009, other applicable codes and, in general, intercept fire and smoke and prevent glow from severe fire on the stage from showing on the auditorium side for at least thirty (30) minutes in order to permit safe egress of all people from the auditorium.
c.
The curtain shall close by gravity due to over-balance of the curtain as specified below. Emergency closing shall occur as specified in NFPA 80 or as required by local codes when the fire line is released or fusible links separate.
2.
Special Conditions: It is the intention of this specification to provide a fully functioning fire safety curtain system. Actual equipment and components shall reflect building conditions and approved construction drawings. All dimensions shall be field verified by the Rigging Contractor.
3.
ZetexPlus Fire Safety Curtain: The curtain shall be fabricated from tightly woven J.R. Clancy ZetexPlus 1210-ZP non-wire inserted, non-asbestos, non-carcinogenic silica based cloth, 12 x 7 weave of .070 inch (1.778 mm) thickness weighing at least 40 ounces per square yard (1.35 KG/sq mtr). The curtain shall be listed and approved by the State of California Fire Marshall, the NYC Material Acceptance and Equipment Acceptance Division, and shall bear a certification label from a nationally recognized listing agency. All strips of fabric shall be in continuous lengths running the full height of the curtain. There shall be no horizontal seams. Each seam shall be sewn with two lines of stitching using fiberglass thread. Top and bottom pockets shall be 6 inch (152.4 mm). The bottom pocket shall be equipped with a 3 inch (76.2 mm) yield pad filled with ZetexPlus.
4.
Sides of curtain shall have steel wheel roller guides every 18 inch (457.2 mm), securely fastened to a 6 inch (152.4 mm) hem with at least three bolts or rivets, or as required by the governing code.
5.
Metal Edge Channel:
a.
Fire curtain vertical edges shall have u-shaped, 16 gauge (1.6 mm) steel reinforcement 6 inch (152 mm) deep.
b.
Channels shall attach to the curtain using the curtain guide bolts.
c.
Channels are supplied in 5 feet (1.5 m) and 10 feet (305 mm) long sections and can be field cut.
6.
Smoke Pockets: Furnish and install one pair of smoke pockets to extend from the stage floor to a point above the top of the raised curtain or to the height specified in the drawings. Pockets shall consist of a 6 inch deep "Z" channel formed from 1/4 inch (6.4 mm) steel plate and a 1/4 inch x 18 inch (6.4 mm x 457.2 mm) steel plate which shall be bolted to the channels on 2 feet-0 inch (609.6 mm) centers. A 14 ga. (1.98 mm) steel channel track, entirely enclosed except for a slot in the side, shall be bolted to the inside of each smoke pocket to carry the guide rollers. Channels shall be anchored to the walls on 4 feet-0 inch (1,219 mm) centers.
7.
Smoke Seal: Provide a smoke seal consisting of a triple layer of folded fabric fastened above the proscenium with a mounting clamp so it rubs the curtain and seals the top of the opening. The fabric shall be Zetex 800 cloth with a minimum weight of 27 oz. per square yard (0.91 KG/sq m).
8.
Drum Style Fire Curtain Hoist:
a.
The hoist shall be mounted to allow dual drive lines to travel from either side of the fire curtain centerline, over loft blocks and to the hoist drum.
b.
The hoist shall consist of a cable drum and a manual clutch with throw out fork, direct coupled and keyed to the output shaft of the gearbox. The entire assembly shall be mounted on a heavy channel base. The hoist shall have a 2,000lb (907.2 KG) lifting capacity at a rate of 25 feet per minute (0.127 m/s).
c.
The drum shall be a minimum diameter of 30 times cable diameter with helical grooves for the number and diameter of lift lines required.
d.
The clutch shall be rated for the applied load. The clutch lever arm shall be kept engaged by tension in the fire line that passes through a pulley in the handle. Release of the clutch is ensured by an overbalance weight acting on the arm.
e.
Gearmotor:
1)
The motor, primary brake and gearbox shall be an integrated unit, with the first stage pinion gear and the primary brake both mounted directly on the motor's armature shaft. No couplings shall be permitted between the motor, primary brake and gear reducer.
2)
Motor shall be totally enclosed fan cooled (TEFC). The motor shall have a minimum AGMA service factor of 1.0 for constant operation.
3)
The gear reducer shall be a combination helical/bevel reducer. The gear case shall be cast iron for protection against shock damage. The output shaft(s) shall have double lip oil seals to prevent leaks. The gearing service factor shall be a minimum of 1.0 with a mechanical strength service factor of 1.25.
4)
Brakes shall be normally spring applied, direct acting, electrically released, and equipped with a manual release. The brake shall be an AC / DC electro-magnetic unit with a minimum retarding torque equal to 200% of motor full load torque.
f.
Four direct struck limit switches shall be installed so that they are operated by the fire curtain arbor. These shall provide top and bottom limits of travel as well as overtravel functions. The direct struck limit switches shall be heavy duty, lever operated rotary head units, with positive opening contacts. Direct struck limit switches shall be Telemecanique ZCKJ series or equal.
g.
Fixed Speed Starter:
1)
The hoist shall be controlled by a UL 508E listed, full voltage, self protected, reversing starter. Enclosure shall be NEMA 12 with hinged, latching cover. The interior of the starter cabinet shall be "touch safe" per IEC 204-1 "Protection against direct contact" rules.
2)
The NEMA/IEC, magnetically operated, mechanically and electrically interlocked, reversing starter shall be sized to match the hoist motor horsepower and shall be rated for plugging and jogging. Units shall incorporate UL508E Type 2, non-welding, positive break contactors.
3)
Overcurrent protection shall be provided by an IEC Class 10 overload. Short circuit protection shall be provided by a circuit breaker.
4)
Starters shall be wired so that operation of the normal end of travel limit switches shall only allow movement away from the limit switch. Operation of an overtravel limit switch shall open the line contactor, and shall not allow further movement in either direction. A spring return toggle switch shall be housed inside the starter cabinet to allow override of the overtravel limits for resetting purposes.
9.
Control Stations: Two control stations shall be provided in wall mounted NEMA 12 enclosures. Each shall contain hold to operate (dead man) Up and Down pushbuttons, and a mushroom head emergency stop pushbutton.
10.
Loft Block:
a.
The sheave shall have a 12 inch (304.8 mm) pitch diameter, and shall be an iron casting, with a machined groove. The sheave shall be equipped with a 1 inch (25.4 mm) diameter shaft and two tapered roller bearings.
b.
Base angles shall be a minimum 2 inch x 1-1/2 inch x 1/4 inch (50.8 mm x 38.1 mm x 6.4 mm) angle.
c.
Side plates shall be a minimum of 10-gauge (3.57 mm) steel, and shall fully enclose the sheave. Side plates shall be bolted to the base angles.
d.
The block and associated mounting hardware shall have a recommended working load of at least 1400 lbs (635 KG), and shall be designed for use in either upright or underhung usage.
e.
Loft blocks shall have cast iron sheave grooved for one 3/8 inch (9.5 mm) lift line.
11.
Counterweight Arbor:
a.
Arbor shall be long enough to accommodate counterweights to permit normal motorized operation of the fire curtain and emergency closure without power.
b.
The arbor top shall be a fabricated weldment of 1/2 inch (12.7 mm) formed steel plate and 7 gauge (4.76 mm) formed side plates. The side plates shall be punched to receive 8 cables, and shall be tied together with a bolt and spacer providing a tie-off point for the hand line.
c.
The arbor bottom shall be 1/2 inch x 3 inch (12.7 mm x 76.2 mm) steel bar with counterweight rests to keep the weights from resting on the arbor inner nuts, and a forged steel eye for the hand line tie off.
d.
The top and bottom of the arbor shall be tied together by means of two 3/4 inch (19.1 mm) steel arbor rods. The arbor rods shall have three nuts at each end, the outermost being a lock nut.
e.
The top and bottom shall have bronze guides to engage the lattice track.
f.
Provide 14 gauge (1.98 mm) spreader plates (two minimum) on arbor rods so they can be spaced between counterweights on 2 feet (609.6 mm) centers. Provide a retaining collar on each rod, each with a 1/4 inch (6.4 mm) set screw with red plastic knob for easy locking. One retaining collar shall be welded to the top spreader plate.
12.
Lattice Track:
a.
The track shall consist of two 2 inch x 2 inch x 1/4 inch (50.8 mm x 50.8 mm x 6.4 mm) angles opposing each other with formed brackets alternating front and back on 2 feet centers. Back brackets shall contain two 9/16 inch (14.3 mm) diameter holes for proper anchorage to wall.
b.
A fabricated steel bracket shall support the bottom of the lattice. Bracket shall have ample clearance for passage of hand line.
13.
Battens: Battens shall be made of 2 inch (50.8 mm) I.D. nominal, schedule 40 black iron pipe.
14.
Fire line System: The manual fire line release system shall consist of a 1/8 inch (3.2 mm) diameter wire rope, with six fusible links, side mounting pulleys as required, and two fire line release devices, each mounted in enclosures. Devices shall be mounted 5 feet (1,524 mm) above the stage floor on each side of the proscenium. All other components such as round weight arbors, arbor guards, floor pulleys, etc. required to form a fully functional fire line release system shall be provided.
15.
Lift Cables: The curtain lift cables shall be 3/8 inch (9.5 mm) diameter 7 x 19 galvanized utility cable as specified. Cables shall be terminated with corresponding cable thimbles and two forged cable clips or a Swage sleeve fitting at each end. The curtain end of each cable shall be attached to the batten using a pipe clamp.
16.
Safety Chains: Supply one more safety chain than the number of lift cables. 1/4 inch (6.4 mm) minimum, proof coil chains shall be located between lift cables except at the ends where chains shall be 12 inch (304.8 mm) or less from the end of the batten. Chains shall be attached to the top of the curtain with pipe clamps around the top of the batten and chain shackles. The other end shall be appropriately attached to the building structure.
2.28
FIRE CURTAIN SYSTEMS, STRAIGHT LIFT CURTAIN, PROSCENIUM OPENING GREATER THAN 30'T x 50'W
A.
Line Shaft Hoist.
1.
General Description:
a.
Furnish and install a motorized straight lift type, automatically closing fire safety curtain for the proscenium opening indicated on the drawings. Curtain shall lap masonry not less than 18 inch (457 mm) at each side of the proscenium opening and 24 inch (610 mm) at the top of the proscenium opening.
b.
The curtain shall be arranged to comply with the "International Building Code (2006)", American National Standard E1.22-2009, other applicable codes and, in general, intercept fire and smoke and prevent glow from severe fire on the stage from showing on the auditorium side for at least thirty (30) minutes in order to permit safe egress of all people from the auditorium.
c.
The curtain shall close by gravity due to over-balance of the curtain as specified below. Emergency closing shall occur as specified in NFPA 80 or as required by local codes when the fire line is released or fusible links separate.
2.
Special Conditions: It is the intention of this specification to provide a fully functioning fire safety curtain system. Actual equipment and components shall reflect building conditions and approved construction drawings. All dimensions shall be field verified by the Rigging Contractor.
3.
ZetexPlus Fire Safety Curtain: The curtain shall be fabricated from tightly woven J.R. Clancy ZetexPlus 1210-ZP non-wire inserted, non-asbestos, non-carcinogenic silica based cloth, 12 x 7 weave of .070 inch (1.8 mm) thickness weighing at least 40 oz/yd² (1.35 KG/m²). The curtain shall be listed and approved by the State of California Fire Marshall, the NYC Material Acceptance and Equipment Acceptance Division, and shall bear a certification label from a nationally recognized listing agency. All strips of fabric shall be in continuous lengths running the full height of the curtain. There shall be no horizontal seams. Each seam shall be sewn with two lines of stitching using fiberglass thread. Top and bottom pockets shall be 6 inch (152.4 mm). The bottom pocket shall be equipped with a 6 inch (152.4 mm) yield pad filled with ZetexPlus.
4.
Fire Safety Curtain Frame: The fully framed fire safety curtain shall be designed and fabricated to sustain a minimum uniform wind load of 2 psf, or as indicated by code. The attachment of the curtain to the frame shall be made to facilitate future maintenance and repair. The frame shall remain engaged in its guides and operate under the full range of temperatures and wind conditions.
5.
Each side of the curtain frame shall have two bronze guides, securely fastened to the curtain frame.
6.
Smoke Seal: Provide a smoke seal consisting of a triple layer of folded fabric fastened above the proscenium with a mounting clamp so it rubs the curtain and seals the top of the opening. The fabric shall be Zetex 800 cloth with a minimum weight of 27 oz/yd² (0.91 KG/m²).
7.
Line Shaft Fire Curtain Hoist:
a.
The hoist shall consist of a gearmotor assembly, a drum for each lift line, and interconnecting shafts. The gearmotor assembly shall include a brake release and a hydraulic speed regulator, allowing the curtain to close at a controlled rate of speed when the brake is released by the activation of the fire line. The hoist shall have a minimum 1,400lb. (635 KG) lifting capacity at a rate of 25 feet/min (0.127 m/s).
b.
Gearmotor:
1)
The motor, primary brake and gearbox shall be an integrated unit, with the first stage pinion gear and the primary brake both mounted directly on the motor's armature shaft. No couplings shall be permitted between the motor, primary brake and gear reducer.
2)
Motors shall be totally enclosed fan cooled (TEFC). The motor shall have a minimum AGMA service factor of 1.0 for constant operation.
3)
The gear reducer shall be a helical bevel reducer. The gear case shall be cast iron for protection against shock damage. The output shaft(s) shall have double lip oil seals to prevent leaks. The gearing service factor shall be a minimum of 1.0 with a mechanical strength service factor of 1.25.
4)
Brakes shall be normally spring applied, direct acting, electrically released, and equipped with a manual release. The brake shall be an AC / DC electro-magnetic unit with a minimum retarding torque equal to 200% of motor full load torque.
c.
Drums.
1)
Each helical drum shall be supported by a sturdy steel base, holding the elements of the drum assembly in proper alignment. Both ends of each drum shall be supported by a self-aligning flange bearing.
2)
Alternate drums shall be threaded in opposite directions, to keep the batten from "walking" as its elevation changes.
3)
Drums shall be interconnected by shafts with universal joints at each end. Shafts without universal joints are not acceptable.
d.
Rotary Limit Switches:
1)
Rotary limit switch assemblies shall have two or four independently adjustable switch/cam sets as required. Cams shall be driven by a geared assembly.
2)
Switches shall have snap acting contacts.
3)
Rotary limit switches shall be driven directly or by roller chains. If roller chains are used, sprockets shall be pinned to prevent slipping and sized for maximum usable rotation of switch cams. The input shaft and drive chain shall be fully guarded.
4)
Switches shall be mounted to the hoist base to allow for easy adjustment of the switch settings.
e.
Fixed Speed Starter:
1)
The hoist shall be controlled by a UL 508E listed, full voltage, self-protected, reversing starter. Enclosure shall be NEMA 12 with hinged, latching cover. The interior of the starter cabinet shall be "touch safe" per IEC 204-1 "Protection against direct contact" rules.
2)
The NEMA/IEC, magnetically operated, mechanically and electrically interlocked, reversing starter shall be sized to match the hoist motor horsepower and shall be rated for plugging and jogging. Units shall incorporate UL508E Type 2, non-welding, positive break contactors.
3)
Overcurrent protection shall be provided by an IEC Class 10 overload. Short circuit protection shall be provided by a circuit breaker.
4)
Starters shall be wired so that operation of the normal end of travel limit switches shall only allow movement away from the limit switch. Operation of an overtravel limit switch shall open the line contactor, and shall not allow further movement in either direction. A spring return toggle switch shall be housed inside the starter cabinet to allow override of the overtravel limits for resetting purposes.
8.
Control Stations: Two control stations shall be provided in wall mounted NEMA 12 enclosures. Each shall contain hold to operate (dead man) Up and Down pushbuttons, and a mushroom head emergency stop pushbutton.
9.
Fire line System: The manual fire line release system shall consist of a 1/8 inch (3.2 mm) diameter wire rope, with six UL listed fusible links that release at 165 degree F (74 degree C), side mounting pulleys as required, and two fire line release devices, each mounted in a steel enclosure with acrylic viewing window that contains a positive method to release the fire line. Devices shall be mounted 5 feet-0 inch (1,524 mm) above the stage floor on each side of the proscenium. All other components such as round weight arbors, arbor guards, floor pulleys, etc. required to form a fully functional fire line release system shall be provided.
10.
Lift Cables: The curtain lift cables shall be 3/8 inch (9.5 mm) diameter 7 x 19 galvanized utility cable as specified. Cables shall be terminated with corresponding cable thimbles and two forged cable clips or a Swage sleeve fitting at each end. The curtain end of each cable shall be attached to the batten using a pipe clamp.
11.
Battens: Battens shall be made of 2 inch (50.8 mm) I.D. nominal, schedule 40 black iron pipe.
12.
Safety Chains: Supply one more safety chain than the number of lift cables. 1/4 inch (6.4 mm) minimum, proof coil chains shall be located between lift cables except at the ends where the chains shall be 12 inch (304.8 mm) or less from the end of the batten. Chains shall be attached to the top of the curtain with pipe clamps around the top of the batten and chain shackles. The other end shall be appropriately attached to the building structure.
13.
Smoke Pockets with Track: Furnish and install one pair of smoke pockets to extend from the stage floor to a point above the top of the raised curtain or to the height specified in the drawings. Pockets shall consist of an 8 inch (203 mm) deep "Z" channel formed from 1/4 inch (6.4 mm) steel plate and a 1/4 inch x 18 inch (6.4 mm x 457 mm) steel plate which shall be bolted to the channels on 2 feet-0 inch (610 mm) centers. An angle iron, steel track shall be bolted to the side of the smoke pocket to carry the guides. Channels shall be anchored to the walls on 4 feet-0 inch (1,219 mm) centers.
B.
Traction Drive Hoist.
1.
General Description:
a.
Furnish and install a motorized straight lift type, automatically closing fire safety curtain for the proscenium opening indicated on the drawings. Curtain shall lap masonry not less than 18 inch 457 mm) at each side of the proscenium opening and 24 inch (610 mm) at the top of the proscenium opening.
b.
The curtain shall be arranged to comply with the International Building Code (2015), NFPA 80: Standard for Fire Doors and Other Opening Protectives, other applicable codes and, in general, intercept fire and smoke and prevent glow from severe fire on the stage from showing on the auditorium side for at least thirty (30) minutes in order to permit safe egress of all people from the auditorium.
c.
The curtain shall close by gravity due to over-balance of the curtain as specified below. When the fire line is released, emergency closing shall occur at an average speed between 6 in/sec (152 mm/sec) and 24 in/sec (610 mm/sec) with the last 8 feet (2.4 m) taking more than 5 seconds.
2.
Special Conditions: It is the intention of this specification to provide a fully functioning fire safety curtain system. Actual equipment and components shall reflect building conditions and approved construction drawings. All dimensions shall be field verified by the Rigging Contractor.
3.
ZetexPlus Fire Safety Curtain: The curtain shall be fabricated from tightly woven J.R. Clancy ZetexPlus 1210-ZP non-wire inserted, non-asbestos, non-carcinogenic silica based cloth, 12 x 7 weave of .070 inch (1.8 mm) thickness weighing at least 40 ounces per square yard (1.35 KG/sq m). The curtain shall be listed and approved by the State of California Fire Marshall, the NYC Material Acceptance and Equipment Acceptance Division, and shall bear a certification label from a nationally recognized listing agency. All strips of fabric shall be in continuous lengths running the full height of the curtain. There shall be no horizontal seams. Each seam shall be sewn with two lines of stitching using fiberglass thread. Top and bottom pockets shall be 6 inch (152.4 mm). The bottom pocket shall be equipped with a 6 inch (152.4 mm) yield pad filled with ZetexPlus.
4.
Fire Safety Curtain Frame: The fully framed fire safety curtain shall be designed and fabricated to sustain a minimum uniform wind load of 2 psf, or as indicated by code. The attachment of the curtain to the frame shall be made to facilitate future maintenance and repair. The frame shall remain engaged in its guides and operate under the full range of temperatures and wind conditions.
5.
Each side of the curtain frame shall have two bronze guides, securely fastened to the curtain frame.
6.
Smoke Seal: Provide a smoke seal consisting of a triple layer of folded fabric fastened above the proscenium with a mounting clamp so it rubs the curtain and seals the top of the opening. The fabric shall be Zetex 800 cloth with a minimum weight of 27 oz. per square yard (0.91 KG/sq m).
7.
Traction Style Fire Curtain Hoist:
a.
The hoist shall consist of a traction sheave and gearmotor assembly. The gearmotor assembly shall consist of a high efficiency gearbox, brake release and hydraulic speed regulator, allowing the curtain to close at a controlled rate of speed when the brake is released. The entire assembly shall be mounted on a heavy channel base. The hoist shall have a lifting capacity sufficient to overcome the out of balance load required to lower the curtain at a rate of 25 feet per minute (0.13 m/s).
b.
The sheave shall be a 20 inch (508 mm) diameter iron or steel sheave, with V-grooves for the number and diameter of lift lines required.
c.
Gearmotor:
1)
The motor, primary brake and gearbox shall be an integrated unit, with the first stage pinion gear and the primary brake both mounted directly on the motor's armature shaft. No couplings shall be permitted between the motor, primary brake and gear reducer.
2)
Motors shall be totally enclosed fan cooled (TEFC). The motor shall have a minimum AGMA service factor of 1.0 for constant operation.
3)
The gear reducer shall be a helical bevel reducer. The gear case shall be cast iron for protection against shock damage. The output shaft(s) shall have double lip oil seals to prevent leaks. The gearing service factor shall be a minimum of 1.0 with a mechanical strength service factor of 1.25.
4)
Brakes shall be normally spring applied, direct acting, electrically released, and equipped with a manual release. The brake shall be an AC / DC electro-magnetic unit with a minimum retarding torque equal to 200% of motor full load torque.
d.
Four direct struck limit switches shall be installed so that they are operated by the fire curtain arbor. These shall provide top and bottom limits of travel as well as overtravel functions. The direct struck limit switches shall be heavy duty, lever operated rotary head units, with positive opening contacts. Direct struck limit switches shall be Allen Bradley Bulletin 802T or equal.
e.
Fixed Speed Starter:
1)
The traction drive hoist shall be controlled by a UL 508E listed, full voltage, self protected, reversing starter. Enclosure shall be NEMA 12 with hinged, latching cover. The interior of the starter cabinet shall be "touch safe" per IEC 204-1 "Protection against direct contact" rules.
2)
The NEMA/IEC, magnetically operated, mechanically and electrically interlocked, reversing starter shall be sized to match the hoist motor horsepower and shall be rated for plugging and jogging. Units shall incorporate UL508E Type 2, non-welding, positive break contactors.
3)
Overcurrent protection shall be provided by an IEC Class 10 overload. Short circuit protection shall be provided by a circuit breaker.
4)
Starters shall be wired so that operation of the normal end of travel limit switches shall only allow movement away from the limit switch. Operation of an overtravel limit switch shall open the line contactor, and shall not allow further movement in either direction. A spring return toggle switch shall be housed inside the starter cabinet to allow override of the overtravel limits for resetting purposes.
8.
Control Stations: Two control stations shall be provided in wall mounted NEMA 12 enclosures. Each shall contain hold to operate (dead man) Up and Down pushbuttons, and a mushroom head emergency stop pushbutton.
9.
Loft Block:
a.
The sheave shall have a 16 inch (406.4 mm) pitch diameter, and shall be an iron casting, with a machined groove. The sheave shall be equipped with a 1 inch (25.4 mm) diameter shaft and two tapered roller bearings.
b.
Base angles shall be a minimum 2 inch x 1-1/2 inch x 1/4 inch (50.8 mm x 38.1 mm x 6.4 mm) angle.
c.
Side plates shall be a minimum of 10-gauge (3.57 mm) steel, and shall fully enclose the sheave. Side plates shall be bolted to the base angles.
d.
The block and associated mounting hardware shall have a recommended working load of at least 1,400lb (635 KG), and shall be designed for use in either upright or underhung usage.
e.
Loft blocks shall have a cast iron sheave grooved for one 3/8 inch (9.5 mm) lift line.
10.
Counterweight Arbor:
a.
Arbor shall be long enough to accommodate counterweights to balance the fire curtain and related equipment.
b.
The arbor top shall be a fabricated weldment of 1/2 inch (12.7 mm) formed steel plate and 7 gauge (4.76 mm) formed side plates. The side plates shall be punched to receive 8 cables, and shall be tied together with a bolt and spacer providing a tie-off point for the hand line.
c.
The arbor bottom shall be 1/2 inch x 3 inch (12.7 mm x 76.2 mm) steel bar with counterweight rests to keep the weights from resting on the arbor inner nuts, and a forged steel eye for the hand line tie off.
d.
The top and bottom of the arbor shall be tied together by means of two 3/4 inch (19.1 mm) steel arbor rods. The arbor rods shall have three nuts at each end, the outermost being a lock nut.
e.
The top and bottom shall have bronze guides to engage the lattice track.
f.
Provide 14 gauge (1.98 mm) spreader plates (two minimum) on arbor rods so they can be spaced between counterweights on 2 feet (610 mm) centers. Provide a retaining collar on each rod, each with a 1/4 inch (6.4 mm) set screw with red plastic knob for easy locking. One retaining collar shall be welded to the top spreader plate.
11.
Lattice Track:
a.
The track shall consist of two 2 inch x 2 inch x 1/4 inch (50.8 mm x 50.8 mm x 6.4 mm) angles opposing each other with formed brackets alternating front and back on 2 feet centers. Back brackets shall contain two 9/16 inch (14.3 mm) diameter holes for proper anchorage to the wall.
b.
A fabricated steel bracket shall support the bottom of the lattice. Bracket shall have ample clearance for passage of hand line.
12.
Fire line System: The manual fire line release system shall consist of a 1/8 inch (3.2 mm) diameter wire rope, UL listed fusible links that release at 165 degree F (74 degree C), side mounting pulleys as required, and two fire line release devices, each mounted in a steel enclosure with acrylic viewing window that contains a positive method to release the fire line. Devices shall be mounted 5 feet (1,524 mm) above the stage floor on each side of the proscenium. All other components such as round weight arbors, arbor guards, floor pulleys, etc. required to form a fully functional fire line release system shall be provided.
a.
Fusible links shall be spaced every 15 feet (4.6 m) along the length of the fire line. A fusible link shall be located no more than 7.5 feet (2.3 m) from the vertical rise of the fire line.
13.
Lift Cables: The curtain lift cables shall be 3/8 inch (9.5 mm) diameter 7 x 19 galvanized utility cable as specified. Cables shall be terminated with corresponding cable thimbles and two forged cable clips or a Swage sleeve fitting at each end. The curtain end of each cable shall be attached to the batten using a pipe clamp.
14.
Battens: Battens shall be made of 2 inch (50.8 mm) I.D. nominal, schedule 40 black iron pipe.
15.
Safety Chains: Supply one more safety chain than the number of lift cables. 1/4 inch (6.4 mm) minimum, proof coil chains shall be located between lift cables except at the ends where the chains shall be 12 inch (304.8 mm) or less from the end of the batten. Chains shall be attached to the top of the curtain with pipe clamps around the top of the batten and chain shackles. The other end shall be appropriately attached to the building structure.
16.
Smoke Pockets with Track: Furnish and install one pair of smoke pockets to extend from the stage floor to a point above the top of the raised curtain or to the height specified in the drawings. Pockets shall consist of a channel 4 inch (102 mm) deeper than the curtain frame and a 1/4 inch x 18 inch (6.4 mm x 457.2 mm) steel plate which shall be bolted to the channels on 2 feet-0 inch (609.6 mm) centers. An angle steel track shall be bolted to the side of the smoke pocket to carry the guides. Channels shall be anchored to the walls on 4 feet-0 inch (1,219 mm) centers or as required to support the curtain.
C.
Drum Hoist.
1.
General Description:
a.
Furnish and install a motorized framed type, automatically closing fire safety curtain for the proscenium opening indicated on the drawings. Curtain shall lap masonry not less than 18 inch (457 mm) at each side of the proscenium opening and 24 inch (610 mm) at the top of the proscenium opening.
b.
The curtain shall be arranged to comply with the "International Building code (2006)", American National Standard E1.22-2009, other applicable codes and, in general, intercept fire and smoke and prevent glow from severe fire on the stage from showing on the auditorium side for at least thirty (30) minutes in order to permit safe egress of all people from the auditorium.
c.
The curtain shall close by gravity due to over-balance of the curtain as specified below. Emergency closing shall occur as specified in NFPA 80 or as required by local codes when the fire line is released or fusible links separate.
2.
Special Conditions: It is the intention of this specification to provide a fully functioning fire safety curtain system. Actual equipment and components shall reflect building conditions and approved construction drawings. All dimensions shall be field verified by the Rigging Contractor.
3.
ZetexPlus Fire Safety Curtain: The curtain shall be fabricated from tightly woven J.R. Clancy ZetexPlus 1210-ZP non-wire inserted, non-asbestos, non-carcinogenic silica based cloth, 12 x 7 weave of .070 inch (1.8 mm) thickness weighing at least 40 ounces per square yard (1.35 KG/sq m). The curtain shall be listed and approved by the State of California Fire Marshall, the NYC Material Acceptance and Equipment Acceptance Division, and shall bear a certification label from a nationally recognized listing agency. All strips of fabric shall be in continuous lengths running the full height of the curtain. There shall be no horizontal seams. Each seam shall be sewn with two lines of stitching using fiberglass thread. Top and bottom pockets shall be 6 inch (152.4 mm). The bottom pocket shall be equipped with a 6 inch(152.4 mm) yield pad filled with ZetexPlus.
4.
Fire Safety Curtain Frame: The fully framed fire safety curtain shall be designed and fabricated to sustain a minimum uniform wind load of 2 psf, or as indicated by code. The attachment of the curtain to the frame shall be made to facilitate future maintenance and repair. The frame shall remain engaged in its guides and operate under the full range of temperatures and wind conditions.
5.
Each side of the curtain frame shall have two bronze guides, securely fastened to the curtain frame.
6.
Smoke Seal: Provide a smoke seal consisting of a triple layer of folded fabric fastened above the proscenium with a mounting clamp so it rubs the curtain and seals the top of the opening. The fabric shall be Zetex 800 cloth with a minimum weight of 27 oz. per square yard (0.91 KG/sq m).
7.
Drum Style Fire Curtain Hoist:
a.
The hoist shall be mounted to allow dual drive lines to travel from either side of the fire curtain centerline, over loft blocks and to the hoist drum.
b.
The hoist shall consist of a cable drum and a manual clutch with throw out fork, direct coupled and keyed to the output shaft of the gearbox. The entire assembly shall be mounted on a heavy channel base. The hoist shall have a 2,000lb (907.2 KG) lifting capacity at a rate of 25 feet per minute (0.127 m/s).
c.
The drum shall be a minimum diameter of 30 times cable diameter with helical grooves for the number and diameter of lift lines required.
d.
The clutch shall be rated for the applied load. The clutch lever arm shall be kept engaged by tension in the fire line that passes through a pulley in the handle. Release of the clutch is ensured by an overbalance weight acting on the arm.
e.
Gearmotor:
1)
The motor, primary brake and gearbox shall be an integrated unit, with the first stage pinion gear and the primary brake both mounted directly on the motor's armature shaft. No couplings shall be permitted between the motor, primary brake and gear reducer.
2)
Motor shall be totally enclosed fan cooled (TEFC). The motor shall have a minimum AGMA service factor of 1.0 for constant operation.
3)
The gear reducer shall be a combination helical/bevel reducer. The gear case shall be cast iron for protection against shock damage. The output shaft(s) shall have double lip oil seals to prevent leaks. The gearing service factor shall be a minimum of 1.0 with a mechanical strength service factor of 1.25.
4)
Brakes shall be normally spring applied, direct acting, electrically released, and equipped with a manual release. The brake shall be an AC / DC electro-magnetic unit with a minimum retarding torque equal to 200% of motor full load torque.
f.
Four direct struck limit switches shall be installed so that they are operated by the fire curtain arbor. These shall provide top and bottom limits of travel as well as overtravel functions. The direct struck limit switches shall be heavy duty, lever operated rotary head units, with positive opening contacts. Direct struck limit switches shall be Telemecanique ZCKJ series or equal.
g.
Fixed Speed Starter:
1)
The hoist shall be controlled by a UL 508E listed, full voltage, self protected, reversing starter. Enclosure shall be NEMA 12 with hinged, latching cover. The interior of the starter cabinet shall be "touch safe" per IEC 204-1 "Protection against direct contact" rules.
2)
The NEMA/IEC, magnetically operated, mechanically and electrically interlocked, reversing starter shall be sized to match the hoist motor horsepower and shall be rated for plugging and jogging. Units shall incorporate UL508E Type 2, non-welding, positive break contactors.
3)
Overcurrent protection shall be provided by an IEC Class 10 overload. Short circuit protection shall be provided by a circuit breaker.
4)
Starters shall be wired so that operation of the normal end of travel limit switches shall only allow movement away from the limit switch. Operation of an overtravel limit switch shall open the line contactor, and shall not allow further movement in either direction. A spring return toggle switch shall be housed inside the starter cabinet to allow override of the overtravel limits for resetting purposes.
8.
Control Stations: Two control stations shall be provided in wall mounted NEMA 12 enclosures. Each shall contain hold to operate (dead man) Up and Down pushbuttons, and a mushroom head emergency stop pushbutton.
9.
Loft Block:
a.
The sheave shall have a 16 inch (406.4 mm) pitch diameter, and shall be an iron casting, with a machined groove. The sheave shall be equipped with a 1 inch (25.4 mm) diameter shaft and two tapered roller bearings.
b.
Base angles shall be a minimum 2 inch x 1-1/2 inch x 1/4 inch (50.8 mm x 38.1 mm x 6.4 mm) angle.
c.
Side plates shall be a minimum of 10-gauge(3.57 mm) steel, and shall fully enclose the sheave. Side plates shall be bolted to the base angles.
d.
The block and associated mounting hardware shall have a recommended working load of at least 1,400lb (635 KG), and shall be designed for use in either upright or underhung usage.
e.
Loft blocks shall have a cast iron sheave grooved for one 3/8 inch (9.5 mm) lift line.
10.
Counterweight Arbor:
a.
Arbor shall be long enough to accommodate counterweights to balance the fire curtain and related equipment.
b.
The arbor top shall be a fabricated weldment of 1/2 inch (12.7 mm) formed steel plate and 7 gauge (4.76 mm) formed side plates. The side plates shall be punched to receive 8 cables, and shall be tied together with a bolt and spacer providing a tie-off point for the hand line.
c.
The arbor bottom shall be 1/2 inch x 3 inch (12.7 mm x 76.2 mm) steel bar with counterweight rests to keep the weights from resting on the arbor inner nuts, and a forged steel eye for the hand line tie off.
d.
The top and bottom of the arbor shall be tied together by means of two 3/4 inch (19.1 mm) steel arbor rods. The arbor rods shall have three nuts at each end, the outermost being a lock nut.
e.
The top and bottom shall have bronze guides to engage the lattice track.
f.
Provide 14 gauge (1.98 mm) spreader plates (two minimum) on arbor rods so they can be spaced between counterweights on 2 feet (610 mm) centers. Provide a retaining collar on each rod, each with a 1/4 inch (6.4 mm) set screw with red plastic knob for easy locking. One retaining collar shall be welded to the top spreader plate.
11.
Lattice Track:
a.
The track shall consist of two 2 inch x 2 inch x 1/4 inch (50.8 mm x 50.8 mm x 6.4 mm) angles opposing each other with formed brackets alternating front and back on 2 feet centers. Back brackets shall contain two 9/16 inch (14.3 mm) diameter holes for proper anchorage to the wall.
b.
A fabricated steel bracket shall support the bottom of the lattice. Bracket shall have ample clearance for passage of hand line.
12.
Fire line System: The manual fire line release system shall consist of a 1/8 inch (3.2 mm) diameter wire rope, with six UL listed fusible links that release at 165 degree F (74 degree C), side mounting pulleys as required, and two fire line release devices, each mounted in a steel enclosure with acrylic viewing window that contains a positive method to release the fire line. Devices shall be mounted 5 feet (1,524 mm) above the stage floor on each side of the proscenium. All other components such as round weight arbors, arbor guards, floor pulleys, etc. required to form a fully functional fire line release system shall be provided.
13.
Lift Cables: The curtain lift cables shall be 3/8 inch (9.5 mm) diameter 7 x 19 galvanized utility cable as specified. Cables shall be terminated with corresponding cable thimbles and two forged cable clips or a Swage sleeve fitting at each end. The curtain end of each cable shall be attached to the batten using a 1/2 inch x 6 inch (12.7 mm x 152.4 mm) turnbuckle and pipe clamp.
14.
Battens: Battens shall be made of 2 inch (50.8 mm) I.D. nominal, schedule 40 black iron pipe.
15.
Safety Chains: Supply one more safety chain than the number of lift cables. 1/4 inch (6.4 mm) minimum, proof coil chains shall be located between lift cables except at the ends where the chains shall be 12 inch (304.8 mm) or less from the end of the batten. Chains shall be attached to the top of the curtain with pipe clamps around the top of the batten and chain shackles. The other end shall be appropriately attached to the building structure.
16.
Smoke Pockets with Track: Furnish and install one pair of smoke pockets to extend from the stage floor to a point above the top of the raised curtain or to the height specified in the drawings. Pockets shall consist of a 8 inch (203 mm) deep "Z" channel formed from 1/4 inch (6.4 mm) steel plate and a 1/4 inch x 18 inch (6.4 mm x 457.2 mm) steel plate which shall be bolted to the channels on 2 feet-0 inch (609.6 mm) centers. An angle iron, steel track shall be bolted to the side of the smoke pocket to carry the guides. Channels shall be anchored to the walls on 4 feet-0 inch (1,219 mm) centers.
2.29
FIRE CURTAIN SYSTEMS, CURTAIN ACCESSORlES
A.
Dashpot:
1.
Dash Pot:
a.
The hydraulic dash pot shall be sized and valved to fully decelerate a free falling fire safety curtain over the last 10 feet (305 mm) of curtain travel.
b.
The top sheave shall be a 12 inch (304.8 mm) diameter cast iron sheave with tapered roller bearings. It shall be connected to a piston rod with 5 feet (1.52 m) of travel.
c.
The cylinder shall be fabricated from seamless tubing. Provision shall be made for automatically releasing the oil and returning the unit to an "at rest condition".
d.
Provide a fluid reservoir, flow control valve, an oil fill cap and a drain plug.
e.
Maximum dashpot load is 1250 lbs (567 KG).
2.
Dash Pot Line: The 3/8 inch (9.53 mm) diameter dashpot line shall begin at a suitable tieoff point on the structure, travel around the dashpot sheave, through a hole in the arbor stop bracket, over a top sheave/s and end at a round weight arbor with safety chain. A swaged ball on the line shall engage the hole in the arbor and activate the dashpot to decelerate the fire curtain.
B.
Dashpot - Heavy Duty:
1.
Dash Pot:
a.
The hydraulic dash pot shall be sized and valved to fully decelerate a free falling fire safety curtain within the last 10 feet (3 m) of curtain travel.
b.
The top sheave shall be a 12 inch (304.8 mm) diameter, steel sheave with tapered roller bearings and heavy duty side plates. It shall be connected to a piston rod with 5 feet (1.52 m) of travel.
c.
The cylinder shall be fabricated from seamless tubing. Provision shall be made for automatically releasing the oil and returning the unit to an "at rest condition".
d.
Provide a fluid reservoir, flow control valve, an oil fill cap and a drain plug.
e.
Maximum dashpot load is 3500 lbs (1,588 KG).
2.
Dash Pot Line: The 3/8 inch (9.53 mm) diameter dashpot line shall begin at a suitable tieoff point on the structure, travel around the dashpot sheave, through a hole in the arbor stop bracket, over a top sheave/s and end at a round weight arbor with safety chain. A swaged ball on the line shall engage the hole in the arbor and activate the dashpot to decelerate the fire curtain.
C.
Electrical Fire Line Release:
1.
Product: Sure-Guard II.
2.
The fire curtain shall be equipped with an electro-mechanical fire line release mechanism operated by a Sure-Guard II, activated by normally open or normally closed devices including rate of rise heat detectors, smoke detectors, emergency switches, etc. (furnished and installed by others) or by release of tension in the fire line. A switch shall be mounted in the release mechanism enclosure for testing system operation. Activation of the mechanism shall release tension in the fire line which, in turn, allows the fire curtain arbor to rise and the fire curtain to close in the normal manner. The release unit shall incorporate three pulleys permitting its attachment to the fireline at any point and to help prevent accidental release.
3.
The release shall contain an integral sealed, rechargeable "Gel Pac" battery and charger to provide emergency power during power interruptions. A charged battery shall keep the curtain raised for a half hour minimum without building power. The release shall operate from a 120 VAC power source provided by others.
4.
The electrical fire line release shall be UL Listed.
5.
The fire line release system shall be the Sure-Guard II.
D.
Rate of Rise Heat Detector:
1.
A heat detector that closes a normally open electrical contact at a fixed temperature or at a temperature rise of 15 degree F (9.4 degree C) in one minute.
2.
Rating: 3.0A at 6 to125 VAC, 1.0 A at 6 to 24VAC, 0.3 A 125 VDC, and 0.1 A VDC.
3.
UL/ULC rating temperature - 135 degree F (57.2 degree C).
4.
UL/ULC maximum temperature at ceiling - 100 degree F (37.8 degree C).
 
** NOTE TO SPECIFIER ** Provide heat resistant border curtains in the sizes, color (tan or black) and quantities listed. Delete if not required.
 
E.
Fire Curtain Systems, Heat Resisting Border:
1.
Heat resistant border curtains shall be fabricated from ZetexPlus 800 fabric, rated for 1,500 degree F (815.6C) continuous temperature. The fabric shall be woven from highly texturized silica yarn with a proprietary high temperature treatment, and a weight of 25.5 oz. per square yard.
2.
Borders shall have a sewn hem on all edges, with webbing, grommets, and ties on 12" (304.8 mm) centers on the top edge.
2.30
COUNTERWEIGHT RIGGING
 
** NOTE TO SPECIFIER **Select blocks and rigging required. Delete types not required.
 
A.
12 inch Nylon Head Block - Upright.
1.
Type: Single Purchase 12 inch (304.8 mm) Head Block.
2.
The sheave shall be filled nylon, with a 12 inch (304.8 mm) outer diameter. The sheave shall be equipped with a 1 inch (25.4 mm) diameter shaft and two tapered roller bearings.
3.
Base angles shall be a minimum 2 inch x 1.5 inch x 1/4 inch (50.8 mm x 38.1 mm x 6.4 mm) angle with the short leg turned in and notched to allow clear passage of all cables.
4.
Side plates shall be a minimum of 10-gauge (3.57 mm) steel, and shall fully enclose the sheave. Side plates shall be bolted and welded to the base angles for extra strength.
5.
Mounting clips shall be steel, 3/8 inch (9.5 mm) thick minimum with a welded toe at least as thick as the mounting steel and punched with two oval holes for 1/2 inch (12.7 mm) bolts, flat washers and lock nuts.
6.
The block and associated mounting hardware shall have a recommended working load of at least 3,000 lbs (1,360.8 KG).
7.
Head blocks shall be grooved for six or eight 1/4 inch (6.4 mm) lift lines and one 3/4 inch (19.05 mm) hand line.
B.
12 Inch Cast Iron Head Block - Upright.
1.
Type: Single Purchase 12 inch (304.8 mm) Head Block:
2.
The sheave shall be an iron casting with a 12 inch (304.8 mm) outer diameter. The sheave shall be equipped with a 1 inch (25.4 mm) diameter shaft and two tapered roller bearings.
3.
Base angles shall be a minimum 2 inch x 1.5 inch x 1/4 inch (50.8 mm x 38.1 mm x 6.34m) angle with the short leg turned in and notched to allow clear passage of all cables.
4.
Side plates shall be a minimum of 10-gauge (3.57 mm) steel, and shall fully enclose the sheave. Side plates shall be bolted and welded to the base angles for extra strength.
5.
Mounting clips shall be steel, 3/8 inch (9.5 mm) thick minimum with a welded toe at least as thick as the mounting steel and punched with two oval holes for 1/2 inch (12.7 mm) bolts, flat washers and lock nuts.
6.
The block and associated mounting hardware shall have a recommended working load of at least 3,000 lbs (1,360 KG).
7.
Head blocks shall be grooved for six or eight 1/4 inch (6.4 mm) lift lines and one 3/4 inch (19.1 mm) hand line.
C.
12 Inch Nylon Head Block - Underhung.
1.
Type: Single Purchase 12 inch (304.8 mm) Head Block:
2.
The sheave shall be filled nylon with a 12 inch (304.8 mm) outer diameter. The sheave shall be equipped with a 1 inch (25.4 mm) diameter shaft and two tapered roller bearings.
3.
Base angles shall be a minimum 2 inch x 1.5 inch x 1/4 inch (50.8 mm x 38.1 mm x 6.4 mm) angle with the short leg turned in.
4.
Side plates shall be a minimum of 10-gauge (3.57 mm) steel, and shall fully enclose the sheave. Side plates shall be bolted and welded to the base angles for extra strength.
5.
Auxiliary base angles shall be a minimum 2 inch x 1-1/2 inch x 1/4 inch (50.8 mm x 38.1 mm x 6.4 mm) angle with the short leg turned in. Angles shall be supplied with punched holes and 1/2 inch (12.7 mm) bolts, flat washers and lock nuts.
6.
The block and associated mounting hardware shall have a recommended working load of at least 2,500 lbs. (1,1334 KG).
7.
Head blocks shall be grooved for six or eight 1/4 inch (6.4 mm) lift lines and one 3/4 inch (19.1 mm) hand line.
D.
12 Inch Cast Iron Head Block, Underhung.
1.
Type: Single Purchase 12 inch (304.8 mm) Head Block:
2.
The sheave shall be an iron casting with a 12 inch (304.8 mm) outer diameter. The sheave shall be equipped with a 1 inch (25.4 mm) diameter shaft and two tapered roller bearings.
3.
Base angles shall be a minimum 2 inch x 1.5 inch x 1/4 inch (50.8 mm x 38.1 mm x 6.4 mm) angle with the short leg turned in.
4.
Side plates shall be a minimum of 10-gauge (3.57 mm) steel, and shall fully enclose the sheave. Side plates shall be bolted and welded to the base angles for extra strength.
5.
Auxiliary base angles shall be a minimum 2 inch x 1.5 inch x 1/4 inch (50.8 mm x 38.1 mm x 6.4 mm) angle with the short leg turned in. Angles shall be supplied with punched holes and 1/2 inch (12.7 mm) bolts, flat washers and lock nuts.
6.
The block and associated mounting hardware shall have a recommended working load of at least 2,500 lbs (1,1334 KG).
7.
Head blocks shall be grooved for six or eight 1/4 inch (6.4 mm) lift lines and one 3/4 inch (19.1 mm) hand line.
E.
16 Inch Cast Iron Head Block - Upright.
1.
Type: Single Purchase 16 inch (406.4 mm) Head block .
2.
The sheave shall be an iron casting with a 16 inch (406.4 mm) outer diameter. The sheave shall be equipped with a 1-1/2 inch (38.1 mm) diameter shaft and two tapered roller bearings.
3.
Base angles shall be a minimum 2-1/2 inch (63.5 mm) x 2 inch (50.4 mm) x 1/4 inch (6.4 mm) angle with the short leg turned in and notched to allow clear passage of all cables.
4.
Side plates shall be a minimum of 7-gauge (4.76 mm) steel, and shall fully enclose the sheave. Side plates shall be bolted and welded to the base angles for extra strength.
5.
Mounting clips shall be steel, 3/8 inch (9.5 mm) thick minimum with a welded toe at least as thick as the mounting steel and punched with two oval holes for 1/2 inch (12.7 mm) bolts, flat washers and lock nuts.
6.
The block and associated mounting hardware shall have a recommended working load of at least 3,600 lbs. (1,633 KG).
7.
Head blocks shall be grooved for eight 3/8 inch (9.5 mm) lift lines and one 1 inch (25.4 mm) hand line.
F.
16 Inch Cast Iron Head Block - Underhung.
1.
Type: Single Purchase 16 inch (406.4 mm) Head block.
2.
The sheave shall be an iron casting with a 16 inch (406.4 mm) outer diameter. The sheave shall be equipped with a 1.5 inch (38.1 mm) diameter shaft and two tapered roller bearings.
3.
Base angles shall be a minimum 2.5 inch x 2 inch x 1/4 inch (63.5 mm x 50.8 mm x 6.4 mm) angle with the short leg turned in.
4.
Side plates shall be a minimum of 7-gauge (4.76 mm) steel, and shall fully enclose the sheave. Side plates shall be bolted and welded to the base angles for extra strength.
5.
Auxiliary base angles shall be a minimum 2.5 inch x 2 inch x 1/4 inch (50.8 mm x 50.8 mm x 6.4 mm) angle with the short leg turned in. Angles shall be supplied with punched holes and 1/2 inch (12.7 mm) bolts, flat washers and lock nuts.
6.
The block and associated mounting hardware shall have a recommended working load of at least 3,600 lbs (1,633 KG).
7.
Head blocks shall be grooved for eight 3/8 inch (9.52 mm) lift lines and one 1 inch (25.4 mm) hand line.
 
** NOTE TO SPECIFIER **Delete double purchase head blocks not required for manual counterweight rigging.
 
G.
12 Inch DP, Nylon Head Block - Upright.
1.
Type: Double Purchase 12 inch (304.8 mm) Head Block:
2.
The sheave shall be filled nylon, with a 12 inch (304.8 mm) outer diameter. The sheave shall be equipped with a 1 inch (25.4 mm) diameter shaft and two tapered roller bearings.
3.
Base angles shall be a minimum 2 inch x 1.5 inch x 1/4 inch (50.8 mm x 38.1 mm x 6.4 mm) angle with the short leg turned in and notched to allow clear passage of all cables.
4.
Side plates shall be a minimum of 10-gauge (3.57 mm) steel, and shall fully enclose the sheave. Side plates shall be bolted and welded to the base angles for extra strength.
5.
Double purchase blocks shall have punched angles and an additional pipe spacer properly placed to provide tie-off points for lift lines so that proper fleet angles into the arbor top sheave are maintained.
6.
Mounting clips shall be steel, 3/8 inch (9.5 mm) thick minimum with a welded toe at least as thick as the mounting steel and punched with two oval holes for 1/2 inch (12.7 mm) bolts, flat washers and lock nuts.
7.
The block and associated mounting hardware shall have a recommended working load of at least 3,000 lbs (1,7360.8 kg).
8.
Head blocks shall be grooved for six or eight 1/4 inch (6.4 mm) lift lines and one 3/4 inch (19.1 mm) hand line.
H.
12 Inch DP, Cast Head Block - Upright.
1.
Type: Double Purchase 12 inch (30.48cm) Head Block:
2.
The sheave shall be an iron casting with a 12 inch (30.48cm) outer diameter. The sheave shall be equipped with a 1 inch (25.4 mm) diameter shaft and two tapered roller bearings.
3.
Base angles shall be a minimum 2 inch x 1-1/2 inch x 1/4 inch (50.8 mm x 38.1 mm x 6.35 mm) angle with the short leg turned in and notched to allow clear passage of all cables.
4.
Side plates shall be a minimum of 10-gauge (3.57 mm) steel, and shall fully enclose the sheave. Side plates shall be bolted and welded to the base angles for extra strength.
5.
Double purchase blocks shall have punched angles and an additional pipe spacer properly placed to provide tie-off points for lift lines so that proper fleet angles into the arbor top sheave are maintained.
6.
Mounting clips shall be steel, 3/8 inch (9.5 mm) thick minimum with a welded toe at least as thick as the mounting steel and punched with two oval holes for 1/2 inch (12.7 mm) bolts, flat washers and lock nuts.
7.
The block and associated mounting hardware shall have a recommended working load of at least 3,000lbs (1,360.8 KG).
8.
Head blocks shall be grooved for six or eight 1/4 inch (6.4 mm) lift lines and one 3/4 inch (19.05 mm) hand line.
I.
12 Inch DP, Nylon Head Block - Underhung.
1.
Type: Double Purchase 12 inch (304.8 mm) Head Block:
2.
The sheave shall be filled nylon with a 12 inch (304.8 mm) outer diameter. The sheave shall be equipped with a 1 inch diameter shaft and two tapered roller bearings.
3.
Base angles shall be a minimum 2 inch x 1.5 inch x 1/4 inch (50.8 mm x 38.1 mm x 6.35 mm) angle with the short leg turned in.
4.
Side plates shall be a minimum of 10-gauge (3.57 mm) steel, and shall fully enclose the sheave. Side plates shall be bolted and welded to the base angles for extra strength.
5.
Double purchase blocks shall have punched angles and an additional pipe spacer properly placed to provide tie-off points for lift lines so that proper fleet angles into the arbor top sheave are maintained.
6.
Auxiliary base angles shall be a minimum 2 inch x 1.5 inch x 1/4 inch (50.8 mm x 38.1 mm x 6.4 mm) angle with the short leg turned in. Angles shall be supplied with punched holes and 1/2 inch (12.7 mm) bolts, flat washers and lock nuts.
7.
The block and associated mounting hardware shall have a recommended working load of at least 2,500 lbs (1,134 KG).
8.
Head blocks shall be grooved for six or eight 1/4 inch (6.35 mm) lift lines and one 3/4 inch (19.05 mm) hand line.
J.
12 Inch DP, Cast Iron Head Block - Underhung.
1.
Type: Double Purchase 12 inch (304.8 mm) Head Block:
2.
The sheave shall be an iron casting with a 12 inch (304.8 mm) outer diameter. The sheave shall be equipped with a 1 inch (25.4 mm) diameter shaft and two tapered roller bearings.
3.
Base angles shall be a minimum 2 inch x 1.5 inch x 1/4 inch (50.8 mm x 38.1 mm x 6.4 mm) angle with the short leg turned in.
4.
Side plates shall be a minimum of 10-gauge (3.57 mm) steel, and shall fully enclose the sheave. Side plates shall be bolted and welded to the base angles for extra strength.
5.
Double purchase blocks shall have punched angles and an additional pipe spacer properly placed to provide tie-off points for lift lines so that proper fleet angles into the arbor top sheave are maintained.
6.
Auxiliary base angles shall be a minimum 2 inch x 1.5 inch x 1/4 inch (50.8 mm x 38.1 mm x 6.4 mm) angle with the short leg turned in. Angles shall be supplied with punched holes and 1/2 inch (12.7 mm) bolts, flat washers and lock nuts.
7.
The block and associated mounting hardware shall have a recommended working load of at least 2,500 lbs (1,134 KG).
8.
Head blocks shall be grooved for six or eight 1/4 inch (6.4 mm) lift lines and one 3/4 inch (19.05 mm) hand line.
K.
16 Inch DP, Cast Iron Head Block - Upright.
1.
Type: Double Purchase 16 inch (406.4 mm) Head block .
2.
The sheave shall be iron casting with a 16 inch (406.4 mm) outer diameter. The sheave shall be equipped with a 1.5 inch (38.1 mm) diameter shaft and two tapered roller bearings.
3.
Base angles shall be a minimum 2.5 inch x 2 inch x 1/4 inch (63.5 mm x 50.8 mm x 6.4 mm) angle with the short leg turned in and notched to allow clear passage of all cables.
4.
Side plates shall be a minimum of 7-gauge (4.76 mm) steel, and shall fully enclose the sheave. Side plates shall be bolted and welded to the base angles for extra strength.
5.
Mounting clips shall be steel, 3/8 inch (9.5 mm) thick minimum with a welded toe at least as thick as the mounting steel and punched with two oval holes for 1/2 inch (12.7 mm) bolts, flat washers and lock nuts.
6.
The block and associated mounting hardware shall have a recommended working load of at least 3,600 lbs (1,633.9 KG).
7.
Head blocks shall be grooved for eight 3/8 inch (9.52 mm) lift lines and one 1 inch (25.4 mm) hand line.
L.
16 Inch DP, Cast Iron Head Block - Underhung.
1.
Type: Double Purchase 16 inch (406 mm) Head block .
2.
The sheave shall be iron casting with a 16 inch (406 mm) outer diameter. The sheave shall be equipped with a 1-1/2 inch (38.1 mm) diameter shaft and two tapered roller bearings.
3.
Base angles shall be a minimum 2-1/2 inch x 2 inch x 1/4 inch (57 mm x 50.8 mm x 6.35 mm) angle with the short leg turned in.
4.
Side plates shall be a minimum of 7-gauge (4.76 mm) steel, and shall fully enclose the sheave. Side plates shall be bolted and welded to the base angles for extra strength.
5.
Double purchase blocks shall have punched angles and an additional pipe spacer properly placed to provide tie-off points for lift lines so that proper fleet angles into the arbor top are maintained.
6.
Auxiliary base angles shall be a minimum 2.5 inch x 2 inch x 1/4 inch (50.8 mm x 50.8 mm x 6.4 mm) angle with the short leg turned in. Angles shall be supplied with punched holes and 1/2 inch (12.7 mm) bolts, flat washers and lock nuts.
7.
The block and associated mounting hardware shall have a recommended working load of at least 3,600 lbs (1,633 KG).
8.
Head blocks shall be grooved for eight 3/8 inch (9.53 mm) lift lines and one 1 inch (25.4 mm) hand line.
M.
12 Inch WG, Nylon Head Block - Upright.
1.
Type: Wire Guide 12 inch (304.8 mm) Head Block:
2.
The sheave shall be filled nylon, with a 12 inch (304.8 mm) outer diameter. The sheave shall be equipped with a 1 inch (25.4 mm) diameter shaft and two tapered roller bearings.
3.
Base angles shall be a minimum 2 inch x 1.5 inch x 1/4 inch (50.8 mm x 38.1 mm x 6.4 mm) angle with the short leg turned in and notched to allow clear passage of all cables.
4.
Side plates shall be a minimum of 10-gauge (3.57 mm) steel, and shall fully enclose the sheave. Side plates shall be bolted and welded to the base angles for extra strength.
5.
Blocks used in wire guide systems shall have tie-off points for the guide wires.
6.
Mounting clips shall be steel, 3/8 inch (9.5 mm) thick minimum with a welded toe at least as thick as the mounting steel and punched with two oval holes for 1/2 inch (12.7 mm) bolts, flat washers and lock nuts.
7.
The block and associated mounting hardware shall have a recommended working load of at least 3,000 lbs (1,360 KG).
8.
Head blocks shall be grooved for six or eight 1/4 inch (6.4 mm) lift lines and one 3/4 inch (19.1 mm) hand line.
N.
12 Inch WG, Cast Iron Head Block - Upright.
1.
Type: Wire Guide 12 inch (304.8 mm) Head Block:
2.
The sheave shall be iron casting with a 12 inch (304.8 mm) outer diameter. The sheave shall be equipped with a 1 inch (25.4 mm) diameter shaft and two tapered roller bearings.
3.
Base angles shall be a minimum 2 inch x 1.5 inch x 1/4 inch (50.8 mm x 38.1 mm x 6.4 mm) angle with the short leg turned in and notched to allow clear passage of all cables.
4.
Side plates shall be a minimum of 10-gauge (3.57 mm) steel, and shall fully enclose the sheave. Side plates shall be bolted and welded to the base angles for extra strength.
5.
Blocks used in wire guide systems shall have tie-off points for the guide wires.
6.
Mounting clips shall be steel, 3/8 inch (9.5 mm) thick minimum with a welded toe at least as thick as the mounting steel and punched with two oval holes for 1/2 inch (12.7 mm) bolts, flat washers and lock nuts.
7.
The block and associated mounting hardware shall have a recommended working load of at least 3,000 lbs (1,360.8 KG).
8.
Head blocks shall be grooved for six or eight 1/4 inch (6.4 mm) lift lines and one 3/4 inch (19.1 mm) hand line.
O.
12 Inch WG, Nylon Head Block - Underhung .
1.
Type: Wire Guide 12 inch (304.8 mm) Head Block:
2.
The sheave shall be filled nylon with a 12 inch (304.8 mm) outer diameter. The sheave shall be equipped with a 1 inch (25.4 mm) diameter shaft and two tapered roller bearings.
3.
Base angles shall be a minimum 2 inch x 1.5 inch x 1/4 inch (50.8 mm x 38.1 mm x 6.4 mm) angle with the short leg turned in.
4.
Side plates shall be a minimum of 10-gauge (3.57 mm) steel, and shall fully enclose the sheave. Side plates shall be bolted and welded to the base angles for extra strength.
5.
Blocks used in wire guide systems shall have tie-off points for the guide wires.
6.
Auxiliary base angles shall be a minimum 2 inch x 1.5 inch x 1/4 inch (50.8 mm x 38.1 mm x 6.4 mm) angle with the short leg turned in. Angles shall be supplied with punched holes and 1/2 inch (12.7 mm) bolts, flat washers and lock nuts.
7.
The block and associated mounting hardware shall have a recommended working load of at least 2,500 lbs (1,134 KG).
8.
Head blocks shall be grooved for six or eight 1/4 inch (6.4 mm) lift lines and one 3/4 inch (19.1 mm) hand line.
P.
12 Inch WG, Cast Iron Head Block - Underhung.
1.
Type: Wire Guide 12 inch (304.8 mm) Head Block:
2.
The sheave shall be an iron casting with a 12 inch (304.8 mm) outer diameter. The sheave shall be equipped with a 1 inch (25.4 mm) diameter shaft and two tapered roller bearings.
3.
Base angles shall be a minimum 2 inch x 1.5 inch x 1/4 inch (50.8 mm x 38.1 mm x 6.4 mm) angle with the short leg turned in.
4.
Side plates shall be a minimum of 10-gauge (3.57 mm) steel, and shall fully enclose the sheave. Side plates shall be bolted and welded to the base angles for extra strength.
5.
Blocks used in wire guide systems shall have tie-off points for the guide wires.
6.
Auxiliary base angles shall be a minimum 2 inch x 1.5 inch x 1/4 inch (50.8 mm x 38.1 mm x 6.4 mm) angle with the short leg turned in. Angles shall be supplied with punched holes and 1/2 inch (12.7 mm) bolts, flat washers and lock nuts.
7.
The block and associated mounting hardware shall have a recommended working load of at least 2,500 lbs (1,134 KG).
8.
Head blocks shall be grooved for six or eight 1/4 inch (6.4 mm) lift lines and one 3/4 inch (19.1 mm) hand line.
 
** NOTE TO SPECIFIER **Delete staggered sheave head blocks not required for manual counterweight rigging.
 
Q.
Staggered Sheave Nylon Head Block.
1.
Type: Staggered Sheave Head Block:
2.
The block sheaves shall have 8.5 inch (215.9 mm) outside diameters, and shall be filled nylon. Each sheave shall be equipped with a 17 mm (.67in) diameter shaft and two sealed, precision ball bearings. Sheaves shall be spaced in the housing so cables align with the hoist drum grooving to eliminate fleet angles.
3.
Base angles shall be a minimum 2 inch x 1.5 inch x 1/4 inch (50.8 mm x 38.1 mm x 6.4 mm) angle punched with a mounting hole pattern for clip attachment.
4.
Side plates shall be a minimum of 12-gauge (2.78 mm) steel, and shall fully enclose the sheaves. Side plates shall be bolted and welded to the base angles for strength.
5.
Auxiliary base angles shall be a minimum 2 inch x 1.5 inch x 1/4 inch (50.8 mm x 38.1 mm x 6.4 mm) angle with the short leg turned in. Angles shall be supplied with punched holes and 1/2 inch (12.7 mm) bolts, flat washers and lock nuts.
6.
The block and associated mounting hardware shall have a minimum recommended working load at least equal to the hoist capacity and associated stresses.
 
** NOTE TO SPECIFIER ** Insert number of sheave grooves required for project.
 
7.
Head blocks shall have ___ sheaves grooved for one 1/4 inch (6.4 mm) lift line each.
R.
Staggered Sheave Cast Iron Head Block.
1.
Type: Staggered Sheave Head Block:
2.
The block sheaves shall be iron castings with 8.5 inch (215.9 mm) outside diameters. Each sheave shall be equipped with a 17 mm (.67in) diameter shaft and two sealed, precision ball bearings. Sheaves shall be spaced in the housing so cables align with the hoist drum grooving to eliminate fleet angles.
3.
Base angles shall be a minimum 2 inch x 1.5 inch x 1/4 inch (50.8 mm x 38.1 mm x 6.4 mm) angle punched with a mounting hole pattern for clip attachment.
4.
Side plates shall be a minimum of 12-gauge (2.78 mm) steel, and shall fully enclose the sheaves. Side plates shall be bolted and welded to the base angles for strength.
5.
Auxiliary base angles shall be a minimum 2 inch x 1.5 inch x 1/4 inch (50.8 mm x 38.1 mm x 6.4 mm) angle with the short leg turned in. Angles shall be supplied with punched holes and 1/2 inch (12.7 mm) bolts, flat washers and lock nuts.
6.
The block and associated mounting hardware shall have a minimum recommended working load at least equal to the hoist capacity and associated stresses.
 
** NOTE TO SPECIFIER ** Insert number of sheave grooves required for project.
 
7.
Head blocks shall have sheaves grooved for one 1/4 inch (6.4 mm) lift line each,.
a.
Number of Sheave Grooves: ______.
 
** NOTE TO SPECIFIER **Delete loft blocks not required for manual counterweight rigging.
 
S.
8 Inch Nylon Universal Loft Block.
1.
The sheave shall have an 8-1/2 inch (215.9 mm) outside diameter, and shall be filled nylon. The sheave shall be equipped with a 17 mm (.67in) diameter shaft and two sealed, precision ball bearings.
2.
Base angles shall be a minimum 1-1/2 inch x 1-1/2 inch x 3/16 inch (38.1 mm x 38.1 mm x 4.76 mm) angle punched with a universal hole pattern for easy installation.
3.
Side plates shall be a minimum of 12-gauge (2.78 mm) steel, and shall fully enclose the sheave. Side plates shall be bolted to the base angles.
4.
The block and associated mounting hardware shall have a recommended working load of at least 750 lbs. (340.2 KG), and shall be designed for use in either upright or underhung usage.
5.
Loft blocks shall be grooved for one 1/4 inch (6.4 mm) lift line.
T.
8 Inch Nylon Universal Loft Block.
1.
The sheave shall have an 8-1/2 inch (215.9 mm) outside diameter, and shall be filled nylon. The sheave shall be equipped with a 17 mm (.67 inch) diameter shaft and two tapered roller bearings.
2.
Base angles shall be a minimum 1.5 inch x 1.5 inch x 3/16 inch (38.1 mm x 38.1 mm x 4.76 mm) angle punched with a universal hole pattern for easy installation.
3.
Side plates shall be a minimum of 12-gauge (2.78 mm) steel, and shall fully enclose the sheave. Side plates shall be bolted to the base angles.
4.
The block and associated mounting hardware shall have a recommended working load of at least 750 lbs. (340.2 KG), and shall be designed for use in either upright or underhung usage.
5.
Loft blocks shall be grooved for one 1/4 inch (6.4 mm) lift line.
U.
8 Inch Cast Iron Universal Loft Block.
1.
The sheave shall have an 8-1/2 inch (215.9 mm) outside diameter, and shall be an iron casting, with a machined groove. The sheave shall be equipped with a 17 mm (0.67in.) diameter shaft and two sealed, precision ball bearings.
2.
Base angles shall be a minimum 1-1/2 inch x 1-1/2 inch x 3/16 inch (38.1 mm x 38.1 mm x 4.76 mm) angle punched with a universal hole pattern for easy installation.
3.
Side plates shall be a minimum of 12-gauge (2.78 mm) steel, and shall fully enclose the sheave. Side plates shall be bolted to the base angles.
4.
The block and associated mounting hardware shall have a recommended working load of at least 500 lbs. (227 KG) and shall be designed for use in either upright or underhung usage.
5.
Loft blocks shall be grooved for one 1/4 inch (6.4 mm) lift line.
V.
8 Inch Cast Iron Universal Loft Block.
1.
The sheave shall have an 8-1/2 inch (215.9 mm) outside diameter, and shall be an iron casting, with a machined groove. The sheave shall be equipped with a 17 mm (0.67in.) diameter shaft and two tapered roller bearings.
2.
Base angles shall be a minimum 1-1/2 inch x 1-1/2 inch x 3/16 inch (38.1 mm x 38.1 mm x 4.76 mm) angle punched with a universal hole pattern for easy installation.
3.
Side plates shall be a minimum of 12-gauge (2.78 mm) steel, and shall fully enclose the sheave. Side plates shall be bolted to the base angles.
4.
The block and associated mounting hardware shall have a recommended working load of at least 500 lbs. (227 KG) and shall be designed for use in either upright or underhung usage.
5.
Loft blocks shall be grooved for one 1/4 inch (6.4 mm) lift line.
W.
8 Inch Nylon Universal Loft Block - 2 Line.
1.
Loft Block - 2 Line:
2.
The sheave shall have an 8-1/2 inch (215.9 mm) outside diameter, and shall be filled nylon. The sheave shall be equipped with a 17 mm (.67in) diameter shaft and two sealed, precision ball bearings.
3.
Base angles shall be a minimum 1-1/2 inch x 1-1/2 inch x 3/16 inch (38.1 mm x 38.1 mm x 4.76 mm) angle punched with a universal hole pattern for easy installation.
4.
Side plates shall be a minimum of 12-gauge (2.78 mm) steel, and shall fully enclose the sheave. Side plates shall be bolted to the base angles.
5.
The block and associated mounting hardware shall have a recommended working load of at least 750 lbs. (340.2 KG), and shall be designed for use in either upright or underhung usage.
6.
Loft blocks shall be grooved for two 1/4 inch (6.4 mm) lift lines.
X.
8 Inch Nylon Universal Loft Block - 2 Line.
1.
Loft Block - 2 Line:
2.
The sheave shall have an 8-1/2 inch (215.9 mm) outside diameter, and shall be filled nylon. The sheave shall be equipped with a 17 mm (.67in) diameter shaft and two tapered roller bearings.
3.
Base angles shall be a minimum 1.5 inch x 1.5 inch x 3/16 inch (38.1 mm x 38.1 mm x 4.76 mm) angle punched with a universal hole pattern for easy installation.
4.
Side plates shall be a minimum of 12-gauge (2.78 mm) steel, and shall fully enclose the sheave. Side plates shall be bolted to the base angles.
5.
The block and associated mounting hardware shall have a recommended working load of at least 750 lbs. (340.2 KG), and shall be designed for use in either upright or underhung usage.
6.
Loft blocks shall be grooved for two 1/4 inch (6.4 mm) lift lines.
Y.
8 Inch Cast Iron Universal Loft Block - 2 Line.
1.
Loft Block - 2 Line:
2.
The sheave shall have an 8-1/2 inch (215.9 mm) outside diameter, and shall be an iron casting, with two machined grooves. The sheave shall be equipped with a 17 mm diameter shaft and two sealed, precision ball bearings.
3.
Base angles shall be a minimum 1-1/2 inch x 1-1/2 inch x 3/16 inch (38.1 mm x 38.1 mm x 4.76 mm) angle punched with a universal hole pattern for easy installation.
4.
Side plates shall be a minimum of 12-gauge (2.78 mm) steel, and shall fully enclose the sheave. Side plates shall be bolted and welded to the base angles.
5.
The block and associated mounting hardware shall have a recommended working load of at least 500 lbs. (226.8 KG) per line and 750 lbs. (340.2 KG) total, and shall be designed for use in either upright or underhung usage.
6.
Loft blocks shall be grooved for two 1/4 inch (6.4 mm) lift lines.
Z.
8 Inch Cast Iron Universal Loft Block - 2 Line.
1.
Loft Block - 2 Line:
2.
The sheave shall have an 8-1/2 inch (215.9 mm) outside diameter, and shall be an iron casting, with two machined grooves. The sheave shall be equipped with a 17 mm diameter shaft and two tapered roller bearings.
3.
Base angles shall be a minimum 1.5 inch x 1.5 inch x 3/16 inch (38.1 mm x 38.1 mm x 4.76 mm) angle punched with a universal hole pattern for easy installation.
4.
Side plates shall be a minimum of 12-gauge (2.78 mm) steel, and shall fully enclose the sheave. Side plates shall be bolted and welded to the base angles.
5.
The block and associated mounting hardware shall have a recommended working load of at least 500 lbs. (226.8 KG) per line and 750 lbs. (340.2 KG) total, and shall be designed for use in either upright or underhung usage.
6.
Loft blocks shall be grooved for two 1/4 inch (6.4 mm) lift lines.
AA.
8 Inch Nylon Loft Block, Upright, 4 & 8 Line.
1.
Loft Block - 4 & 8 Line:
2.
The sheave shall have an 8.5 inch (215.9 mm) outside diameter, and shall be filled nylon. The sheave shall be equipped with a 1 inch (25.4 mm) diameter shaft and two tapered roller bearings.
3.
Base angles shall be a minimum 1.5 inch x 1.5 inch x 3/16 inch (38.1 mm x 38.1 mm x 4.76 mm) angle.
4.
Side plates shall be a minimum of 10-gauge (3.57 mm) steel, and shall fully enclose the sheave. Side plates shall be bolted and welded to the base angles.
5.
The block and associated mounting hardware shall have a recommended working load of at least 750 lbs. (340.2 KG) per line and 1300 lbs. (589.7 KG) total, and shall be designed for use in either upright or underhung usage.
6.
Loft blocks shall be grooved for 4 or 8 - 1/4 inch (6.4 mm) lift lines.
AB.
8 Inch Cast Iron Loft Block, Underhung, 4 & 8 Line.
1.
Loft Block - 4 & 8 Line:
2.
The sheave shall have an 8.5 inch (215.9 mm) outside diameter, and shall be an iron casting, with machined grooves. The sheave shall be equipped with a 1 inch (25.4 mm) diameter shaft and two tapered roller bearings.
3.
Base angles shall be a minimum 1.5 inch x 1.5 inch x 3/16 inch (38.1 mm x 38.1 mm x 4.76 mm) angle.
4.
Side plates shall be a minimum of 10-gauge (3.57 mm) steel, and shall fully enclose the sheave. Side plates shall be bolted to the base angles.
5.
The block and associated mounting hardware shall have a recommended working load of at least 500 lbs. (226.8 KG) per line and 1300 lbs. (589.7 KG) total, and shall be designed for use in either upright or underhung usage.
6.
Loft blocks shall be grooved for 4 or 8 - 1/4 inch (6.4 mm) lift lines.
AC.
12 Inch Cast Iron Universal Loft Block.
1.
The sheave shall have a 12 inch (304.8 mm) pitch diameter, and shall be an iron casting, with a machined groove. The sheave shall be equipped with a 1 inch (25.4 mm) diameter shaft and two tapered roller bearings.
2.
Base angles shall be a minimum 1.5 inch x 2 inch x 3/16 inch (38.1 mm x 50.8 mm x 4.76 mm) angle.
3.
Side plates shall be a minimum of 10-gauge steel (3.57 mm), and shall fully enclose the sheave. Side plates shall be bolted to the base angles.
4.
Loft blocks shall be grooved for one 1/4 inch or 3/8 inch (6.4 mm or 9.52 mm) lift line.
5.
The block and associated mounting hardware shall have a recommended working load of at least 700 lbs. (317.5 KG) for 1/4 inch (6.4 mm) cable or 1050 lbs. (476.3 KG) for 3/8 inch (9.52 mm) cable, and shall be designed for use in either upright or underhung usage.
AD.
16 Inch Steel, Universal Loft Block.
1.
The steel sheave shall have a 16 inch (406.4 mm) diameter with a machined groove. The sheave shall be equipped with a 1 inch (25.4 mm) diameter shaft and two tapered roller bearings.
2.
Base angles shall be a minimum 2 inch x 2 inch x 1/4 inch (50.8 mm x 50.8 mm x 6.4 mm) angle.
3.
Side plates shall be a minimum of 7-gauge (4.76 mm) steel, and shall fully enclose the sheave. Side plates shall be bolted to the base angles.
4.
The block and associated mounting hardware shall have a recommended working load of at least 1400 lbs (635 KG), and shall be designed for use in either upright or underhung usage.
5.
Loft blocks shall be grooved for one 3/8 inch (9.52 mm) lift line.
 
** NOTE TO SPECIFIER **Delete 19 series cable loft blocks not required for manual counterweight rigging.
 
AE.
8 Inch Nylon Loft Block, Underhung (19 Series).
1.
Underhung Loft Block:
2.
The sheave shall have an 8-1/2 inch (215.9 mm) outside diameter and shall be filled nylon. The sheave shall be equipped with a 17 mm (.67in) diameter shaft and two sealed, precision ball bearings.
3.
Side plates shall be a minimum of 10-gauge (3.57 mm) steel, with a cut-out to grasp the beam flange.
4.
A machined steel 3/4 inch (19.1 mm) drawbolt and steel clip shall grasp the opposing beam flange and allow a 5 inch (127 mm) grip adjustment to accommodate a range of beam sizes.
5.
The block shall have a recommended working load of at least 500 lbs. (226.8 mm).
6.
Loft blocks shall be grooved for one 1/4 inch (6.4 mm) lift line.
AF.
8 Inch Nylon Loft Block, Underhung (19 Series).
1.
Underhung Loft Block:
2.
The sheave shall have an 8-1/2 inch (215.9 mm) outside diameter and shall be filled nylon. The sheave shall be equipped with a 17 mm (.67in) diameter shaft and two tapered roller bearings.
3.
Side plates shall be a minimum of 10-gauge (3.57 mm) steel, with a cut-out to grasp the beam flange.
4.
A machined steel 3/4 inch (19.1 mm) drawbolt and steel clip shall grasp the opposing beam flange and allow a 5 inch (127 mm) grip adjustment to accommodate a range of beam sizes.
5.
The block shall have a recommended working load of at least 500 lbs. (226.8 mm).
6.
Loft blocks shall be grooved for one 1/4 inch (6.4 mm) lift line.
AG.
8 Inch Cast Iron Loft Block, Underhung (19 Series).
1.
Underhung Loft Block:
2.
The sheave shall have an 8-1/2 inch (215.9 mm) outside diameter and shall be an iron casting with a machined groove. The sheave shall be equipped with a 17 mm (.67in) diameter shaft and two sealed, precision ball bearings.
3.
Side plates shall be a minimum of 10-gauge (3.57 mm) steel, with a cut-out to grasp the beam flange.
4.
A machined steel 3/4 inch (19.1 mm) drawbolt and steel clip shall grasp the opposing beam flange and allow a 5 inch (127 mm) grip adjustment to accommodate a range of beam sizes.
5.
The block shall have a recommended working load of at least 500 lbs. (226.8 mm).
6.
Loft blocks shall be grooved for one 1/4 inch (6.4 mm) lift line.
AH.
8 Inch Cast Iron Loft Block, Underhung (19 Series).
1.
Underhung Loft Block:
2.
The sheave shall have an 8-1/2 inch (215.9 mm) outside diameter and shall be an iron casting with a machined groove. The sheave shall be equipped with a 17 mm (.67in) diameter shaft and two tapered roller bearings.
3.
Side plates shall be a minimum of 10-gauge (3.57 mm) steel, with a cut-out to grasp the beam flange.
4.
A machined steel 3/4 inch (19.1 mm) drawbolt and steel clip shall grasp the opposing beam flange and allow a 5 inch (127 mm) grip adjustment to accommodate a range of beam sizes.
5.
The block shall have a recommended working load of at least 500 lbs. (226.8 mm).
6.
Loft blocks shall be grooved for one 1/4 inch (6.4 mm) lift line.
AI.
8 Inch Nylon Loft Block, Underhung (19 Series) - 2 Line.
1.
Underhung Loft Block - 2 Line:
2.
The sheave shall have an 8-1/2 inch (215.9 mm) outside diameter, and shall be filled nylon. The sheave shall be equipped with a 17 mm (.67in) diameter shaft and two sealed, precision ball bearings.
3.
Side plates shall be a minimum of 10-gauge (3.57 mm) steel, with a cutout to grasp the beam flange.
4.
A machined steel 3/4 inch (19.1 mm) drawbolt and steel clip shall grasp the opposing beam flange and allow a 5 inch (127 mm) grip adjustment to accommodate a range of beam sizes.
5.
The block shall have a recommended working load of at least 500 lbs. (226.8 mm).
6.
Loft blocks shall be grooved for two 1/4 inch (6.4 mm) lift lines.
AJ.
8 Inch Nylon Loft Block, Underhung (19 Series) - 2 Line.
1.
Underhung Loft Block - 2 Line:
2.
The sheave shall have an 8.5 inch (215.9 mm) outside diameter, and shall be filled nylon. The sheave shall be equipped with a 17 mm (.67in) diameter shaft and two tapered roller bearings.
3.
Side plates shall be a minimum of 10-gauge (3.57 mm) steel, with a cutout to grasp the beam flange.
4.
A machined steel 3/4 inch (19.1 mm) drawbolt and steel clip shall grasp the opposing beam flange and allow a 5 inch (127 mm) grip adjustment to accommodate a range of beam sizes.
5.
The block shall have a recommended working load of at least 500 lbs. (226.8 mm).
6.
Loft blocks shall be grooved for two 1/4 inch (6.4 mm) lift lines.
AK.
8 Inch Cast Iron Loft Block, Underhung (19 Series) - 2 Line.
1.
Underhung Loft Block - 2 Line:
2.
The sheave shall have an 8-1/2 inch (215.9 mm) outside diameter, and shall be an iron casting, with two machined grooves. The sheave shall be equipped with a 17 mm (.67 inch) diameter shaft and two sealed, precision ball bearings.
3.
Side plates shall be a minimum of 10-gauge steel (3.57 mm), with a cutout to grasp the beam flange.
4.
A machined steel 3/4 inch (19.1 mm) drawbolt and steel clip shall grasp the opposing beam flange and allow a 5 inch (127 mm) grip adjustment to accommodate a range of beam sizes.
5.
The side plates shall be rigidly fastened together with a minimum of three 1/4 inch (6.4 mm) bolts and pipe, two of which prevent cables from escaping the sheave grooves.
6.
The block shall have a recommended working load of at least 500 lbs. (226.8 mm).
7.
Loft blocks shall be grooved for two 1/4 inch (6.4 mm) lift lines.
AL.
8 Inch Cast Iron Loft Block, Underhung (19 Series) - 2 Line.
1.
Underhung Loft Block - 2 Line:
2.
The sheave shall have an 8-1/2 inch (215.9 mm) outside diameter, and shall be an iron casting, with two machined grooves. The sheave shall be equipped with a 17 mm (.67in) diameter shaft and two tapered roller bearings.
3.
Side plates shall be a minimum of 10-gauge steel (3.57 mm), with a cutout to grasp the beam flange.
4.
A machined steel 3/4 inch (19.1 mm) drawbolt and steel clip shall grasp the opposing beam flange and allow a 5 inch (127 mm) grip adjustment to accommodate a range of beam sizes.
5.
The side plates shall be rigidly fastened together with a minimum of three 1/4 inch (6.4 mm) bolts and pipe, two of which prevent cables from escaping the sheave grooves.
6.
The block shall have a recommended working load of at least 500 lbs. (226.8 mm).
7.
Loft blocks shall be grooved for two 1/4 inch (6.4 mm) lift lines.
AM.
8 Inch Nylon Loft Block, Underhung (19 Series) - 4 & 8 Line.
1.
Underhung Loft Block - 4 & 8 Line:
2.
The sheave shall have an 8-1/2 inch (215.9 mm) outside diameter and shall be filled nylon. The sheave shall be equipped with a 1 inch (25.4 mm) diameter shaft and two tapered roller bearings.
3.
Side plates shall be a minimum of 10-gauge (3.57 mm) steel, with a cut-out to grasp the beam flange.
4.
A machined steel 3/4 inch (19.1 mm) drawbolt and steel clip shall grasp the opposing beam flange and allow a 4 inch (101.6 mm) grip adjustment to accommodate a range of beam sizes.
5.
The side plates shall be rigidly fastened together with a minimum of three 1/4 inch (6.4 mm) bolts and pipe, two of which prevent cables from escaping the sheave grooves.
6.
The block shall have a recommended working load of at least 700 lbs. (317.5 KG).
7.
Loft blocks shall be grooved for 4 or 8 - 1/4 inch (6.4 mm) lift lines.
AN.
8 inch Cast Iron Loft Block, Underhung (19 Series) - 4 & 8 Line.
1.
Underhung Loft Block - 4 & 8 Line:
2.
The sheave shall have an 8.5 inch (215.9 mm) outside diameter, and shall be an iron casting, with machined grooves. The sheave shall be equipped with a 1 inch (25.4 mm) diameter shaft and two tapered roller bearings.
3.
Side plates shall be a minimum of 10-gauge (3.57 mm) steel, with a cut-out to grasp the beam flange.
4.
A machined steel 3/4 inch (19.05 mm) drawbolt and steel clip shall grasp the opposing beam flange and allow a 4 inch (101.6 mm) grip adjustment to accommodate a range of beam sizes.
5.
The side plates shall be rigidly fastened together with a minimum of three 1/4 inch (6.4 mm) bolts and pipe, two of which prevent cables from escaping the sheave grooves.
6.
The block shall have a recommended working load of at least 700 lbs (317.5 KG).
7.
Loft blocks shall be grooved for 4 or 8 - 1/4 inch (6.4 mm) lift lines.
AO.
12 Inch Cast Iron Loft Block, Underhung (19 Series).
1.
Underhung Loft Block:
2.
The sheave shall have a 12 inch (304.8 mm) outside diameter, and shall be an iron casting, with a machined groove. The sheave shall be equipped with a 1 inch (25.4 mm) diameter shaft and two tapered roller bearings.
3.
Side plates shall be a minimum of 7-gauge (4.76 mm) steel, with a cut-out to grasp the beam flange.
4.
A machined steel 3/4 inch (19.1 mm) drawbolt and steel clip shall grasp the opposing beam flange and allow a 5 inch (127 mm) grip adjustment to accommodate a range of beam sizes.
5.
The block shall have a recommended working load of at least 675 lbs (306.2 KG).
6.
Loft blocks shall be grooved for one 1/4 inch or 3/8 inch (6.4 mm or 9.52 mm) lift line.
 
** NOTE TO SPECIFIER **Delete 3/16 inch (4.8 mm) cable loft blocks not required for manual counterweight rigging.
 
AP.
8 Inch Nylon Loft Block.
1.
Underhung Loft Block:
2.
The sheave shall have an 8-1/2 inch (215.9 mm) outside diameter and shall be filled nylon. The sheave shall be equipped with a 17 mm (.67in) diameter shaft and two sealed, precision ball bearings.
3.
Side plates shall be a minimum of 10-gauge steel (3.57 mm), with a cut-out to grasp the beam flange.
4.
A machined steel 3/4 inch (19.1 mm) drawbolt and steel clip shall grasp the opposing beam flange and allow a 5 inch (127 mm) grip adjustment to accommodate a range of beam sizes.
5.
The block shall have a recommended working load of at least 500 lbs. (226.8 KG).
6.
Loft blocks shall be grooved for one 3/16 inch (4.76 mm) lift line.
AQ.
8 Inch Nylon Loft Block.
1.
Underhung Loft Block:
2.
The sheave shall have an 8-1/2 inch (215.9 mm) outside diameter and shall be filled nylon. The sheave shall be equipped with a 17 mm (.67in) diameter shaft and two tapered roller bearings.
3.
Side plates shall be a minimum of 10-gauge steel (3.57 mm), with a cut-out to grasp the beam flange.
4.
A machined steel 3/4 inch (19.1 mm) drawbolt and steel clip shall grasp the opposing beam flange and allow a 5 inch (127 mm) grip adjustment to accommodate a range of beam sizes.
5.
The block shall have a recommended working load of at least 500 lbs. (226.8 KG).
6.
Loft blocks shall be grooved for one 3/16 inch (4.76 mm) lift line.
AR.
8 Inch Nylon Univ. Loft Block.
1.
The sheave shall have an 8-1/2 inch (215.9 mm) outside diameter, and shall be filled nylon. The sheave shall be equipped with a 17 mm (.67in) diameter shaft and two sealed, precision ball bearings.
2.
Base angles shall be a minimum 1-1/2 inch x 1-1/2 inch x 3/16 inch (38.1 mm x 38.1 mm x 4.76 mm) angle punched with a universal hole pattern for easy installation.
3.
Side plates shall be a minimum of 12-gauge steel (2.78 mm), and shall fully enclose the sheave. Side plates shall be bolted to the base angles.
4.
The block and associated mounting hardware shall have a recommended working load of at least 500 lbs. (226.8 KG), and shall be designed for use in either upright or underhung usage.
5.
Loft blocks shall be grooved for one 3/16 inch (4.76 mm) lift line.
AS.
8 Inch Nylon Universal Loft Block.
1.
The sheave shall have an 8-1/2 inch (215.9 mm) outside diameter, and shall be filled nylon. The sheave shall be equipped with a 17 mm (.67in) diameter shaft and two tapered roller bearings.
2.
Base angles shall be a minimum 1-1/2 inch x 1-1/2 inch x 3/16 inch (38.1 mm x 38.1 mm x 4.76 mm) angle punched with a universal hole pattern for easy installation.
3.
Side plates shall be a minimum of 12-gauge steel (2.78 mm), and shall fully enclose the sheave. Side plates shall be bolted to the base angles.
4.
The block and associated mounting hardware shall have a recommended working load of at least 500 lbs. (226.8 KG), and shall be designed for use in either upright or underhung usage.
5.
Loft blocks shall be grooved for one 3/16 inch (4.76 mm) lift line.
AT.
8 inch Nylon Loft Block, Underhung - 8LN.
1.
Underhung Loft Block - 8 Line:
2.
The sheave shall have an 8.5 inch (215.9 mm) outside diameter and shall be filled nylon. The sheave shall be equipped with a 1 inch (25.4 mm) diameter shaft and two tapered roller bearings.
3.
Side plates shall be a minimum of 10-gauge (3.57 mm) steel, with a cut-out to grasp the beam flange.
4.
A machined steel 3/4 inch (19.05 mm) drawbolt and steel clip shall grasp the opposing beam flange and allow a 4 inch (101.6 mm) grip adjustment to accommodate a range of beam sizes.
5.
The side plates shall be rigidly fastened together with a minimum of three 1/4 inch (6.45 mm) bolts and pipe, two of which prevent cables from escaping the sheave grooves.
6.
The block shall have a recommended working load of at least 700 lbs (317.5 KG).
7.
Loft blocks shall be grooved for eight, 3/16 inch (4.76 mm) lift lines.
AU.
8 Inch Nylon Loft Block, Upright, 8LN.
1.
Loft Block - 8 Line:
2.
The sheave shall have an 8.5 inch (215.9 mm) outside diameter, and shall be filled nylon. The sheave shall be equipped with a 1 inch (25.4 mm) diameter shaft and two tapered roller bearings.
3.
Base angles shall be a minimum 1.5 inch x 1.5 inch x 3/16 inch (38.1 mm x 38.1 mm x 4.763 mm) angle.
4.
Side plates shall be a minimum of 10-gauge steel (3.57 mm), and shall fully enclose the sheave. Side plates shall be bolted and welded to the base angles.
5.
The block and associated mounting hardware shall have a recommended working load of at least 500 lbs. (226.8 KG) per line and 1300 lbs. (598.7 KG) total load, and shall be designed for use in either upright or underhung usage.
6.
Loft blocks shall be grooved for eight, 3/16 inch (4.763 mm) lift lines.
AV.
Idler Assemblies.
1.
Loft block idlers shall be provided to carry the weight of the cables and prevent rubbing against adjacent block side plates. They shall not be installed to carry line loads or to act as deflector or mule blocks.
2.
Idler assemblies shall consist of one or two 3-1/2 inch (88.9 mm) diameter, 3-line filled ABS idler pulleys mounted on the side of the loft block housing.
3.
The sheaves shall have 1/4 inch (6.4 mm) cable grooves and two sealed, precision ball bearings and shall ride on a 1/4 inch (6.4 mm) shaft inserted through the block housing.
4.
A 1/8 inch (3.2 mm) diameter bail shall mount in the housing and captivate the cables in the grooves.
5.
All nuts shall be of the nylon insert self-locking type.
 
** NOTE TO SPECIFIER **Delete if not required for manual counterweight rigging.
 
AW.
Pivot Bracket.
1.
Pivot brackets mount loft blocks to beams with more than 1-1/2 degrees of slope.
2.
They consist of a pair of angles that bolt to the block base angles and a matching pair of angles that mount to the beam with clips. A 3/4 inch (19.1 mm) diameter threaded rod connects the two sets of angle to provide a hinge point.
 
** NOTE TO SPECIFIER **Delete mule block not required for manual counterweight rigging.
 
AX.
8 Inch Cast Iron Mule Block - 1 & 2 Line.
1.
8 inch (203 mm) Mule Blocks - 1 & 2 Line.
2.
The sheave shall have an 8-1/2 inch (215.9 mm) outside diameter and shall be an iron casting with a machined groove.
3.
The sheave shall be equipped with a 17 mm (0.67 inch) diameter shaft and two, sealed, precision ball bearings.
4.
Side plates shall be a minimum of 7-gauge (4.76 mm) steel, and shall fully enclose the sheave.
5.
Side plates shall be fillet welded to an 8 inch (203.2 mm) structural steel channel or a 3 gage (6.2 mm) formed channel base. Brace tubes with a minimum size of 2 inch x 2 inch x 3/16 inch (50.8 mm x 50.8 mm x 4.8 mm) shall be welded to both side plates and the channel base for added strength.
6.
There shall be a minimum of four 3/8 inch (9.52 mm) bolts with spacers between the side plates for structural strength and to prevent cables from escaping the sheave grooves.
7.
The block shall have a recommended working load maximum of 500 lbs. (226.8 KG) per line.
8.
Mule blocks shall be grooved for one or two 1/4 inch (6.4 mm) lines.
AY.
8 Inch Cast Iron Mule Block - 1 & 2 Line.
1.
8 inch (203 mm) Mule Blocks - 1 & 2 Line.
2.
The sheave shall have an 8.5 inch (215.9 mm) outside diameter and shall be an iron casting with a machined groove.
3.
The sheave shall be equipped with a 17 mm (0.67 inch) diameter shaft and two tapered roller bearings.
4.
Side plates shall be a minimum of 7-gauge (4.76 mm) steel, and shall fully enclose the sheave.
5.
Side plates shall be fillet welded to an 8 inch (203.2 mm) structural steel channel or a 3 gage (6.2 mm) formed channel base. Brace tubes with a minimum size of 2 inch x 2 inch x 3/16 inch (50.8 mm x 50.8 mm x 4.8 mm) shall be welded to both side plates and the channel base for added strength.
6.
There shall be a minimum of four 3/8 inch (9.52 mm) bolts with spacers between the side plates for structural strength and to prevent cables from escaping the sheave grooves.
7.
The block shall have a recommended working load maximum of 500 lbs. (226.8 KG) per line.
8.
Mule blocks shall be grooved for one or two 1/4 inch (6.4 mm) lines.
AZ.
8 Inch Cast Iron Mule Block - 4 & 8 Line.
1.
8 inch (203 mm) Mule Blocks - 4 & 8 Line.
2.
The sheave shall have an 8-1/2 inch (215 mm) outside diameter and shall be an iron casting with machined grooves.
3.
The sheave shall be equipped with a 1 inch (25.4 mm) diameter shaft and two tapered roller bearings.
4.
Side plates shall be a minimum of 7-gauge (4.76 mm) steel, and shall fully enclose the sheave.
5.
Side plates shall be fillet welded to an 8 inch (203.2 mm) structural steel channel or a 3 gauge (6.2 mm) formed channel base. Brace tubes with a minimum size of 2 inch x 2 inch x 1/4 inch (50.8 mm x 50.8 mm x 6.35 mm) shall be welded to both side plates and the channel base for added strength.
6.
There shall be a minimum of four 3/8 inch (9.52 mm) bolts with spacers between the side plates for structural strength and to prevent cables from escaping the sheave grooves.
7.
The block shall have a recommended working load of at least 500 lbs. (226.8 KG) per line with a total load not to exceed 2000 lbs. (907.2 KG) using a 90 degree wrap or 1400 lbs. (635.0 kg) using a 180 degree wrap.
8.
Mule blocks shall be grooved for four or eight 1/4 inch (6.4 mm) lines.
BA.
12 Inch Cast Iron Mule Block.
1.
12 inch (304.8 mm) Mule Blocks:
2.
The sheave shall have a 12 inch (304.8 mm) outside diameter and shall be an iron casting with a machined groove.
3.
The sheave shall be equipped with a 1 inch (25.4 mm) diameter shaft and two tapered roller bearings.
4.
Side plates shall be a minimum of 7-gauge (4.76 mm) steel, and shall fully enclose the sheave.
5.
Side plates shall be fillet welded to an 8 inch (203 mm) structural steel channel or a 3 gauge (6.2 mm) formed channel base. Brace tubes with a minimum size of 2 inch x 2 inch x 1/4 inch (50.8 mm x 50.8 mm x 6.4 mm) shall be welded to both side plates and the channel base for added strength.
6.
There shall be a minimum of four 3/8 inch (9.52 mm) bolts with spacers between the side plates for structural strength and to prevent cables from escaping the sheave grooves.
7.
The block shall have a recommended working load of at least 700 lbs. (317.5 KG) per line.
8.
Total load of a one line block shall not exceed 700 lbs. (317.5 KG) using a 90 degree wrap or 700 lbs. (317.5 KG) using a 180 degree wrap.
9.
Total load of a two line block shall not exceed 1400 lbs. (907.2 KG) using a 90 degree wrap or 1400 lbs. (907.2 KG) using a 180 degree wrap.
10.
Total load of a four line block shall not exceed 2000 lbs. (408.23 KG) using a 90 degree wrap or 1400 lbs. (907.2 KG) using a 180 degree wrap.
11.
Total load of a four line block shall not exceed 2000 lbs. (408.23 KG) using a 90 degree wrap or 1400 lbs. (907.2 KG) using a 180 degree wrap.
12.
Mule blocks shall be grooved for 1, 2, 4, or 8 - 1/4 inch (6.4 mm) lines.
BB.
8 Inch Nylon Mule Block - 2 Line.
1.
8 inch (203 mm) Mule Blocks - 1 & 2 Line.
2.
The sheave shall have an 8-1/2 inch (209.55 mm) outside diameter and shall be filled nylon.
3.
The sheave shall be equipped with a 17 mm (0.67 inch) diameter shaft and two, sealed, precision ball bearings.
4.
Side plates shall be a minimum of 7-gauge (4.76 mm) steel, and shall fully enclose the sheave.
5.
Side plates shall be fillet welded to an 8 inch (203.2 mm) formed steel channel base. Bracing tubes with a minimum size of 2 inch x 2 inch x 3/16 inch (50.8 mm x 50.8 mm x 4.76 mm) shall be welded to both side plates and the base for added strength.
6.
There shall be a minimum of four 3/8 inch (9.53 mm) bolts with spacers between the side plates for structural strength and to prevent cables from escaping the sheave grooves.
7.
The block shall have a recommended working load of at least 875 lbs. (385.55 KG) per line. Total load not to exceed 1750 lbs. (793.8 KG) for a 90 degree wrap and 1400 lbs. (635.0 KG) for a 180 degree wrap.
8.
Mule blocks shall be grooved for one or two 1/4 inch (6.4 mm) or 3/16 inch (4.76 mm) lines.
BC.
8 Inch Nylon Mule Block - 2 Line.
1.
8 inch (203 mm) Mule Blocks - 1 & 2 Line.
2.
The sheave shall have an 8-1/2 inch (209.55 mm) outside diameter and shall be filled nylon.
3.
The sheave shall be equipped with a 17 mm (0.67 inch) diameter shaft and two tapered roller bearings.
4.
Side plates shall be a minimum of 7-gauge (4.76 mm) steel, and shall fully enclose the sheave.
5.
Side plates shall be fillet welded to an 8 inch (203.2 mm) formed steel channel base. Bracing tubes with a minimum size of 2 inch x 2 inch x 3/16 inch (50.8 mm x 50.8 mm x 4.76 mm) shall be welded to both side plates and the base for added strength.
6.
There shall be a minimum of four 3/8 inch (9.53 mm) bolts with spacers between the side plates for structural strength and to prevent cables from escaping the sheave grooves.
7.
The block shall have a recommended working load of at least 875 lbs. (385.55 KG) per line. Total load not to exceed 1750 lbs. (793.8 KG) for a 90 degree wrap and 1400 lbs. (635.0 KG) for a 180 degree wrap.
8.
Mule blocks shall be grooved for one or two 1/4 inch (6.4 mm) or 3/16 inch (4.76 mm) lines.
BD.
8 Inch Nylon Mule Block - 4 & 8 Line.
1.
8 inch (203.2 mm) Mule Block.
2.
The sheave shall have an 8-1/2 inch (209.55 mm) outside diameter and shall be filled nylon.
3.
The sheave shall be equipped with a 1 inch (25.4 mm) diameter shaft and two tapered roller bearings.
4.
Side plates shall be a minimum of 7-gauge (4.76 mm) steel, and shall fully enclose the sheave.
5.
Side plates shall be fillet welded to an 8 inch (203.2 mm) formed steel channel base. Bracing tubes with a minimum size of 2 inch x 2 inch x 3/16 inch (50.8 mm x 50.8 mm x 4.76 mm) shall be welded to both side plates and the base for added strength.
6.
There shall be a minimum of four 3/8 inch (9.525 mm) bolts with spacers between the side plates for structural strength and to prevent cables from escaping the sheave grooves.
7.
The block shall have a recommended working load of at least 875 lbs. (396.9 KG) per 1/4 inch (6.4 mm) line and 525 lbs. (238.1 KG) per 3/16 inch (4.76 mm) line with a total load not to exceed 2000 lbs. (907.2 KG) using a 90 degree wrap or 1400 lbs. (635.0 kg) using a 180 degree wrap.
8.
Mule blocks shall be series grooved for four or eight 1/4 inch (6.4 mm) or 3/16 inch (4.76 mm) lines.
 
** NOTE TO SPECIFIER **Delete if not required for manual counterweight rigging.
 
BE.
Swivel Stand.
1.
The stand consists of a heavy pipe welded to a braced base plate. The plate may be punched for temporary attachment bolts but the base will be welded to the building structure after final alignment.
2.
A swivel is factory welded to mule block. It shall have a tube at one end that fits over the vertical stand member and swivels for alignment. Bolts are for alignment but all connections shall be welded after alignment.
 
** NOTE TO SPECIFIER **Delete if not required for manual counterweight rigging.
 
BF.
Mule Stand.
1.
The stand shall consist of a steel frame that is elevated to the required height and tilted to adjust the mule to the proper angle. The frame may be punched for temporary attachment bolts but the base will be welded to the building structure after final alignment.
 
** NOTE TO SPECIFIER **Delete if not required for manual counterweight rigging. Delete Guide System Types "J", "A" or "T" not required for project.
 
BG.
J-Guide System.
1.
Vertical J's shall be 1-3/4 inch x 1-1/2 inch x 3/16 inch (44.45 mm x 38.1 mm x 4.76 mm) extruded aluminum members.
2.
J-guides shall be held in place by extruded aluminum clips, which are bolted to the wall battens. The clips and J-guide shall be formed so that they lock together in accurate alignment. There shall be no need for holes or slots in the J-guides.
3.
Horizontal wall battens shall be located on centers not to exceed 5 feet (1524 mm). Wall battens shall be 1-3/4 inch x 1-3/4 inch x 3/16 inch (44.45 mm x 44.45 mm x 4.76 mm steel angles with factory punched holes on 2 inch (50.8 mm) centers to allow J-guides to be located on 6 inch, 8 inch (152.4 mm, 203.2 mm) or other centers. (Locations with high seismic activity may require different batten spacing or sizes.).
4.
Wall battens shall be held in place by adjustable wall knees, consisting of a 5/16 inch x 1.5 inch (7.93 mm x 38.1 mm) steel knee and an 11 gauge (3.18 mm) 1 inch x 2 inch (25.4 mm x 50.8 mm) formed, slotted channel to aid in alignment made necessary by irregularities in the wall.
5.
There shall be a top stop batten, a bottom stop batten and a floor batten, all of which shall be made of 1-3/4 inch x 1-3/4 inch x 3/16 inch (44.45 mm x 44.45 mm x 4.76 mm) steel angle. The top and bottom stop battens shall each have a 2 inch x 2 inch (50 mm x 50 mm) hardwood bumper securely bolted to the stop battens by 1/4 inch x 2-1/2 inch (6.4 mm x 63.5 mm) carriage bolts, nuts, and washers.
6.
All other members of the J-guide system shall be assembled using 5/16 inch (7.93 mm) hex head bolts, lock nuts and washers.
BH.
A-Guide System.
1.
The A-guides shall be 3.5 inch deep x 2 inch wide x 3/16 inch (88.9 mm x 50.8 mm x 4.76 mm) wall extruded aluminum members.
2.
A-guides shall be held in place by extruded aluminum clips on each leg of the guide. The clips are bolted to the wall battens. The clips and A-guide shall be formed so that they lock together in accurate alignment. There shall be no need for holes or slots in the A-guides.
3.
Horizontal wall battens shall be located on centers not to exceed 5ft (1.52 mm). (Locations with high seismic activity may require different spacing or sizes.) Wall battens shall be 1-3/4 inch x 1-3/4 inch x 3/16 inch (44.45 mm x 44.45 mm x 4.76 mm) steel angles with factory punched holes on 2 inch (50.8 mm) centers to allow A-guides to be located on 6 inch, 8 inch (152.4 mm x 203.2 mm) or other centers.
4.
Wall battens shall be held in place by adjustable wall knees, consisting of a 5/16 inch x 1.5 inch (38.1 mm) steel knee and an 11 gauge (3.18 mm) 1 inch x 2 inch (25.4 mm x 50.8 mm) formed, slotted channel to aid in alignment made necessary by irregularities in the wall.
5.
There shall be a top stop batten, a bottom stop batten and a floor batten, all of which shall be made of 1-3/4 inch x 1-3/4 inch x 3/16 inch (44.45 mm x 44.45 mm x 4.76 mm) steel angle. The top and bottom stop battens shall each have a 2 inch x 2 inch (50.8 mm x 50.8 mm) hardwood bumper faced with 1/4 inch x 2 inch (6.4 mm x 50.8 mm) neoprene securely bolted to the stop battens by 1/4 inch x 2-1/2 inch (6.4 mm x 63.5 mm) carriage bolts, nuts, and washers.
6.
All other members of the A-guide system shall be assembled using 5/16 inch (7.94 mm) hex head bolts, lock nuts and washers.
BI.
T-Guide System.
1.
Vertical T-bars shall be 1.5 inch x 1.5 inch x 3/16 inch (38.1 mm x 38.1 mm x4.76 mm) steel members with factory punched mounting holes and slots.
2.
T-bars shall be held in place and properly spaced by "U" shaped spreader plates formed from 1 inch x 3/16 inch (25.4 mm x 4.76 mm) steel, which are bolted to the wall battens.
3.
Horizontal wall battens shall be located on centers not to exceed 5 feet (1524 mm). Wall battens shall be 1-3/4 inch x 1-3/4 inch x 3/16 inch (44.45 mm x 44.45 mm x 4.76 mm) steel angles with factory punched holes on 2 inch (50.5 mm) centers to allow J-guides to be located on 6 inch, 8 inch (152.4 mm, 203.2 mm) or other centers. (Locations with high seismic activity may require different batten spacing or sizes.).
4.
Wall battens shall be held in place by adjustable wall knees, consisting of a 5/16 inch x 1.5 inch (7.93 mm x 38.1 mm) steel knee and an 11 gauge (3.18 mm) 1 inch x 2 inch (25.4 mm x 50.8 mm) formed, slotted channel to aid in alignment made necessary by irregularities in the wall.
5.
There shall be a top stop batten, a bottom stop batten and a floor batten, all of which shall be made of 1-3/4 inch x 1-3/4 inch x 3/16 inch (44.45 mm x 44.45 mm x 4.76 mm) steel angle. The top and bottom stop battens shall each have a 2 inch x 2 inch (50.8 mm x 50.8 mm) hardwood bumper securely bolted to the stop battens by 1/4 inch x 2-1/2 inch (6.35 mm x 63.5 mm) carriage bolts, nuts, and washers.
6.
All other members of the T-bar system shall be assembled using 5/16 inch (7.93 mm) hex head bolts, lock nuts and washers.
 
** NOTE TO SPECIFIER ** Available for J-Guide, A-Guide and T-Bar types. Delete arbors not required.
 
BJ.
Arbor: FrontLoader Front Loading Arbor - Single Purchase.
1.
Arbor shall be of specified length, or long enough to accommodate counterweights to balance its pipe batten and related equipment, whichever is longer.
2.
The arbor shall be comprised of a series of sloped shelves within individually accessible compartments at 24 inch (6100 mm) increments.
3.
Each arbor compartment shall be designed to accommodate ANSI E1.4.1 compliant counterweight bricks 13-3/4 inches (349 mm) deep.
4.
Arbor models available shall include for 6 inch (152 mm) wide bricks with a minimum guide spacing of 8 inches (203 mm) center to center, and models for 4 inch (102 mm) wide bricks with a minimum guide spacing of 6 inches (152 mm) center to center based on project requirements.
5.
Arbor heights available shall include 6 feet (1829 mm) tall, 8 feet (2438 mm) tall, or 10 feet (3048 mm) tall (nominal) based on project requirements.
6.
Compartment latching mechanism shall be a two stage rotary latch system designed to comply with the strength requirements of SAE J839 and FMVSS 206.
7.
The pivot axial load shall meet or exceed 120 lb-in (13.55 N-m) torque.
8.
Arbor housing shall be constructed of formed 12-gauge steel sheet.
9.
Arbor gates shall be constructed of resistance welded bar in a grid (mesh) configuration.
10.
Each 24 inch (6100 mm) tall (nominal) arbor gate shall be attached onto the arbor with two hinges rated for a minimum of 400 lbs (181 kg) hanging static load each.
 
** NOTE TO SPECIFIER ** Available for J-Guide, A-Guide and T-Bar types. Delete arbors not required.
 
BK.
Arbor: FrontLoader Front Loading Arbor - Double Purchase.
1.
Arbor shall be of specified length, or long enough to accommodate counterweights to balance its pipe batten and related equipment, whichever is longer.
2.
The arbor shall be comprised of a series of sloped shelves within individually accessible compartments at 24 inch (6100 mm) increments.
3.
Each arbor compartment shall be designed to accommodate ANSI E1.4.1 compliant counterweight bricks 13-3/4 inches (349 mm) deep.
4.
Arbor models available shall include for 6 inch (152 mm) wide bricks with a minimum guide spacing of 8 inches (203 mm) center to center, and models for 4 inch (102 mm) wide bricks with a minimum guide spacing of 6 inches (152 mm) center to center based on project requirements.
5.
Arbor heights available shall include 6 feet (1829 mm) tall, 8 feet (2438 mm) tall, or 10 feet (3048 mm) tall (nominal) based on project requirements.
6.
Compartment latching mechanism shall be a two stage rotary latch system designed to comply with the strength requirements of SAE J839 and FMVSS 206.
7.
The pivot axial load shall meet or exceed 120 lb-in (13.55 N-m) torque.
8.
Arbor housing shall be constructed of formed 12-gauge steel sheet.
9.
Arbor gates shall be constructed of resistance welded bar in a grid (mesh) configuration.
10.
Each 24 inch (6100 mm) tall (nominal) arbor gate shall be attached onto the arbor with two hinges rated for a minimum of 400 lbs (181 kg) hanging static load each.
 
** NOTE TO SPECIFIER ** Available for J-Guide, A-Guide and T-Bar types. Delete arbors not required.
 
BL.
Arbor: J/T-Guide Single Purchase Arbor.
1.
Arbor shall be of specified length, or long enough to accommodate counterweights to balance its pipe batten and related equipment, whichever is longer.
2.
The arbor top shall be a 1/4 inch (6.4 mm) steel plate formed into a channel with 3 inch (76 mm) sides and punched to receive 8 cables. A bolt and spacer shall tie the legs together and provide a tie-off point for the hand line. The front of the arbor top shall carry a 1-1/2 inch (38 mm) high white set number.
3.
The arbor bottom shall be of similar construction, with counterweight rests to keep the weights from resting on the inner arbor rod nuts.
4.
The top and bottom of the arbor shall be tied together by means of two 3/4 inch steel arbor rods and a 3/8 inch x 3 inch (9.5 mm x 76 mm) steel back plate. The arbor rods shall have three nuts at each end, the outermost being a lock nut.
5.
Two guide assemblies shall be provided, each comprised of UHMW plates between steel backup plates or molded plastic shoe assemblies with stiffening ribs and lock tabs, secured to the arbor by means of two 3/8 inch (9.5 mm) hex head bolts and lock nuts.
6.
Provide 12-gauge (2.78 mm) spreader plates (two minimum) on arbor rods so they can be spaced between counterweights on 2 foot centers. Provide a retaining collar on each rod, each with a 1/4 inch (6.4 mm) set screw with red plastic knob for easy locking. The front retaining collar shall be welded to the top spreader plate.
7.
Provide labels on the steel back plates showing the proper locations for the spreader plates.
 
** NOTE TO SPECIFIER ** Available for J-Guide, A-Guide and T-Bar types. Delete if not required.
 
BM.
Arbor: J/T- Guide Single Purchase Arbor (Seismic).
1.
Spreader plates shall be captured by the arbor rods and the back bar. They are located as normal with additional plates added inside at the arbor top and bottom. The top and bottom plates are held in place using the inner arbor rod nuts.
2.
The spreader plates are 7 Ga. (4.7 mm) thick minimum and notched to ride around the edges of tee or J-guides without rubbing. This keeps the arbors attached to the guides, even if the arbor guide shoes are damaged during a seismic event.
3.
The bottom spreader plate shall be equipped with counterweight rests to keep the weights from resting on the inner arbor rod nuts.
BN.
Arbor: J/T-Guide Double Purchase Arbor.
1.
Arbor shall be of specified length, or long enough to accommodate counterweights to balance its pipe batten and related equipment, whichever is longer.
2.
The arbor top shall be a fabricated weldment of 1/2 inch (12.7 mm) steel plate and 7 gauge (4.76 mm) formed side plates. These shall enclose an 8-1/2 inch (215.9 mm) outside diameter cast sheave with grooves as required. The sheave shall be equipped with a 1 inch (25.4 mm) diameter shaft and two tapered roller bearings.
3.
The arbor bottom shall be a fabricated weldment of 1/2 inch (12.7 mm) formed steel plate and 10 gauge (3.57 mm) formed side plates, with counterweight rests to keep the weights from resting on the inner arbor rod nuts. The side plates shall enclose an 8" (203.2 mm) outside diameter cast sheave with a groove for a 3/4 inch (19.05 mm) hand line. The sheave shall be equipped with a 17 mm (0.67 inch) diameter shaft and two sealed, precision ball bearings.
4.
The top and bottom of the arbor shall be tied together by means of two 3/4 inch (19.05 mm) steel arbor rods and a 3/8 inch x 3 inch (9.52 mm x 76.2 mm) steel back plate. The arbor rods shall have three nuts at each end, the outermost being a lock nut.
5.
Two guide assemblies shall be provided, each comprised of UHMW plates between steel backup plates or molded plastic shoe assemblies with stiffening ribs and lock tabs, secured to the arbor by means of two 3/8 inch (9.52 mm) hex head bolts and lock nuts.
6.
Provide 12-gauge (2.78 mm) spreader plates (two minimum) on arbor rods so they can be spaced between counterweights on 2ft (609.6 mm) centers. Provide a retaining collar on each rod, each with a 1/4 inch (6.4 mm) set screw with red plastic knob for easy locking. The front retaining collar shall be welded to the top spreader plate.
7.
Provide labels on the steel back plates showing the proper locations for the spreader plates.
 
** NOTE TO SPECIFIER ** Available for J-Guide, A-Guide and T-Bar types. Delete locking rails not required for guide system.
 
BO.
Locking Rail: J/T-Guide Locking Rail.
1.
Rope locks and index cards shall be mounted on a formed steel angle no smaller than 3-1/2 inch x 5 inch x 1/4 inch (88.9 mm x 127 mm x 6.4 mm).
2.
The onstage edge of the rail shall be sloped and punched to receive formed clips which hold index cards centered on the installed sets. Provide one numbered plastic write-on card for each installed set.
3.
Stanchions made from 1/2 inch x 3 inch (12.7 mm x 76.2 mm) flat bar shall be provided on 5 feet (1.52m) (maximum) centers.
4.
The entire locking rail shall be designed and installed to withstand a minimum up load of 500 pounds per foot (226.8 KG per 304.8 mm) per AISC standards.
BP.
Locking Rail: J/T-Guide, DP Locking Rail.
1.
Rope locks and index cards shall be mounted on a formed steel angle no smaller than 3-1/2 inch x 5 inch x 1/4 inch (88.9 mm x 127 mm x 6.35 mm).
2.
The onstage edge of the rail shall be sloped and punched to receive formed clips which hold index cards centered on the installed sets. Provide one numbered plastic write-on card for each installed set.
3.
Stanchions made from 1/2 inch x 3 inch (12.7 mm x 76.2 mm) flat bar shall be provided on 5 feet (1.52m) (maximum) centers.
4.
A 3 inch X 2 inch X 1/4 inch (76.2 mm x 50.8 mm x 6.4 mm) angle located on the rear of the stanchions shall be punched and furnished with anchor shackles for tying off the ends of the double purchased handlines.
5.
The entire locking rail shall be designed and installed to withstand a minimum up load of 500 pounds per foot (226.8 KG per 304.8 mm) per AISC standards.
BQ.
Locking Rail: Gallery Locking Rail.
1.
Rope locks and index cards shall be mounted on a formed steel angle no smaller than 3-1/2 inch x 5 inch x 1/4 inch (88.9 mm x 127 mm x 6.4 mm).
2.
The onstage edge of the rail shall be sloped and punched to receive formed clips which hold index cards centered on the installed sets. Provide one numbered plastic write-on card for each installed set.
3.
Stanchions made from 2 inch (50.8 mm) steel square tube shall be provided on 5 feet (1.54m) (maximum) centers. They shall be long enough to anchor to the edge of the gallery. A continuous 3 inch x 2 inch x 1/4 inch (76.2 mm x 50.8 mm x 6.35 mm) angle shall help anchor the rail to the gallery and serve as a kick rail. Expanded metal mesh shall be provided between the stanchions.
 
** NOTE TO SPECIFIER ** Available for J-Guide, A-Guide and T-Bar types. The entire locking rail shall be designed and installed to withstand a minimum up load of 500 pounds per foot (226.8 KG per 304.8 mm) per AISC standards. Delete outrigger bracket if not required.
 
BR.
Outrigger Brackets:
1.
Angle iron outrigger brackets shall be made of 3/16 inch x 1-3/4 inch x 1-3/4 inch (4.76 mm x 44.45 mm x 44.45 mm) angle and spaced not more than 10ft (304.8 mm) apart. The brackets shall be attached to the wall battens of the arbor guide system so that the batten is located 10ft (304.8 mm) above the gallery or stage floor. The brackets shall include clamps for attaching the batten.
2.
The outrigger batten shall be made from 1.5 inch (38.1 mm) I.D., schedule 40 pipe extending the full length of the locking rail. Specifications are the same as other battens.
 
** NOTE TO SPECIFIER ** Available for J-Guide, A-Guide and T-Bar types. Delete compensating chain system if not required.
 
BS.
Compensating Chain System:
1.
A compensating chain system shall be provided to balance the transfer of weight of the lift lines from the batten to the arbor as counterweight sets are raised and lowered.
2.
Roller chain is attached to the bottom of the arbor and to a T-Bar wall batten at the midpoint of the T-Bar battery. The T-Bars are spaced away from the wall battens so the chain travels in the space between the arbor back bars and the wall battens. Size the chain so that weight is added to the arbor to balance the cable weight added to the batten as the batten is lowered.
 
** NOTE TO SPECIFIER ** Available for J-Guide, A-Guide and T-Bar types. Delete floor block not required for guide system.
 
BT.
Floor Block: Tension Floor Block.
1.
10 inch (254 mm) Tension Floor Block:
2.
The cast iron sheave shall have a 10 inch (254 mm) outside diameter and shall be an iron casting with a machined groove for a 3/4 inch (19.1 mm) rope.
3.
The sheave shall be equipped with a 17 mm (0.67inch) diameter shaft and two sealed, precision ball bearings.
4.
Side plates shall be a minimum of 3/16 inch (4.67 mm) steel plate.
5.
The block shall have a minimum weight of 40 lbs. (18.1 KG) to properly tension the hand line.
6.
A plastic kick tab shall be provided for adjustment of the rope tension.
7.
The floor block shall be held in place and guided in the T-bar, J-bar, or A-bar guides by two guide shoe assemblies, each consisting of two guides and one spacer made of 5/16 inch (7.94 mm) thick steel plates. Each guide shall be secured to the housing by means of two 3/8 inch (9.52 mm) hex head bolts and nuts.
BU.
Floor Block: Tension Floor Block.
1.
12 inch (304.8 mm) Tension Floor Block:
2.
The cast iron sheave shall have a 12 inch (304.8 mm) outside diameter and shall be an iron casting with a machined groove for a 3/4 inch (19.05 mm) rope.
3.
The sheave shall be equipped with a 17 mm (0.67inch) diameter shaft and two sealed, precision ball bearings.
4.
Side plates shall be a minimum of 3/16 inch (4.763 mm) steel plate.
5.
The block shall have a minimum weight of 48 lbs. (21.8 KG) to properly tension the hand line.
6.
A plastic kick tab shall be provided for adjustment of the rope tension.
7.
The floor block shall be held in place and guided in the T-bar, J-bar, or A-bar guides by two guide shoe assemblies, each consisting of two guides and one spacer made of 5/16 inch (7.94 mm) thick steel plates. Each guide shall be secured to the housing by means of two 3/8 inch (9.52 mm) hex head bolts and nuts.
 
** NOTE TO SPECIFIER ** Available for J-Guide, A-Guide and T-Bar types. Wire guides can be used to guide the travel path of counterweight arbors in place of J/T-guides or lattice tracks at much reduced cost under certain conditions. We do not recommend using wire guides with over 30ft (90.14m) of travel because the guides allow the arbors to move and twist too much. High tension in the guide wires keeps the arbors from swaying but greatly increases the loads placed in the building structure. If there are a number of guide wires present, the loads can become high enough to cause structural failure in the system. Lightly tensioned guides reduce building stress but allow the arbors to sway. This is OK if the arbors are far enough away from other arbors or obstructions to eliminate the possibility of collisions that can cause damage or falling counterweights. Delete if not required for project.
 
BV.
Wire Guide - Arbor.
1.
Arbor shall be of specified length, or long enough to accommodate counterweights to balance its pipe batten and related equipment, whichever is longer.
2.
The arbor top shall be a fabricated weldment of 1/2 inch (12.7 mm) steel plate and 7 gauge (4.76 mm) formed side plates. The side plates shall be punched to receive 8 cables, and shall be tied together with a bolt and spacer providing a tie-off point for the hand line.
3.
The arbor bottom shall be 1/2 inch x 3 inch (12.7 mm x 76.2 mm) steel bar with counterweight rests to keep the weights from resting on the inner arbor rod nuts, and a forged steel eye for the hand line tie off.
4.
The top and bottom of the arbor shall be tied together by means of two 3/4 inch (19.05 mm) steel arbor rods. The arbor rods shall have three nuts at each end, the outermost being a lock nut.
5.
The top and bottom shall have smoothed and rounded 3/8 inch (9.52 mm) holes for 1/4 inch (6.4 mm) diameter guide wires located on 15 inch (381 mm) centers.
6.
Provide 12-gauge (2.78 mm) spreader plates (two minimum) on arbor rods so they can be spaced between counterweights on 2ft (609.6 mm) centers. Provide a retaining collar on each rod, each with a 1/4 inch (6.4 mm) set screw with red plastic knob for easy locking. The front retaining collar shall be welded to the top spreader plate.
7.
The arbor shall be guided by 1/4 inch (6.35 mm) diameter wire ropes when installed. The guides shall be tensioned with turnbuckles tightened to prevent excessive play in the arbor travel but not so tight as to over stress the attachment points of the cables.
BW.
Wire Guide - Locking Rail.
1.
Rope locks and index cards shall be mounted on a formed steel angle no smaller than 3-1/2 inch x 5 inch x 1/4 inch (88.9 mm x 127 mm x 6.4 mm).
2.
The onstage edge of the rail shall be sloped and punched to receive formed clips which hold plastic write-on index cards centered on the installed sets. Provide one numbered plastic write-on card for each installed set.
3.
Stanchions made from 1/2 inch x 3 inch (12.7 mm x 76.2 mm) flat bar and 3 inch (76.2 mm) channel shall be provided on 5 feet (1.52m) (maximum) centers. A 4 inch (101.6 mm) Channel shall be mounted along the stanchions to provide a lower bumper for wire guided counterweight arbors.
4.
Two angles on the stanchions shall be provided to support 855M floor blocks.
5.
The entire locking rail shall be designed and installed to withstand a minimum up load of 500 pounds per foot (226.8 KG per 304.8 mm) per AISC standards.
 
** NOTE TO SPECIFIER ** Available for J-Guide, A-Guide and T-Bar types. Delete floor blocks not required for project.
 
BX.
Floor Block: Nylon Wire Guide Floor Block.
1.
The sheave shall have an 8 inch (203.2 mm) outside diameter and shall be filled nylon. The sheave shall be equipped with a 17 mm (0.67 inch) diameter shaft and two sealed, precision ball bearings.
2.
Base angles shall be a minimum 1.5 inch x 1.5 inch x 3/16 inch (38.1 mm x 38.1 mm x 4.76 mm) angle.
3.
Side plates shall be a minimum of 12-gauge steel (2.78 mm), and shall fully enclose the sheave.
4.
Base angles shall incorporate tie off points for guide wires.
BY.
Floor Block: Wire Guide Floor Block.
1.
The sheave shall have an 8 inch (203.2 mm) outside diameter and shall be an iron casting with a machined groove for a 3/4 inch (19.05 mm) rope. The sheave shall be equipped with a 17 mm diameter shaft and two sealed, precision ball bearings.
2.
Base angles shall be a minimum 1.5 inch x 1.5 inch x 3/16 inch (38.1 mm x 38.1 mm x 4.76 mm) angle.
3.
Side plates shall be a minimum of 12-gauge (2.78 mm) steel, and shall fully enclose the sheave.
4.
Base angles shall incorporate tie off points for guide wires.
BZ.
Floor Block: Nylon Fixed Combination Floor Block.
1.
The sheave shall have an 8 inch (203.2 mm) outside diameter and shall be filled nylon. The sheave shall be equipped with a 17 mm (0.67 inch) diameter shaft and two sealed, precision ball bearings.
2.
Side plates shall be a minimum of 12-gauge (2.78 mm) steel, and shall fully enclose the sheave.
3.
The included rope lock shall consist of an ASTM A536 ductile iron housing, cams and handle. The cams shall compress the rope, not bend it over a tight radius corners that reduce its strength. The housing shall allow the use of a standard padlock to hold the handle in its closed position. There shall be a rubber bumper in the housing to silence the handle when it is opened.
4.
Adjustment for rope shall be from 5/8 inch to 1 inch (15.87 mm to 25.4 mm) by means of a 1/2 inch (12.7 mm) nylon tipped, socket head adjustment screw with lock nut at the rear of the housing.
5.
The handle shall be 9 inch (228.6 mm) long with a nylon powder or vinyl dip coating. The handle shall be installed so that it passes two degrees past vertical to lock the hand line. A coated, oval, welded steel ring shall be provided as a safety lock. The outer end of the handle shall be slotted to accommodate a safety padlock.
6.
The rope lock and floor block shall be mounted to a 1/2 inch x 4 inch (12.7 mm x 101.6 mm) formed steel frame, which incorporates tie off points for guide wires.
CA.
Floor Block: Fixed Combination Floor Block.
1.
The sheave shall have an 8 inch (203.2 mm) outside diameter and shall be an iron casting with a machined groove for a 3/4 inch (19.1 mm) rope. The sheave shall be equipped with a 17 mm (0.67 inch) diameter shaft and two sealed, precision ball bearings.
2.
Side plates shall be a minimum of 12-gauge steel (2.78 mm), and shall fully enclose the sheave.
3.
The rope lock shall consist of an ASTM A536 ductile iron housing, cams and handle. The cams shall compress the rope, not bend it over tight radius corners that reduce its strength. The housing shall allow the use of a standard padlock to hold the handle in its closed position. There shall be a rubber bumper in the housing to silence the handle when it is opened.
4.
Adjustment for rope shall be from 5/8 inch to 1 inch (15.87 mm to 25.4 mm) by means of a 1/2 inch (12.7 mm) nylon tipped, socket head adjustment screw with lock nut at the rear of the housing.
5.
The handle shall be 9 inch (228.6 mm) long with a nylon powder or vinyl dip coating. The handle shall be installed so that it passes two degrees past vertical to lock the hand line. A coated, oval, welded steel ring shall be provided as a safety lock. The outer end of the handle shall be slotted to accommodate a safety padlock.
6.
The rope lock and floor block shall be mounted to a 1/2 inch x 4 inch (12.7 mm x 101.6 mm) formed steel frame, which incorporates tie off points for guide wires.
CB.
Floor Block: Adjustable Combination Floor Block.
1.
The sheave shall have a 10 inch (254 mm) outside diameter and shall be an iron casting with a machined groove for a 3/4 inch (19.1 mm) rope. The sheave shall be equipped with a 17 mm (0.67inch) diameter shaft and two sealed, precision ball bearings. The shaft shall be fitted with a locking handle, allowing the sheave to be moved to adjust rope tension.
2.
Side plates shall be a minimum of 10-gauge (3.57 mm) steel, shall fully enclose the sheave, and shall have a slot allowing a minimum of 5 inch (1.52m) of sheave position adjustment.
3.
The rope lock shall consist of an ASTM A536 ductile iron housing, cams and handle. The cams shall compress the rope, not bend it over tight radius corners that reduce its strength. The housing shall allow the use of a standard padlock to hold the handle in its closed position. There shall be a rubber bumper in the housing to silence the handle when it is opened.
4.
Adjustment for rope shall be from 5/8 inch to 1 inch (15.87 mm to 25.4 mm) by means of a 1/2 inch (12.7 mm) nylon tipped, socket head adjustment screw with lock nut at the rear of the housing.
5.
The handle shall be 9 inch (228.6 mm) long with a nylon powder or vinyl dip coating. The handle shall be installed so that it passes two degrees past vertical to lock the hand line. A coated, oval, welded steel ring shall be provided as a safety lock. The outer end of the handle shall be slotted to accommodate a safety padlock.
6.
The rope lock and floor block shall be mounted to a 1/2 inch x 4 inch (12.7 mm x 101.6 mm) formed steel frame, which incorporates tie off points for guide wires.
CC.
Floor Block: Adjustable Combination Floor Block.
1.
The sheave shall have a 12 inch (304.8 mm) outside diameter and shall be an iron casting with a machined groove for a 3/4 inch (19.1 mm) rope. The sheave shall be equipped with a 17 mm (0.67 inch) diameter shaft and two sealed, precision ball bearings. The shaft shall be fitted with a locking handle, allowing the sheaved to be moved a minimum of 5 inch (1.52m) to adjust rope tension.
2.
Side plates shall be a minimum of 10-gauge (3.57 mm) steel, shall fully enclose the sheave, and shall have a slot allowing a minimum of 8 inch (203.2 mm) of sheave position adjustment.
3.
The rope lock shall consist of an ASTM A536 ductile iron housing, cams and handle. The cams shall compress the rope, not bend it over tight radius corners that reduce its strength. The housing shall allow the use of a standard padlock to hold the handle in is closed position. There shall be a rubber bumper in the housing to silence the handle when it is opened.
4.
Adjustment for rope shall be from 5/8 inch to 1 inch (15.87 mm to 25.4 mm) by means of a 1/2 inch (12.7 mm) nylon tipped, socket head adjustment screw with lock nut at the rear of the housing.
5.
The handle shall be 9 inch (228.6 mm) long with a nylon powder or vinyl dip coating. The handle shall be installed so that it passes two degrees past vertical to lock the hand line. A coated, oval, welded steel ring shall be provided as a safety lock. The outer end of the handle shall be slotted to accommodate a safety padlock.
6.
The rope lock and floor block shall be mounted to a 1/2 inch x 4 inch (12.7 mm x 101.6 mm) formed steel frame, which incorporates tie off points for guide wires.
 
** NOTE TO SPECIFIER ** Available for J-Guide, A-Guide and T-Bar types. Delete if not required for project.
 
CD.
Lattice Track Arbor.
1.
Arbor shall be of specified length, or long enough to accommodate counterweights to balance its pipe batten and related equipment, whichever is longer.
2.
The arbor top shall be a fabricated weldment of 1/2 inch (12.7 mm) formed steel plate and 7 gauge (4.76 mm) formed side plates. The side plates shall be punched to receive 8 cables, and shall be tied together with a bolt and spacer providing a tie-off point for the hand line.
3.
The arbor bottom shall be 1/2 inch x 3 inch (12.7 mm x 76.2 mm) steel bar with counterweight rests to keep the weights from resting on the inner arbor rod nuts, and a forged steel eye for the hand line tie off.
4.
The top and bottom of the arbor shall be tied together by means of two 3/4 inch (19.05 mm) steel arbor rods. The arbor rods shall have three nuts at each end, the outermost being a lock nut.
5.
The top and bottom shall have UHMW or bronze guides to engage the lattice track.
6.
Provide 12-gauge (2.78 mm) spreader plates (two minimum) on arbor rods so they can be spaced between counterweights on 2 feet-0 inch (610 mm) centers. Provide a retaining collar on each rod, each with a 1/4 inch (6.4 mm) set screw with red plastic knob for easy locking. One retaining collar shall be welded to the top spreader plate.
 
** NOTE TO SPECIFIER ** Available for J-Guide, A-Guide and T-Bar types. Delete bottom bracket if not required for project.
 
CE.
Bottom Bracket: Lattice Track & Bracket.
1.
Lattice Track:
a.
The track shall consist of two 2 inch x 2 inch x 1/4 inch (50.8 mm x 50.8 mm x 6.35 mm) angles opposing each other with 1/4 inch x 2 inch (6.35 mm x 50.8 mm) formed brackets alternating front and back on 2 feet-0 inch (50.8 mm) centers. Back brackets shall contain two, 9/16 inch (14.3 mm) diameter holes for anchorage to wall.
b.
All connections shall be made with 3/8 inch (9.52 mm) hex bolts and lock nuts.
2.
Lattice Track Bracket:
a.
A fabricated steel bracket shall support the bottom of the lattice track. Bracket shall have ample clearance for passage of hand line.
CF.
Bottom Bracket: Lattice Track & Spring Bracket.
1.
Lattice Track:
a.
The track shall consist of two 2 inch x 2 inch x 1/4 inch (50.8 mm x 50.8 mm x 6.4 mm) angles opposing each other with 1/4 inch x 2 inch (6.35 mm x 50.8 mm) formed brackets alternating front and back on 2 inch (50.8 mm) centers. Back brackets shall contain two, 9/16 inch (14.3 mm) diameter holes for anchorage to wall.
b.
All connections shall be made with 3/8 inch (9.52 mm) hex bolts and lock nuts.
2.
Lattice Track Spring Bracket:
a.
A fabricated steel bracket with integral compression springs shall support the bottom of the lattice track, prevent abrupt stops, and limit arbor travel. The springs shall be braced and guarded for safety. Bracket shall have ample clearance for passage of hand line.
 
** NOTE TO SPECIFIER ** Delete floor clock not required for project.
 
CG.
Floor Block: Sliding Tension Block.
1.
12 inch (304.8 mm) Sliding Tension Block:
2.
The cast iron sheave shall have a 12 inch (304.8 mm) outside diameter, and shall be an iron casting, with a machined groove for a 3/4 inch (19.05 mm) rope.
3.
The sheave shall be equipped with a 1 inch (25.4 mm) diameter shaft and two tapered roller bearings.
4.
The tension block shall be held in place and guided by two 3/4 inch (19.05 mm) diameter rods.
CH.
Floor Block: Sliding Tension Block.
1.
16 inch (406.4 mm) Tension Block:
2.
The cast iron sheave shall have a 16 inch (406.4 mm) outside diameter and shall be an iron casting with a machined groove for a 1 inch (25.4 mm) rope.
3.
The sheave shall be equipped with a 1 inch (25.4 mm) diameter shaft and two, tapered roller bearings.
4.
The tension block shall be held in place and guided by two 3/4 inch (19.1 mm) diameter rods, each equipped with adjustable locking collar to limit sheave travel.
5.
The sliding tension block shall be J.R. Clancy No. 6CR-1618.
 
** NOTE TO SPECIFIER ** Delete index light(s) not required for project.
 
CI.
Single Circuit: Index Light.
1.
Each index light unit shall consist of a sheet steel housing containing lamp sockets mounted 24 inch (609.6 mm) apart and wired on a single circuit with leads and junction box at either end. Sockets shall be suitable for 60 Watt, type 'A' lamps.
2.
Units shall be constructed so as to light the locking rail and prevent light from spilling on stage. The exterior of the index strip light shall be painted a matte black; the interior shall be white. Units shall be supplied in five and ten foot sections.
3.
Index strip lights shall be UL Listed.
CJ.
Dual Circuit: Index Light - 2 Circuits.
1.
Each index light unit shall consist of a sheet steel housing containing lamp sockets mounted 12 inch (304.8 mm) apart and wired alternately on two circuits with leads and junction box at either end. Sockets shall be suitable for 60 Watt, type 'A' lamps.
2.
Units shall be constructed so as to light the locking rail and prevent light from spilling on stage. The exterior of the index strip light shall be painted a matte black; the interior shall be white. Units shall be supplied in five and ten foot sections.
3.
Index strip lights shall be UL Listed.
 
** NOTE TO SPECIFIER ** Delete rope lock not required for project.
 
CK.
Rope Lock.
1.
The rope lock shall consist of an ASTM A536 ductile iron housing, cams and handle. The cams shall compress the rope, not bend it over tight radius corners that reduce its strength. The housing shall allow the use of a standard padlock to hold the handle in its closed position.
2.
In order to reduce noise during operation, there shall be a rubber bumper in the housing to silence the handle when it is opened. The dogs that grip the rope shall be machined to fit closely to reduce noise and not use washers.
3.
Adjustment for rope shall be from 5/8 inch to 1 inch (15.9 mm to 25.4 mm) by means of a 0.5 inch (12.7 mm) nylon tipped, socket head adjustment screw with lock nut at the rear of the housing.
4.
The handle shall be 9 inch (228.6 mm) long with a nylon powder or vinyl dip coating. The handle shall be installed so that it passes two degrees past vertical to lock the hand line.
5.
A coated, oval, welded steel ring shall be provided as a safety lock.
6.
The rope lock shall mount to the locking rail with four 3/8 inch (9.5 mm) hex bolts and lock nuts.
CL.
SureLock Rope Lock.
1.
In order to reduce the possibility of accidents caused by out of balance sets, the rope lock shall not open if there is an out of balance condition exceeding 50 lbs. (23 KG) in either direction. A visual indicator shall be provided on the front of the unit showing if the set is balanced, batten heavy, or arbor heavy.
2.
The rope lock shall consist of an ASTM A536 ductile iron housing, cams and handle. There shall be rubber bumpers in the housing to silence the handle when it is opened. The body of the rope lock shall accommodate a padlock, securing the handle in the closed position.
3.
Adjustment for rope shall be from 5/8 inch to 1 inch (15.87 mm to 25.4 mm) by means of a 0.5 inch (12.7 mm) nylon tipped, socket head adjustment screw with lock nut at the rear of the housing.
4.
The handle shall be 9 inch (228.6 mm) long with a nylon powder, or vinyl dip, coating. The handle shall be installed so that it passes two degrees past vertical to lock the hand line. The cam at the lower end of the handle shall be equipped with a steel roller to eliminate sliding friction and promote ease of use.
5.
A coated, oval, welded steel ring shall be provided as a safety lock.
6.
The rope lock shall mount to the locking rail with four 3/8 inch (9.52 mm) hex bolts and lock nuts.
 
** NOTE TO SPECIFIER ** Delete batten not required for project.
 
CM.
Pipe Batten.
1.
All battens shall be 1.5 inch (38.1 mm) nominal diameter, schedule 40 pipe in lengths as shown on the drawings or Bill of Materials. All joints shall be spliced with 18 inch (457.2 mm) long sleeves with 9 inch (228.6 mm) extending into each pipe and held by two 3/8 inch (9.52 mm) hex bolts and lock nuts on each side of the joint.
2.
Each end shall be covered with a bright yellow, closed end, soft vinyl safety cap at least 4 inch (101.6 mm) in length.
CN.
Truss Battens.
1.
Two pipe truss battens shall be in lengths as shown on the drawings or Bill of Materials. Truss battens shall be formed from two 1-1/2 inch (38.1 mm) nominal diameter, schedule 40 pipes, spaced 12 inch (304.8 mm) apart by 1/4 inch by 2 inch (6.4 mm x 50.8 mm) flat bars located a maximum of 5 ft (1.52m) apart and welded between the pipes. All joints shall be spliced with 18 inch (457.2 mm) long sleeves with 9 inch (228.6 mm) extending into each pipe and held by two 3/8 inch (9.52 mm) hex bolts and lock nuts on each side of the joint.
2.
Each end shall be covered with a bright yellow, closed end, soft vinyl safety cap at least 4 inch (101.6 mm) in length.
 
** NOTE TO SPECIFIER ** Delete termination not required for project.
 
CO.
Turnbuckles and Pipe Clamp.
1.
Turnbuckles: Turnbuckles.
a.
Turnbuckles shall be drop forged and galvanized, and conform to ASTM F-1145 Type 1, Grade 1 standard. Turnbuckles shall be moused after adjustment to prevent loosening.
2.
Pipe Clamps: Pipe Clamps.
a.
Full Pipe Clamps:
b.
Pipe clamps shall be made of two strips of 12 Ga. (2.780 mm) by 2 inch (50.8 mm) hot rolled steel formed to encompass and clamp the pipe batten to prevent its rotation. Corners shall be rounded.
c.
There shall be a 3/8 inch x 1 inch (9.525 mm x 25.4 mm) hex bolt with lock nut above and below the batten. A 5/8 inch (15.875 mm) hole in the top of each clamp half allows the attachment of cable, chain, or other fittings.
d.
Full pipe clamps shall have a manufacturer's recommended load rating of at least 750 lbs (340.2 KG).
CP.
Trim Chains: Trim Chains.
1.
Trim chains shall be 36 inch (914.4 mm) long, made of 1/4 inch (6.4 mm) plated, grade 30 Proof Coil chain. Connection between the end link and the lifting cable shall be made with a thimble and copper Nicopress sleeve. Chains shall be wrapped one and one half turns around the batten and attached back to the thimble at the end of the lift line with a 1/4 inch (6.4 mm) forged shackle. Adjustment is made by connecting the shackle into a link along the return side of the chain.
2.
Trim chains shall have a recommended working load of at least 750 lbs (340 KG).
CQ.
Trim Chains: Alloy Trim Chains.
1.
Trim chains shall be 36 inch (914 mm) long, made of 7 mm, Grade 63, hardened alloy chain meeting OSHA 1910.184(e)(5). The chain shall have a RWL of 3,250 lbs(1,474 KG), shall be manufactured in the United States and have a black finish to eliminate glare. Each link is marked with the manufacturer's code and every 10th link has date code for traceability.
2.
Connection between the end link and the lifting cable shall be made with a thimble and copper Nicopress sleeve.
3.
Chains shall be wrapped one and one half turns around the batten and attached back to the thimble at the end of the lift line with a 1/4 inch to 3/8 inch (6.4 mm to 9.5 mm) forged shackle. Adjustment is made by connecting the forged shackle into a link along the return side of the chain.
4.
Trim chains shall have a recommended working load of at least 750lbs (340.2 KG). when attached to 1/4 inch(6.4 mm), 7x19 GUC.
CR.
Batten Trim Plate:
1.
Screw Pin Shackles: Shackles are u-shaped fittings with holes at each end to accommodate a pin to connect a rope, cable, or chain to another device. The pin has a head at one end and a thread at the other that screws into the body of the shackle. Shackle shall be from a U.S. manufacturer, and shall be moused after final trim adjustment.
2.
Trim Plate Assembly: Trim plate assembly consists of a batten clamp and plate punched with holes to receive 3/8 inch (9.52 mm) hardware, and 1/4 inch (6.35 mm) screw pin shackles.
a.
The plate shall be punched with five trim holes and one pick point hole to receive 3/8 inch (9.52 mm) hardware.
b.
The trim holes shall be positioned to allow for 1/2 inch (12.7 mm) variations in trim height.
c.
Trim plate assembly shall be able to support up to 500 lbs. (226.8 KG) per pick point.
d.
Trim plate assembly shall have the ability to be adjusted without the use of tools.
CS.
Batten Trim Clamp:
1.
Batten trim clamps shall consist of two pipe clamps, each made of two strips of 12-gauge (2.78 mm) by 2" (50.8 mm) hot rolled steel formed to encompass and clamp the pipe batten to prevent its rotation. Corners shall be rounded. There shall be a 3/8" x 1" (9.52 mm x 25.4 mm) hex bolt with lock nut above and below the batten. A 5/8" hole (15.87 mm) in the top of one clamp half allows the attachment of cable, chain, or other fittings. The other clamp shall be fitted with a Nylon or aluminum grooved spacer with a minimum 2" (50.8 mm) diameter.
2.
Line adjustment shall be made by loosening the end clamp and sliding it along the batten or by adjusting the turnbuckle if so equipped.
3.
Trim clamps shall have a recommended working load of at least 700 lbs. (317.5 KG).
CT.
Lift Cables:
1.
All lift cables shall be 7 x 19 construction, galvanized utility cable, sized as required, and with breaking strengths as follows:
a.
1/8 inch (3.17 mm) diameter - 2,000 lbs. (907 KG).
b.
3/16 inch (4.77 mm diameter - 4,200 lbs. (1,905 KG).
c.
1/4 inch (6.35 mm) diameter - 7,000 lbs. (3,175 KG).
d.
5/16 inch (7.94 mm) diameter - 9,800 lbs. (4445 KG).
e.
3/8 inch (9.52 mm) diameter - 14,400 lbs. (6,532 KG).
2.
Damaged or deformed cable shall not be used. All wire rope rigging shall be installed so as to prevent abrasion of the wire rope against any part of the building construction or other equipment.
CU.
Cable Fittings:
1.
Cable clips shall conform to wire rope manufacturer's recommendations as to size, number, and method of installation. Clips shall be drop forged, made in the United States per Federal Specification FF-C-450, Type 1, Class 1. Under no circumstances may malleable cable clips be used in suspension or lifting lines.
2.
Swaged sleeve fittings shall be copper Nicopress. Aluminum sleeves are not permitted. Swaged fittings shall be installed per the fitting manufacturer's instructions, using the appropriate tools, and checked with the appropriate Nicopress "Go - No go" gauge.
3.
Eyes shall be formed over galvanized steel, wire rope thimbles of correct size. It is grooved to support the rope or cable and prevent kinking and deformation.
4.
Anchor shackles are u-shaped fittings with holes at each end to accommodate a pin used to connect a rope, cable, or chain to another device or hanging point. The pin has a head at one end and a cotter pin at the other end, a thread that screws into the body of the shackle, or a thread, nut and cotter pin at the other end.
CV.
Counterweight:
1.
Counterweights shall be 6 inch wide x 13-3/4 inch (349.25 mm) long, with U-shaped cutouts for the arbor rods. Counterweights shall be flame or laser cut steel. Each piece shall be free from slag and sharp edges. The thickness of counterweights shall not vary more than 3/16 inch (4.76 mm) from nominal dimension.
2.
Opposite corners shall be notched for ease of handling. Alternate weights when stacking to provide finger holds when loading arbors.
3.
Provide 25% of weight 2 inch (50.8 mm) thick and 75% of weight 1 inch (25.4 mm) thick for ease of balancing.
 
** NOTE TO SPECIFIER ** Delete ropes not required for project.
 
CW.
Hand Line - Suregrip.
1.
Hand line shall be 3/4 inch (19.05 mm) in diameter, employing a 3-strand composite construction combining filament and staple/spun polyester wrapped around fibrillated polyolefin.
2.
The hand line shall contain an identifying tape showing the manufacturer's name, phone number, website, and year of manufacture.
3.
The hand line shall contain a red safety/wear indicator that becomes visible as the rope nears the end of its useful life.
4.
The rope shall hold knots well, be easily spliced and be dense enough to allow it to be clamped in a rope lock without damage. Rope shall not be subject to rotting, mildew, resistance to UV, or moisture damage, nor shall its length be affected by changes in humidity.
5.
Tape ends before cutting. Attach to arbor with two half hitches or bowline and tape end to standing line with electrical tape.
6.
Hand lines shall be SureGrip rope.
CX.
Hand Line - Multiline II.
1.
Hand line shall employ a 3-strand composite construction combining filament and staple/spun polyester wrapped around fibrillated polyolefin.
2.
The rope shall hold knots well, be easily spliced and be dense enough to allow it to be clamped in a rope lock without damage.
3.
Rope shall not be subject to rotting, mildew, resistance to UV, or moisture damage, nor shall its length be affected by changes in humidity.
4.
Tape ends before cutting. Attach to arbor with two half hitches or bowline and tape end to standing line with electrical tape.
5.
Hand lines shall be Multiline II rope.
CY.
Hand Line - Stage-Set-X.
1.
Hand lines shall have a parallel filament core constructed of high-tenacity filament polyester. The core shall remain firm and round under all load conditions, and be dense enough to allow it to be clamped in a rope lock without damage. The core shall be wrapped in polyester tape to provide the core with protection against external damage and wear. The braided polyester outer jacket shall be constructed of spun polyester for good gripping.
2.
The rope shall hold knots well, be easily spliced. Rope shall not be subject to rotting, mildew, resistance to UV, or moisture damage, nor shall its length be affected by changes in humidity.
3.
Tape ends before cutting. Attach to arbor with two half hitches or bowline and tape end to standing line with electrical tape.
4.
Hand lines shall be Stage-Set-X rope.
 
** NOTE TO SPECIFIER ** Delete if not required for project.
 
CZ.
Mobile Capstan Hoist.
1.
The capstan hoist shall have a capacity of 1500 lbs (680.4 KG) and an operating speed of approximately 35 fpm (0.17 mps). It shall consist of a structural steel, castered frame with a 4 inch (101.6 mm) tread diameter, cast iron capstan drum, directly coupled to the output of the gearbox.
2.
The motor, primary brake, and gearbox shall be an integrated unit, with the first stage pinion gear mounted directly on the motor's armature shaft. No couplings will be permitted between the motor and gear reducer.
3.
Motors shall be totally enclosed fan cooled (TEFC). The motor shall have a minimum AGMA service factor of 1.0 for constant operation.
4.
The gear reducer shall be a combination Helical/Worm reducer. The gear case shall be cast iron for protection against shock damage. The output shaft(s) shall have double lip oil seals to prevent leaks. The gearing service factor shall be a minimum of 1.0 with a mechanical strength service factor of 1.25.
5.
The primary brake shall be an integral part of the motor, mounted directly on the motor's armature shaft. Brakes shall be spring applied, direct acting, electrically released, and equipped with a manual release.
6.
The mobile dolly base shall be equipped with stationary casters in front and swivel casters in the rear. A 3 inch x 3 inch x 3/8 inch (76.2 mm x 76.2 mm x 9.52 mm) angle in front shall engage the reaction bar in the locking rail. A forged cleat permits cable tieoff and a hook provides storage for power and control cables. A side opening gate block shall protrude into the locking rail.
7.
The unit shall incorporate a full voltage reversing starter with overload, a footswitch to control motion, and an Up / Down direction selector. Unit will be equipped with 40 feet of type SO power cord with a locking electrical connector and mating receptacle.
8.
Mobile capstan hoist with 150 ft (45.7m) of 3/4 inch (19.1 mm) SureGrip rope with a latching hook spliced in one end.
DA.
Capstan Reaction Bar:
1.
Mobile Capstan Reaction Bar:
2.
The capstan hoist shall engage a bar welded to the front of the locking rail stanchion the full width of the joint on the top and bottom.
3.
The reaction bar shall be a 4 inch x 4 inch x 1/4 inch steel tube, in the vertical orientation, painted to match the locking rail.
DB.
Production Lighting Distribution:
1.
This assembly shall consist of an extruded aluminum wireway, 2-1/2 inch (63.5 mm) x 3-3/8 inch (85.7 mm) in cross section, and in lengths up to twenty feet. It shall contain a terminal strip for feed wire extending to outlets (flush mount or pigtail), as specified.
2.
Connector strip housing shall be fabricated of black extruded aluminum wireway with interlocking cover sections to exceed UL 1573 standards. Housing shall be inherently rustproof.
3.
Connector strip shall have an electrostatic paint finish in black, with outlets identified by 2 inch (50.8 mm) high die-cut circuit identification numbers on the vertical surface of the strip.
4.
The strip shall contain 125 degreesC XLP wiring of the proper sizes and quantities to connect the individual outlets to the terminal blocks in up to sixteen 20 Amp circuits.
5.
The terminal blocks shall be molded barrier type with screw lugs suitable for connecting incoming wire. Terminal blocks can accept up to #10 gauge wire.
6.
Connector strips shall be supplied with 1/8 inch (3.18 mm) thick by 1-1/2 inch (38.1 mm) steel C-channel mounting brackets. Brackets shall be 60 inch (1.524 m) on centers. U-bolts shall be supplied to grip up to 2 inch (50.8 mm) O.D. standard steel pipe.
7.
The entire assembly shall be listed and labeled by Underwriters Laboratories.
8.
Options available shall be color, LED indicator lights, low voltage raceway, custom circuit identification, and DMX input/output.
2.31
ZERO FLEET PACKAGED HOIST
A.
The hoist shall be specifically designed for lifting loads in theatres and other places of public assembly. It shall have a compact design with all required components integrated into its structure. All components shall be designed to properly support the required loads.
1.
Hoists shall be UL or ETL marked as meeting "UL 1340 Standard for Hoists.".
2.
The hoist shall incorporate a sturdy frame and adjustable mounting clips for easy mounting, either horizontally or vertically, on beams with up to 12 feet (3.65 m) centers. No external strengthening members shall be required.
3.
Lift Lines: 3/16 inch (4.76 mm) diameter, 7x19 galvanized utility cable.
4.
Units shall be available for 208, 230, or 460 VAC 60 Hz (230, 380, 400, 415 VAC 50 Hz) power, without the need for transformers.
5.
The hoist shall use a moving drum to minimize hoist size and wire rope wear. The drum shall move along its axis as it rotates, keeping the cable takeoff points on the drum aligned with the head block sheaves incorporated in the hoist (zero fleet angle design). This shall be accomplished by the drum sliding on its axle.
6.
Electrical components, such as motors and brakes, shall not move relative to the fixed frame of the hoist, in order to prevent premature failure of wiring, connections and other components.
7.
Covers shall be provided for hoists if required per ANSI E1.6-1.
8.
Provide battens, fittings, and related equipment as shown on the drawings and as required for a functional system.
9.
Hoists shall not be used to lift humans.
 
** NOTE TO SPECIFIER ** Delete options not required.
 
B.
Gearmotor and Primary Brake:
1.
The motor, primary brake, and gearbox shall be an integrated unit from a single manufacturer. For enhanced reliability, a continuous shaft shall link the brake, motor armature, and the first stage pinion gear without the use of couplings.
2.
Motors shall be totally enclosed fan cooled (TEFC) per NEMA MG1. Motors shall have a minimum service factor of 1.0.
3.
The gear reducer shall employ helical gearing. The gear case shall be cast iron, aluminum is not allowed, for protection against shock damage and to provide noise reduction. The output shaft shall have triple lip oil seals to prevent leaks.
4.
The integral electro-magnetic brake shall be spring applied and electrically released, with a minimum retarding torque of 200% of motor full load torque. Brakes with a lower retarding torque shall not be permitted.
5.
Fixed speed hoists shall incorporate a cast iron flywheel fan for soft starts and stops.
C.
For added security, a spring applied and electrically released electro-magnetic load brake shall be located between the output shaft of the gearbox and the drum. The brake controller shall apply the brake if the speed exceeds the commanded speed, the maximum speed, or if it detects a failure in the integrity of the shafting and gearbox.
D.
Drum:
1.
The drum shall be helically grooved to accept a single layer of cable accommodating the entire travel distance plus three dead wraps per cable. Drums that do not provide a minimum of three dead wraps shall not be allowed.
2.
The hoist drum diameter shall not change along its long axis.
3.
Cables shall be retained by a copper swage stop sleeve inside the drum. The cable retention system shall allow replacement of lift lines in situ. Cables shall be factory installed on the drum and color coded for ease of field installation.
4.
Preloaded chase rollers shall be provided to retain lift lines in their grooves.
5.
The pitch diameter of all drums shall meet or exceed the wire rope manufacturer s minimum recommended D/d ratio. Load bearing wire rope groove profiles shall meet the recommendations of the "Wire Rope Technical Board".
6.
The drum shall be positively driven to move along its axle to maintain a zero fleet angle with the grooves in the drum and the head block sheaves. The drum and axle shall be permanently lubricated.
7.
The drum shall be molybdenum disulphide filled nylon.
E.
Sheaves:
1.
All load bearing sheaves, both internal and external, shall have a minimum 26:1 D:d ratio to meet the wire rope manufacturer's recommendations. Sheave grooves shall be deeper than the cable diameter for cable protection. The sheave shall be equipped with a minimum 12 mm diameter machined steel shaft and two sealed, precision ball bearings. Spacers shall positively retain the cable.
F.
Head Block:
1.
Head block sheaves shall be mounted between 12-gauge steel (2.78 mm) minimum side plates that fully enclose the sheaves. The block shall have an additional mounting location for one sheave to allow one cable to exit the hoist in the opposite direction. The block shall be located so all cables have a zero degree fleet angle relative to the pitch of the drum groove.
2.
The block shall be mounted to permit the attachment of dual or solid state load cells for load monitoring.
G.
Loft Blocks:
1.
Loft blocks shall have 12-gauge steel (2.78 mm) (minimum) side plates that shall fully enclose the sheave. Base angles shall be a minimum 1-1/2 inch x 1-1/2 inch x 3/16 inch (38.1 mm x 38.1 mm x 4.76 mm) angle punched with a universal hole pattern for easy installation.
2.
The block and associated mounting hardware shall have a recommended working load of at least 500 lbs. (226.6 KG), and shall be designed for upright or underhung use.
3.
External loft blocks shall be provided with idlers to support ongoing lift lines with an individual groove for each lift line to prevent tangling. The use of un-grooved idler drums is known to cause tangling and jams and is not allowed.
4.
In double purchased applications, the double purchase loft block side plates shall be attached to the batten with two steel pipe clamps.
H.
Limit Switches:
1.
Hoists shall have positively actuated limit switches for normal end of travel indication. These switches shall open the control circuit in the drive or starter to stop any further movement in the direction of travel.
2.
Positively actuated limit switches shall be provided for over travel indication. These shall use a separate circuit that is redundant to the normal end of travel switches, and positively disconnects power from the hoist, using a UL 508E Type 2, non-welding, positive break contactor.
3.
An override mechanism to allow resetting of the overtravel limits shall be included.
4.
Limit switches shall be set to match actual site conditions.
5.
Computer controlled systems shall also have software limits utilizing solid state encoders, in addition to the two levels of mechanically actuated limit switches.
I.
Motor Controllers:
1.
For fire and electrical safety, motor controllers shall conform to the NEC (NFPA 70), be built in accordance with UL 508E, and be "touch safe" per IEC 60204-1 "Protection against direct contact" rules.
2.
Controllers shall provide over current, overload, and phase loss protection.
3.
Operation of the system key switch shall disconnect power to all starters and drives.
4.
A maintenance pendant shall be provided for direct control of the hoists during setup and for maintenance. It shall contain Up and Down pushbuttons, an Overtravel Bypass switch, and a key operated On/Off switch.
J.
Emergency Stop System:
1.
The emergency stop system shall meet NFPA-79 (Electrical Standards for Industrial Machinery) and directly remove power by means of electromechanical components, using a UL508E Type 2, non-welding, positive break contactors.
2.
The emergency stop circuit shall be a normally closed circuit or a supervised circuit that provides the same or greater level of reliability and security. Its operation shall not depend on software or semiconductors.
3.
Resetting the emergency stop circuit shall not initiate motion.
4.
For hoists running at more than 50 fpm, a Category 1 controlled stop per NFPA-79 (Electrical Standards for Industrial Machinery) shall be provided. This provides a rapid ramp to a stop, and then removes power to reduce shock loading.
 
** NOTE TO SPECIFIER ** Option. This option can only be used in conjunction with SceneControl series consoles. Delete options not required.
 
K.
Load Sensing:
1.
Load information shall be obtained from dual or solid state load cells on the PowerLift hoists. The load sensing system shall be able to accommodate changing loads, such as the weight of power and/or data control cables which change with elevation, without false tripping.
L.
Power & Control Wiring:
1.
Integral power and control cables shall be provided with each PowerLift hoist. Cables shall be eight feet long, with one end directly connected to the hoist assembly.
2.
Power cables shall be a properly rated SO cable, with a NEMA L series locking connector. Control cables shall have a connector with a steel body and a positive locking lever.
3.
Power and control raceways or boxes (configured as determined by the hoist manufacturer) shall be provided, complete with connectors that mate with those provided on the cables.
 
** NOTE TO SPECIFIER ** Delete if not required for project.
 
2.32
VERSATILITY HOIST WITH BACKBONE
A.
Each hoist unit shall have the capacity to raise and lower the specified load at the specified speed.
1.
Hoist Characteristics:
a.
Speed: 15 fpm (.076 mps) average over full travel range.
b.
Hoist Gross Capacity: 1,500 lbs. (680kg).
c.
Lifting Capacity: 1,000 lbs. (454kg) with full drum assuming 500 lbs. (227kg) of batten, cable management and production lighting distribution.
d.
Travel: up to 50 feet (15.24 m).
e.
# of Lift Lines: up to 5.
f.
Lift Line Diameter: 3/16 inch (4.76 mm).
2.
Construction:
a.
Hoist shall be mounted to a frame constructed of aluminum and steel, holding the elements of the hoist in proper alignment.
b.
Drum shall be directly connected to the output of the integrated motor-brake-gear reducer unit.
B.
Gearmotor:
1.
Motor, primary brake, and gearbox shall be an integrated unit, with the first stage pinion gear mounted directly on the motor's armature shaft. No couplings shall be permitted between the motor and gear reducer.
2.
Motors shall be totally enclosed fan cooled (TEFC). The motor shall have a minimum AGMA service factor of 1.0 for constant operation.
3.
The gear reducer shall be a combination helical/worm reducer. The gear case shall be cast iron for protection against shock damage. The gearing service factor shall be a minimum of 1.0 with a mechanical strength service factor of 1.25.
C.
Primary Brake:
1.
The primary brake shall be an integral part of the motor, mounted directly on the motor's armature shaft. No couplings shall be permitted between the motor and primary brake.
2.
Brakes shall be spring applied, direct acting, electrically released, and equipped with a manual release. The brake shall be an AC / DC electro-magnetic unit with a minimum retarding torque equal to 200% of motor full load torque.
3.
The brake shall be released by energizing the coil simultaneously with the motor winding to provide fail-safe braking in case of power failure.
D.
Shafts and Keys:
1.
Shafts shall be designed to accommodate the applied loads (including shock and bending loads) in accordance with ANSI B 106.1 m, "Design of Transmission Shafting.".
2.
All connections shall be keyed, using keys designed to accommodate the applied loads. Keys shall be in accordance with ANSI B 17.1, "Keys and Key Seats.".
E.
Pile-Up Drum:
1.
Drum shall have a slotted construction so that the cable winds on top of itself in multiple layers.
2.
The width of the slot shall be consistent throughout its depth to ensure the cable stacks evenly. The slot shall have sufficient depth for the entire travel, plus three dead wraps, and overtravel.
3.
The drum shall be direct coupled and keyed to the output shaft of the gear box.
4.
Drum construction shall be steel of at least 1/2 inch (12.7 mm) thick. The drum sides shall be of sufficient thickness to withstand the forces applied by the cable.
5.
Cables shall enter the drum through holes drilled from the base of the slots at a 45 degree angle and shall be retained by a copper stop sleeve.
F.
Hoist Mounting Criteria:
1.
Hoist and Frame shall be mounted anywhere along the compression tube backbone.
2.
Center of hoist drum shall be placed within 3 feet-0 inch (0.91 m) of attachment to structure.
G.
Rotary Limit Switches:
1.
Rotary limit switch assemblies shall have four gear-driven, independently adjustable switch/cam sets. Switches shall have snap acting contacts.
2.
Rotary limit switches shall be driven by roller chains. Sprockets shall be pinned to prevent slipping and sized for maximum usable rotation of switch cams. The input shaft and drive chain shall be fully guarded if a cover is needed per ANSI E1.6-1.
3.
Switches shall be mounted to the winch base to allow for easy adjustment of the switch settings.
H.
Overspeed Brake;.
1.
A secondary overspeed brake shall be supplied in addition to the primary brake on the motor. This brake shall be located on the low speed output shaft of the gearbox.
2.
This brake shall be factory set to apply itself at 125% of the maximum rated hoist speed.
3.
The overspeed brake shall not require either electricity or pressure from an external source for operation.
I.
Compression Tube:
1.
The hoist shall incorporate a rectangle, tubular-shaped, aluminum extrusion capable of supporting the entire static load of the hoist assembly plus the live load.
2.
The compression tube shall be attached to the structure at points no farther than 15 feet-0 inch (4.57 m) center to center.
3.
The compression tube shall negate the hoist transferring horizontal forces into the structure.
4.
Tube shall be providing mounting capabilities for loft blocks to be positioned anywhere along the tube.
J.
Overload Sensing:
1.
Overload sensing shall be included in the hoist as standard equipment.
2.
The sensor shall be a mechanical means of detecting an overload condition which sends an electrical signal to the motor controller.
3.
If an overload condition occurs, the sensor shall prevent the movement of the hoist until the load is returned to a proper weight.
K.
Blocks
1.
3/16" grooved blocks shall be designed to be placed anywhere along the compression tube.
2.33
ZERO FLEET HEAVY DUTY HOIST
A.
The hoist shall be specifically designed for lifting loads in theatres and other places of public assembly. It shall have a compact design with all required components integrated into its structure. Hoists shall have integrated safety covers.
1.
The hoist shall incorporate a sturdy frame and adjustable mounting clips for easy mounting, either horizontally or vertically, on beams centered up to 12 feet-0 inch (3.6 m) apart. No external strengthening members shall be required.
2.
Characteristics: The hoist shall have the following characteristics:
a.
Speed and lifting capacity to specific applications with speeds up to 400 fpm (2 mps) and maximum capacity of 3000 lbs. (1360 kg).
b.
Travel: Up to 98 feet (30 m).
c.
Lift Lines: 9 @ 1/4 inch (6.35 mm) diameter, 7x19 galvanized utility cable.
d.
Units shall be available for all standard 60 Hz and 50 Hz power sources without the need for transformers.
3.
The hoist shall use a moving drum to minimize hoist size and wire rope wear. The drum shall move along its axis as it rotates, keeping the cable takeoff points on the drum aligned with the head block sheaves incorporated in the hoist (zero fleet angle design).
4.
Hoists shall be designed such that multiple units can be mounted 16 inch (406.4 mm) on center, or 8 inch (203.2 mm) on center if hoists are alternated on stage left and right.
5.
Hoists shall not be used to lift humans.
B.
Gearmotor and Primary Brake:
1.
The motor, primary brake and gearbox shall be an integrated unit from a single manufacturer. For enhanced reliability, a continuous shaft shall link the brake, motor armature, and the first stage pinion gear without the use of couplings.
2.
Motors shall be totally enclosed fan cooled (TEFC) per NEMA MG1. Motors shall have a minimum service factor of 1.0.
3.
The gear reducer shall employ helical gearing. The gear case shall be cast iron for protection against shock damage and to provide noise reduction. The output shaft shall have triple lip oil seals to prevent leaks.
4.
The primary brake shall be spring applied and electrically released, with a minimum retarding torque of 150% of motor full load torque.
C.
For added security, a spring applied and electrically released electro-magnetic load brake shall be located between the output shaft of the gearbox and the drum. The brake controller shall apply the brake if the speed exceeds the commanded speed, the maximum speed, or if it detects a failure in the integrity of the shafting and gearbox.
1.
SureBrake II as manufactured by JR Clancy.
D.
Drum:
1.
The drum shall be helically grooved to accept a single layer of cable accommodating the entire travel distance plus a minimum of three dead wraps per cable.
2.
Cables shall be retained by a copper swage stop sleeve inside the drum. The cable retention system shall allow replacement of lift lines in situ.
3.
Preloaded chase rollers shall be provided to retain lift lines in their grooves.
4.
The pitch diameter of all drums shall meet or exceed the wire rope manufacturer's minimum recommended D/d ratio. Load bearing wire rope groove profiles shall meet the recommendations of the Wire Rope Technical Board.
5.
The drum shall be positively driven to move along its axle to maintain a zero fleet angle with the head block sheaves. The axle shall be permanently lubricated.
E.
Sheaves:
1.
All load bearing sheaves shall have a minimum 26:1 D:d ratio to meet the wire rope manufacturer's recommendations. Sheave grooves shall be deeper than the cable diameter for cable protection. The sheave shall be equipped with a machined steel shaft and two sealed, precision ball bearings. Spacers shall positively retain the cable.
F.
Loft Blocks:
1.
Loft blocks shall have 12-gauge (2.7 8 mm) steel (minimum) side plates that shall fully enclose the sheave. Side plates shall be bolted to the base angles. Base angles shall be a minimum 1-1/2 inch x 1-1/2 inch x 3/16 inch (38.1 mm x 38.1 mm x 4.8 mm) angle punched with a universal hole pattern for easy installation. There shall be a minimum of seven 1/4 inch (6.4 mm) bolts with spacers between the side plates, four of which prevent cables from escaping the sheave grooves.
2.
The block and associated mounting hardware shall have a recommended working load of at least 750 lbs. (340 kg), and shall be designed for upright or underhung use.
3.
Loft blocks shall be provided with idlers to support ongoing lift lines with an individual groove for each lift line to prevent tangling or abrasion.
G.
Limit Switches:
1.
Hoists shall have positively actuated limit switches for normal end of travel indication. These switches shall open the control circuit in the drive or starter to stop any further movement in the direction of travel.
2.
Positively actuated limit switches shall be provided for over travel indication. These shall use a separate circuit that is redundant to the normal end of travel switches, and positively disconnects power from the hoist, using a UL 508E Type 2, non-welding, positive break contactor.
3.
An override mechanism to allow resetting of the over travel limits shall be included in the drive cabinet.
4.
Limit switches shall be set to match actual site conditions.
5.
Computer controlled systems shall also have software limits utilizing solid state encoders, in addition to the two levels of mechanically actuated limit switches.
H.
Motor Controllers:
1.
For fire and electrical safety, motor controllers shall conform to the NEC (NFPA 70), be built in accordance with UL Standard UL508E, and be "touch safe" per IEC 204-1 "Protection against direct contact" rules.
2.
Controllers shall provide over current, overload, and phase loss protection.
3.
Operation of the system key switch shall disconnect power to all starters and drives.
4.
A maintenance pendant shall be provided for direct control of the hoists during setup and for maintenance. It shall contain Up and Down pushbuttons, an Overtravel Bypass switch, and a key operated On / Off switch.
I.
Emergency Stop System.
1.
The emergency stop system shall meet SIL 3 or NFPA-79 (Electrical Standards for Industrial Machinery) and directly remove power by means of electromechanical components, using a UL 508E Type 2, non-welding, positive break contactors.
2.
The emergency stop circuit shall be a normally closed circuit or a supervised circuit that provides the same or greater level of reliability and security. Its operation shall not depend on software or semiconductors.
3.
Resetting the emergency stop circuit shall not initiate motion.
4.
For hoists running at more than 50 fpm (0.254 mps), a Category 1 controlled stop per NFPA-79 (Electrical Standards for Industrial Machinery) shall be provided. This provides a rapid ramp to a stop, and then removes power to reduce shock loading.
J.
Load Monitoring:
1.
Load information shall be obtained from dual solid state load cells on the hoist. The load monitoring system shall be able to accommodate dynamic loads, such as cable weight that changes during batten travel, without false tripping.
2.
Load monitoring requires the use of a SceneControl series control console.
K.
Installation supervision and commissioning of the motorized rigging system shall be performed by a factory authorized and trained technician.
 
** NOTE TO SPECIFIER **Delete if not required for the project.
 
2.34
COUNTERWEIGHT ASSIST HOIST
A.
The single axis hoist shall be used to motorize counterweight rigging sets.
1.
The hoist shall be of a compact design with all required components integrated into its structure. It shall be floor mounted in place of a floor block and rope lock. Its starter and control mount to the locking rail.
2.
The hoist assembly shall be less than 12 inch (305 mm) wide, and be able to automate a set that is located between counterweight sets on 6 inch (152.4 mm) centers or greater.
3.
Single axis hoists shall have a speed of 25 fpm (0.13 mps) with a total line set capacity of 2,000 lbs. (907 kg). The hoist shall handle an out of balance load equal to 50% of the set capacity. The counterweight arbor shall be permanently loaded to 50% of the set capacity. The counterweight in the arbor shall be banded in place, and a method to impede the installation of additional counterweight provided. A sign shall be provided warning the user not to adjust the weight in the arbor.
4.
All components shall be designed to properly support the required loads.
5.
Motor, Gearbox and Brake:
a.
A motor, gear reducer and primary brake shall be provided. Motors shall be totally enclosed fan cooled (TEFC) per NEMA MG1.
b.
The gearmotor shall have a minimum service factor of 1.0 and be provided with seals to effectively prevent leaks.
c.
Brakes shall be spring applied, direct acting, electrically released, and equipped with a manual release. The brake shall be an electro-magnetic unit with a minimum retarding torque of 200% of motor full load torque. The brake shall be released by energizing the coil simultaneously with the motor winding to provide fail-safe braking in case of power failure.
6.
Drive Medium:
a.
The drive medium shall allow the use of a counterweight set head block without modification and shall be positively driven in a manner that shall allow repeatable positioning.
b.
The drive medium shall have a minimum design factor of 10:1.
c.
Roller chains shall have a double leaf construction. UHMW chain guides shall be provided to ensure positive engagement of chain and sprockets, even with slack in the drive chain.
d.
The portion of the drive medium that runs on the head block shall operate at the same pitch diameter as the lift lines so that they operate at the same speed, to avoid excessive cable wear and "jumping" caused by differing speeds.
7.
Limit Switches:
a.
Rotary limit switch assemblies shall have four gear-driven, independently adjustable switch/cam sets. Switches shall have snap acting contacts.
b.
Rotary limit switches shall be driven directly or by roller chains. If roller chains are used, sprockets shall be pinned to prevent slipping and sized for maximum usable rotation of switch cams. The input shaft and drive chain shall be fully guarded.
c.
Switches shall be mounted to the winch base to allow for easy adjustment of the switch settings.
8.
Fixed Speed Motor Controllers:
a.
For fire and electrical safety, motor controllers shall conform to the NEC (NFPA 70), be built in accordance with UL 508E, and be "touch safe" per IEC 60204-1 "Protection against direct contact" rules.
b.
Controllers shall be wired so that operation of the normal end of travel limit switches shall only allow movement away from the limit switch. Operation of an overload limit switch shall open the line contactor and shall not allow further movement in either direction. A spring return toggle switch shall be housed inside the starter cabinet to allow override of the overtravel limits for resetting purposes.
c.
The controller shall be sized to match the hoist motor horsepower. Overload and overcurrent protection shall conform to UL and NEC requirements.
9.
Control Station.
a.
Control stations shall be contained in the hoist assembly, and contain hold to operate (dead man) Up and Down pushbuttons for each hoist. A key operated On / Off switch shall be provided.
b.
A red, mushroom head emergency stop pushbutton shall be provided, which shall disconnect power to the winch through a circuit meeting NFPA-79 (Electrical Standards for Industrial Machinery) requirements.
c.
A "Service" indicator shall be provided to alert the user when regular system service is required.
d.
Panel components (pushbuttons, key switches, switches, indicators, E-stop switches, and the like) shall be industrial grade units.
 
** NOTE TO SPECIFIER ** The following chart indicates standard line shaft hoist characteristics. Delete standard line shaft hoists if not required for the project.
Fixed Speed: 20 fpm / 1000 pounds (0.1 m/s / 454 kg).
Fixed Speed: 20 fpm / 1250 pounds (0.1 m/s / 567 kg).
Fixed Speed: 20 fpm / 1600 pounds (0.1 m/s / 726 kg).
Fixed Speed: 20 fpm / 2150 pounds (0.15 m/s / 975 kg).
Fixed Speed: 20 fpm / 2500 pounds (0.1 m/s / 1184 kg).
Variable Speed: 0 - 110 fpm / 1300 pounds (0 - 0.56 m/s / 590 kg).
Variable Speed: 0 - 140 fpm / 1950 pounds (0 - 0.71 m/s / 885 kg).
Variable Speed: 0 - 240 fpm / 2300 pounds (0 - 1.2 m/s / 1043 kg).
Lift Line: 1/4 inch (6.35 mm) 3/16 inch (4.8 mm).
Drum Diameter: 7-1/2 inches (190 mm) 5-1/2 inches (140 mm).
Max. Load/Line: 750 pounds (341 kg) 500 pounds (227 kg).
 
2.35
STANDARD LINE SHAFT HOIST
 
** NOTE TO SPECIFIER ** Controls shall be added for a complete system.
 
A.
The line shaft type hoist shall have the ability to raise and lower the specified load at the specified speed. All components shall be designed to properly support the required loads.
1.
The hoist shaft shall incorporate a sturdy frame and field adjustable mounting clips for easy mounting.
 
** NOTE TO SPECIFIER ** Delete cable size not required.
 
a.
Lift Line Diameter: 1/4 inch (6.35 mm) 8 inch drums (2.3 mm)5 mm.
b.
Lift Line Diameter: 3/16 inch (4.8 mm) 6 inch drums8 mm (152 mm drums).
2.
Construction:
a.
The integrated motor - brake - gear reducer unit and associated components, drum, shall be supported by a sturdy steel base, holding the elements of the hoist in proper alignment.
b.
A 4 inch x 4 inch (102 mm x102 mm) rectangular steel backbone shall be provided to support the PowerLine hoist. Backbones shall be continuous, or non-continuous, to meet the specific requirements of the specific application. The backbone shall accommodate spans between mounting steel members up to 12 feet (3.65 m) with a maximum deflection of L/180.
c.
Gearmotors shall be able to mount parallel or perpendicular to the plane of the mounting steel.
d.
Lift lines shall be able to exit parallel or perpendicular to the plane of the mounting steel.
3.
Gearmotor:
a.
Motor, primary brake, and gearbox shall be an integrated unit, with the first stage pinion gear mounted directly on the motor's armature shaft. No coupling shall be permitted between the motor and gear reducer.
b.
Motors shall be totally enclosed fan cooled (TEFC). The motor shall have a minimum AGMA service factor of 1.0 for constant operation.
c.
The gear reducer shall be a combination helical/worm or helical/bevel reducer. The gear case shall be cast iron for protection against shock damage. The input and output shafts shall have double lip oil seals to prevent leaks. The gearing service factor shall be a minimum of 1.0 with a mechanical strength service factor of 1.25.
 
** NOTE TO SPECIFIER ** Other configurations: There are other motor / brake configurations. Please contact us for more information.
 
4.
Primary Brake:
a.
The primary brake shall be an integral part of the motor, mounted directly on the motor's armature shaft. No couplings shall be permitted between the motor and primary brake.
b.
Brakes shall be spring applied, direct acting, electrically released, and equipped with a manual release as backup. The brake shall an AC / DC electro-magnetic unit with a minimum retarding torque equal to 200% of motor full load torque.
c.
The brake shall be released by energizing the coil simultaneously with the motor winding to provide fail-safe braking in case of power failure.
5.
Shafts, Keys, and Couplings:
a.
Drums shall be interconnected by commercial transmission shafts with universal joints at each end. The use of solid couplings and bar, pipe, or square tubes as shafts are not permitted.
b.
Shafts shall be designed to accommodate the applied loads (including shock and bending loads) in accordance with ANSI B106.1 m, "Design of Transmission Shafting".
c.
All connections shall be keyed, using keys designed to accommodate the applied loads. Keys shall be in accordance with ANSI B17.1, "Keys and Key Seats".
d.
Universal joints shall accommodate the applied loads, including shock and bending loads, and shall accommodate the possible parallel and angular misalignments caused during manufacturing, assembly, and installation, as well as by structural tolerances and structural or equipment deflections.
6.
Bearings.
a.
Bearings shall be selected to accommodate the applied loads and speeds with a minimum L10 life of 2,000 hours.
7.
Helical Drums.
a.
Winding drums shall be designed to properly support the required loads.
b.
Drums shall be helically grooved to accept a single layer of cable accommodating the entire travel distance plus three dead wraps. The drum diameter shall meet or exceed the wire rope manufacturer's minimum recommended D/d ratio.
c.
Drum construction shall be of the all welded type, including a continuous drum shaft. Cables shall enter the drum through key slots machined from root of the cable groove through the tubing wall at a 45 degree angle and shall be retained by a Copper swage stop sleeve inserted through the end of the slot from the outside. Cables shall have a minimum of three dead wraps on the drum. In order to prevent unbalanced operation, drum assemblies that exceed 20 rpm shall be straightened to a maximum total indicated run out (T.I.R.) of 0.005 inch (0.127 mm).
d.
Each end of the drum shall be supported by either the output shaft of the gearbox or an appropriately sized bearing mounted in the side steel plate that fully captures the drum shaft.
e.
Alternate drums shall be threaded in opposite directions, to keep the batten from "walking" as its elevation changes.
f.
Side plates shall hold four keepers designed to prevent cross winding of the lift lines on the drums.
g.
Tread pressures shall not exceed allowable radial bearing pressures as specified in the Wire Rope User Manual.
h.
Drums shall have capacity for termination on either end so lift lines can come off in either direction.
8.
Limit Switches.
a.
The hoist shall have four gear-driven, independently adjustable switch/cam sets. Switches shall have snap acting contacts.
b.
Rotary limit switches shall be driven directly or by roller chains. If roller chains are used, sprockets shall be pinned to prevent slipping and sized for maximum usable rotation of switch cams. The input shaft and drive chain shall be fully guarded.
c.
Switches shall be mounted to the winch base to allow for easy adjustment of the switch settings.
B.
Secondary Brake:
 
** NOTE TO SPECIFIER ** Delete either electric or overspeed brake.
 
1.
Electric Brake:
a.
A secondary load brake shall be supplied in addition to the primary brake on the motor. This brake shall be located on the low speed output shaft of the gearbox or directly fixed to the hoist drum. The brake shall be sufficient to stop and hold the load.
b.
This brake shall be normally applied and require a source of power to release the brake.
c.
Control of the secondary brake shall be integrated with the primary brake to ensure the proper sequence of application and release between the brakes.
2.
Overspeed Brake:
a.
A secondary overspeed load brake shall be supplied in addition to the primary brake on the motor. This brake shall be located on the low speed output shaft of the gearbox or directly fixed to the hoist drum.
b.
This brake shall be factory set to apply itself at 125% of the maximum rated hoist speed (50 rpm minimum). The friction lining is mechanically set against the drum to grip when the arms extend to lock into the drum and bring the hoist to a halt.
c.
The overspeed brake shall not require either electricity or pressure from an external source for operation.
 
** NOTE TO SPECIFIER ** Select required starter and delete one not needed.
 
C.
Fixed Speed Starters:
1.
Each fixed speed hoist shall be controlled by a UL508E compliant, full voltage, self-protected, reversing starter. Enclosure shall be NEMA 12 with hinged, latching cover. The interior of the starter cabinet shall be "touch safe" per IEC 60204-1 "Protection against direct contact" rules.
2.
The NEMA/IEC mechanically and electrically interlocked, reversing starter shall be sized to match the hoist motor horsepower and shall be rated for plugging and jogging. Units shall incorporate UL508E Type 2, non-welding, positive break contactors.
3.
Overcurrent protection shall be provided by an IEC Class 10 overload. Short circuit protection shall be provided by a circuit breaker.
4.
Starters shall be wired so that operation of the normal end of travel limit switches shall only allow movement away from the limit switch. Operation of an overtravel limit switch shall open the line contactor, and shall not allow further movement in either direction. A spring return toggle switch shall be housed inside the starter cabinet to allow override of the overtravel limits for resetting purposes.
D.
Variable Speed Drive:
1.
Motor controllers shall be solid state flux vector controllers, designed for hoisting duty, and rated for the motor to be controlled. The controller shall incorporate closed loop feedback using a solid state position encoder mounted on the motor shaft to identify the speed and position of motor shaft in order to provide the greatest accuracy and performance. Each controller shall incorporate a microprocessor to provide direct control of torque and shaft position. The controller shall provide an essentially infinite speed range, including the ability to produce full torque at zero speed.
2.
The motor controller enclosure shall be NEMA 12 with a hinged, latching cover. The interior of the cabinet shall be "touch safe" per IEC 60204-1 "Protection against direct contact" rules.
3.
A brake contactor shall be provided. The controller shall not release the hoist brake until the drive has developed the full rated torque.
4.
Controllers shall provide controlled deceleration and braking of rapidly descending loads.
5.
Each controller shall contain a line contactor. This contactor shall be controlled by the E-stop and overtravel limit switches, providing a redundant means of removing power from the hoist.
6.
Controllers shall be wired so that operation of the normal end of travel limit switches shall only allow movement away from the limit switch. Operation of an overtravel limit switch shall open the line contactor, and shall not allow further movement in either direction. A spring return toggle switch shall be housed inside the cabinet to allow override of the overtravel limits for resetting purposes.
7.
Each controller shall incorporate overcurrent protection in the form of properly rated fuses (per UL 198C guidelines) or circuit breakers.
8.
Controllers shall incorporate all required contactors, relays, and interface electronics required by the control system. Controllers shall provide under voltage, over voltage, instantaneous over current, overload, and over temperature indication. Properly labeled, screw clamp terminals shall be provided for all field connections, including limit switches and other peripheral devices.
 
** NOTE TO SPECIFIER ** Delete if not required for project.
 
E.
Load Monitoring:
1.
Load information shall be obtained from solid state load cells mounted between the base of the hoist and the gear motor.
a.
The cell shall accommodate total hoist loads or changing loads depending on the functions included in the supplied controls.
 
** NOTE TO SPECIFIER ** Optional - If desired delete cable roller type not required for project.
 
F.
Cable Roller:
1.
Fixed Cable Roller.
a.
Provide an adjustable roller to keep lift lines in the grooves of the drum and prevent them from becoming crossed. Light pressure on the cables keeps the lines from becoming slack.
b.
The roller shall be large enough in diameter for rigidity, have a bearing in each end so it shall rotate and ride on an adjustable shaft.
2.
Sprung Cable Roller:
a.
Provide an adjustable roller to keep lift lines in the grooves of the drum and prevent them from becoming crossed. Light pressure on the cables keeps the lines from becoming slack.
b.
The roller shall be large enough in diameter for rigidity, have a bearing in each end so it shall rotate and ride on an adjustable shaft.
c.
The shaft is spring mounted so crossed cables or jams shall cause a cable to jump from its groove and trip a limit switch, stopping the hoist.
 
** NOTE TO SPECIFIER ** Optional - If desired delete cable roller type not required for project.
 
G.
Slack Line Detection:
1.
Charged Bar.
2.
Provide an electrically isolated bar that grounds the control when a cable escapes from its groove. When a line touches and grounds the bar it activates a contact in the controller that does one of the following as wired or programmed:
a.
Engages the emergency stop and halts all motion.
b.
Stops motion and prevent further motion in the same direction.
c.
Signals the PLC and waits for further instruction.
 
** NOTE TO SPECIFIER ** Delete if not required for project.
 
2.36
CUSTOM LINE SHAFT HOIST
 
** NOTE TO SPECIFIER ** Controls shall be added for a complete system.
 
A.
General: Each hoist unit shall have the capacity to raise and lower the specified load at the specified speed.
1.
The hoist shaft shall incorporate a sturdy frame and field adjustable mounting clips for easy mounting.
 
** NOTE TO SPECIFIER ** Delete cable size not required for project.
 
a.
Lift Line Diameter Cable Size: 3/16 inch (4.8 mm).
b.
Lift Line Diameter Cable Size: 1/4 inch (6.4 mm).
c.
Lift Line Diameter Cable Size: 5/16 inch (7.9 mm).
d.
Lift Line Diameter Cable Size: 3/8 inch (9.5 mm).
2.
Construction:
a.
The integrated motor - brake - gear reducer unit and associated components, which may include a helical drum, shall be supported by a sturdy steel base, holding the elements of the winch in proper alignment.
b.
Each helical drum shall be supported by a sturdy steel base, holding the elements of the drum assembly in proper alignment. Both ends of each drum shall be supported by a self-aligning flange bearing.
c.
Alternate drums shall be threaded in opposite directions, to keep the batten from moving left and right as cables wrap on the drum.
d.
Drums shall be interconnected by shafts with universal joints at each end.
e.
Side plates shall have three keepers designed to prevent cross winding of lift lines on the drums.
3.
Gearmotor:
a.
Motors, primary brakes, and gearboxes shall be an integrated unit, with the first stage pinion gear mounted directly on the motor's armature shaft. No couplings shall be permitted between the motor and gear reducer. Exceptions shall be permitted only when special gearing or torque requirements cannot be met with an integrated unit.
b.
Motors shall be totally enclosed fan cooled (TEFC). The motor shall have a minimum AGMA service factor of 1.0 for constant operation.
c.
The gear reducer shall be a combination helical/worm or helical/bevel reducer. The gear case shall be cast iron for protection against shock damage. The output shaft(s) shall have double lip oil seals to prevent leaks. The gearing service factor shall be a minimum of 1.0 with a mechanical strength service factor of 1.25.
4.
Primary Brake:
a.
The primary brake shall be an integral part of the motor, mounted directly on the motor's armature shaft. No couplings shall be permitted between the motor and primary brake.
b.
Brakes shall be spring applied, direct acting, electrically released, and equipped with a manual release. The brake shall an AC / DC electro-magnetic unit with a minimum retarding torque equal to 200% of motor full load torque.
c.
The brake shall be released by energizing the coil simultaneously with the motor winding to provide fail-safe braking in case of power failure.
5.
Shafts, Keys, and Couplings:
a.
Shafts shall be designed to accommodate the applied loads (including shock and bending loads) in accordance with ANSI B 106.1 m, "Design of Transmission Shafting",.
b.
All connections shall be keyed, using keys designed to accommodate the applied loads. Keys shall be in accordance with ANSI B 17.1, "Keys and Key Seats.".
c.
Couplings shall be chosen to accommodate the applied loads, including shock and bending loads. Couplings shall accommodate the possible parallel and angular misalignments caused during manufacturing, assembly, and installation, as well as by structural tolerances and structural or equipment deflections.
d.
In the case of line shaft hoists, the couplings in the shafts between the drums shall be universal joints in order to compensate for misalignment and deflections.
e.
Only couplings made of steel and with steel to steel contact surfaces shall be used.
6.
Bearings:
a.
Bearings shall be selected to accommodate the applied loads and speeds.
b.
The use of self-aligning flange bearings is preferred. The use of other bearing types shall be in accordance with good engineering practice. Pillow blocks may be used only where they are subject to compressive forces only.
7.
Helical Drums:
a.
Winding drums shall be designed to properly support the required loads.
b.
Drums shall be helically grooved to accept a single layer of cable accommodating the entire travel distance plus three dead wraps. The drum diameter shall meet or exceed the wire rope manufacturer's minimum recommended D/d ratio.
c.
Drum construction shall be of the all welded type. Cables shall enter the drum through holes drilled from root of the cable groove through the tubing wall at a 45 degree angle and shall be retained by a Copper swage stop sleeve. In order to prevent unbalanced operation, drum assemblies that exceed 20 rpm shall be straightened to a maximum total indicated run out (T.I.R.) of 0.005 inch (0.127 mm).
d.
Each end of the drum shall be supported by either the output shaft of the gearbox or an appropriately properly sized self-aligning flange mounted in a steel plate that fully captures the drum shaft.
 
** NOTE TO SPECIFIER ** Add Either a Fixed Speed Starter or a Variable Speed Drive. Delete drive not required.
 
8.
Fixed Speed Starters:
a.
Each fixed speed hoist shall be controlled by a UL 508E listed, full voltage, self-protected, reversing starter. Enclosure shall be NEMA 12 with hinged, latching cover. The interior of the starter cabinet shall be "touch safe" per IEC 204-1 "Protection against direct contact" rules.
b.
The NEMA/IEC mechanically and electrically interlocked, reversing starter shall be sized to match the hoist motor horsepower and shall be rated for plugging and jogging. Units shall incorporate UL508E Type 2, non-welding, positive break contactors.
c.
Overcurrent protection shall be provided by an IEC Class 10 overload. Short circuit protection shall be provided by a circuit breaker.
d.
Starters shall be wired so that operation of the normal end of travel limit switches shall only allow movement away from the limit switch. Operation of an overtravel limit switch shall open the line contactor, and shall not allow further movement in either direction. A spring return toggle switch shall be housed inside the starter cabinet to allow override of the overtravel limits for resetting purposes.
e.
Touch safe protection, a line contactor, and override spring return switch for overtravel limits are mandatory for safety.
9.
Variable Speed Drive:
a.
Motor controllers shall be solid state flux vector controllers, designed for hoisting duty, and rated for the motor to be controlled. The controller shall incorporate closed loop feedback using a solid state position encoder mounted on the motor shaft to identify the speed and position of motor shaft in order to provide the greatest accuracy and performance. Each controller shall incorporate a microprocessor to provide direct control of torque and shaft position. The controller shall provide an essentially infinite speed range, including the ability to produce full torque at zero speed.
b.
The motor controller enclosure shall be NEMA 12 with a hinged, latching cover. The interior of the cabinet shall be "touch safe" per IEC 204-1 "Protection against direct contact" rules.
c.
A brake contactor shall be provided. The controller shall not release the hoist brake until the drive has developed the full rated torque.
d.
Controllers shall provide controlled deceleration and braking of rapidly descending loads. Dynamic braking resistor shall be provided to dissipate heat during stopping.
e.
Each controller shall contain a line contactor. This contactor shall be controlled by the E-stop and overtravel limit switches, providing a redundant means of removing power from the winch.
f.
Controllers shall be wired so that operation of the normal end of travel limit switches shall only allow movement away from the limit switch. Operation of an overtravel limit switch shall open the line contactor, and shall not allow further movement in either direction. A spring return toggle switch shall be housed inside the cabinet to allow override of the overtravel limits for resetting purposes.
g.
Each controller shall incorporate overcurrent protection in the form of properly rated fuses (per UL 198C guidelines) or circuit breakers.
h.
Controllers shall incorporate all required contactors, relays, and interface electronics required by the control system. Controllers shall provide under voltage, over voltage, instantaneous over current, overload, and over temperature indication. Properly labeled, screw clamp terminals shall be provided for all field connections, including limit switches and other peripheral devices. .
i.
Touch safe protection, a line contactor, and override spring return switch for overtravel limits are mandatory for safety.
B.
Limit Switch:
 
** NOTE TO SPECIFIER ** Delete limit switch not required.
 
1.
Rotary Limit Switches.
a.
Rotary limit switch assemblies shall have four gear-driven, independently adjustable switch/cam sets. Switches shall have snap acting contacts.
b.
Rotary limit switches shall be driven directly or by roller chains. If roller chains are used, sprockets shall be pinned to prevent slipping and sized for maximum usable rotation of switch cams. The input shaft and drive chain shall be fully guarded.
c.
Switches shall be mounted to the winch base to allow for easy adjustment of the switch settings.
2.
Direct Struck Limit Switch.
a.
Direct struck limit switches shall be heavy duty, lever operated rotary head units.
b.
Switches shall have positive opening contacts.
c.
Direct struck limit switches shall be Telemecanique ZCKJ series or Allen Bradley Bulletin 802T.
C.
Secondary Brake:
 
** NOTE TO SPECIFIER ** Delete secondary brakes not required.
 
1.
Electric Brake:
a.
A secondary load brake shall be supplied in addition to the primary brake on the motor. This brake shall be located on the low speed output shaft of the gearbox or directly fixed to the hoist drum. The brake shall be sufficient to stop and hold the load.
b.
This brake shall be normally applied and require a source of power to release the brake.
c.
Control of the secondary brake shall be integrated with the primary brake to ensure the proper sequence of application and release between the brakes.
2.
Overspeed Brake:
a.
A secondary overspeed load brake shall be supplied in addition to the primary brake on the motor. This brake shall be located on the low speed output shaft of the gearbox or directly fixed to the hoist drum.
b.
This brake shall be factory set to apply itself at 125% of the maximum rated hoist speed (50 rpm minimum). The friction lining is mechanically set against the drum to grip when the arms extend to lock into the drum and bring the hoist to a halt.
c.
The overspeed brake shall not require either electricity or pressure from an external source for operation.
3.
Caliper Load Brake:
a.
A secondary load brake shall be supplied in addition to the primary brake on the motor. The brake flange shall be located on the low speed output shaft of the gearbox or directly fixed to the hoist drum. The brake caliper(s) shall be sufficient to stop and hold the load.
b.
This brake shall be normally applied and require a source of power (air or electric) to release the brake.
c.
Control of the secondary brake shall be integrated with the primary brake to ensure the proper sequence of application and release between the brakes.
D.
Load Monitoring:
1.
Load information shall be obtained from solid state load cells mounted between the base of the hoist and the gear motor.
a.
The cell shall accommodate total hoist loads or changing loads depending on the functions included in the supplied controls.
 
** NOTE TO SPECIFIER ** Optional - If desired delete cable roller type not required for project .
 
E.
Cable Roller:
1.
Fixed Cable Roller:
a.
Provide an adjustable roller to keep lift lines in the grooves of the drum and prevent them from becoming crossed. Light pressure on the cables keeps the lines from becoming slack.
b.
The roller shall be large enough in diameter for rigidity, have a bearing in each end so it shall rotate and ride on an adjustable shaft.
2.
Sprung Cable Roller:
a.
Provide an adjustable roller to keep lift lines in the grooves of the drum and prevent them from becoming crossed. Light pressure on the cables keeps the lines from becoming slack.
b.
The roller shall be large enough in diameter for rigidity, have a bearing in each end so it shall rotate and ride on an adjustable shaft.
c.
The shaft is spring mounted so crossed cables or jams shall cause a cable to jump from its groove and trip a limit switch, stopping the hoist.
 
** NOTE TO SPECIFIER ** Delete if not required for project.
 
F.
Slack Line Detection:
1.
Charged Bar:
2.
Provide an electrically isolated bar that grounds the control when a cable escapes from its groove. When a line touches and grounds the bar it activates a contact in the controller that does one of the following as wired or programmed:
a.
Engages the emergency stop and halts all motion.
b.
Stops motion and prevent further motion in the same direction.
c.
Signals the PLC and waits for further instruction.
 
** NOTE TO SPECIFIER ** Delete if not required for project.
 
2.37
DRUM HOIST
A.
Drum Hoist:
 
** NOTE TO SPECIFIER ** Controls shall be added for a complete system.
 
1.
General: Each hoist unit shall have the capacity to raise and lower the specified load at the specified speed.
 
** NOTE TO SPECIFIER ** Delete cable sizes not required for project.
 
a.
Lift Line Diameter Cable Size: 3/16 inch (4.8 mm).
b.
Lift Line Diameter Cable Size: 1/4 inch (6.4 mm).
c.
Lift Line Diameter Cable Size: 5/16 inch (7.9 mm).
d.
Lift Line Diameter Cable Size: 3/8 inch (9.5 mm).
2.
Construction:
a.
All hoists shall be supported by a sturdy steel base, holding the elements of the hoist in proper alignment.
b.
A helical drum shall be directly connected to the output of the integrated motor - brake - gear reducer unit. The outboard end of the drum shall be supported by a self-aligning flange bearing.
3.
Gearmotor:
a.
Motors, primary brakes, and gearboxes shall be an integrated unit, with the first stage pinion gear mounted directly on the motor's armature shaft. No couplings shall be permitted between the motor and gear reducer.
b.
Motors shall be totally enclosed fan cooled (TEFC). The motor shall have a minimum AGMA service factor of 1.0 for constant operation.
c.
The gear reducer shall be a combination helical/worm or helical/bevel reducer. The gear case shall be cast iron for protection against shock damage. The output shaft(s) shall have double lip oil seals to prevent leaks. The gearing service factor shall be a minimum of 1.0 with a mechanical strength service factor of 1.25.
4.
Primary Brake:
a.
The primary brake shall be an integral part of the motor, mounted directly on the motor's armature shaft. No couplings shall be permitted between the motor and primary brake.
b.
Brakes shall be spring applied, direct acting, electrically released, and equipped with a manual release. The brake shall an AC / DC electro-magnetic unit with a minimum retarding torque equal to 200% of motor full load torque.
c.
The brake shall be released by energizing the coil simultaneously with the motor winding to provide fail-safe braking in case of power failure.
5.
Shafts, Keys, and Couplings:
a.
Shafts shall be designed to accommodate the applied loads (including shock and bending loads) in accordance with ANSI B 106.1 m, "Design of Transmission Shafting",.
b.
All connections shall be keyed, using keys designed to accommodate the applied loads. Keys shall be in accordance with ANSI B 17.1, "Keys and Key Seats.".
c.
Couplings shall be chosen to accommodate the applied loads, including shock and bending loads. Couplings shall accommodate the possible parallel and angular misalignments caused during manufacturing, assembly, and installation, as well as by structural tolerances and structural or equipment deflections.
d.
Only couplings made of steel and with steel to steel contact surfaces shall be used. Solid couplings shall not be permitted.
6.
Bearings:
a.
Bearings shall be selected to accommodate the applied loads and speeds.
b.
The use of self-aligning flange bearings is preferred. The use of other bearing types shall be in accordance with good engineering practice. Pillow blocks may be used only where they are subject to compressive forces only.
7.
Helical Drums:
a.
Winding drums shall be designed to properly support the required loads.
b.
Drums shall be helically grooved to accept a single layer of cable accommodating the entire travel distance plus three dead wraps. The drum diameter shall meet or exceed the wire rope manufacturer's minimum recommended D/d ratio.
c.
Drum construction shall be of the all welded type. Cables shall enter the drum through key slots machined from root of the cable groove through the tubing wall at a 45 degree angle and shall be retained by a Copper swage stop sleeve inserted through the end of the slot from the outside. Cables shall have a minimum of three dead wraps on the drum. In order to prevent unbalanced operation, drum assemblies that exceed 20 rpm shall be straightened to a maximum total indicated run out (T.I.R.) of 0.005 inch (0.127 mm).
d.
Each end of the drum shall be supported by either the output shaft of the gearbox or an appropriately sized, self-aligning flange bearing.
 
** NOTE TO SPECIFIER ** Add Either a Fixed Speed Starter or a Variable Speed Drive. Delete drive not required.
 
8.
Fixed Speed Starters:
a.
Each fixed speed hoist shall be controlled by a UL 508E compliant, full voltage, self protected, reversing starter. Enclosure shall be NEMA 12 with hinged, latching cover. The interior of the starter cabinet shall be "touch safe" per IEC 204-1 "Protection against direct contact" rules.
b.
The NEMA/IEC mechanically and electrically interlocked, reversing starter shall be sized to match the hoist motor horsepower and shall be rated for plugging and jogging. Units shall incorporate UL50808E Type 2, non-welding, positive break contactors.
c.
Overcurrent protection shall be provided by an IEC Class 10 overload. Short circuit protection shall be provided by a circuit breaker.
d.
Starters shall be wired so that operation of the normal end of travel limit switches shall only allow movement away from the limit switch. Operation of an overtravel limit switch shall open the line contactor, and shall not allow further movement in either direction. A spring return toggle switch shall be housed inside the starter cabinet to allow override of the overtravel limits for resetting purposes.
 
** NOTE TO SPECIFIER ** Delete drive if not required.
 
9.
Variable Speed Drive:
a.
Motor controllers shall be solid state flux vector controllers, designed for hoisting duty, and rated for the motor to be controlled. The controller shall incorporate closed loop feedback using a solid state position encoder mounted on the motor shaft to identify the speed and position of motor shaft in order to provide the greatest accuracy and performance. Each controller shall incorporate a microprocessor to provide direct control of torque and shaft position. The controller shall provide an essentially infinite speed range, including the ability to produce full torque at zero speed.
b.
The motor controller enclosure shall be NEMA 12 with a hinged, latching cover. The interior of the cabinet shall be "touch safe" per IEC 204-1 "Protection against direct contact" rules.
c.
A brake contactor shall be provided. The controller shall not release the hoist brake until the drive has developed the full rated torque.
d.
Controllers shall provide controlled deceleration and braking of rapidly descending loads.
e.
Each controller shall contain a line contactor. This contactor shall be controlled by the E-stop and overtravel limit switches, providing a redundant means of removing power from the winch.
f.
Controllers shall be wired so that operation of the normal end of travel limit switches shall only allow movement away from the limit switch. Operation of an overtravel limit switch shall open the line contactor, and shall not allow further movement in either direction. A spring return toggle switch shall be housed inside the cabinet to allow override of the overtravel limits for resetting purposes.
g.
Each controller shall incorporate overcurrent protection in the form of properly rated fuses (per UL 198C guidelines) or circuit breakers.
h.
Controllers shall incorporate all required contactors, relays, and interface electronics required by the control system. Controllers shall provide under voltage, over voltage, instantaneous over current, overload, and over temperature indication. Properly labeled, screw clamp terminals shall be provided for all field connections, including limit switches and other peripheral devices.
10.
Hoists shall be UL or ETL marked as meeting "UL 1340 Standard for Hoists".
B.
Limit Switch:
 
** NOTE TO SPECIFIER ** Delete limit switch not required.
 
1.
Rotary Limit Switches:
a.
Rotary limit switch assemblies shall have four gear-driven, independently adjustable switch/cam sets. Switches shall have snap acting contacts.
b.
Rotary limit switches shall be driven directly or by roller chains. If roller chains are used, sprockets shall be pinned to prevent slipping and sized for maximum usable rotation of switch cams. The input shaft and drive chain shall be fully guarded.
c.
Switches shall be mounted to the winch base to allow for easy adjustment of the switch settings.
2.
Direct Struck Limit Switch.
a.
Direct struck limit switches shall be heavy duty, lever operated rotary head units.
b.
Switches shall have positive opening contacts.
c.
Direct struck limit switches shall be Telemecanique ZCKJ series or Allen Bradley Bulletin 802T.
C.
Secondary Brake:
 
** NOTE TO SPECIFIER ** Delete secondary brakes not required.
 
1.
Electric Brake:
a.
A secondary load brake shall be supplied in addition to the primary brake on the motor. This brake shall be located on the low speed output shaft of the gearbox or directly fixed to the hoist drum. The brake shall be sufficient to stop and hold the load.
b.
This brake shall be normally applied and require a source of power to release the brake.
c.
Control of the secondary brake shall be integrated with the primary brake to ensure the proper sequence of application and release between the brakes.
2.
Overspeed Brake:
a.
A secondary overspeed load brake shall be supplied in addition to the primary brake on the motor. This brake shall be located on the low speed output shaft of the gearbox or directly fixed to the hoist drum.
b.
This brake shall be factory set to apply itself at 125% of the maximum rated hoist speed (50 rpm minimum). The friction lining is mechanically set against the drum to grip when the arms extend to lock into the drum and bring the hoist to a halt.
c.
The overspeed brake shall not require either electricity or pressure from an external source for operation.
3.
Caliper Load Brake:
a.
A secondary load brake shall be supplied in addition to the primary brake on the motor. The brake flange shall be located on the low speed output shaft of the gearbox or directly fixed to the hoist drum. The brake caliper(s) shall be sufficient to stop and hold the load.
b.
This brake shall be normally applied and require a source of power (air or electric) to release the brake.
c.
Control of the secondary brake shall be integrated with the primary brake to ensure the proper sequence of application and release between the brakes.
 
** NOTE TO SPECIFIER ** Delete if not required for project.
 
D.
Load Monitoring:
1.
Load Monitor:
a.
Load information shall be obtained from solid state load cells mounted between the base of the hoist and the gear motor.
b.
The cell shall accommodate total hoist loads or changing loads depending on the functions included in the supplied controls.
 
** NOTE TO SPECIFIER ** Optional - If desired delete cable roller type not required for project.
 
E.
Cable Roller:
1.
Fixed Cable Roller:
a.
Provide an adjustable roller to keep lift lines in the grooves of the drum and prevent them from becoming crossed. Light pressure on the cables keeps the lines from becoming slack.
b.
The roller shall be large enough in diameter for rigidity, have a bearing in each end so it shall rotate and ride on an adjustable shaft.
2.
Sprung Cable Roller:
a.
Provide an adjustable roller to keep lift lines in the grooves of the drum and prevent them from becoming crossed. Light pressure on the cables keeps the lines from becoming slack.
b.
The roller shall be large enough in diameter for rigidity, have a bearing in each end so it shall rotate and ride on an adjustable shaft.
c.
The shaft is spring mounted so crossed cables or jams shall cause a cable to jump from its groove and trip a limit switch, stopping the hoist.
 
** NOTE TO SPECIFIER ** Delete if not required for project.
 
F.
Slack Line Detection:
1.
Charged Bar.
2.
Provide an electrically isolated bar that grounds the control when a cable escapes from its groove. When a line touches and grounds the bar it activates a contact in the controller that does one of the following as wired or programmed:
a.
Engages the emergency stop and halts all motion.
b.
Stops motion and prevent further motion in the same direction.
c.
Signals the PLC and waits for further instruction.
 
** NOTE TO SPECIFIER ** Delete if not required for project.
 
2.38
PILE-UP HOIST
A.
General: Each hoist unit shall have the capacity to raise and lower the specified load at the specified speed.
1.
General: Each hoist unit shall have the capacity to raise and lower the specified load at the specified speed.
 
** NOTE TO SPECIFIER ** Delete cable sizes not required for project.
 
a.
Lift Line Diameter Cable Size: 3/16 inch (4.8 mm).
b.
Lift Line Diameter Cable Size: 1/4 inch (6.4 mm).
c.
Lift Line Diameter Cable Size: 5/16 inch (7.9 mm).
d.
Lift Line Diameter Cable Size: 3/8 inch (9.5 mm).
2.
Construction:
a.
All hoists shall be supported by a sturdy steel base, holding the elements of the hoist in proper alignment.
b.
A drum shall be directly connected to the output of the integrated motor - brake - gear reducer unit. The outboard end of the drum shall be supported by a self aligning flange bearing.
3.
Gearmotor:
a.
Motors, primary brakes, and gearboxes shall be an integrated unit, with the first stage pinion gear mounted directly on the motor's armature shaft. No couplings shall be permitted between the motor and gear reducer. Exceptions shall be permitted only when special gearing or torque requirements cannot be met with an integrated unit.
b.
Motors shall be totally enclosed fan cooled (TEFC). The motor shall have a minimum AGMA service factor of 1.0 for constant operation.
c.
The gear reducer shall be a combination helical/worm reducer. The gear case shall be cast iron for protection against shock damage. The output shaft(s) shall have double lip oil seals to prevent leaks. The gearing service factor shall be a minimum of 1.0 with a mechanical strength service factor of 1.25.
4.
Primary Brake:
a.
The primary brake shall be an integral part of the motor, mounted directly on the motor's armature shaft. No couplings shall be permitted between the motor and primary brake.
b.
Brakes shall be spring applied, direct acting, electrically released, and equipped with a manual release. The brake shall an AC / DC electro-magnetic unit with a minimum retarding torque equal to 200% of motor full load torque.
c.
The brake shall be released by energizing the coil simultaneously with the motor winding to provide fail-safe braking in case of power failure.
5.
Shafts, Keys, and Couplings:
a.
Shafts shall be designed to accommodate the applied loads (including shock and bending loads) in accordance with ANSI B 106.1 m, "Design of Transmission Shafting",.
b.
All connections shall be keyed, using keys designed to accommodate the applied loads. Keys shall be in accordance with ANSI B 17.1, "Keys and Key Seats.".
c.
Couplings shall be chosen to accommodate the applied loads, including shock and bending loads. Couplings shall accommodate the possible parallel and angular misalignments caused during manufacturing, assembly, and installation, as well as by structural tolerances and structural or equipment deflections.
d.
Only couplings made of steel and with steel to steel contact surfaces shall be used. Solid couplings shall not be permitted.
6.
Bearings:
a.
Bearings shall be selected to accommodate the applied loads and speeds.
b.
The use of self-aligning flange bearings is preferred. The use of other bearing types shall be in accordance with good engineering practice. Pillow blocks may be used only where they are subject to compressive forces only.
7.
Pile Up Drum (Yo-Yo Drum):
a.
Drum shall have a slotted construction so that the cable winds on top of itself in a single layer.
b.
The width of the slot shall be consistent throughout its depth to ensure the cable stacks evenly. The slot shall have sufficient depth for the entire travel, plus three dead wraps, and overtravel.
c.
The drum shall be direct coupled and keyed to the output shaft of the gear box.
d.
A self-aligning flange bearing shall support the outboard end of the shaft.
e.
Drum construction shall be of steel or ASTM A-48 Class 30 grey iron castings. The drum sides shall be of sufficient thickness to withstand the forces applied by the cable.
f.
Cables shall enter the drum through holes drilled from the base of the slots at a 45 degree angle and shall be retained by a Copper swage stop sleeve.
 
** NOTE TO SPECIFIER ** Add Either a Fixed Speed Starter or a Variable Speed Drive Delete fixed or variable speed.
 
8.
Fixed Speed Starters:
a.
Each fixed speed hoist shall be controlled by a UL 508E compliant, full voltage, self-protected, reversing starter. Enclosure shall be NEMA 12 with hinged, latching cover. The interior of the starter cabinet shall be "touch safe" per IEC 204-1 "Protection against direct contact" rules.
b.
The NEMA/IEC mechanically and electrically interlocked, reversing starter shall be sized to match the hoist motor horsepower and shall be rated for plugging and jogging. Units shall incorporate UL508E Type 2, non-welding, positive break contactors.
c.
Overcurrent protection shall be provided by an IEC Class 10 overload. Short circuit protection shall be provided by a circuit breaker.
d.
Starters shall be wired so that operation of the normal end of